The URL can be used to link to this page

Home My Public Portal AboutORD14036 BILL NO, 2005-168 • SPONSORED BY COUNCILMAN Martin ORDINANCE NO. /�ID3L AN ORDINANCE OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AUTHORIZING THE MAYOR AND CITY CLERK TO EXECUTE AN AGREEMENT WITH BARRY CONSTRUCTION COMPANY FOR CONSTRUCTION OF THE FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING. WHEREAS, Barry Construction Company has become the apparent lowest and best bidder on the Fire Apparatus Storage Building project; NOW, THEREFORE, BE IT ENACTED BY THE COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI, AS FOLLOWS: Section 1. The bid of Barry Construction Company is declared to be the lowest and best bid and is hereby accepted. Section 2.The Mayorand City Clerk are hereby authorized to execute an agreement • with Barry Construction Company for construction of the Fire Apparatus Storage Building. Section 3. The agreement shall be substantially the same in form and content as that agreement attached hereto as Exhibit A. Section 4. This Ordinance shall be in full force and effect from and after the date of Its passage and approval. Passed ! 7 Approved: y l iQ'�Jly residing Officer Mayor AT EST: APP OVED AS TO FORM: Ci Clerk City Counselor • LI '.: ; tt S rs �ts ; � r a t�7 � " y�j •.` ..7?"y� r krli rtf +w� ,7r J±',`..f t }r]k �r�i�t.'� ?is?4,t$r k' )4 h) �� 3 Q I t§ * Y t y STr ,e /a�N f4,. � : • + nS ++ } ..!•t r Y � t£�l��xRkCt 2^�r{l�fl�l t 1 ;Y t r �E � !aq •x,.ir.��+1,Q�y1 4'�j�.��1tL � h / t. 1 J w J w rt s`i a rM1J i>ti ` ly4•{xc ��? x r� '1�F"f,��j�� t 4sj I�,J�! 7�,jj��! "!p'` }k•lwt�}y J� U{ � , R 1 `'yT-'ij.�*SU ?S'r 4i7 3 t yn z q✓a°2 avvn�!f 3'l:){15 t/ k i Oil •. A`?y i h' r {•t rs !1��:}4."�a�'µr�' w� h4 §. a ) �'��'{1,,]'. ` "th '� .'�'7 �C` a 1 p {� ��i(�tYa��,�4 �`+ 4 / ' 1� , f A t N f' t r{1 1 §T}; }' .y�T55 fr• 5� dtl kv.l � l'�'tlT�p J��.. )'fi�[j �.�W J i )Sd' ^i L `/ + 1 1 't 1.4t,U• xtft4�+;�' t r } ' ♦ ( " /fr • } §. `yv��$Qi r )?+ � /I t it l {lt.✓ � J.• k / i f f �fY �fW } J �`K /}`> "�4r c d- 1rf *tk�r x}?rFt`�;1�! f S nt , ! ! ' T YtT irl c !t•!%��['c rt�, r}lp ?� t,. +V+�tr t 1 .Y r „ n. n4<t W{.} ' + i Y 7 ' C � MAIN AblF i K r if ' - .- 1 V lt11�L{`/11i� i 1da'Lli'�x-'f r y+ <zlii�t { t_141,tgyr + w t' rh 7i`it� e� SPECIFICATIONS AND • ` CT DOCUMENTS , rot r r ! t p r YrY Q1lj� r` (tt PROJECT NO. 81000 r J1, ` ! • y t b � Fire Apparatus • r • Building 1 n� { a if r l 3 r it r�fv n r w { r as r s rot r t ri �{ +Yr Sr !'SiVj•6} t '4i t � N'Y' .�1. '!I' Ih vV" '}srr r: t 1 . t 1rr 4{,i'�t1 Y1i t�t9�� t3.t�lCµ ty r+V!'Yx�Y.S*G}Jgji�Kt� X}r�iYt jjr"1y'"g�rs� SM1��;Yf! �'f< Y 4 J u f kit v s r, a s J`` �` ui� \>\"`k s.?1 � •S Y YG fD 4�J1 +tttxj krarl 91" ! ffgf7 + SA�f+ifreG iY1)f 4}i}rt vi ° tt:+ir . . ' �� t r�',r � te��`��,!)'il(-C�r}r5�§t±k X}Ui?!�/�2�Ir��Y+�it�}}ri r��4}f 1�P�i�J rpr't.�..r,..• � J � ,� , Pi'yy',rrMt 'd5„! t�jr j{Ar r r'tly ),� ✓ r . r'r ! tf45lr}�rs� t�k Si t!°e xr Y4✓ y9d{4}F^', d' i JJJJa ! ral r, t r.:)'f ij ..rr 1 x a`1 ftt 6 3+ 1+ tJ { r r r i)r-��la 7tr/f F7,Tr ti t-{r tda[i i fr 44 t 5rx tt rtpr ! 4t.rr it J h r .r a >•rf 1Ya J.r 1T i A:r! J71 ar'l t J t . s tt y$) 1 er P r c r f t� it f 1 r i i t i f s r t r J rt TV A i t ! r t t J >f F`F{S tiT ♦ St.'2tI4t, ry,y�) rl �' 2rd d it t�'.. 3 , qS 4 1 tY 4t r5tra } tt +'4 S Will,� eG K” A `! tsi n twr l+r) s t.; Y 1 q •? }YYi{e)lr t_t,iW t} wk X,(}'! jy! � M l{ty 1 }t+s 1'.Y.d .{U! rat�ti' 1•\r)4 ) t !;. t r t � {`.!)n 1 tt>•!4.�2 a +5i1' rr.. + ,} � ..cj f he t�j,:C7 lh}'� yl( t tl ,}tt {3 kt `' 11 fi`t+d(`.Sy(F F !f ^ 4 r y J`1"h 1 U'1 'lf e� [1 } ttf e t # 1 g V i{ h,�s t rt t t N s t wl[/ t f t str. t1 ? ry Y r?!)IL�§1ji,ttlfY.iYt) f{ .�. ixr y ite!"A '�}r4L(r,✓t i {'1;}41'1tk Y4 rr� + 1 ++ 5 .. r I Y pt{rJJt3' 1 ry IY '{a}{rt' �� k�k 4�+4�• Ylt is !} ✓ a r 1' t - i, a 1 {.t){ st E' at rt ?, 1>-z�li•+„y r,a it �* � S . v.>"I"r jIF..40,4u _Y r r }+t t)r))i 7' liJ}Si4)raree{p`eft.t.°,.}M'}*yt�)4, R�fx'k L��Ty;'t }1�34ti2�'k '1ft`y tk, A! L t �MY k t t,)r.1 r{4>l.Ntjl�l l'Ya�t YrAri , it ?.�� s �'� f ii i' '' tr r rra fi'� +iryhryn:�a/. s ii}6+,} t�'� •j�},.f4�}p ,� t �i r•}�y( ., tt 'ti y"y 7c x r,i s 7 ' r F j i.• F to r1t r, h +'lt *s ,p Itr 1 � .r rt < ':! s s +� r � 7u,• /t, {` 1 }�, r.t r 4vM,�(. t�y,t ry .t y+ 14A rat�y� w rh�1(y�� 4�`X r.. Y i5 tx �'7i)j §xr +x rru r[ ) • !L f S5't 3 V f 1 � '1 > '4 � t v r � � '�� S x 4 !7 F b A �i r i + 1• 1 ' SPECIFICATIONS AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS PROJECT NO. 81000 ' Fire Apparatus Storage Building nil RI { r» F V� �0 ' Jefferson City Department of Community Development February, 2006 MITY-PROJECTS181 ODD-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE SUIIDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.W PD 1 ,• TABLE OF CONTENTS 1 • Advertisement for Bids • Notice to Bidders ' • Information for Bidders • Bid Form • • Bid Bond • • Anti-Collusion Statement " ' Contractor's Affidavit • • Minority Business Enterprise Statement ' Minority Business Utilization Agreement" M Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law • Prevailing Wage Determination ' a Affidavit of Compliance Public Works Contracts Law 0 Excessive Unemployment Exception Certification ' 0 Construction Contract • Performance, Payment, and Guarantee Bond ' 0 General Provisions ' 0 Special Provisions • Technical Specifications ' a Addendums ( If Any ) INDICATES THIS ITEM INCLUDED IN BID PACKET FOR SUBMISSION OF BID) FACITY-PROJECTS181000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILOINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.wPD 1 1• ADVERTISEMENT FOR BIDS Sealed bids will be received at the office of the Purchasing Agent, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri 65101, until 1:30 PM, on Tuesday,February 21, 2006. The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM on that same day. The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 81000, Fire Apparatus Storage Building" will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct a fire apparatus storage building and associated improvements. A pro-bid conference will be held at 9:00 AM,on Tuesday, February 14,2006 in the ' Small Conference Room of City Hall, 320 E, McCarty Street, Jefferson City, MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend. ' Copies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from the Director of Community Development, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri. A non-refundable deposit of Twenty-Five Dollars($26.00)will be required for each set of plans and specifications. Individual full size sheets of the plans may be N obtained for Three Dollars ($3.00) per sheet. The contract will require compliance with the wage and labor requirements and the payment of minimum wages in accordance with the Schedule of Wage Rates established by the Missouri Division of Labor Standards. The City reserves the right to reject any and all bids and to waive informalities therein, to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond. CITY OF JEFFERSON ' Terry Stephenson Purchasing Agent 1 ' Publication Date Sunday, February 5, 2006 FACITY•PROJECTSM000•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE SUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 '• NOTICE TO BIDDERS Sealed bids will be received at the Office of the Purchasing Agent, City Hall, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, Missouri, until 1:30 PM on Tuesday, February 21, ' 2005. The bids will be opened and read aloud in the Council Chambers at 1:30 PM on that some day. The proposed work for the project entitled "Project No. 51000, Fire Apparatus Storage Bullding"will include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment to construct a fire apparatus storage building and associated improvements. A pro-bid conference will be held at 9:00 AM,on Tuesday,February 14, 2005 in the Small Conference Room of City Hall, 320 E. McCarty Street, Jefferson City, MO 65101. All prospective bidders are urged to attend. ' All equipment, material, and workmanship must be in accordance with the plans, specifications, and contract documents on file with the Director of Community Development, Jefferson City, Missouri. Copies of the contract documents required for bidding purposes may be obtained from the Director of Community Development, 320 East McCarty Street, Jefferson City, N Missouri, A non-refundable deposit of Twenty-Five Dollars(:25.00)will be required for each set of plans and specifications. Individual full size sheets of the plans maybe obtained for Three Dollars ($3.00) per sheet. A certified check on a solvent bank or a bid bond by a satisfactory surety in an amount ' equal to five(5)percent of the total amount of the bid must accompany each proposal. A one-year Performance and Guarantee Bond is required. ' The owner reserves the right to reject any or all bids and to waive informalities therein to determine which is the lowest and best bid and to approve the bond, ' CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI Patrick E. Sullivan, PE ' Director of Community Development 1 FACITY•PROJECTSMODD•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD ' INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS ' IS-1 SCOPE OF WORK • The work to be done under this contract includes the furnishing of all technical personnel,labor, materials, and equipment required to perform the work included in the project entitled"Project No.81000, Fire Apparatus Storage Building"in accordance with the plans and specifications on file with the Department of Community Development. ' The proposed work for this project will Include the furnishing of all material, labor, and equipment io•constnrct a Ors apparatus storage building and assoclated Improvements. ' I8-2 INSPECTION OF PLANS, SPECIFICATIONS, AND SITE OF WORK ' The bidder is required to examine carefully the site of the proposed work, the bid, plans, specifications, supplemental specifications, special provisions, and contract documents before submitting a bid. Failure to do so will not relieve a successful bidder of the obligation to furnish all materials and labor necessary to carry out the provisions of the contract. ' I13-3 INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' If the bidder has any questions which arise concerning the true meaning or intent of the Plans, Specifications or any part thereof, which affect the cost, quality, quantity, or character of the project,he shall request in writing,at least five(5)days prior to the date fixed for the bid opening, ' that an interpretation be made and an addendum be Issued by the City, which shall then be delivered to all bidders to whom Plans and Specifications have been issued. All addenda issued shall become part of the contract documents. Failure to have requested an addendum covering any questions affecting the interpretation of the Plans and Specifications shall not relieve the N Contractor from delivering the completed project in accordance with the intent of the Plans and Specifications to provide a workable project. I04 QUALIFICATIONS OF BIDDERS The City of Jefferson may make such investigations as deemed necessary to determine the ' ability of the bidder to perform the work and the bidder shall furnish to the City all such Information and data for this purpose as the City may request. The City reserves the right to reject any bid If the evidence submitted by the bidder or Investigation of such bidder falls to satisfy the City that such bidder Is properly qualified to carry out the obligations of the Contract and to complete the work contemplated therein. IS4 EQUIVALENT MATERIAL ' Wherever definite reference is made in these Specifications to the use of any particular material or equipment, it Is to be understood that any equivalent material or equipment may be used which will perform adequately the duties Imposed by the general design, subject to the approval of the City. ' I" BID SECURITY F1CRY•PROJECTS191000•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE eUILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPO 1 ' ,• Each bid must be accompanied by a certified check or bid bond made payable to the City of ' Jefferson for five percent (5%) of the amount of the bid. Bid securities will be returned after award of the contract except to the successful bidder, Should the successful bidder fall or refuse to execute the bond and the contract required within seven(7)days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, he shall forfeit to the City as liquidated damages for such failure or refusal, the security deposited with his bid. ' I19-7 PREPARATION OF BIDS Bids must be made upon the prescribed forms attached in these Contract Documents. Only sealed bids will be considered, all bids otherwise submitted will be rejected as irregular. All blank spaces In the bid must be filled in and no change shall be made In the phraseology of the bid, or addition to the items mentioned therein. Any conditions, limitations or provisions attached to bids will render them informal and may be considered cause for their rejection. Extensions of quantities and unit prices shall be carried out to the penny. 184 PRICES ' The price submitted for each item of the work shall include all costs of whatever nature involved in its construction, complete In place, as described in the Plans and Specifications. Section 144.062 RSMo provides that the City s sales tax exemption may be used for the purchase of goods and materials for this project. The contract for the project will authorize and direct the Contractor to utilize the Citys sales tax exemption In the purchase of goods and materials for the project. This provision shall apply to only those purchases totaling over$500 from an Individual supplier. All sales taxes on those Items which do not qualify for the use of the City's sales tax exemption and for which sales tax might lawfully be assessed against the City are to be paid by the Contractor from the monies obtained In satisfaction of the Contract, It being understood by the bidder, that the bid prices submitted for those Items shall Include the cost of such taxes. ' 19-9 APPROXIMATE QUANTITIES In cases where any part or all of the bidding Is to be received on a unit price basis,the quantities stated In the bid will not be used In establishing final payment due the successful Contractor. The quantifies stated on which unit prices are so invited are approximate only and each bidder shall make his own estimate from the plans of the quantities required on each Item and calculate ' his unit price bid for each Item accordingly. Bids will be compared on the basis of number of units stated in the bid. Such estimated quantities, while made from the best Information available, are approximate only. Payment of the Contract will be based on actual number of units installed on the complete work. ' IS-10 LUMP SUM ITEMS '• FA CITY-PROJECTS161000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE eUILDINGICONTRACTDOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPO 1 ,• Payment for each lump sum item shall be at the lump sum bid for the Item, complete in place, and shall include the costs of all labor, materials, tools and equipment to construct the item as described herein and to the limits shown on the Plans. IB-11 SUBMISSION OF BIDS The Bid and the Bid Security guaranteeing the some shall be placed in a sealed envelope and marked "Project No. 01000, Fire Apparatus Storage Building". IB-12 ALTERNATE BIDS In making the award, if alternate bids have been requested,the alternate bid which will be in the beet interest of the City will be used. IB-13 WITHDRAWAL OF BIDS If a bidder wishes to withdraw his bid,he may do so before the time fixed for the opening,without prejudice to himself. No bidder may withdraw his bid for a period of ninety(90) days after the ' scheduled closing time for the receipt of bids. No bids received after the time set for opening for bids will be considered. ' I13-14 RIGHT TO REJECT BIDS The City reserves the right to reject any or all bids, to waive any informality In the bids received, N or to accept the bid or bids that In its judgement will be in the best interests of the City of Jefferson. ' I8-16 AWARD OF CONTRACT If, within seven (7) days after he has received notice of acceptance of his bid, the successful bidder or bidders shall refuse or neglect to come to the office of the Director of Community Development and to execute the Contract and to furnish the required Performance and Payment Bonds and Insurance,property signed by the Contractor and the Surety and Sureties satisfactory to the City of Jefferson as hereinafter provided, the bidder or bidders shall be deemed to be in ' default and shall forfeit the deposit. IB-16 PERFORMANCE AND PAYMENT BOND A Performance and Payment Bond in an amount equivalent to one hundred percent (100%)of the Contract price, must be furnished and executed by the successful bidder or bidders. A form for the bidders use is contained In these Contract Documents. The issuing Surety shall be a corporate Surety Company or companies of recognized standing licensed to do business In the State of Missouri and acceptable to the City of Jefferson. IB-17 INDEMNIFICATION AND INSURANCE The Contractor agrees to Indemnify and hold harmless the City from all claims and suits for loss '• FACITY•PROJECTSWWO•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPO 1• of or damage to property, Including loss of all judgments recovered therefore, and from all expense In defending said claims, or suits, including court costs, attorney fees and other ' expense caused by any act or omission of the Contractor and/or his subcontractors, their respective agents, servants or employees. The Contractor shall be required to provide the City of Jefferson with a Certificate of Insurance outlining the coverage provided. IB-18 BID SECURITY RETURNED TO SUCCESSFUL BIDDER Upon the execution of the Contract and approval of Bond,the Bid Security will be returned to the bidder unless the same shall have been presented for collection prior to such time,In which case the amount of the deposit will be refunded by the City. IB-19 NONDISCRIMINATION IN EMPLOYMENT ' Contracts for work under this bid will obligate the Contractor and subcontractors not to discriminate In employment practices. ' IS-20 PREVAILING WAGE LAW The principal contractor and all subcontractors shall pay not less than the prevailing wage hourty rate for each craft or type of workman required to execute this contract as determined by the Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of Missouri, pursuant to Sections 290.210 through 290.340 inclusive of the Revised Statutes of Missouri, 1994 as amended. (See Determination Included herewith.) IS-21 GUARANTEE ' The Contractor shall guarantee that the equipment, materials and workmanship furnished under this contract will be as specified and will be free from defects for a period of one year from the date of final acceptance. In addition, the equipment furnished by the Contractor shall be guaranteed to be free from defects in design. Within the guarantee period and upon notification of the Contractor by the City, the Contractor ' shall promptly make all needed adjustments, repairs or replacements arising out of defects which, in the judgment of the City become necessary during such period. ' The cost of all materials, parts, labor, transportation, supervision, special tools, and supplies required for replacement of parts, repair of parts or correction of abnormalities shall be paid by the Contractor or by his surety under the terms of the Bond. ' The Contractor also extends the terms of this guarantee to cover repaired parts and all replacement parts furnished under the guarantee provisions for a period of one year from the date of installation thereof. ' If within ten days after the City gives the Contractor notice of defect,failure,or abnormalityof the work, the Contractor neglects to make, or undertake with due diligence to make, the necessary ' repairs or adjustments, the City is hereby authorized to make the repairs or adjustments Itself or order the work to be done by a third party, the costs of the work to be paid by the Contractor. '� FA CITY•PROJECTSWODO•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING%CONTRACTDOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPO '• In the event of an emergency where, in the judgment of the City delays would cause serious loss ' or damage, repairs or adjustments may be made by the City or a third party chosen by the City without giving notice to the Contractor, and the cost of the work shall be paid by the Contractoror by his surety under the terms of the Bond. IB-22 NOTICE TO PROCEED A written notice to begin construction work will be given to the Contractor by the City of Jefferson ' within ten (10)days after the Contract is approved by the City Council. The time for completion of the project shall begin to run on the date established in this notice, IS-23 WORK SCHEDULE To insure that the work will proceed continuously through the succeeding operations to its completion with the least possible interference to traffic and inconvenience to the public, the Contractor shall, at the request of the City, submit for approval a complete schedule of his proposed construction procedure, stating the sequence in which various operations of work are to be performed. IS-24 CONTRACT TIME The contract time shall be 210 working days. I8-25 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES NLiquidated damages shall be assessed at the rate of Five Hundred Dollars (=500.00) per calendar day until the work is complete, should the project not be completed within the contract ' time. IB-20 POWER OF ATTORNEY ' Attomeys-in-fact who sign bid bonds or contract bonds must file with each bond a certified and effectively dated copy of their power of attorney. IB-27 IND PACKET Each bid must be submitted on the prescribed forms and contain certain certifications and ' documentation. Each bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing on the outside the name of the bidder, ' the bidder's address, and the name of the project for which the bid is being submitted. If forwarded by mail,the sealed envelope containing the bid must be enclosed in anotherenvelope addressed as follows; Purchasing Agent City of Jefferson, MO 320 E. McCarty Street Jefferson City, MO 05101 ' Forthe convenience of bidding this project,a"BID PACKET"has been Included with the project '• F:(CITY-PROJECTSMODD-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING%CONTRACTDOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 1 manual. This packet contains the necessary forms to be submitted with the bld proposal The • contents of this packet Include the following: 1 1) BID FORM 2) BID BOND 3) ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT 4) CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT 5) MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION AGREEMENT 1 ' END OF INFORMATION FOR BIDDERS 1 1 N 1 ;1 1 1 i • 1 1 1• F:ICITY•PROJECTM81000•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD 1 '• BID FORM Name of � ' Bidder -94-1my CCZIC y (O• �dc AddressofBidder 31j,2Gi »'z1-f8'J ' To: CITY OF JEFFERSON �'•�L�Tp2diil V�/lo • (�Sa i�3 ' 320 East McCarty Street Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 THE UNDERSIGNED BIDDER, having examined the plans, specifications, regulations of the Contract, Special Conditions, other proposed contract documents and all addenda thereto; and being acquainted with and fully understanding (a)the extent and ' character of the work covered by this Bid; (b)the location, arrangement, and specified requirements for the proposed work; (c) the location, character, and condition of existing streets, roads, highways, railroads, pavements, surfacing, walks, driveways, ' curbs, gutters, trees, sewers, utilities, drainage courses, structures, and other installations, both surface and underground which may affect or be affected by the proposed work; (d)the nature and extent of the excavations to be made and the type, N character, and general condition of materials to be excavated; (e) the necessary handling and rehandling of excavated materials; (f) the location and extent of necessary or probable dewatering requirements; (g)the difficulties and hazards to the ' work which might be caused by storm and flood water; (h) local conditions relative to labor, transportation, hauling, and rail delivery facilities; and (I) all other factors and conditions affecting or which may be affected by the work. HEREBY PROPOSED to furnish all required materials, supplies,equipment,tools,and plant; to perform all necessary labor and supervision; and to construct, install, erect, and complete all work stipulated, required by, and in accordance with the proposed contract documents and the drawings, specifications, and other documents referred to therein (as altered, amended, or modified by addenda) in the manner and time ' prescribed and that he will accept in full payment sums determined by applying to the quantities of the following items, the following unit prices and/or any lump sum ' payments provided, plus or minus any special payments and adjustments provided In the specifications and he understands that the estimated quantities herein given are not guaranteed to be the exact or total quantities required for the completion of the work shown on the drawings and described in the specifications, and that increases or decreases may be made over or under the Contract estimated quantities to provide for needs that are determined during progress of the work and that prices bid shall apply to ' such increased or decreased quantities as follows: ,• FXITY-PROJECTSWODO•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE eUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 '• CITY OF JEFFERSON ITEMIZED BID FORM ' FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING PROJECT NO. 81000 ITEM UNIT ESTIMATED UNIT PRICE EXTENDED UNITS PRICE Fire Apparatus Storage Building Lump Sum 1 S 3"I 13 1 ALTERNATE 1: ' Construct Manual Each 2 gtZS Add S ZS; Barrier Gate Entrance NALTERNATE 2: ' Construct Room Lump Sum 1 Add S 109 and 110 ALTERNATE I New 18^by 24° ' Bronze Dedication Lump Sum 1 Add S Plaque and Installation 1 ' Signature of Bidder Date • i 1 '• SUBCONTRACTORS ' If the Bidder intends to use any subcontractors in the course of the construction, he shall list th . - - ( - CEO E ' TIME OF COMPLETION The undersigned hereby agrees to complete the project within 210 working days, ' subject to the stipulations of the regulations of the Contract and the Special Provisions. It is understood and agreed that if this bid is accepted, the prices quoted above include ' all applicable state taxes and that said taxes shall be paid by the Contractor. The undersigned, as Bidder, hereby declares that the only persons or firms interested ' in the bid as principal or principals is or are named herein and that no other persons or firms than herein mentioned have any interest In this bid or in the Contract to be entered into; and this bid is made without connection with any other person,company, or parties making a bid; and that it is in all respects fair and in good faith, without collusion or fraud, NThe undersigned agrees that the accompanying bid deposit shall become the property of the Owner, should he fail or refuse to execute the Contract or furnish Bond as called for in the specifications within the time provided. If written notice of the acceptance of this bid is mailed, telegraphed, or delivered to the undersigned within sixty (60) days after the date of opening of bids, or any time thereafter before this bid is withdrawn, the undersigned will, within ten(10)days after the date of such mailing, telegraphing, or delivering of such notice, execute and deliver ' a Contract in the form of Contract attached. The undersigned hereby designates as his office to which such notice of acceptance may be mailed, telegraphed, or delivered: ' P. b. 3a4- 3 A -i C(c„=yn✓iii P//,. 6C-012 It is understood and agreed that this bid may be withdrawn at any time prior to the ' scheduled time for the opening of bids or any authorized postponement thereof. Attached hereto is a Bid Bond for the sum of Dollars (cashier's check), make payable to the City of Jefferson. FACITY-PROJECTS01000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGNCONTRACTDOCUMENTMCONTRACT WPO , 1 ,• Signature of Bidder: If an individual, doing business as If a partnership, member of firm. by If corporation, 94&/2Y /,WS';7-. (ro. TctC. . by &4101th rL.Z Title �� f SEAL Business Address of Bidder N d4V/ Iq. P.v • 49 — 3/3Z�1 H/�Y fs'7 �mt.ref- (7-/t . .=nt.d.-y Ike . 6 •i'J t � If Bidder is a corporation, supply the following information: State in which incorporated t�utsti tv, Name and Address of its: President 12o,bRti7 « . , Secretary 1 k ti ZL• �-o•��A/ /Vlm Date. ZI- D 6 1 , �• FA CITY•FROJECTSWOOO-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILOIN05CONTRACTDOCUMENTSZONTRACT APD ,• BID BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned,Barry Construction Company, Inc. as Principal, and Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company as surety,are hereby held and firmly bound unto the CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI , as owner, in the penal sum of Five Percent of Amount Bid for the payment of which,well and truly to be made,we hereby Jointly and severally bind ourselves,our heirs,executors,administrators, successors and assigns, this 21st day ofFebruary ; 200 6 ' The condition of the above obligation is such that whereas the Principal has submitted to the CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI a certain Bid, attached hereto and hereby made a part hereof to enter into a contract In writing,for the project enthled: . "Project No.81000, Fire Apparatus Storage Building" NOW,THEREFORE, (a) If said Bid shell be rejected, or In the alternate, (b) If sold Bid shall be accepted and the Principal shall execute and deliver a contract in the Form of Contract attached hereto (property completed In accordance with said Bid)and shall furnish a bond for his faithful performance of sold contract, and for the payment of all persons performing labor or furnishing materials in connection therewith, shall in all other respects perform the agreement created by the acceptance of said Bid, then this obligation shall be void, otherwise the same shall remain In force and effect; it being expressly understood and agreed that the liability of the Surety for any and all claims hereunder shall,In no event, exceed the penal amount of this obligation as herein stated. The Surety,for value received,hereby stipulates and agrees that the obligations of said ' Surety and its bond shall be in no way Impaired or affected by the extension of the time within which the Owner may accept such Bid; and said Surety does hereby waive notice of any such extension, ' iN WITNESS WHEREOF,the Principal and the Surety have hereunto set their hands and seats, and such of them as are corporations have caused their corporate seals to be hereto affixed and these presents to be signed by their proper officers,the day and year first set forth above. ' Barry Construction Company, Inc. (L.S.) rant pa ' By: i SEAL Nationwidl Mutual Insuranc many c, y Kris L. Bennett, Attorney-in-Fact ,• FACITY•PROJECT601000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE SUILOINGICONTRACT OOCUMENTs%CONTRACT.WPO ' ACKNOWLEDGMENT BY SURETY ' STATE OF Missouri County of Cole ss. ' On this 21st day of February 2006 , before me personally appeal Kris L.Bennett know i to, me to be ilia Attomeyin-Fact of Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company the corporation that executed the within instrument,and acknowledged to me that such corporation executed the same. IN WITNESS WHEREOF,I have hereunto set my hand and affixed my official seal, al my once in ilia afaresadd County,the day and year in this cartificate first above written, Notary Publ in the State of Missouri (Seal) County of sage JANETHASLAG NOTARY PUBLIC-NOTARY SEAL STATE OF MISSOURI COUNTY OF OSAGE MY Commisska Expires; October 18,2088 1 I 8.023010EEF IM ❑ 294263 Power of Attorney KNOW ALL MEN 13Y THESE PRESENTS THAT Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company, a corporation organized under the laws of the State of Ohio, with its principal of ice in the City of Columbus. Ohio, herelnaller called 'Company', • does hereby make, constitute and appoint KRISTINA L. BENNETT LOUIS A. LANDWEIIII CIIAIMES F_TRABUE ' JEFFERSON CITY MO each in their individual capacity,its true and lawful Attorney-In-pact with full power and authority to sign,seal,and execute In its behalf any and all bonds Laid undertakings and otter obligatory instruments of similar nature in penalties not exceeding the sum of FIVE HUNDRED TIIOUSANII AND NO/100 DOLLARS f 500,000.00 and to bind the Company thereby, as fully and to the same extent as if such Instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Company; and all acts of said Attorney pursuant to the authority hereby given are hereby ratified and confirmed. This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of die following resolution duly adapted by the Board of Directors of the Company. 'RESOLVED, that the president, or any Senior Vice President, Resident Vice President or Second Vice President by,and the same hereby is,authorized and empowered to appoint Attorneys-In-Fact of the Company and to authorized them to execute any and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, policies, contracts 6uarantecing the fidelity of persons holding positions of public or private trust, and other writings obligatory in nature which the business of the Company may require; and to modify or revoke, with or without cause, any such appointment or authority. The authority granted hereby shall in no way limit the authority of other duly authorized agents to sign and counlersign any of said documents on behalf of the Company." 'RESOLVED FUR'T'HER, that such Attorneys-In-Fact shall have full power and authority to execute and deliver any and all such documents and to bind die Company,subject to the terms and limitations of the power orattorney issued to them,and to affix the seal of the Company thereto, provided,however,tint said seal shall not be necessary for the validity of any such documents.' This power of Attorney is signed and scaled by facsimile under and by the following By-Laws duly adopted by the hoard of Directors of the Company. ' ARTICLE VIII Section 10. Execution of instruments . Any Vice President and any Assistant Secretary or Assistant Treasurer shall have the power and authority—to sign or attest all approved documents, instruments, contracts or other papers in connection with the operation of the business of the company in addition to the Chairman and Chief N xcculvo Officer, President,Treasurer and Secretary;provided,however,the signature of any of them may be printed,engraved or stamped on any approved document,contract,Instrument or other papers of the Company. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be scaled and duly attested by the signature of Its Vice President the 28th day of April, 1999, ' 1 ACKNOWLEDGMENT �0 '•��0 By BL�AL;i S'I'A'fE OF IOWA / s. � President,./ COUNTY OF POLK SS �''• : MM On this 28th day or April, 1999, before me came the above named Vice President for Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company, to me personally known to be the officer described in and who executed the preceding instrument, and he ' acknowledged the execution of the same,and being by me duly sworn,deposes and says,that he is the officer of the Company aforesaid,that the seal affixed thereto is the corporate seal of said Company, and the said corporate seal and his signature were duly affixed and subscribed to said instrument by the authority and direction or said Company. ' SAMYAUTZ 00MMI11 VIMD.ttmm Notary public !=w wROAMJ m My Commission expires March 24, 2008 ' CERTIFICATE 1, John F. Dchaloye, Assistant Secretary or Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company, do hereby certify, that the Resolution included herein is a true and correct transcript from the minutes of the meeting of the Board of Directors duly ' called and held on the 6th day of September, 1967,and the same has not been revoked or amended in any manner;that said Stephen S. Rasmussen was on the date of the execution of the foregoing Power of Attorney We duly elected Vice President of Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company and the corporate suit] and his signature as Vice President were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority ol'said Board of Directors. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, 1 have hereunto subscribed my name as Assistant Secretary, and affixed the corporate seal orsuld Company this 21,�ay of Cebruary, 2006 '0a • . 0111 23479 This Power of Attorney expires � S8�'�/ Assicwn! Secretary zed 1 (04-00)DO 09124108 ♦ must 1` I NO ANTI-COLLUSION STATEMENT U STATE OF COUNTY OF being first duly sworn, deposes and says that he is Ilus,- P/Llee . of TITLE OF PERSON SIGNING NAME OF BIDDER that all statements made and facts set out in the bid for the above project are true and correct; and that the bidder (the person, firm, association, or corporation making said bid) has not, either directly or indirectly, entered into any agreement, participated in any collusion, or otherwise taken any action in restraint of free competitive bidding in connection with such bid of any contract which result from its acceptance. Affiant further certifies that bidder is not financially interested in, or financially affiliated with, any other bidder for the above project. Sworn to before me this —_I;day of Erie. ' BEVERLY BARRY _ Notary Public-Notary Scai County of Missouri r, County of Morgan My Commission Exp.06/27/2006 OTARY P LIC ' �l N• ' My commission expires: Q 1_ I •� 1 • rt1CtTY-PKUJECTSln1t106•FlRE APPARATUS DTOPIGE UUILOINOZONTRACT OOCIIM.EN1S%CONTRACT.WPD CONTRACTOR'S AFFIDAVIT • This affidavit is hereby made a part of the Bid, and an executed copy thereof shall accompany each Bid submitted. STATE OF ss COUNTY OF The undersigned, of lawful age, being first duly sworn states upon oath that he is of the contractor submitting the attached bid, that he knows of his own knowledge and N states it to be a fact that neither said bid nor the computation upon which it Is based include any amount of monies, estimate or allowance representing wages, moneys or expenses, however designated, proposed to be paid to persons who are not required to 1 furnish material or actually perform services upon or as a part of the proposed project. ' AFFIANT Subscribed and sworn to before me, a Notary Public, in and for the County and State aforesaid, this al-,- day of /& , 20_6:n__. ' NOTARY PUBLIC ' My Commission Expires: 4 1 FACITY•PROJECTSV II000•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.W PD 1 ,• MINORITY BUSINESS ENTERPRISE STATEMENT Contractors bidding on City contracts shall take the following affirmative steps to ' assure that small, women owned, and minority business are utilized when possible as sources of suppliers, services, and construction items. 1. Contractor's will submit the names and other information if any, about their MBE sub-contractors along with their bid submissions. 2. Sufficient and reasonable efforts will be made to use qualified MBE sub- contractors when possible on City contracts. 3. Qualified small, women owned, and minority business will be included on solicitation lists as sub-contractors for City supplies, services, and construction. 4. Qualified small, women owned, and minority business will be solicited whenever they are potential sources. ' 5. When economically feasible, Contractors will divide total requirements Into N smaller tasks or quantities so as to permit maximum small,women owned, and minority business participation. 6. Where the requirement permits, Contractor will establish delivery schedules which will encourage participation by small, women owned and minority businesses. 7.- Contractor will use the services and assistance of the Small Business Administration, the Office of Minority Business Enterprise, and the Community Services Administration. 8. Forms for determining Minority Business Enterprise eligibility may be obtained from the Department of Public Works. 1• i . FACITY-PROJECTS 1000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE SUILDINGICONTRACTDOCUMENTSICONTRACT IMI) '• MINORITY BUSINESS UTILIZATION AGREEMENT A. The bidder agrees to attempt to expend at least two (2) % of the contract, if awarded,for Minority Business Enterprise (MBE). For purposes of this goal,the tern "Minority Business Enterprise" shall mean a business: 1. Which is at least 51 percent owned by one or more minorities or women, or, in the case of a publicly owned business, at least 51 percent of the stock of which is owned by one or more minorities or women; and 2. Whose management and daily business operations are controlled by one or more such individuals. "Minority Group Member"or"Minority"means a person who is a citizen or lawful permanent resident of the United States, and who is: ' 1. Black(a person having origins In any of the black racial groups of Africa); 2. Hispanic (a person of Spanish or Portuguese culture with origins in Mexico, South or Central America, or the Caribbean Island, regardless of race); N3. Asian American(a person having origins in any of the original peoples of the Far East, Southeast Asia, the Indian sub-continent, or the Pacific Islands); 4. American Indians and Alaskan Native(a person having origins in any of ' the original peoples of North America); 5. Member of other groups, or other individuals, found to be economically and socially disadvantaged by the Small Business Administration under Section 8(a) of the Small Business Act, as amended 115 U.S.C. 637(x)]. ' 6. A female person who requests to be considered as an MBE, and who 'owns" and "controls" a business as defined herein. ' Minority Business Enterprises may be employed as contractors, subcontractors, or suppliers. ' F:ICITY•PROJECTSM000•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE SUILOING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD d crr l l t i .Wl'il l I'h.''rl '.h ,• B. The bidder must indicate the Minority Business Enterprises) proposed for utilization as part of this contract as follows: Name and Addresses Nature of Dollar Value of ' of Mino Ry Firms Participation f'ariici atior AA,law) ' Total Bid Amount: Total: Percentage of Minority Enterprise Participation:_ C. The bidder agrees to certify that the minority firm(s) engaged to provide materials or services in the completion of this project: (a) is a bone fo-wl Minority Business Enterprise; and(b)has executed a binding contract to prov;:'e specific materials or servio5s for a specific dollar amount. roster of bona fide Minority Busine ns Enterprise firms will be fumishod by the G;ty of Jefferson, The bidder will provide written notice to the Liaison Officer of the City of Jefferson indicating the Minority Business Enterprise(s) It intends to use in conjunction with this contract. This written notice is due five days after notification to the lowest bidder. 1 Corti cation that the Minority Business Enterprise(s) has executed a binding contract with the bidder for materials or services should be provided to the MBE ' C:oordinstor at then time the bidder's contract is submitted to the MBE Coordinator. D. The undersigned hereby certified that he or she has read the terms of this agreement and Is authorized to bind the bidder to the agreement herein set ' forth. NAME OF AUTHORIZED O�D OFFICER DATE 2/-F.Tis-t�6 SIGN6„URE OF AUTHORIZED OFFICER ' F1CITY•PROJLCTSN5I0M-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGLB UILUNWCOMRAOT00CUMENTS%ZONTRACT.WID 1 Missouri Division of Labor Standards WAGE AND HOUR SECTION h 0 0 ' MATT BLUNT,Governor Annual Wage Order No. 12 MSection 026 ' COLE COUNTY In accordance with Section 290.262 RSMo 2000, within thirty (30) days after a certified copy of this Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State as indicated below, any person who may be affected by this Annual Wage Order may object by filing an objections in triplicate with the Labor and Industrial Relations Commission, P.O. Boa 599, Jefferson City, MO 65102-0599. Such objections must ' set forth in writing the specific grounds of objection. Each objection shall certify that a copy has been furnished to the Division of Labor Standards, P.O. Box 449,Jefferson City, MO 65102-0449 pursuant to 8 CSR 20-5.010(1). A certified copy of the Annual Wage Order has been filed with the Secretary of State of Missouri. Original Signed by ' Colleen A. White, Director Division of Labor Standards ' This Is A True And Accurate Copy Which Was Filed With Secretary of State: _ March 9.2005 Last Date Objections May Be Filed: April 8,2005 ' Prepared by Missouri Department of Labor and Industrial Relations Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 , COLE County rve vet. OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits , Increase Rates Schedule Schedule Asbestos Worker 10105 $26.44 55 60 $12.76 Boilermaker 9105 $28.19 57 7 $17.42 ' Bridle era-Stone Mason $25.16 59 7 $8.86 Carpenter 3105 $20.48 60 15 $8.91 Cement Mason $18.91 9 3 $10.10 Eledridan Inside Wireman $25.64 28 7 $10.03+13% ' Communication Technician USE ELECTRICIAN INSIDE WIREMAN RATE Elevator Constructor 8 $34.065 26 54 $13.241 Ope retie a Engineer Group 1 5105 1 $24.07 86 66 $14.53 ' Group II 5105 1 $24.07 86 66 $14.53 Group 111 5105 1 $22.82 86 66 S%53 Group III-A 5105 $24.07 86 66 $14.53 ' Group IV 5105 $24.77 86 66 $14.53 Group V 5105 $26.07 86 66 $14.53 Pipe Fitter 7105 b $30.50 91 69 $17.18 Glazier $13.00 FED $1.84 ' Laborer(Building): General $17.22 110 7 58.08 First Seml-Skilled 579.22 110 7 58.08 Second Sam]-Skilled $18.22 110 7 $8.08 , LaMar USE CARPENTER RATE Linoleum Layer&Cutler USE CARPENTER RATE Marble Mason $25.16 59 7 $8.86 Millwright 3105 521.48 60 15 $8.91 Iron Worker 8105 $22.85 11 8 $14.84 Painter $20.50 18 7 $6.37 Plasterer $17.97 94 5 $9.85 ' Plumber $21.50 FED $3.27 Pile Driver 3105 $21.48 60 15 $8.91 Roofer 9105 $24.75 12 4 $8.99 Street Metal Worker 7105 $24.18 1 40 23 $1034 ' Sprinkler Filler $15.25 FED $2.38 Terrazzo Worker $25.18 59 7 $8.86 Tile Setter $25.16 58 7 $0.86 Truck Driver-Teamster , Group 1 $20.10 101 5 $6.75 Grow II $20.80 101 5 $8.75 Group 111 $20.50 101 5 1 $6.75 , Group IV $20.80 101 5 $6.75 Traffic Control Service Driver Welders-Acetylene&Electric Fringe Benefit Percentage is of the Basic Hourly Rate , Attention Workers: If you are not being paid the appropriate wage rate and fringe benefits contact the Division of Labor Standards at(573)751.3403. , "Annual Incremental Increase , *SEE FOOTNOTE PAGE ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO.12 10105 •' 1 1 Building Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 028 • COLE County Footnotes Us= uver. 1 OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of s Hourly Tine Holiday Total Fdnge Benerds Increase Rates Schedule Schedule 1 1 1 1 'Welders receive rate prescribed for the occupational litle performing operation to which welding Is Incidental. Use Building Construction Rates on Building(s)and NI Immediate Attachments.Use Heavy Construction 1 rates for remalnderof pr*ct. Forthe oocupatlonal tiles not listed In Heavy Construction Sheets,use Rates shown on Building Construction Rate Sheet a•Vantlon: F-mployses over b years-$* Employees under b years-8% 1 01, Ali work over$3.6 Million Total Mechanical Contract-130.60,Frnges-111.18 As work under 13.6 Million Total Mechanical Contract-128.18,Fringes-113.08 N 1 ' i 1 1 1 1� 'MOUaI Incremental Increase ANNUAL WADE ORDER N0.12 7106 1 1 COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION ' FED: Minimum requirement per Fair Labor Standards Act means time and one-half(1 '/,)shall be paid for all work in excess of forty • (40)hours per work week. NO.9: Means the regular workday starting time of 8:00 am.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 ' am.or delayed one hour to 9:00 a.m. All work performed in excess of the regular workday and on Saturday shall be compensated at one and one-half(I%)times the regular pay. In the event time Is lost during the work week due to weather conditions,the Employer may ' schedule work on the following Saturday at straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall he compensated for at double the regular rate of wages. The work week shall be Monday through Friday,except for midweek holidays. NO, 11: Means eight(8) hours shall constitute a day's work,with the starting time to be established between 7:00 am. and 8:00 am. , from Monday to Friday. Time and one-half(1'/,)shall be paid for first two(2)hours of overtime Monday through Friday and the first eight(8)hours on Saturday. All other overtime hours Monday through Saturday shall be paid at double(2)time rate. Double(2)lime shall be paid for all time on Sunday and recognized holidays or the days observed in lieu of These holidays, NO. 12: Means the work week shall commence on Monday at 12:01 am.and shall continue through the following Friday,inclusive of , each week. All work performed by employees anywhere in excess of forty(40)hours in one(1)work week,shall be paid for at the rate of one and one-half(1%I)times The regular hourly wage scale, All work performed within the regular working hours which shall consist ' of a ten(10) hour work day except in emergency situations. Overtime work and Saturday work shall be paid at one and one-hair(I'/,) times the regular hourly rate. Work on recognized holidays and Sundays shall be paid at two(2)times the regular hourly rate. NO.18: Means the regular workday shall be eight(8)hours. Working hours arc from six(6)hours before Noon(12:00)to six(6)hours ' after Noon (12:00). The regular work week shall be forty(40) hours, beginning between 6:00 am. and 12:00 Noon on Monday and ending between 1:00 p.m.and 6:00 p.m.on Friday. Saturday will be paid at time and one-half(IV;). Sunday and Holidays shall be paid at double(2)lime. Saturday can be a make-up day If the weather has forced u day off,but only in the week of the day being last. Any time before six(6)hours before Noon or six(6)hours alter Noon will be paid at time and one-half(11/2). ' NO.26: Means that the regular working day shall consist of eight(8)hours worked between 6:00 am.,and 5:00 p.m.,five(5)days per week,Monday to Friday,inclusive,Hours of work at each Jobsite shall be those established by the general contractor and worked by the majority of trades. (The above working hours may be changed by mutual agreement). Work performed on Concoction Work on Saturdays,Sundays and before and after the regular working day on Monday to Friday,inclusive,shall be classified as overtime,and paid for at double(2)the rate of single time. The employer may establish hours worked on a jobsitc for a four(4)ten(10)hour day work week at straight time pay for construction work;the regular working day shall consist of ten(10)hours worked consecutively, between 6:(1) , am. and 6:00 p.m., four(4) days per week, Monday to Thursday, inclusive. Any work performed on Friday, Saturday, Sunday and holidays,and before and niter the regular working day on Monday to Thursday where a four(4)ten(10)hour day workweek has been established, will be paid at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. The rate of pay for all work performed on holidays shall be at two times(2)the single time rate of pay. ' NO. 28: Means eight(8)hours between 7:00 am, and 530 p.m.,with at least a thirty(30) minute period to be taken for lunch,shall constitute a day's work five(5)days a week, Monday through Friday inclusive, shall constitute a work: week. The Employer has the ' option for a workday/workweek of four(4)ten(10)hour days(4-10's)provided: -The project must be for u minimum of four(4)consecutive days. -Starting time may be within one(1)hour either side of 8:00 am. ' -Work week must begin on either a Monday or Tuesday: If a holiday falls within that week It shall be a consecutive work day, (Alternate: If a holiday falls in the middle of a week,then the regular eight(8)hour schedule may be implemented). -Any time worked in excess of any ten(10)hour work day(in a 4-10 hour work week)shall be at the appropriate overtime rate All work outside of the regular working hours as provided,Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at one&one-half(1'G)times die ' employee's regular rate of pay. All work performed from 12:00 am.Sunday through 8:00 am. Monday and recognized holidays shall be paid at double(2)the straight time hourly rate of pay. Should employees work in excess of twelve(12)consecutive hours they shall be , paid double time(2X)for all time after twelve(12)hours, Shift work performed between the hours of 4:30 p.m.and 12:30 am.(second shift)shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus ten(10%)percent for seven and one-half(7'/,)hours work. Shift work performed between the hours of 12:30 am.and 8:00 am.(third shift)shall receive eight(8)hours pay at the regular hourly rate of pay plus fifteen(15%)percent for seven(7)hours work. A lunch period of thirty(30)minutes shall be allowed an each shif4 All , overtime work required after the completion of a regular shift shall be paid at one and one-half(I'/,)times the shift hourly rate. AW17 DIb 07.da ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 •' I'Iac I oM Pages 1 ' COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION • NO.33: Means the standard work day shall be eight (8) consecutive hours of work between the hours of 6:00 am. and 6:00 p.m., excluding the lunch period, or shall conform to the practice on the job site. Four(4)days at ten (10) hours a day may be worked at straight time,Monday through Friday and need not be consecutive. All overtime,except for Sundays and holidays shall be at the rate of time and one-half(1'/2). Overtime worked on Sundays and holidays shall be at double(2)time. N0.40: Means the regular working week shall consist of five(5)consecutive(8)hour days'labor on the job beginning with Monday and ending with Friday of each week. Four(4) 10-hour days may constitute the regular work week. The regular working day shall consist of eight(8)hours labornn the job beginning as early as 7:00 am.and ending as late as 5:30 p.m. All full or pan time labor performed ' during such hours shall be recognized as regular working hours and paid for at the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Saturday and all hours worked in excess of eight(8)hours but not more than twelve(12)hours during the regular working week shall be paid for at time and one-half(I%a)the regular hourly rate. All hours worked on Sundays and holidays and all hours worked in excess of twelve (12)hours during the regular working day shall be paid at two(2)times the regular hourly rate. In the event of min,snow,cold or excessively windy weather on a regular working day,Saturday maybe designated as a"make-up"day. Saturday may also be designated as a"make-up"day,for an employee who has missed a day of work for personal or other reasons. Pay for"make-up"days shalt he at regular rates. ' NO.55i Means the regular work day shall be eight(8)hours between 6:00 am,and 4:30 p.m. The first two(2)hours of work performed in excess of the eight(8)hour work day,Monday through Friday,and the first ten(10) hours of work on Saturday,shall be paid at one& one-half(1'/a) times the straight time rate. All work performed on Sunday,observed holidays and in excess of ten (10)hours a day, Monday through Saturday,shall be paid at double(2)the straight time rata NO. 57: Means eight(8) hours per day shall constitute a day's work and forty (40)hours per week, Monday through Friday, shall constitute a week's work. The regular starting time shall be 8:00 am, The above may be changed by mutual consent of authorized personnel, When circumstances warrant,the Employe may change the regular workweek to four(4)ten-hour days at the regular time rate of pay. It being understood that all other pertinent Information must be adjusted accordingly. All time worked before and after the established workday of eight(8)hours,Monday through Friday,all time worked on Saturday,shall be paid at the rate of time and one-half (1'h)except in cases where work Is part of an employee's regular Friday shin All time worked an Sunday and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. NO.59: Means that except as herein provided,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per week ' shall constitute a week's work, All Ume worked outside of the standard eight(8)hour work day and on Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(1'h). All time worked an Sunday and holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double(2)time. The Employe has the option of working either five(5)eight hour days or four(4)ten hour days to constitute a normal forty(40)hour work week. When the four(4)ten-hour work week is in effect,the standard work day shall be consecutive ten (10) hour periods between the hours of 6:30 am. and 6:30 p.m. Forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a weeks work, Monday through Thursday, inclusive. In the event the job Is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Friday and/or Saturday may,at the option of the Employer,be worked as a make-up day;straight time not to exceed ten(10)hours or forty(40)hours per week. When the five day(8) hour work week Is In effect, forty (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work,Monday through Friday, Inclusive. in the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Saturday may,at the option of the Employer, be worked as a make-up day; straight time not to exceed eight (8) hours or forty(40)hours per week. The regular starting time(and resulting quitting time) may be moved W 6:00 am, or delayed to 9:00 am. Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost due to holidays. 1 ' ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO,12 AWI2 a160T.doc Page 4af4 F'a/er COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE , BUILDING CONSTRUCTION ' NO,60: Means the Employer shall have the option of working five R-hour days or four 10-hour days Monday through Friday, If an • Employer elects to work five 8-hour days during any work week,hours worked more than eight(8)per day or folly(40)per week shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/e-)the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday, SATURDAY MAKE-UP DAY: ]fan , Employer is prevented from working forty(40)hours,Monday through Friday,or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather(rain or mud),Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. It is agreed by the panics that the make-up day Is not to be used to make up time lost due to recognized holidays. if an Employer elects to work four 10-hour days,between the hours of 6:30 am.and 6:30 p.m.in any week,work performed more than ten(10)hours per day or folly(40)hours per week shall be paid ' at time and one half(I%)the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits Monday through Friday. If an Employer Is working 10-hour days and loses a day due to inclement weather,the Employer may work ten(10)hours on Friday at straight time. Friday must be scheduled for no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate,but all hours worked over the forty(40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at ' time and one-half(1'/,)the hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. All Millwright work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated for at time and one-half (1'/3)the regular Millwright hourly wage rate plus fringe benefits. The regular work day starting of 8:00 am.(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 am.or delayed one(1)hour to 9:00 am. All work accomplished on Sundays and recognized holidays,or days observed as recognized holidays,shall be compensated ' for at double(2)the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. NOTE: All overtime is computed on the hourly wage rate plus an amount equal to the fringe benefits, NO.86: Means the regular work week shall consist of five(5)days,Monday through Friday,beginning at 8:00 am,and ending at 430 ' p.m. The regular work day beginning time may be advanced one all two hours or delayed by one hour. Howcver,the Emp)nyermay have the option to schedule his work week from Monday through Thursday at ten(10)hours per day at the straight time rate of pay with all hours In excess of ten (10) hours in any one day to be at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects to work from Monday ' through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control,Inclement weather or holiday,he shall have the option to work Friday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty(40)hours. Iran employee declines to work Friday as a make-up day,he shall not be penalized.All overtime work performed on Monday through Saturday shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/,)of the hourly rate plus an amount equal to one half m)of the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. All work performed an Sundays and recognized ' holidays shall he paid at double(2)the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. NO, 91: Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a day's work commencing to 8:00 am,and ending at 4:30 p.m.,allowing one-half(F,) hour for lunch. The option exists for the Employer to use a flexible starting time between the hours of 6:00 am. and 9:00 am. The regular workweek shall consist of forty(40)hours of five(5)workdays,Monday through Friday. The workweek may consist of four(4) ten(10)hour days from Monday through Thursday,with Friday as a make-up day. ifthe make-up day is a holiday,the employee shall he paid at the double(2)time rate. The employees shall be paid time and one-half(1'h)for work performed before the regular starting time , or after the regular quitting time or over eight(8)hours per work day (unless working a 10-hour work day,then time and one-half(I%a)is paid for work performed over ten(10)hours a day)or over forty(40)hours per work week. Work performed on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized holidays shall be paid at the double(2)time rate of psy. NO.94t Means eight(8)hours shall constitute a days work between the hours of 8:00 am.and 5:00 p.m. The regular workday starting ' time of 8W. am,(and resulting quitting time of 4:30 p.m.)may be moved forward to 6:00 am.or delayed one(1)hour to 9:00 am. All work performed in excess of the regular work day and on Saturday shall be compensated to one and one-half(I'/j)times the regular pay, In the event time is last during the work week due to weather conditions,the Employer may schedule work on the following Saturday at ' straight time. All work accomplished on Sunday and holidays shall be compensated at double the regular rate of wages. NO.101: Means Ihat except as provided below,eight(8)hours a day shall constitute a standard work day,and forty(40)hours per week , shall constitute a week's work,which shall begin on Monday and end on Friday. All time worked outside of the standard work day and an Saturday shall be classified as overtime and paid the rate of time and one-half(I%)(except as herein provided). All time worked on Sunday and recognized holidays shall be classified as overtime and paid at the rate of double(2)time, The regular starttmg time of 8:00 am.(and resulting quiuing time of 4:30 p.m.)maybe moved forward to 6:00 am,or delayed one(1)hour to 9:00 am. The Employer has the option ' of working either five(5)eight-hour days or four(4)ten-hour days to constitute a normal forty(40)hour work week. When a four(4)ten- hour day work week is in effect,the standard work day shall be consecutive ten(10)hour periods between the hours of 6:30 am.and 6:30 p.m, Forty(40)hours per week shall constitute a week's work Monday through Thursday,inclusive. In the event the job is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control, then Friday and/or Saturday may, at the option of the Employer, be worked as u make-up day; ' straight time not to exceed ten(10)hours per day or folly(40)hours per week. Stating time will be designated by the employer. When the five(5) day eight (8)hour work week Is in effect, folly (40) hours per week shall constitute a week's work, Monday through Friday, Inclusive. In the event the job Is down for any reason beyond the Employer's control,then Saturday may,at the option of die Employer,he worked as a make-up day;straight time not to exceed eight(8)hours per day or forty(40)hours per week. Make-up days shall not be ' utilized for days lost due to holidays. • ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 , A W 12 026 0T,doe Page 3 of Pages i ' COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE BUILDING CONSTRUCTION • NO.110: Means eight(8)hours between the hours of 8:00 am,and 4:30 p.m.shall constitute a work day. The starting time may be advanced one(1)or two(2)hours. Employees shall have a lunch period of thirty(30)minutes. The Employer may provide a lunch period of one (1) hour, and in that event, the workday shall commence at 8:00 am. and end at 5:00 p.m. The workweek shall commence at 8:00 a.m.on Monday and shall end at 4:30 p.m.an Friday(or 5:00 p.m,on Friday if the Employer grants a lunch period of one(1)hour),or as adjusted by starting time change as stated above, All work performed before 8:00 am,and after 4:30 p.m,(or 5:00 p.m.where one(1)hour lunch Is granted for lunch)or as adjusted by stoning time change as stated above or on Saturday,except as herein provided,shall be compensated at one and one-half(I%,)times the regular hourly rate of pay for the work performed. All work performed on Sunday and on recognized holidays shall be compensated at double(2)the regular hourly rate of pay for the work performed. if an Employer is prevented from working forty (40)hours, Monday through Friday,or any pan thereof by reason of Inclement weather(rain and mud), Saturday or any pan thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate, The Employer shell have the option of working five eight (8) hour days or four ten (10) hour days Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work five(5)eight(8)hour days during any work week,hours worked more than eight(8)per day or forty(40) ' hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half(I%)the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer elects to work four(4) ten(10)hour days In any week,work performed more than ten(10)hours per day or forty(40)hours per week shall be paid at time and one-half(IY,) the hourly rate Monday through Friday. If an Employer Is working ten (10) hour days and loses a day due to Inclement weather,they may work ten(10)hours Friday at straight time. Friday must be scheduled for at least eight(8)hours and no more than ten(10)hours at the straight time rate,but all hours worked over the forty(40)hours Monday through Friday will be paid at time and one-half(1%)overtime rate. 1 ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO, 12 AW120260T.doa Page 4ofl Pita , 1 COLE COUNTY ' HOLIDAY SCHEDULE—BUILDING CONSTRUCTION NO.3:All work done on New Year's Day, Decoration Day,July 4th,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, • Thanksgiving bay and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. Whenever any ' such holidays fall on a Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday. NO.4:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day, ' Thanksgiving and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If any of the above holidays fall on Sunday,Monday will be observed as the recognized holiday. If any of the above holidays fall oh Saturday,Friday will be observed as the recognized holiday. ' NO.5: All work that shall be done on New Year's Day, Memorial Day, Fourth of July, Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double(2)time ' rate of pay. NO,7:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day, , Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the Monday following. If a holiday falls on a Saturday,it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. , NO.8:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day, Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day,or the days observed in lieu of these holidays,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. ' NO.15:All work accomplished on the recognized holidays of New Year's Day,Decoration Day (Memorial Day),Independence Day(Fourth of July),Labor Day,Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day, or days observed as these named holidays,shall be compensated for at double(2)the regular hourly rate of wages plus fringe benefits. If a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday. If holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on ' the following Monday. No work shall be performed on Labor Day,Christmas Day,Decoration Day or Independence Day except to preserve life or property. NO.19:All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day.July 4th,Labor Day,Thanksgiving ' Day,and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. The employee may take off Friday following Thanksgiving Day. However,the employee shall notify his or her Foreman, ' General Foreman or Superintendent on the Wednesday preceding Thanksgiving Day. When one of the above holidays falls on Sunday,the following Monday shall be considered the holiday and all work performed on said day shall be at the double(2)time rate. When one of the holidays falls ' on Saturday,the preceding Friday shall be considered the holiday and all work performed on said day shall be at the double(2)time rate. NO.23: All work done on New Year's Day,Memorial Day, Independence Day,Labor Day, ' Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day and Sundays shall be recognized holidays and shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday fails on Sunday,the following Monday shall be considered a holiday. ' NO,54:All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day,Labor Day, Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day,the Friday after Thanksgiving Day,and Christmas Day shall be , paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. When a holiday falls on Saturday,it shall be observed on • Friday. When a holiday falls on Sunday, it shall be observed on Monday. ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 ' A W012 076131W Page I of 2 Page 1 1 COLE COUNTY HOLIDAY SCHEDULE—BUILDING CONSTRUCTION 1• NO.60: All work performed on New Year's Day,Armistice Day(Veteran's Day),Decoration Day(Memorial Day),Independence Day(Fourth of July),Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. No work shall be performed on Labor Day 1 except when triple(3)time is paid. When a holiday falls on Saturday,Friday will be observed as the holiday. When a holiday falls on Sunday,the following Monday shall be observed as the holiday. 1 NO,66: All work performed on Sundays and the following recognized holidays,or the days observed as such,of New Year's Day,Decoration Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, 1 Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day,shall be paid at double(2)the hourly rate plus an amount equal to the hourly Total Indicated Fringe Benefits. Whenever any such holidays fall on a Sunday, the following Monday shall be observed as a holiday. 1 NO.69: All work performed on New Year's Day,Decoration Day,July Fourth,Labor Day, Veteran's Day,Thanksgiving Day or Christmas Day shall be compensated at double(2)then straight-time hourly rate of pay. Friday after Thanksgiving and the day before Christmas will also 1 be holidays,but if the employer chooses to work these days,the employee will be paid at straight- time rate of pay. If a holiday falls on a Sunday in a particular year,the holiday will be observed on the following Monday. 1 N i 1 1 1 1 1 1� 1 ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 AW012 026 allol Page 2 or2 Pages 1 � Heavy Construction Rates for REPLACEMENT PAGE Section 026 , COLE Count • 'Effective Basic Over- OCCUPATIONAL TITLE Date of Hourly Time Holiday Total Fringe Benefits ' Increase Rates Schedule Schedule CARPENTER Journeymen 5/05 $25.48 7 16 $8.89 ' Mii(wri ht 5/05 $25.48 7 16 $8.89 Pile Driver Worker 5/05 $25.48 7 16 $8.89 ' OPERATING ENGINEER Group 1 5105 $23.15 21 5 $14.45 , Group II 5105 $22.80 1 21 5 $14.45 ' Group III 5105 $22.60 21 5 $14.45 Group IV 5/05 $18.95 21 5 $14.45 Oiler-Driver 5/05 $18.95 21 5 $14.45 ' LABORER General Laborer 5/05 $21.77 2 4 $7.78 Skilled Laborer 5/05 $22.37 2 4 $7.78 TRUCK DRIVER-TEAMSTER ' Group 1 5105 $23.67 22 19 $7.50 Group II 5105 $23.83 1 22 19 $7.50 ,Group III 5105 $23.82 22 19 $7.50 ' lGroup IV 5105 1 $23.94 1 22 19 1 $7.50 For the occupational titles not listed on the Heavy Construction Rate Sheet, use Rates shown on the ' Building Construction Rate Sheet. ' 1 'Annual Incremental Increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 7105 •, ' COLE COUNTY OVERTIME SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION • NO.2: Means a regular workweek shall be forty(40)hours and will start on Monday and end on Friday. The regular workday shall be either eight(8)or ten(10)hours. If a crew is prevented from working forty(40)hours Monday through Friday,or any part thereof,by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day,notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. A workday shift is to begin at the option of the Employer,between 6:00 a.m. ' and not later than 9:00 a.m. However,the project starting time may be advanced or delayed if required. If workmen are required to work the enumerated holidays or days observed as such or Sundays,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. ' NO.7: Means the regular work week shall start on Monday and end on Friday,except where the Employer elects to work Monday through Thursday,ten(10)hours per day. All work over ten ' (10)hours in a day or forty(40)hours in a week shall be at the overtime rate of one and one-half (1'/z)times the regular hourly rate. The regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten(10) hours. If a job can't work forty(40)hours Monday through Friday because of inclement weather ' or other conditions beyond the control of the Employer,Friday or Saturday may be worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working 4-10's). Saturday maybe worked as a make-up day at straight time(if working 5-8's). Make-up days shall not be utilized for days lost from holidays. Except as worked as a make-up day,time on Saturday shall be worked at one and one-half(I%) ' times the regular rate. Work performed on Sunday shall be paid at two(2)times the regular rate. Work performed on recognized holidays or days observed as such,shall also be paid at the double(2)time rate of pay. NO.21: Means the regular workday for which employees shall be compensated at straight time hourly rate of pay shall,unless otherwise provided for,begin at 8:00 a.m.and end at 4:30 p.m. ' However,the project starting time may be advanced or delayed at the discretion of the Employer. At the discretion of the Employer,when working a five(5)day eight(8)hour schedule,Saturday may be used for a make-up day. If an Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that ' employer may work the following Saturday at the straight time rate. However,the Employer may have the option to schedule his work from Monday through Thursday at ten (10)hours per day at the straight time rate of pay with all hours in excess of ten(10)hours in any one day to be paid at the applicable overtime rate. If the Employer elects to work from Monday through Thursday and is stopped due to circumstances beyond his control,he shall have the option to work Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate of pay to complete his forty(40)hours. if an ' Employer is prohibited from working on a holiday,that Employer may work the following Friday or Saturday at the straight time rate. Overtime will be at one and one-half(1%3)times the regular rate. If workmen arc required to work the enumerated holidays or days observed as such, or Sundays,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. ' NO.22: Means a regular work week of forty(40)hours will start on Monday and end on Friday. The regular work day shall be either eight(8)or ten (10)hours. If a crew is prevented from ' working forty(40)hours Monday through Friday, or any part thereof by reason of inclement weather, Saturday or any part thereof may be worked as a make-up day at the straight time rate. Employees who are part of a regular crew on a make-up day, notwithstanding the fact that they may not have been employed the entire week,shall work Saturday at the straight time rate. For • all time worked on recognized holidays,or days observed as such,double(2)time shall be paid. ' ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 AW012026110T Pape I of IPern COLE COUNTY ' HOLIDAY SCHEDULE—HEAVY CONSTRUCTION NO.4: All work performed on New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving • Day,Christmas Day,or days observed as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When a holiday ' falls on a Sunday,Monday shall be observed. NO.5: The following days are recognized as holidays:New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor ' Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday, it shall be observed on the following Monday.If a holiday falls on a Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction.This rule is applied to , protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward a forty(40)hour week; however,no reimbursement for this eight(8)hours is to be paid the workman unless worked.If workmen are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such,or Sundays,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. The above shall apply to the four 10's Monday through Thursday work week.The ten(10)hours shall be applied to the forty(40)hour work week. ' NO. 16:The following days are recognized as holidays:New Year's Day, Memorial Day,Fourth of July, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on Sunday,it shall be observed on the , following Monday.if a holiday falls on Saturday, it shall be observed on the preceding Friday.No work shall be performed on Labor Day except in case of jeopardy to work under construction.This rule is applied to protect Labor Day. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,Monday through Friday, it shall be counted as eight(8)hours toward the forty(40)hour week;however,no reimbursement for this eight(8)hours ' is to be paid to the worker unless worked.If workers are required to work the above recognized holidays or days observed as such,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. NO.19. The following days are recognized as holidays:New Year's Day,Memorial Day,Independence Day, Labor Day,Thanksgiving Day and Christmas Day. If a holiday falls on a Sunday,it shall be observed on the following Monday. When a holiday falls during the normal work week,Monday through Friday,it shall be ' counted as eight(8)hours toward the forty(40)hour week;however,no reimbursement for this eight(8)hours is to be paid the workmen unless worked. If workmen are required to work the above enumerated holidays,or days observed as such,they shall receive double(2)the regular rate of pay for such work. , AW0121111o1 ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 Page I or I Pipe ' REPLACEMENT PAGE OUTSIDE ELECTRICIAN • These rates are to be used for the following counties: ' Adair,Audratn,Boone,Calloway,Camden,Carter,Chariton,Clark,Cole,Cooper,Crawford,Dent,Franklin, Gasconade,Howard,Howell,Iran,Jefferson,Knox,Lewis,Lincoln,Linn,Macon,Maries,Marion,Miller,Monlicau, Monroe,Montgomery,Morgan,Oregon,Osage,Perry,Phelps,Pike,Pulaski,Putnam,Ralls,Randolph,Reynolds, Ripley,St.Charles,St.Francois,St.Louis City,SL Louis County,Ste,Genevieve,Schuyler,Scotland Shannon,Shelby, Sullivan,Texas,Warren,and Washington COMMERCIAL-WORK Occupational Title Basic Total Hourly Frin e Rate Benefits *Joumeyman Lineman $30.30 $450+41.3% *Lineman Operator $27.04 $4.50+41.3% *Groundman $21.22 $4.50+41.3% OVERTIME RATE:Eight(B)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 am.and 4:30 p.m.Forty (40)hours within rive(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week. Work performed In the 9th and 10th hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(1'h)the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(I'/,)the regular straight time rate of pay ' between the hours of 6:00 am.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday.Work performed outside the regularly scheduled workinghours and on Saturdays,Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of double(2)time. N HOLIDAY RATE:All work performed on New Yc&s Day,Memorial Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. W hen one of the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. ' UTILITY WORK ' Occupational Title Basic Total Hourly Frin e Rate Benefits *Journeyman Lineman $30.30 $4.50+37.3% *Lineman Operator $26.16 $4.50+37.3% ' *Groundman $20.23 $4.50+37.3%/a OVERTIME RATE:Eight(8)hours shall constitute a work day between the hours of 7:00 am.and 4:30 p.m.Forty (40)hours within five(5)days,Monday through Friday inclusive,shall constitute the work week.W otk performed in the ' 91h and 10th hour,Monday through Friday,shall be paid at time and one-half(1'/3)the regular straight time rate of pay. Contractor has the option to pay two(2)hours per day at the time and one-half(I%3)the regular straight time rate ofpay between the hours of6:00 am.and 5:30 p.m.,Monday through Friday. Worked performed In the first eight(8)hours on Saturday shall be paid at the rate of one and eight tenths(1.8)the regular straight time rate. Work performed outside ' these hours and on Sundays and recognized legal holidays,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid for at the rate of double(2)time, ' HOLIDAY RATE:All work performed on New Yeats Day,Mcmorla)Day,Fourth of July,Labor Day,Veteran's Day, Thanksgiving Day,Christmas Day,or days celebrated as such,shall be paid at the double time rate of pay. When one of • the foregoing holidays falls on Sunday,it shall be celebrated on the following Monday. ' *Annual Incremental increase ANNUAL WAGE ORDER NO. 12 vAs Il4odbcNW01r`G0e,nonn'Oarb'ILAWa W ds ,• AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW I, the undersigned, of lawful age, first being duly swom, state to the best of my information and belief as follows; 1. That 1 am employed as ' by 2. That was awarded a public works contract for Project No. 81000, Fire Apparatus Storage Building. 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as amended)an act relating to public works contracts, which impose certain requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public ' works construction project in the State of Missouri. 4. That has fully complied with the Nprovisions and requirements of Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as amended) ' FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT. ' AFFIANT ' Subscribed and sworn to before me this_day of 12Q.__. ' NOTARY PUBLIC ' My Commission Expires; ' STATE OF MISSOURI ) ss ' COUNTY OF ) 1• F1CITY•PROJECTSWODO•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD ' EXCESSIVE UNEMPLOYMENT EXCEPTION CERTIFICATION ' I, the undersigned, , of lawful age, first being duly sworn, state to the best of my information and belief as follows: ' 1. That I am employed as by ' 2. That was awarded a public works contract for Project No. 81000, Fire Apparatus Storage Building. 3. That I have read and am familiar with Section 290.290 RSMo (1994 as ' amended)an act relating to public works contracts,which impose certain requirements upon contractors and subcontractors engaged in a public works construction project in the State of Missouri. 4. Although there is a period of excessive unemployment in the State of Missouri, which requires the employment of only Missouri laborers and laborers from non-restrictive states on public works projects or ' improvements, an exception applies as to the hiring of since no Missouri ' laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are available or capable of performing FURTHER AFFIANT SAYETH NAUGHT. ' AFFIANT ' Subscribed and sworn to before me this_day of _, 20 ' NOTARY PUBLIC My Commission Expires; '• APPROVED BY: Director of Community Development, City of Jefferson, MO FACITY•PROJECTSM000•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE SUILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 '• CITY OF JEFFERSON CONSTRUCTION CONTRACT I ' THIS CONTRACT, made and entered Into this_1L day of i I 2006, ' by and between Barry Construction Company hereinafter refer ed to as"Contractor", and the City of Jefferson, Missouri, a municipal corporation of the State of Missouri, hereinafter referred to as "City". ' WITNESSETH: That Whereas, the Contractor has become the lowest responsible bidder for furnishing the supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies ' and for constructing the following City Improvements: Project No. 81000, Fire Apparatus Storage Building. ' NOW THEREFORE, the parties to this contract agree to the following: ' 1. Scope of Services. Contractor agrees to provide all labor, equipment, hardware and supplies to perform the work included in the project entitled "Fire Apparatus Storage Building" in ' accordance with the plans and specifications on file with the Department of Community Development. 2. Manner and time for Completion. Contractor agrees with the City to furnish ail supervision, labor, tools, equipment, materials and supplies necessary to perform said work at Contractor's own expense In ' accordance with the contract documents and any applicable City ordinances and state and federal laws, within 210 calendar days from the date Contractor is ordered to proceed,which order shall be Issued by the Directorof Community Development within ' ten (10)days after the date of this contract. ' 3. Prevailing Wages. To the extent that the work performed by Contractor is subject to prevailing wage law, Contractor shall pay a wage of no less than the "prevailing hourly rate of wages" for ' work of a similar character In this locality, as established by Department of Labor and Industrial Relations of the State of Missouri, and as established by the Federal Employment Standards of the Department of Labor. Contractor acknowledges that ' Contractorknows the prevailing hourly rate of wages forthis project because Contractor has obtained the prevailing hourly rate of wages from the contents of the current Annual Wage Order No. 12, Section 026, Cole County rates as set forth. The ' Contractor further agrees that Contractor will keep an accurate record showing the names and occupations of all workmen employed in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of this contract. The record shall show the actual wages paid to the workmen in connection with the work to be performed under the terms of • this contract. A copy of the record shall be delivered to the Purchasing Agent of the Jefferson City Finance Department each week. In accordance with Section 290.250 RSMo, Contractor shall forfeit to the City Ten Dollars ($10.00) for each workman employed, for each calendar day or portion thereof that the workman is paid less than 1 '• the stipulated rates for any work done under this contract, by the Contractor or any subcontractor under the Contractor. 4. Insurance. ' Contractor shall procure and maintain at its own expense during the life of this contract: (a) Workmen's Compensation Insurance for all of its employees to be ' engaged in work under this contract. (b) Contractor's Public Liability Insurance in an amount not less than ' $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence, except for those claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo., and ' Contractor's Property Damage Insurance in an amount not less than$2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one person in a single accident or occurrence. ' (c) Automobile Liability Insurance in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $300,000 for any one ' person in a single accident or occurrence. (d) Owner's Protective Liability Insurance -The Contractor shall also obtain N at its own expense and deliver to the City an Owner's Protective Liability insurance Policy naming the City of Jefferson as the Insured, in an amount not less than $2,000,000 for all claims arising out of a single accident or occurrence and $500,000 foranyone person in a single accident or occurrence, except forthose claims governed by the provisions of the Missouri Workmen's Compensation Law, Chapter 287, RSMo. No policy will be accepted which excludes liability for damage to underground ' structures or by reason of blasting, explosion or collapse. (e) Subcontracts-In case any orall of this work is sublet,the Contractor shall require the Subcontractor to procure and maintain all insurance required in ' Subparagraphs (a), (b), and (c) hereof and in like amounts. ' (f) Scone of Insurance and Special Hazard. The insurance required under Sub-paragraphs(b)and (c)hereof shall provide adequate protection for the Contractor and its subcontractors, respectively, against damage claims which may arise from ' operations under this contract,whether such operations be by the Insured or by anyone directly or indirectly employed by It, and also against any special hazards which may be encountered in the performance of this contract. ' NOTE: Paragraph(f)is construed to require the procurement of Contractor's protective insurance (or contingent public liability and contingent property damage policies) by a ' general contractor whose subcontractor has employees working on the project, unless . the general public liability and property damage policy(or rider attached thereto)of the general contractor provides adequate protection against claims arising from operations ' by anyone directly or indirectly employed by the Contractor. ,• 5. Contractor's Responsibility for Subcontractors. It Is further agreed that Contractor shall be as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of Its subcontractors, and of persons either directly or indirectly employed by them, as Contractor Is for the acts and omissions of persons it directly employs. Contractor shall cause appropriate provisions to be Inserted In all subcontracts relating to this work, to bind all subcontractors to Contractor by all the terms herein set forth, Insofar as applicable to the work of subcontractors and to give Contractor the same power regarding termination of any subcontract as the City may exercise over Contractor under any provisions of this contract. Nothing contained in this contract shall create any contractual relations between any subcontractor and the ' City or between any subcontractors. 6. Liquidated Damages. ' The City may deduct Five Hundred Dollars($500.00)from any amount otherwise due under this contract for every day the Contractor falls or refuses to prosecute the work, or any separable part thereof, with such diligence as will insure the completion by the ' time above specified, or any extension thereof, or falls to complete the work by such time, as long as the City does not terminate the right of Contractor to proceed. It is further provided that Contractor shall not be charged with liquidated damages because ' of delays In the completion of the work due to unforeseeable causes beyond Contractor's control and without fault or negligence on Contractor's part or the part of its agents. N7. Termination. The City reserves the right to terminate this contract by giving at least five(5)days prior ' written notice to Contractor,without prejudice to any other rights or remedies of the City should Contractor be adjudged a bankrupt, or if Contractor should make a general assignment for the benefit of Its creditors, or if a receiver should be appointed for ' Contractor or for any of Its property, or if Contractor should persistently or repeatedly refuse or fall to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper material, or if Contractor should refuse or fall to make prompt payment to any person supplying labor ' or materials forthe work under the contract, or persistently disregard Instructions of the City or fail to observe or perform any provisions of the contract. ' 8. City's Right to Proceed. In the event this contract is terminated pursuant to Paragraph 7, then the City may take over the work and prosecute the same to completion, by contract or otherwise, and Contractor and its sureties shall be liable to the City for any costs over the amount of this contract thereby occasioned by the City. In any such case the City may take possession of, and utilize in completing the work, such materials, appliances and ' structures as may be on the work site and are necessary for completion of the work. The foregoing provisions are in addition to, and not in limitation of,the rights of the City under any other provisions of the contract, city ordinances, and state and federal laws. '• 9. Indemnity. To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor will indemnify and hold harmless ' the City, Its elected and appointed officials, employees, and agents from and against any and all claims,damages,losses,and expenses including attorneys'fees arising out '• of or resulting from the performance of the work, provided that any such claim,damage, loss or expense (1) is attributable to bodily Injury, sickness, disease, or death, or to ' injury to ordestruction of tangible property(other than the Work Itself)including the loss of use resulting therefrom and (2) is caused in whole or in part by any negligent act or omission of contractor,any subcontractor,anyone directly or Indirectly employed byany of them or anyone for whose acts any of them may be liable, regardless of whether or not it Is caused In part by a party indemnified hereunder. Such obligation shall not be construed to negate, abridge, or otherwise reduce any other right or obligation of indemnity which would otherwise exist as to any party or person described In this Paragraph. ' 10. Payment for Labor and Materials. The Contractor agrees and binds itself to pay for all labor done, and for all the materials used in the construction of the work to be completed pursuant to this contract. Contractor shall furnish to the City a bond to Insure the payment of all materials and labor used In the performance of this contract. ' 11. supplies. The Contractor is hereby authorized and directed to utilize the City's sales tax exemption in the purchase of goods and materials for the project as set out in Section 144.062 RSMo 1994 as amended. Contractor shall keep and maintain records and Invoices of all such purchases which shall be submitted to the City. 12. Payment. The City hereby agrees to pay the Contractor for the work done pursuant to this ' contract according to the payment schedule set forth in the Contract Documents upon acceptance of said work by the Directorof Community Development and In accordance with the rates and/or amounts stated In the bid of Contractor dated February 21, 2006 ' which are by reference made a part hereof. No partial payment to the Contractor shall operate as approval or acceptance of work done or materials furnished hereunder. The total amount of this contract shall not exceed Four Hundred Thirty Thousand, Two Hundred Fifty-Three Dollars and no cents ($430,253.00). 13. Performance and Materialman's Bonds Required. Contractor shall provide a bond to the City before work is commenced, and no later ' than ten (10) days after the execution of this contract, guaranteeing the Contractor's performance of the work bid for, the payment of amounts due to all suppliers of labor and materials, the payment of insurance premiums for workers compensation Insurance and all other insurance called for under this contract, and the payment of the prevailing wage rate to all workmen as required by this contract, said bond to be In a ' form approved by the City, and to be given by such company or companies as may be acceptable to the City in its sole and absolute discretion. The amount of the bond shall be equal to the Contractor's bid. 1• 14. Knowledge of Local Conditions. Contractor hereby warrants that it has examined the location of the proposed work and ' the attached specifications and has fully considered such local conditions In making its bid herein. 1 1 '• 15. Severability. If any section,subsection,sentence,orclause of this Contract shall be adjudged illegal, Invalid, or unenforceable, such illegality, invalidity, or unenforceability shall not affect the legality, validity, or enforceability of the contract as a whole, or of any section, subsection, sentence, clause, or attachment not so adjudged. 16. Governina Law. ' The contract shall be governed by the laws of the State of Missouri. The courts of the State of Missouri shall have jurisdiction over any dispute which arises under this contract, and each of the parties shall submit and hereby consents to such courts exercise of jurisdiction. In any successful action by the City to enforce this contract,the City shall be entitled to recover its attorney's fees and expenses Incurred in such action. ' 17. Contract Documents. The contract documents shall consist of the following; a. This Contract f. General Provisions b. Addenda g. Special Provisions c. Information for Bidders h. Technical Specifications d. Notice to Bidders 1. Drawing and/or Sketches e. Signed Copy of Bid N This contractand the otherdocuments enumerated in this paragraph,form the Contract between the parties. These documents are as fully a part of the contract as if attached hereto or repeated herein. 18. Complete Understanding, Merger. Parties agree that this document including those documents described in the section entitled "Contract Documents"represent the full and complete understanding of the parties. This contact Includes only those goods and services specifically set out. This ' contract supersedes all priorcontracts and understandings between the Contractorand the City. ' 19. Authorship and Enforcement. Parties agree that the production of this document was the joint effort of both parties and that the contract should not be construed as having been drafted by either party. In the event that either party shall seek to enforce the terms of this contract through litigation, the prevailing party in such action shall be entitled to receive, in addition to any other relief, Its reasonable attorneys fees, expenses and costs. ' 20. Amendments. This contract may not be modified,changed or altered by any oral promise or statement by whomsoever made; nor shall any modification of it be binding upon the City until • such written modification shall have been approved in writing by an authorized officer of the City. Contractor acknowledges that the City may not be responsible for paying for changes or modifications that were not properly authorized. '• 21. Waiver of Breach . Failure to Exercise Rights and Waiver: Failure to insist upon strict compliance with any of the terms covenants or conditions herein shall not be deemed a waiver of any such terms, covenants or conditions, nor shall any failure at one or more times be deemed a waiver or relinquishment at any other time or times by any right under the terms, covenants or conditions herein. 22. Assignment. ., Neither party may sell or assign Its rights or responsibilities under the terms of this agreement without the express consent of the remaining party. 23. Nondiscrimination. Contractor agrees in the performance of this contract not to discriminate on the ground or because of race, creed, color, national origin or ancestry, sex, religion, handicap, age, or political opinion or affiliation, against any employee of Contractor or applicant ' for employment and shall include a similar provision in all subcontracts let or awarded hereunder. ' 24. Notices. All notices required to be in writing may be given by first class mail addressed to City of Jefferson, Department of Community Development, 320 East McCarty, Jefferson City, Missouri, 65101, and Contractor at P.O. Box 387, Caiifomia, MO 65018. The date of delivery of any notice shall be the second full day after the day of its mailing. 1 1 IN WITNESS WHEREOF,the parties hereto have set their hands and seals this �g day of ApIO 2006. 1 CITY OF JEFFERSON CONTRACTOR 1 ay f Tille: ' ATTEST: ATTEST: 1 y Ity C" rk Title: APPROVE AS TO FORM: 1 1 � Cit CdTr4e 6r 1 1 1 1� i 1 Bond #BD 699742 1• PERFORMANCE, PAYMENT AND GUARANTEE BOND KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS, that we, the undersigned Barry Construction Company ' hereinafter, referred to as "Contractor" and Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company a Corporation organized under the laws of the State of Ohio and authorized to transact business in the State of ' Missouri as Surety, are held and firmly bound unto the ' City of Jefferson, Missouri hereinafter referred to as"Owner" In the penal sum of Four Hundred Thirty Thousand Two Hundred Fifty- DOLLARS Three Dollars and 00/100 ($ 430,253.00 ), lawful money of the United States of America for the Npayment of which sum, well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves and our heirs, ' executors, administrators, successors, and assigns, jointly and severally by these presents. THE CONDITION OF THE FOREGOING OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT; 1 WHEREAS, the above bounded Contractor has on the day ' of 20 ,entered Into a written contractwith the aforesaid Owner forfumishing all materials,equipment,tools,superintendence,labor,and otherfacilities ' and accessories, for the construction of certain improvements as designated, defined and described in the said Contract and the Conditions thereof, and in accordance with the specifications and plans therefore; a copy of said Contract being attached hereto and made a part hereof. '• NOW THEREFORE, if the said Contractorshall and will, in all particulars,well,dulyand ' faithfully observe, perform and abide by each and every covenant, condition, and part of the said Contract, and the Conditions, Specifications, Plans, Prevailing Wage Law '• and other Contract Documents thereto attached or, by reference, made a part thereof, according to the true intent and meaning in each case, and if said contractor shall replace all defective parts, material and workmanship for a period of one year after acceptance by the Owner, then this obligation shall be and become null and void; otherwise it shall remain in full force and effect. ' PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to duly pay for any labor, materials, sustenances, provisions, provender, gasoline, lubricating oils, fuel oils, greases, coal repairs, equipment and tools consumed or used in said work, groceries ' and foodstuffs, and all insurance premiums, compensation liability, and otherwise, or any other supplies or materials used or consumed by such Contractor or his, their, or ' Its subcontractors in performance of the work contracted to be done,the Surety will pay the same in any amount not exceeding the amount of this Obligation, together with ' Interest as provided by law: NPROVIDED FURTHER,that the said Surety, for value received, hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract, or the work to be performed thereunder, or the specifications accompanying the same, shall in any wise affect Its obligation on this bond and it does hereby waive notice of any change, extension of time, alteration, or addition to the terms of the contract, or to the work, or to the specifications: PROVIDED FURTHER, that if the said Contractor fails to pay the prevailing hourly rate ' of wages, as shown in the attached schedule, to any workman engaged in the construction of the Improvements as designated, defined and described in the said ' contract, specifications and conditions thereof, the Surety will pay the deficiency and any penalty provided for by law which the contractor incurs by reason of an act or omission, in any amount not exceeding the amount of this obligation together with Interest as provided by law: '• IN TESTIMONY WHEREOF, the said Contractor has hereunto set his hand, and the ' said Surety has caused these presents to be executed in its name, and its corporate 1 II '• seal to be hereunto affixed, by it attomey-in-fact duly authorized thereunto so to do, at Jefferson City, Missouri on this the ' day of 20 1 Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company Barry Construction Company SURETY COMPANY CONTRACTOR BY (SEAL) BY (SEAL) ' EAL) BY (SEAL) Attom -in-fact (State Representative) Kris . Bennett N (Accompany this bond with Attomey-in-fact's authority from the Surety Company certified to Include the date of the bond.) 1� ACKNOWLEDGMENT BY SURETY STATE OF Missouri ,. ss. County of Cole On this day of before me personally appeared Kris L.Bennett knouii to, me to be the Attorney-in-Fact of Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company the corporation that executed We eithin instrument,and acknowledged to me that such corporation executed the same. ' iN WITNESS WHEREOF, I bave bercunio set my hand and affixed my official sad,in my office in the aforesaid County,tine day and year in this certificate first above written. 1 N Notary Public in he State or Missouri (Seal) count)-or Osage JANET HASLAG ' NOTARY PUBLIC-NOTARY SEAL STATE OF MISSOURI COUNTY OF OSAGE My Commission Expires; October 18,2008 1 1• ' 5-013111eEEF 1098 ' 4 I 352722 Power of Attorney KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS THAT Nationwide ,Mutual Insurance Company, it corporation organized • under Ore laws of the Suite of Olnho, with its principal office in the City of Columbus, Ohio. hercinaller called 'Company', does hereby make,constitute and appoint KIOSTINA L. BENNETI, LOUIS A. LANDWBIIit ' CHARLES f:.'rItARUI: JEI'I+EItSON CITY MU each In their individual capacity,its true and lawful Attorney-hit-Fact with full power and authority In sign,seal,and execute ' fn its behalf ony and all bonds and underakings and other obligatory instru..cuts of similar nature in penalties not exceeding tine sum of IYVE IfUNURED TIfOUSANO ANO NOflao DOLLARS S 500,000,00 and to bind the Company thereby, as fully and to the same extent as if such instruments were signed by the duly authorized officers of the Company; and all acts of said Attorney pursuant to the authority hereby given are hereby ratlfed find confirmed. ' This Power of Attorney is made and executed pursuant to and by authority of the following resolution duly adopted by the Board of Directors of the Company. 'RESOLVED, that the President, or any Senior Vice President, Resident Vice President or Second Vice President by,and the same hereby is,authorized arid empowered to appoint Attorneys-In-Fact of the Company and to authorized them to execute arts, and all bonds, undertakings, recognizances, contracts of indemnity, policies, contracts guaranteeing the fidelity of persons holding positions of public or private trust, and other writings obligatory in nature which the business or Ole Company may require; and to modify or revoke, with or without cause, any such appointment or authority.The authority granted hereby shall fn no way limit the authority or other duly authorized agents to sign and countersign any of said documents on behalf' or Ole Company; 'RESOLVED FURTHER, that such Attorneys-In-Fact shall have full power and authority to execute and deliver any and all such documents and to bind We Company,subject to the terms and limitations or the power of attorney issued to them,and to affix the seal of the Company thereto, provided,however,that said seal shall not be necessary for the validity of any such documents: This Power of Attorney is signed and scaled by facsimile under and by the following By-Laws duly adopted by We Board or Directors of the Company. ARTICLE VNI 'Section 10. Execution of instruments . Any Vice President and any Assistant Secretary or Assistant Treasurer shall have the power arh authority to sign or attest all approved documents, instruments, contracts or other Rin connection with the operation of the business of the company in addition to We Chairman and Cider Executive Officer, President,Treasurer and Secretary;provided,however,We signature or any of them may be printed,engraved or stamped on any approved document,contract,instrument or other papers of the Company. IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the said Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company has caused this instrument to be sealed and ' duly attested by One signature of Sts Vice President the 21th day of April, 19991 ACKNOWLEDGMENT' P5 y: By: 0 tSLAL-2 STATE OF IOWA �' President COUNTY OF FOLK S5 �� ITy MI ' On this 111h day of April, 1999, before me came the above named Vice President for Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company, to me personally known to be the officer described in and who executed the preceding Instrument, and he acknowledged the execution of the same,and being by me duly sworn,deposes and says,that he is the officer ortne Company aforesaid,that the seal affixed thereto is tine corporate seal of said Company, arid the said corporate seal and his signature were duly offixed and subscribed to said instrument by the authority and direction of said Company. ' Ca M Notary Public ... wysm„ y My Commission expires March 24, 2001 CER'TIFICAT'E 1, John F. Deluloye, Assistant Secretary of Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the Resolution included herein is a true and correct transcript from the minutes of the meeting of the Board of Directors duly called and field on the 61h day of September, 1967,arid the same has not been revoked or amended In any manner;that said Stephen S. Rasmussen was on ire date of the execution of Ore foregoing Power of Attorney tic duly elected Vice President of Nationwide Mutual Insurance Company and die corporate seal and his signature as Vice President were duly affixed and subscribed to the said instrument by the authority of said Board of Directors. IN WITNESS WIIEREOF, I have hereunto subscribed my name as Assistant Secretary, and affixed the corporate seal of said Company this day of 23439 This Power of Attorney expires ; . .•,� Assistant Secretary tat (oi oo>ao 09124108 ��,WIN ME ACORD CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE OF ID DATE(MM1DDNYYY) HARRY-2 03/01/06 PRODUCER THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE Winter-Dent 6 Company HOLDER,THIS CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AMEND,EXTEND OR Box 1046 ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES BELOW. £arson City MO 65102-1046 one: 573-634-2122 Fax:573-fi36-7500 INSURERS AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC0 INSURED INSURERA: Continental Naatam Inaunnca 10BU4 INSURER D. Barry Construction Company Inc INSURER C: Bob S Omega Barry P. O. BOX 387 INSURER O. California MO 65018 INSURER E: COVERAGES THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD INDICATED.NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT,TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WITH RESPECT 10 WHICH THIS CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PERTAIN,THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS.EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES.AGGREGATE LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS. LTR NSRD TYPE OF INSURANCE POLICY NUMBER PDOo LQ ICYY MmOP/Y DATE M10OrYY LMITB GENERAL LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE $1000000 • X COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY CWP2581123 08/11/05 08/11/06 PREMISES Ee�oca,ence S 100000 CLAIMS MADE OOCCUR MEDEXP(Anym,Person) $ 5000 X Per Job Aggregate PERSONAL 8 ADV INJURY $1000000 X Blanket Al GENERAL AGGREGATE $2000000 GEI7L AGGREGATE LIMIT APPLIES PER: PRODUCTS-COMPIOPAGO $2000000 POLICY JECf LOC AUTOMOBILE LIASILITV COMBINED SINGLE LIMIT • X ANY AUTO CWP25B3123 06/11/05 08111106 (Ee'e10enI) $1000000 ALLOWNEDAUTOS BODILY INJURY S SCHEDULED AUTOS (Per Person) X HIRED AUTOS BODILY INJURY X NON 4WNED AUTOS (PeracdoenU S PROPERTY DAMAGE S (Per acoeenN GARAGE LIABILITY AUTO ONLY.EA ACCIDENT S ANY AUTO OTHER THAN EA ACC S AUTO ONLY: AGO S EXCESSIUMBRELLA LIABILITY EACH OCCURRENCE S OCCUR CLAIMS MADE AGGREGATE $ S DEDUCTIBLE S RETENTION S S WORKERS COMPENSATION AND X TORY LIMITS ER A EMPLOYERBYLIASILITY WC2583789 08/11/05 08/11/06 E.L.EACH ACCIDENT $1000000 ANY PROPRIETORlPARTNEPJCXECUTIVE I ICERIMEMBER EXCLUDED? E.L.DISEASE•EA EMPLOYE 51000000 K yea,aecrtee DIVISION SPECIAL PROVISIONS OeIOw E.L.DISEASE-POLICY LIMIT S 1000000 OTHER DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATIONS I VEHICLES I EXCLUSIONS ADDED BY ENDORSEMENT I SPECIAL PROVISIONS Job: Fire Apparatus Storage Building, Project: #81000 CERTIFICATE HOLDER CANCELLATION CITYJ-6 SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE THE EXPIRATIO DATE THEREOF,THE ISSUING INSURER WALL ENDEAVOR TO MAIL 10 DAYS WRITTEN NOTICE TO THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER NAMED TO THE LEFT,BUT FAILURE TO DO BO SHALL City of Jefferson IMPOSE NO OBLIOATION OR LIABILITY OF ANY KIND UPON THE INSURER,ITS AGENTS OR Dept of Community Development 320 E McCarty Street REPRESENTATIVES. Jefferson City MO 65101 AUTHORIZED RE_ PRESENTATIVE _ ACORD 25(2001108) /� A, CL'-- ®ACORD CORPORATION 173E 1 IMPORTANT If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(les)must be endorsed.A statement , on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may ' require an endorsement.A statement on this certificate does not confer rights to the certificate holder In lieu of such endorsement(s). DISCLAIMER , The Certificate of Insurance on the reverse side of this form does not constitute a contract between , the issuing insurer(s), authorized representative or producer, and the certificate holder, nor does it affirmatively or negatively amend,extend or alter the coverage afforded by the policies listed thereon. ' 1 1 1 1 ACORD 25(2001/08) ' ,• GENERAL PROVISIONS ' FORWARD The following Articles GP-1 through GP49 are"General Provisions of the Contract',modified as set forth in the Special Provisions. GP-1 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ' It Is expressly understood and agreed that the Contract Documents comprise the Notice to Bidders, Instruction to Bidders,General Provisions,Special Provisions,Bid,Contract,Performance and One Year Guarantee Bond,Specifications,otherdocuments listed In the Table of Contenlsand bound InthlsVolume. Plans,all Addenda thereto Issued prior to the time of opening lids for the work,all of which are hereto attached, and other drawings, specifications, and engineering data which may be fumished by the Contractor and approved by the Owner,together with such additional drawings which may be furnished by ' the Engineer from time to time as are necessary to make clear and to define In greater detail the Intent of the specifications and drawings,are each and all component parts to the agreement governing theworkto be done and the materiels equipment to be fumished. All of these documents are hereby defined as the Contract Documents. ' The several parts of the Contract Documents are complementary,and what Is called for by any one she(( be as binding as If called for by all. The Intention of the Documents is to Include the furnishing of all ' materials,labor,tools,equipment and supplies necessary for constructing complete and ready to use the workspecifled. Materials or work described in words which so applied have a well known technicalortrade meaning shall be held to refer to such recognized standards. N The Contract shall be executed In the State and County where the Owner is located. Three(3)copies of the contract documents shall be prepared by the Contractor, each containing an exact copy of the Contractor's bit as submitted,the Performance Bond properly executed,a Statutory Bond where required, and the contract agreement signed by both parties thereto. These executed contract documents shall be filed as follows: One(1)with the City Clerk of the City of Jefferson One(1)with the Jefferson City Director of Community Development ' One(1)with the Contractor GP-2 DEFINITIONS Wherever any work or expression defined In this article, or pronoun used In Its stead, occurs in these contract documents,it shall have and k mutually understood to have the meaning herein given: 1. "Contract'or"Contract Documents"shall Include all of the documents enumerated in the previous article. 2. "Owner", "City",or words"Party of the First Part",shall mean the party entering into contract to ' secure performance of the work covered by this Contract and his or Its duly authorized officers or agents.Generally this will be the"City of Jefferson". 3. "Contractor"or the words"Party of the Second Parr shall mean the party entering Into contract for the performance of the work covered by this contract and his duly authorized agents or legal representatives. ' 4. "Subcontractors"shall mean and refer to a corporation,partnership,or Individual having a direct contract with the Contractor,for performing work at the Job site. '• 5. "Engineer"shall mean the authorized representative of the Director of Community Development, p.e.,the Engineering Division Director). FACITY-PROJECTS111000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.MD 1 1• ' 8. "Construction Representative"shall mean the engineering or technical assistantdulyauthorized by the Engineer limited to the particular duties entrusted to him or them as subsequently set forth herein. ' 7. "Date of Award of Contract' or words equivalent thereto, shall mean the date upon which the successful bidder's proposal Is accepted by the City. 8. "Day"or"days",unless herein otherwise expressly defined,shall mean a calendar day ordays of twenty-four hours each. 9. "The work" shall mean the work to be done and the equipment, supplies and materials to be furnished under this contract,unless some other meaning Is Indicated by the context. 10. "Plans"or"drawings"shall mean and include all drawings which may have been prepared by the ' Engineer as a basis for proposals, all drawings submitted by the successful bidder with his proposal and by the Contractor to the City,if and when approved by the Engineer,and ail drawings submitted by the City to the Contractor during the progress of the work,as provided for herein. 11. Whenever in these contract documents the words"as directed","as required","as perrnitled" "as allowed", or words or phrases of like Import are used,it shall be understood that the direction, requirement,permission,or allowance of the City and Engineer Is intended. 12. Similarly the words"approved","reasonable","suitable","acceptable","properiy,"setiafactory',or words of like effect and import, unless otherwise particularly specified herein, shall mean approved,reasonable,suitable,acceptable,proper or satisfactory in thejudgment of the Cilyend Engineer. 13. Whenever any statement Is made in these Contract Documents containing the expression"it Is understood and agreed"or any expression of the like Import,such expression means the mutual understanding and agreement of the Contractor and the City. 14. "Missouri Highway Specifications" shall mean the latest edition of the "Missouri Standard Specifications for Highway Construction"prepared by the Missouri Highway and Transportation Commission and published before the date of this contract. 15. "Consultant" shall mean the firm, company, individual, or its/his/her duly authorized representafdve(s) under separate agreement with the City of Jefferson that prepared the plans, specifications,and other such documents for the work covered by this contract. GP-3 THE CONTRACTOR It Is understood and agreed that the Contractor, has by careful examination satisfied himself as to the nature and location of the work,the conformation of the ground,the character,quality and quantity of the materialsto be encountered,the character of the equipment and facilities needed praliminaryto and during the prosecution of the work,the general local conditions,and all other matters which can in any way affect the work under this Contract. No verbal agreement or conversation with any officer,agent or employee of the City, either before or after the execution of this contract, shall affect or modify any of the terms or obligations herein contained. ' The relation of the Contractor to the City shall be that of an Independent contractor. • GP-4 THE ENGINEER ' The Engineer shall be the Cl ys representative during the construction period and he shall observe the FACITY•PROJECTSMODD.FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD 1• work in process on behalf of the City by a series of periodic visits to the job site. He shall have authority to act on behalf of the City. The Engineer assumes no direction of employees of the Contractor or subcontractors and no supervision of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The Engineer's sole responsibility during construction is to the City to endeavor to protect defects and deficiencies in the work. Any plan or method of work suggested by the Engineer, or other representative of the City, to the Contractor,but not specified or required,If adopted or followed by the Contractor in whole or in part,shall be used at the risk and responsibility of the Contractor;and the Engineer and the City will assume no responsibility therefore. OP-5 BOND Coincident with the execution of the Contract,the Contractor shall furnish a good and sufficient surety bond In the full amount of the contract sum. This surety bond,executed by the Contractor to the City,shall be a ' guarantee: (a) for the faithful performance and completion of the work In strict accordance with the terms and intent of the contract documents; (b) the payment of all bills and obligations arising from this contract which might in any manner become a claim against the City; (c) for the payment to the City of all sums due or which may become due by the terms of the contract,as well as by reason of any violation thereof by the Contractor; and for a period of one year from and Immediately following the acceptance of the completed project bythe City,the payment to the City of all damage loss and expense which may or curto the City by reason of defective materials used,or by reason of defective or Improper workmanship done,In ' the furnishing of materials,labor,and equipment In the performance of the said contract. All provisions of the bond shall be complete and In full accordance with statutory requirements. The bond shall be executed with the property sureties through a company licensed and qualified to operate in the N state and approved by the City. Bond shall be signed by an agent resident in the state and date of bond shall be the date of execution of the contract. ' If at any time during the continuance of the contract the surety on the Contractor's bond becomes Irresponsible,the City shall have the right to require additional and sufficient sureties which the Contractor shall furnish to the satisfaction of the City within ten(10)days after notice to do so. In default thereof,the contract may be suspended, all payments or money due the Contractor withheld, and the contract ' completed as hereinafter provided. GP4 INSURANCE ' GP-6.1 GENERAL: The Contractor shall secure,pay for and maintain during the life of the Contract,Insurance of such types and amounts as necessary to protect himself, and the City,against all hazards enumerated herein. All policies shall be in the amounts,form and companies satisfactory to the City. ' The insuring company shall deliver to the City certificates of all Insurance required,signed byanauthorized representative and stating that all provisions of the following specified requirements are complied with. All certificates of Insurance required herein shall state that ten(10)days written notice will be given to the ' City before the policy Is canceled or changed. All certifications of Insurance shall be delivered to the City prior to the time that any operations under this contract are started. ' All of sold Contractor's certificates of Insurance shall be written in an Insurance company authorized to do business in the State of Missouri. • GP-6.2 BODILY INJURY LIABIUTY 6 PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE FACITY•PROJECTS01 ODD-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 1• (1) Bodily Injury Uability Insurance coverage providing limits for bodily Injuries,including death,of not less then$2,000,000 per person and$300,000 per occurrence. ' (2) Property Damage Uabilhy Insurance coverage for limits of not less than$2,000,000 per one occurrence nor less than$2,000,000 aggregate to limit for the policy year. OP-6.3 CONTRACTOR'S PROTECTIVE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY 6 PROTECTIVE PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY INSURANCE, (COVERING OPERATIONS OF SUBCONTRACTORS) ' (1) Contractors contingent policy providing limits of at least$300,000 per person and $2,000,000 per occurrence for bodhy Injury or death. ' (2) Property Damage Uablft providing limb of at least$2,000,000 per occurrence and $2,000,000 aggregate. OP4A CONTRACTUAL(.(ABILITY Property Damage coverage with$2,000,000 aggregate limit. GP4.5 OWNER'S PROTECTIVE LIABILITY AND PROPERTY DAMAGE INSURANCE ' The Contractor shall purchase and maintain Owners Protective Uability and Property Damage Insurance issued in the name of the Owner and the Engineer as will protect both against any and all dalrns M might arise as a result of the operations of the Contractor or his subcontractors in fulfilling this contract. The minimum amount of such Insurance shall be the same as required for Bodily Injury Uabillty and N Property Damage Uablllty Insurance. This policy shall be filed with the Owner and a copy filed with the Engineer. GP4.6 EXCLUSIONS ' The above requirements GP-8.2,0,3,6.5 for property damage liability shall contain no exclusion relative to: (1) Blasting or explosion. (Consult Technical Specifications Part I for possible deletion of this requirement ' on subject project.) (2) Injury ordestruction of property below the surface of the ground,such as wires,condub,pipes,makes, sewers,etc.,caused by the Contractor's operations. (3) The collapse of,or structural injury to,any building or structure on or adjacent to the Chys premises,or Injury to or destruction of property resulting therefrom,caused by the removal of other buildings,structures, or supports,or by excavations below the surface of the ground. ' OP-6.7 AUTOMOBILE BODILY INJURY LIABILITY 6 AUTOMOBILE PROPERTY DAMAGE LIABILITY DURANCE ' Contractor shall carry in his name,additional assured clauses protecting City,Liability Insurance with Bodily Injury or Death Umhs of not less than$300,000 per person and$2,000,000 per occurrence,and property ' damage limits of not less than$300,000 with hired car and non-owned vehicle coverage or separate polity carrying similar limits. • The above Is to cover the use of automobiles and trucks on and off the she of the project. 1 FACITY•PROJECTSWINX)•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINMCONTRACT DOCUMENTSCONTRACT.WPD 1 1 '• OP4.8 EMPLOYER'S UABIUTY AND WORKMEN'S COMPENSATION Employer's and Workmen's Compensation Insurance as will protect him against any and all claims resulting from Injuries to and death of workman engaged In work under this contract,and in addition the Contractor shall carry occupational disease coverage with statutory limits,and Employer's Uabiiflywith a limit of$3D0,000 per person. The"Ali State"endorsement shall be included. In case any class of employees is not protected under the Workmen's Compensation Statute, the Contrectorshall provide and cause such contractor to provide adequate employer's liability coverage aswill protect him against any claims resulting from Injuries to and death of workmen engaged in work underthis contract. OP-6.9 MISTALLATION FLOATER INSURANCE ' This Insurance shall Insure and protect the Contractor and the City from all insurable risks of physical loss or damage to materiels and equipment, not otherwise covered under Builder's Risk Insurance,when In warehouses or storage areas,during Installation,during testing and until the workfsacceptad. Itshall be ct the"Ali Risks"type,with coverage designed for the circumstances which may occur in the particular work Included in this contract. The coverage shall be for an amount not less than the value of the work at completion, tees the value of the material and equipment Insured under Bulider's Risk Insurance. The ' value shell Include the aggregate value of the City-furnished equipment and materials to be erected or Installed by the Contractor not otherwise insured under Builder's Risk insurance. ' Installation Floater Insurance shall also provide for losses,If any,to be adjusted with and made payable to the Contractor and the City as their Interests may appear. If the aggregate value of the Clty-fumished and Contractor-fumished equipment Is less than$10,000such equipment may be covered under Builder's Risk Insurance, and if so covered, this Installation Floater Insurance may be omitted. ' GP4.10 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR OTHER LOSSES For the considerations In this agreement heretofore stated,in addition to Contractor's other obligations,the Contractor assumes full responsibility for all loss or damage from any cause whatsoever to any tools ' owned by the mechanics, any tool machinery, equipment, or motor vehicles awned or rented by the Contractor's, his agents, sub-contractors, material men or his or their employees; to sheds or other temporary structures, scaffolding and staging, protective fences, bridges and sidewalk hooks. The Contractor shall also assume responsibility for all loss or damage caused by,arising out of or Incident to larceny,theft,or any cause whatsoever(except as herefnbefore provided)to the structure on which the work of this contract and any modifications, alterations, enlargements thereto, IS to be done, and to materials and labor connected or to be used as a part of the permanent materials,and supplies necessary to the work. OR8.11 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY ON DAMAGES R CLAIMS INDEMNIFYING CITY The Contractor shall indemnity and save harmless the City and Engineer and their officers and agents,of and from all losses,damages,costs,expenses,judgments,or decrees whatever arising out of action or suit ' that may be brought against the City or Engineer or any officer or agent of elthar of them,for or on account of the failure,omission,or neglect of the Contractor to do and perform any of the covenants,acts,matters, or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed,or for the Injury,death or damage caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their agents,or in connection with arty claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors,workmen,material • men, or suppliers of machinery and parts thereof,equipment, power tools and supplies Incurred In the fulfillment of this contract. FACITY-PROJECTS181000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 '• OP4.12 NOTIFICATION IN EVENT OF LIABILITY OR DAMAGE ' Upon the occurrence of any event, the liability for which is herein assumed, the Contractor agrees to forthwith notify the City, In writing such happening,which notice shall forthwith give the details as to the happening,the cause as far as can be ascertained,the estimate of loss or damage done,the names of witnesses,if any,and stating the amount of any claim. OP-7 ASSIGNMENT OF CONTRACT The Contractor shall not assign or transfer this contract nor sublet it as a whole,without the written consent of the City and of the Surety on the Contractor's bond. Such consent of Surety, together with copy of assignment,shall be filed with the City. No assignment,transfer or subletting,even though consented to, ' shall relieve the Contractor of his liabilities under this contract. Should any assignee fall to perform the work undertaken by him In a satisfactory manner,the City may at his option annul and terminate Assignee's contract. ' OP-s SUBCONTRACTS,PRINCIPAL MATERIALS R EQUIPMENT Prior to the award of the contract, the Contractor shall submit for approval of the CRY a list of ' subcontractors and the sources of the princlpal hems of materials and equlpmentwhk h he proposes to use In the construction of the project. The Contractor agrees that he is as fully responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of his ' subcontractors and of person either directly or indirectly employed by them as he Is for the acts and ombelons or persons directly employed by him. Any notices to the ContractDrshall be cwroidered as notice to any affected subcontractors. N Nothing contained in the Contract Documents shall create any contractual relation between any subcontractor and the City. No officer, agent or employee of the City, including the Engineer, shall have any power or authority whatsoever to bind the City or Incur any obligation In Its behalf to any subcontractor,material supplier or other person in any manner whatsoever. ' 61114 OTHER CONTRACTS The City reserves the right to let other contracts in connection with this work. The Contractor shall afford ' other contractors reasonable opportunity for the Introduction and storage of their materials and the execution of their work,and shall properly connect and coordinate his work with theirs. If any part of the Contractor's work depends for proper execution or results on the work of any other ' contractor,the Contractor shall Inspect and promptly report to the Engineer any defect In such work that renders It unsuitable for such proper execution and results. ' His failure so to Inspect and report all constitute an acceptance of the other contractor's work as fit and proper for the reception of his work,except as to defects which may develop In the other contractor's work after the execution of his work. ' Wherever work being done by the City's forces or by other contractors is contiguous to work covered by this Contract,the respective rights of the various interests Involved shall be established bythe Engineer,In order to secure the completion of the various portions of the work in general harmony. ' GP-10 LEGAL RESTRICTIONS,PERMITS AND REGULATIONS • The Contractor shell procure at his own expense all necessary licenses and permits of a temporary nature ' and shall give due and adequate notice to those in control of all properties which may be affected by his FACITY•PROJECTS1e1000•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 ,• operations. Rights-of-way and easements for permanent structures or permanent changes in existing facilities shall be provided by the City unless otherwise specified. The Contractor shall give all notices and comply with all laws,ordinances,rules and regulations bearing on the conduct of the work as drawn or specified. ' OP41 ROYALTIES AND PATENTS It is agreed that all royalties for patents or patent claims, Infringement whether such patents are for processes or devices,that might be Involved In the construction or use of the work,shall be included In the contract amount and the Contractor shall satisfy all demands that may be made at any time for such and shall be liable for any damages or claims for patent Infringements,and the Contractor shall at his own expense,defend any and all suits or proceedings that may be Instituted at any time against the City for Infringement or alleged infringement of any patent or patents involved In the work,and In case of an award of damages,the said Contractor shall pay such award;final payment to the Contractor bythe City will not be made while any such suits or claims remain unsettled. ' OP42 SCOPE AND INTENT OF SPECIFICATIONS AND PLANS OP-12.1 GENERAL These Specificatlons and Project Plans are Intended to supplement, but not necessarily duplicate each other,and together constitute one complete set of Specifications and Plansso thatanywork exhibited in the one and not In the other,shall be executed just as if it has been set forth in both,in order that the work shall be completed according to the complete design of the Engineer. Should anything be omitted from the Specifications and Plans which Is necessaryto a clear understanding of the work,or should it appear various Instructions are in conflict,then the Contractor shall secure written N instructions from the Engineer before proceeding with the construction affected by such omissions or discrepancies. It Is understood and agreed that the work shall be performed and completed according to the true spirt,meaning and Intent of the contract,specifications and plans. ' OP-12.2 FIGURED DIMENSIONS TO GOVERN Dimensions and elevations shown on the plans shall be accurately followed even though they differ from scaled measurements. No work shown on the plans,the dimensions of which are not Indicated shall be executed until the required dimensions have been obtained from the Engineer. ' GP 42.3 CONTRACTOR TO CHECK PLANS AND SCHEDULES The Contractor shall check all dimensions,elevations and quantities shown on the plans,and schedules given to him by the Engineer,and shall notify the Engineer of any discrepancy between the plans and the conditions on the ground,or any error or omission In plans,or in the layout as given by stakes,points,or Instructions,which he may discover in the course of the work. The Contractor will not be allowed to take advantage of any error or omission in the plans or contract documents,as full instructions will be furnished ' by the Engineer should such error or omission be discovered, and the Contractor shall carry out such Instructions as If originally specified. The apparentsilence of the Plans and Specifications alto any detail orthe apparent omission fromthem of a detailed description concerning any point, shall be regarded as meaning that only the best general practices,as accepted by the particular trades or Industries Involved,shall be used. ' OP42A STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS • Reference to standard specifications of any technical society,organization or association,or to codes of local or state authorities, shall mean the latest standard, code, specification, or tentative specification ' adopted and published at the date of taking bids,unless specifically stated otherwise. FACITY•PROJECTSMODD-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD 1 '• GP43 CONSTRUCTION REPRESENTATIVE AT PROJECT The City may appoint or employ such "Construction Representatve" as the City may deem proper,to observe the work performed under this Contract, to the end that said work Is performed, In substantial accordance with the plans and specifications therefor. The Project Representative assumes no direction of employees of the Contrectoror Subcontractors and no supervision of the construction activities or responsibility for their safety. The sole duty of the Project 1 Representative during the construction is to the City to endeavorto protect against defects and deficiencies In the work. The Contractorshall regard and obey the directions and Instructions of the Construction Representative so appointed,when the some are consistent with the obligations of this contract and the spedficatons therefor, provided,however,that should the Contractor object to any order given bythe Construction Representative, the Contractor may make written appeal to the Engineer for his decision. ' The Construction Representative and other properly authorized representatives of the Cftyshall be free at all times to perform their duties, an intimidation or attempted Intimidation of any one of them by the Contractor or by any of his employees shall be sufficient reason, If the City so decides, to annul the ' contract. Such construction representation shall not relieve the Contractor from any obligation to perform saki work strictly in accordance with the plans and specifications or any modifications thereof as herein provided,and work notso constructed shall be removed and made good bythe Contractor at his own expense,and free of all expense to the City,whenever so ordered by the Engineer,without referenceto anyprevbus oversight In observation of work. Any defective material or workmanship may be rejected bythe Engineer at any time N before the final acceptance of the work,even though the same may have been previously overlooked and estimated for payment. The Construction Representative shall have no authority to permit any deviation from the plans and specifications except on written order from the Engineer,and the Contractor will be liable for any deviation except on such written order. ' All condemned work shall be promptly taken out and replaced by satisfactory work,and all condemned materials shall be promptly removed from the vicinity of the work. Should the Contractor fail or refuse to comply with Instructions In this respect the City may,upon certification by the Engineer,withhold payment or proceed to terminate contracts as herein provided. Reexamination of questioned work may be ordered by the Engineer,and If so ordered the work must be uncovered by the Contractor. If such work be done in accordance with the Contract Documents,the City shall pay the cost of reexamination and replacement. If such work be found not In accordance with the Contract Documents,the Contractor shall pay such cost,unless he shall show that defectin the work was caused by another contractor of the City and In that event the City shall pay such cost. ' The Contractor shall furnish samples of testing purposes of any material required by the Engineer,and shall famish any Information required concerning the nature or source of any material which he proposes to use. OP44 LINES AND GRADES ' The Department of Community Development will set construction stakes establishing lines,scopes,and continuous profile grade in road work, and center-Ilne and bench marks for culvert work, and • appurtenances as may be deemed necessary, and will furnish the Contractor, with all necessary Information relating to lines, slopes, and grades, to lay out the work correctly. The Contractor shall ' maintain these lines,grades,and bench marks and use them to lay out the work he into perform underthis FACITY•PROJECTS01000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE 6UILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.WPD 1 '• contract. The Contractor shall notify the Department of Community Development not less than 48 hours before stakes are required. No claims shall be made because of delays If the contractors fall to give such notice, The Contractor shall carefully preserve stakes and bench marks. If such stakes and bench mark become damaged,lost,displaced,or removed by the Contractor,they shall be reset at his expense and deducted from the payment for the work. Any work done without being properly located and established by base lines,offset stakes,bench marks,or other basic reference points checked by the Construction Representative may be ordered removed and replaced at the Contractor's expense. GP-15 CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITY FOR MATERIALS ' The Contractor shall be responsible for the condition of all materials furnished by him,and he shall replace at his own cost and expense any and all such material found to be defective In design or manufacture,or which has been damaged after delivery. This includes the furnishing of all materials and labor required for ' replacement of any installed materials which is found to be defective at any time prior to the expiration of one year from the date of final payment. The manufacturer of pipe for use on this project shall certify in writing to the City that all materials furnished ' for use in this project do conform to these specifications. Whenever standard tests are conducted,he shall forward a copy of the test results to the City. GP49 WATER N All water required for and In connection with the work to be performed shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole cost and expense. ' GP-17 POWER All power for lighting, operation of the Contractor's plant or equipment or for any other use by the Contractor,shall be provided by the Contractor at his sole cost and expense. ' GP46 SUPERINTENDENCE AND WORKMANSHIP The Contractor shall keep on his work,during its progress,a competent superintendent and any necessary ' assistants. The superintendent Shall represent the Contractor in his absence and all directions given to him shall be as binding as If given to the Contractor. The Contractor shall provide proper tools and equipment and the services of all workmen, mechanics, ' tradesmen,and other employees necessary in the construction and execution of the work contemplated and outlined herein. The employees of the Contractor shall be competent and willing to perform satisfactorily the work required of them. Any employee who is disorderly,intemperate or Incompetent or who neglects or refuses to perform his work in a satisfactorily manner,shall be promptly discharged. ' It Is called particularly to the Contractor's attention that only first class workmanship will be acceptable. OP49 MAINTENANCE OF TRAFFIC ' Whenever any street is closed,the Police Department,Fire Department,and Ambulance Services shall be notified prior to the closing. When a potion of the project Is closed to through traffic,the Contractor shall provide proper barricades and shall mark a detour route around the section of the project If applicable.The ' route of all detours shall be approved by the Director of Community Development. All detour signing shall conform to the latest edition of the"Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices". • Throughout the project,wherever homes are served directly from a street or portion of a street which is to ' be reconstructed under this project,the Contractor shall make every effort to provide access to each home FACITY-PROJECTS191000-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE SUILOINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD 1 ,• every night. This work shell be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment will be made for ft. ' GP-20 BARRICADES AND LIGHTS All streets,roads,highways,and other public thoroughfares which are closed to traffic shall be protected by means of effective barricades on which shalt be placed acceptable warning signs. Barricades shall be located at the nearest intersecting public highway or street on each side of the blocked section. All open trenches and other excavations shall be provided with suitable barriers,signs,and lights to the extent that adequate protection Is provided to the public. Obstructions, such as material plies and equipment,shall be provided with similar warning signs and lights. All barricades and obstructions shall be illuminated by means of warning lights at night. All lights used for this purpose shall be kept burning from sunset to sunrise. Materials stored upon or alongside public streets ' and highways shall be so placed,and the work at all tines shall be so conducted,asto causethe minknurn obstruction and inconvenience to the traveling public. All barricades,signs,lights and other protective devices shall be installed and maintained In confomdlywlth applicable statutory requirements,and In conformance with the Manuel of Uniform Traffic Control Devices. All necessary barricades, signs, lights and other protective devices will be furnished, installed and ' maintained by the Contractor. This work shall be subsidiary to the construction and no direct payment will be made for k. GP-21 EXISTING UNDERGROUND INSTALLATIONS AND STRUCTURES ' Pipe Ones and other existing underground installations and structures In the vIcIW of the work to be done hereunder are indicated on the plans according to the best Information available to the City. The CRydoes N not guarantee the accuracy of such Information. The Contractor shall make every effort to locate all underground pipe lines, conduits and structures by contacting owners of underground utilities and by prospecting in advance of the excavation. ' Any delays to the Contractor caused by pipe Ones or other underground structures or obstructions not shown bythe plans,orfound in locations differentthen those Indicated,shall not constitute a claim forexha work,additional payment or damages. No payment will be made to the Contractor for locating and protecting utilities and cooperating with their owners,and any damages caused to the utilities by the Contractor's negligence shall be repaired entirety at the Contractor's expense. ' Utilities,other than sanitary sewers and water me Ins,which,in the opinion of the Engineer,must be moved will be moved by the utility company at no cost to the Contractor. Sanitary sewers which must be moved shall be re-lakt by the Contractor and paid for at the prices bid. Only sewers which must be moved because of direct conflict with the storm sewer conduit will be paid for in this manner. Sewers damaged by excavation but not Indirect conflict with the storm sewer will be repaired at the Contractor's expense. ' GP-22 PROTECTION OF WORK AND PROPERTY The Contractor shall be accountable for any damages resulting from his operations. He shall be fully responsible for the protection of all persons including members of the public,employees of the City and ' employees of other contractors or subcontractors and all public and private property including structures, sewers and utilities above and below ground,along,beneath,above,across or near the she or sties of the work, or other persons or property which are in any manner affected by the prosecution of the work. 1 The Contractor shall furnish and maintain all necessary safety equipment such as barters,signs,warning . lights and guards as required to provide adequate protection or persons and property. ' The Contractor shall give reasonable notice to the owner or owners of public or private propertyand Willies FACITY-PROJECTSV OW-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING ICONTRACTDOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD when such property is liable to Injury or damage through the performance of the work,and shall make all necessary arrangements with such owner or owners relative to the removal and replacement or protection ' of such property or utilities. In an emergency affecting the safety of life or of the work or of adjoining property,the Contractor,without ' special Instruction or authorization,Is hereby permitted to act at his discretion to prevent such threatened loss or Injury,and he shall so act. Any compensation,claimed by the Contractor on account of emergency work,shall be determined by agreement or arbitration. ' The Contractor agrees to hold the City harmless from any and all loss or damages arising out of jurisdictional labor disputes or other labor troubles of any kind that may occur during the construction or performance of this contract. OP-29 GUARANTEE OF MATERIALS AND WORKMANSHIP The Contractor hereby guarantees the work in connection with this contract against faulty materials or poor workmanship during the period of one(1)year after the date of completion of the contract. GP-24 NO WAIVER OF RIGHTS Neither observation of work by the City or any of their officials,employees,or agents,nor any order by the City for payment of money,or any payment for,or acceptance of,the whole or any part of the work by the ' City,nor any extension of time,nor any possession taken by the City or Its employees,shall operate as a waiver of any provision of this contract,or of any power herein reserved to the City,or any righttodamages herein provided, nor shall any waiver of any breach in this contract be held to be a waiver of any other or subsequent breach. NOP-25 USE OF COMPLETED PORTIONS If desired by the City,portions of the work may be placed In service when completed or partially completed and the Contractor shall give proper access to the work for this purpose;but such use and operation shall not constitute an acceptance of the work, and the Contractor shall be liable for defects due to faulty construction until the entire work under this Contract Is finally accepted and for the guarantee period thereafter. ' GP-28 ADDITIONAL.OMITTED.OR CHANGED WORK The Owner,without Invalidating the Contract,may order additional work to be done In connection with the Contract or may after or deduct from the work,the Contract sum to be adjusted accordingly. All such work ' shall be executed to the same standards of workmanship and performance as though therein included. The Engineer shell have authority to make minor changes In the work, not involving cost, and not Inconsistent with the purposes of the work. Except for adjustments of estimated quantities for unit price work or materials to conform to actual pay quantities therefor as may be provided for in the Special Conditions, all changes and alterations In the ' terms or scope of the Contract shall be made under the authority of duly executed change orders issued and signed by the Owner and accepted and signed by the Contractor. Ail work increasing the cost shall be done as authorized by the Owner and ordered In writing by the Engineer, which order shall state the ' location,character,amount,and method of compensation. No additional or changed work shall be made unless in pursuance of such written order by the Engineer,and no claim for an addition to the Contractsum • shall be valid unless so ordered. ' If the modification or alteration Increases the amount of work to be done,and the added work or any part F,ICITY•PROJECTSWOM-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE 9UILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD thereof is of a type and character which can be properly and fairly classified under one or more unit price 16 Rams of the Proposal, then such added work or pert thereof shall be paid for according to the amount actually done and at the applicable unit price or prices therefor. Otherwise,such work shall be paid for as "Extra Work"as hereinafter provided In this Article GP-26. ' If the modification or alteration decreases the amount of work to be done, such decrease shall not constitute the basis for a claim for damages or anticipated profits on work affected by such decrease. Where the value of omitted work Is not covered by applicable unit prices,the Engineer shall determine on an equitable basis the amount of: ' 1. Credit due the Owner for Contract work not done as a result of an authorized change, 2. Allowance to the Contractor for any actual loss Incurred In connection with the purchase,delivery and subsequent disposal of materials or equipment required for use on the work planned and which could not be used In any part of the work as actually built. ' 3. Any other adjustment of the Contract amount where the method to be used In making such adjustments is not clearly defined in the contract documents. Statements for extra work shell be rendered by the Contractor not later than fifteen (15)days after the ' completion of each assignment of extra work and if found correct will be approved by the Engineer and submitted for payment with the next regular monthly estimate, The Owner reserves the right to contract with any person or firm other than the Contractor for any or all extra work. The Contractor's attention Is especially called to the factthat he shall be entltiedto no claim for damages or anticipated profits on any portion of the work that may be omitted. NExtra Work: (a) The term "Extra Work" shall be understood to mean and Include all work that may be required to ' accomplish any change or alteration in or addition to the work shown by the Plans or reasonablyimplied by the Specifications and not covered by the Contract proposal items and which Is not otherwise provided under this Article GP-26. ' (b) The Contractor shall perform all extra work under the direction of the Engineer when authorized by the Owner. The compensation to be paid the Contractor for performing extra work shall be determined by one or more of the following methods: 1, Method A: By agreed unit price 2. Method 8: By agreed lump sum ' 3. Method C: If neither Method A or B can be agreed upon before the work Is started,then the work shall be by force account as per Section 108, Measurement and Payment, of the Missouri Standard Specification for Highway Construction,as published by the Missouri State Highway and Transportation Commission. OP-27 SUSPENWN OF WORK ' The Owner may at any time suspend the work, or any part thereof by giving ten (10)days notice to the Contractor in writing. The work shall be resumed by the Contractor within ten(10)days after the date fixed ' in the written notice from the Owner to the Contractor to do so, • But If the work, or any part thereof,shall be stopped by the notice In writing aforesaid,and If the Owner does not give notice in writing to the Contractor to resume within a reasonable period of time,then the Contractor may abandon that pardon of the work so suspended and he will be entitled tothe estimates and F:ICITY•PROJECTSWD00-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD ,• payments for all work done on the portions abandoned,If any. GP-28 OWNER'S RIGHT TO DO WORK If the Contractor should neglect to prosecute the work properly or fail to perform any provision of this contract,the Owner,after ten(10)days written notice to the Contractor,may,without prejudice to anyother ' remedy he may have, make good such deficiencies and may deduct the cost thereof from the payment then or thereafter due the Contractor. OP-29 OWNER'S RIGHT TO TERMINATE CONTRACT if the Contractor should be adjudged a bankrupt,or If he should make a general assignment for the benefit of his creditors,or if a receiver should be appointed on account of his insolvency,orIf he should persistently ' or repeatedly refuse or should tali,except in cases for which extension of tlrne is provided,to supply enough properly skilled workmen or proper materials, or If he should fall to make prompt payment to subcontractors or for material or labor,or persistently disregard laws,ordinances or the Instructions of the ' Engineer,or otherwise be guilty of a substantial violation of any provision of the Contract,then the Owner may,without prejudice to any other right or remedy and after giving the Contractor ftve (5)days written notice, terminate the employment of the Contractor and take possession of the premises and of all materials,tools,and appliances thereon and finish the work by whatever method he may deem expedient. ' In such case, no further payment will be made the Contractor unfit the work is finished. If the unpaid balance of the contract price shall exceed the expense of finishing the work,Including compensation for ' additional managerial and administrative services,such expenses shall be paid to the Contractor. If such expense shall exceed such unpaid balance,the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner. GP-30 CONTRACTOR'S RIGHT TO STOP WORK OR TER MINIM CONTRACT NIf the work should be stopped under an order of any court,or other public authority,for a period of three months,through no act or fault of the Contractor or of anyone employed by him,then the Contractor may, ' upon five (5)days written notice to the Owner and the Engineer,stop work or terminate his contract and recover from the Owner payment for all work executed and any toss sustained upon any plant or materials and reasonable proftt and damages. OP-31 LOSSES FROM NATURAL CAUSES All loss or damage arising out of the nature of the work to be done,of from the action of the elements,or ' from floods or overflows,or from ground water,or from any unusual obstruction of difficulty,or any other natural or existing circumstances either known or unforeseen, which may be encountered In the prosecution of the said work,shall be sustained and bome by the Contractor at his own cost and expense. ' GP-32 SUNDAY,HOLIDAY AND NIGHT WORK No work shell be done between the hours of 8:00 p.m.and 7:00 a.m.,nor on Sundays or legal holidays, without the written approval of the City. However, work necessary in case of emergencies or for the protection of equipment or finished work may be done without the CWs approval. Night work may be established by the Contractor as a regular procedure with the written permission of the ' City;such permission however, may be revoked at any time by the City If the Contractor falls to maintain adequate equipment and supervision for the proper prosecution and control of the work at night. OP-33 UNFAVORABLE ONBTRUCTION CONDITIONS '• During unfavorable weather,wet ground, or other suitable construction conditions,the Contractor shall confine his operations to work which will not be affected adversely thereby. No portion of the work shall be ' constructed under conditions which would affect adversely the quality or efficiency thereof,unless special FACITY•PROJECTSMODO•FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE 9UILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTS%cONTRACT.WPD '• means or precautions are taken by the Contractor to perform the work In a proper and satisfactory manner. OP-34 MATERIALS AND-EQUIPMENT Unless specifically provided otherwise in each case,all materials and equipment furnished for permanent Installation In the worksholl be new,unused,and undamaged when installed or otherwise incorporation in the work. No such material or equipment shall be used by the Contractor for any purpose other than that Intended or specified, unless such use is specifically authorized by the Engineer in each case. OP-38 DEFENSE OF SUITS In case any action at law orsuft in equity is brought against the City or any officer or agent of them fororon account of the failure,omission,or neglect of the Contractor to do and perform any of the covenants,acts, matters,or things by this contract undertaken to be done or performed,or for the injury or damage caused by the negligence or alleged negligence of the Contractor or his subcontractors or his or their agents,or In connection with any claim or claims based on the lawful demands of subcontractors,workmen,materiel men,or suppliers of machinery and parts thereof,equipment,power tools, and supplies incurred in the fulfillment of this contract,the Contractor shall indemnify and save harmless the City and their otlicersond agents,of and from all losses,damages,costs,expenses,judgments,or decrees whatever arising out of such action or SUN that may be brought as aforesaid. OP-36 CHANGE ORDER ' Any changes or additions to the scope of work shall be through a written order from the Engineer to the Contractor directing such changes In the work as made necessary or desirable by unforeseen conditions or events discovered or occurring during the progress of the work. 4212-37 CONTRACT TIME The time for the completion of the work Is specified and it is an essential part of the contract. The ' Contractor will not be entitled to any extension of contract time because of unsuitable weather condition unless suspension of the work for such conditions was authorized in writing by the Engineer. If the time for the completion of the work is based upon working days, this time will be specified in the ' contract. A working day Is defined as any day when, In the judgment of the Engineer,soil and weather conditions are such as would permit any then major operation of the project for six(S)hours oroverunless other unavoidable conditions prevent the Contractor's operation. if conditions are such as to stop work In ' less than slx(8)hours,the day will not be counted as a working day. No working days will be counted from December 15 to March 15, both dates inclusive. Saturdays, Sundays,and City holidays will not be counted as working days any time during the year. GP-38 CONTRACT TIME EXTENSION The Engineer may make allowance for time lost due to causes which he deemajustificatlon forextension of ' contract time, If the Contractor claims an extension of contract time on the grounds that he Is unable to work due to causes beyond his control,he shell state his reasons in writing,furnish proof to establish his claim and state the approximate number of days he estimates he will be delayed. Notice of Intention to claim an extension of contract time on the above grounds shall be filed with the Engineer at the time the cause or causes occur and the claim shall be flied In writing within 30 days after the claimed cause for the delay has ceased to exist, ' OP-39 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES MAGES • Time Is an essential element of the contract and it is therefore Important that the work be pressed ' vigorously to completion. Should the Contractor or in case of default the surety fail to complete the work FACITY•PROJECTSW OOD-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD '• within the time specified In the contract,or within such extra time as maybe allowed in the mannerset out In the preceding sections,a deduction of an amount as set out in the contract will be made for each day and ' every calendardaythatsuch contract remains uncompleted afterthe time allowed forthe completion.The said amount set out In the proposal Is hereby agreed upon,not as a penalty but as liquidated damages for loss to the City and the public,after the expiration of the time stipulated in the contract,and will be deducted from any moneyduethe Contractor underthe contract,and the Contractor and hlssuretyshall be Noble for any and all liquidated damages. Permitting the Contractor to continue and finish the work or any part of it after the expiration of the specified time, or after any extension of the time,shall in no way operate as a waiver on the part of the City or any of Its rights under the contract. OP-40 ' MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT (a) BASH FOR PAYMENT ' Contractor will be paid for quantities actually constructed or performed as determined by field measurement (except as may be hereinafter provided) at the unit price bid for the items listed in the ' schedule of the Bid or for such extra work as maybe authorized and approved by the Engineer. The cost of Incidental work not listed In the schedule of the laid but necessary for the completion of the project shall be included In bid items. ' (b) DEDUCTIONS FOR UNCORRECTED WORK If the Engineer deems it expedient not to correct work that has been damaged or that was not done in ' accordance with the Contract,an equitable deduction from the Contract price shall be made therefore. (c) LUMP SUM ITEMS ' Payment for each lump sum Kom shall be at the lump sum bid for the item,complete in place,and shall Include the costs of all labor,materials,tools,and equipment to construct the item as described herein and to the limits shown on the plane, (d) PARTIAL PAYMENT ' Partial payment will be made on a monthly basis. The payment shall be based on the work that has been found generally acceptable under the contract by the Engineer or inspector. Aretalnerequaltot0%ofthe amount of work completed to date shall be withheld. ' (e) ACCEPTANCE AND FINAL PAYMENT Upon receipt of written notice that the work is ready for final inspection and acceptance,the Engineer will promptly make such Inspection, and when he finds the work acceptable under the Contract and the Contract fully performed he will promptly Issue a final certificate,over his own signature,stating that the work required by this contract has been completed and Is acceptable by him under the terms and conditions thereof, and the entire balance found to be due the Contractor, Including the retained ' percentage,shall be paid to the Contractor by the City of Jefferson within thirty(30)days after the date of sold final certificate. (I) AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE Monies due to the Contractor will not be delivered to the Contractor without presentation to the Department of Community Development an Affidavit of Compliance with Prevailing Wage Law on prescribed form ' attached to the back of these contract documents. F:ICITY-PROJECTSISIeDO-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDINGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT.WPD 1 '• OP41 RELEASE OF LIABILITY The acceptance by the Contractor of the last payment shall operate as and shall be a release to the Owner and every officer and agent thereof, from all claims and liability to the Contractor for anything done or furnished for,or relating to the work,or for any act or neglect of the Owner or of any person relating to or affecting the work. OP42 CERTIFICATIONS OP-42.1 All suppliers of materials such as drainage pipe or handrail and all suppliers of asphaltic concrete or portland cement concrete mixtures shall certify In writing that the product as supplied conforms fully with these specifications. Such certification shall be delivered In triplicate to the Department of Community Development at least 24 hours before the product Is to be used on the project. OP42.2 The City, at its option, may perform or have performed such tests as may be deemed necessary to further assure that only specified materials are Incorporated Into the work. GP-43 LOCAL PREFERENCE ' in making purchases or in letting contracts forthe performance of any Job orservice,the purchasing agent shall give preference to all firms,corporations or Individuals which maintain offices or places of business within the corporate limits of the City of Jefferson, when the quality of the commodity or performance promised Is equal or better and the price quoted is the some or less. GP-44 PREFERENCE FOR U.S.MANUFACTURED GOODS MOn purchases In excess of$5,000,the City shall select products manufactured,assembled or produced in the United States,If quantity,quality,and price are equal. Every contract for public works construction or maintenance in excess of$5,000 shall contain a provision requesting the contractor to use American products In the performance of the contract, OP45 AWARD OF CONTRACT-REJECTION OF BIDS ' All bidders are required to submit with bid Minority Business Enterprise Eligibility Forms for all subcontractors and suppliers who the contractor Intends to use on the project. Compliance with this ' requirement and the Minority Business Enterprise Program shall be a consideration for award of this contract. The contractwill be awarded to the lowest and best responsible bktderon the base bid proposal,complying with the conditions of the Advertisement for bids and Specifications,providing the bid Is reasonable and his In the Interest of the City of Jefferson,Missouri to accept same. The bidder to whom an award is made will be notified at the earliest possible date. The City of Jefferson,however,reserves the right to reject any and all bits and to waive all informalities In bits received whenever such rejection or waiver Is in their Interest. GP 46 AFFIDAVIT OF COMPLIANCE WITH PUBLIC WORKS'CONTRACTS LAW ' Upon completion of project and prior to final payment,each contractor and subcontractor hereunder shall file with the City of Jefferson,Missouri,Department of Community Development,an affidavit stating that the contractor or subcontractor has fully complied with the provisions and requirements of Section 280280, ' RSMo(1884 as amended),an act relating to public works contracts. The City of Jefferson shall not issue a final payment until such affidavit is filed, • OP47 MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT FACITY-PROJECTS1110D0-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BU110INGICONTRACT DOCUMENTSICONTRACT,WPD 1 '• Whenever there is a period of excessive unemployment in Missouri, which is defined as any month Immediately following two consecutive calendar months during which the level of unemployment In the State has exceeded five percent(5%)as measured by the U.S.Bureau of Labor Staf tics In its monthly publication of employment and unemployment figures, only Missouri laborers or laborers from non- restrictive states may be hired by the contractor or subcontractors to work on this Public Works'contract. An exception shall exist when Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states are not available or ' are Incapable or performing the particular type of work Involved, if so certified by the contractor or subcontractor hereunder and approved by the Director of Community Development of the City of Jefferson, Missouri. Nor does this provision apply to regularly employed non-resident executive, supervisory or technical personnel or projects where federal akl funds are being utilized in the act and tibia provision would conflict with any federal statute,rule or regulation. Laborers from non-restrictive states means persons who are residents of a state which has not enacted ' state laws restricting Missouri laborers from working an public works projectsin thatstate,esdeternined by the Missouri Labor and Industrial Relations Commission. A Missouri laborer means any person who has resided In Missouri for at least thirty(30)days and Intends to become or remain a Missouri resident. ' OP48 LIABI M FOR COMPLIANCE WfTH PUBLIC WORKS CONTRACTS LAW AND MISSOURI LABORER REQUIREMENT In the event a contractor or subcontractor hereunder files with the City of Jefferson an affidavit stating that 1 the contractor or subcontractor has fully compiled with the provisions and requirementsof Section 290290, RSMo(1994 as amended),when in factthe contractor or subcontractor has notcompled,tothe extentthat any liability is assessed against the City of Jefferson,Missouri,or any additional expenses are Incurred by ' the City of Jefferson,Missouri,any contractor making the false statement,orwfwee Subcontractor makes a false statement, shall hold harmless and Indemnify the City for any Ilabllfty assessed against it or any additional expenses incurred. N ' Any contractor who fails to comply with the requirements of hiring only Missouri laborers or laborers from non-restrictive states,absent statutory exceptions,whenever there is a period of excessive unemployment In Missouri,agrees to hold harmless and indemnifythe City of Jefferson,Missouri,for any fiabilkythatmay be assessed against it or any additional expenses Incurred by the City of Jefferson,Missoud,because of the contractor or subcontractor's failure to comply. END OF GENERAL PROVISIONS 1 FACITY•PROJECTSWODD-FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING%CONTRACT DOCUMENTS%CONTRACT.W PD '• SPECIAL PROVISIONS ' FORWARD: The provisions of this section take precedence over any other provisions in these specifications. VA. PARTIAL ACCEPTANCE OF BID The City reserves the right to accept any part or all of the bid for the project. ' PRE-CONSTRUCTION CONFERENCE ' Prior to alerting work,a pre-concoction conference will be held to discuss the project,its scheduling and its coordination with the work of others. It is expected that this conference will be attended by representatives of the Owner,the Engineer,the Contractor and his Subcontractors,and the Utilities,as well as representatives of any other affected agencies which the Owner may wish to invite. ' NEI PREVAHMG WAGE LAW Bidders are hereby advised that compliance with the Prevailing Wage Law,Section 290.210 through 290.340 inclusive of the Revised Statutes of Missouri,is a requirement of this contract(Reference Section IB-20) Section 290.265 requires that a clearly legible statement of all prevailing hourly wage rates should be kept posted in a prominent and easily accessible place at the site by each contractor anrd subcontractor engaged in public works projects,and that such notice shall remain posted during the full time. NPROOF OF INSURANCE All certificates of insurance provided for this project shall be insured directly from the company affording ' coverage.Certification from a local agent is not acceptable without the necessary paperwork empowering and authorizing the agent to sign the surety's name. ' In addition,when an aggregate amount is included,a statement of the amount of that aggregate available to date shall also be attached. TECIINICAL SPECIFICATIONS AND DETADS The Technical Specifications for this project shall consist of: ' I, Section 01010 Summary of Work 2. Section 01030 Alternates 3. Section 01040 Coordination 4. Section 01300 Submittals ' 5. Section 01500 Temporary Facilities and Controls 6. Section 01700 Execution Requirements 7, Section 02230 Site Clearing and Preparation ' 8. Section 02300 Earthwork 9. Section 02900 Landscaping 10. Section 02910 Lawn Seeding Specifications ' 11. Section 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete 12, Section 04200 Unit Masonry • 13. Section 06100 Rough Carpentry 14. Section 06200 Finish Carpentry 15. Section 07900 Joint Sealants 1 1 ,• 16. Section 08110 Steel Doors and Frames 17. Section 08211 Flush Wood Doors 18, Section 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors 19. Section 08520 Aluminum Windows 20. Section 08710 Door Hardware 21. Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies 22, Section 09678 Resilient Wall Base and Accessories 23. Section 09900 Painting 24. Section 10800 Toilet and Bath Accessories 25. Section 13125 Metal Building Systems 26, Section 15000 General Requirements 27. Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods ' 28. Section 15250 Mechanical Insulation 29. Section 15410 Plumbing Piping 30. Section 15440 Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties 31. Section 15500 Mechanics!HVAC Equipment ' 32. Section 15610 Furnaces 33. Section 15891 Ductwork and Accessories 34. Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods 35. Section 16060 Grounding and Bonding 36. Section 16120 Conductors and Cables 37. Section 16130 Raceways and Boxes 38, Section 16140 Wiring Devices 39. Section 16442 PanclBoards 40. Section 16476 Disconnect Switches 41. Section 16521 Interior and Exterior Lighting N These technical specifications are contained within the Section entitled"Technical Specifications"included in this document. ' Details,plan sheets,sites plan showing overall final grading requirements,and all other drawings contained within the plan set shall be used in constructing this project. ' Land Disturbance-The work in this project will be covered under the General Operating Pemrit issued to the City of Jefferson by the Missouri State Department of Natural Resources,Water Pollution Control Program, ' Permit No,MO-R100031.The contractor will receive a copy of this permit at the pre-construction conference and is bound by its provisions. ' The Contractor shall be required to obtain a building permit(at no cost to the Contractor)prior to beginning construction. ' SP-7 TRAFFIC CONTROL DURING CONSTRUCTION All work within the right-of-way shall be in accordance with the Manual on Uniform Traffic Control Devices. ' Signs,cones,and barricades shall be placed loth to protect workers and equipment and to Protect the public by marking open trenches and other potential dangers. ' SP-9 ACCESS TO ADJACENT PROPERTIES • Prior to the removal of the driveways to any dwellings or buildings,the Contractor shall notify the inhabitants ' of such structures that the use of the driveways or access will be temporarily affected. Notice shall be of sufficient length to allow the persons affected to remove vehicles and other items that may be inaccessible 1 1• during construction activities. Pedestrian seers shall be maintained at all times. Suitable access shall be provided across trenches,ditches or other barriers and obstacles for pedestrian traffic. Appropriate devices shall be used to team the public of the dangers that may be present. SP-9 PROTECTION OF ADJACENT PROPERTIES Surface water shall be diverted and otherwise prevented from entering or damaging adjacent property as a 1 result of precipitation during construction. SP-10 UTILITIES tThe Contractor shall expose all utility crossings to establish location and depths prior to construction. SP-11 CONSTRUCTION STAKING ' All slaking required for this project shall be the responsibility of the contractor.All associated costs shall be considered incidental to the project. SP-12 SEALED SET OF PLANS AND COMPLIANCE WITH BUILDING CODE The drawings or specifications contained herein arc not intended as a substitute for drawings and specifications prepared by a deign protndonal licensed In the State of Missourl. These drawings and specifications are intended only as a guide during design of the building and foundation. A complete set of drawings and specifications will be a requirement of the contract,and the drawings and specifications will need to be scaled by a design professional(i.e.,Professional Engineer or Architect) registered in the State of Missouri. END OF SPECIAL CONDITIONS 1 t 1 1 r TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ' FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING 1 PROJECT NO. 81000 1 1 1 1 N . 1 ,1 1 1 1 1 • .1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1• FOR r, FIRE APPARATUS STORAGE BUILDING 1` PROJECT NO. 81000 ;1 1 1' 1 1 ' 1 '• SECTION 01010-SUMMARY OF WORK ' PART I -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawingsand general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS A. The Project consists of the construction of a 10,240 SF Fire Apparatus Storage Building and associated,improvements at the City of Jefferson Hyde Park Complex.. 1. Project Location:2300 Hyde Park Road,Jefferson City,MO 2. Owner:City of Jefferson,320 East McCarty Street,Jefferson City,Missouri 65101. ' 3. Contract Documents,dated February 2006. 1.4 WORK PERFORMED BY THE OWNER B. General:The Contractor must coordinate his construction activities with the Owner's activities. ' C. During the course of the contract,the Owner will be performing the following work; 1. Rough grading of site to+/-one foot of final grade 2. Installation of storm water inlets and piping. 3. Installation of 4"sanitary sewer lateral to within 50 feet of the new building. 4. Other miscellaneous construction work as deemed necessary. N1.5 FUTURE WORK(NOT APPLICABLE) 1.6 WORK SEQUENCE A. The contractor shall supply to the owner a schedule of his/her proposed work. ' 1.7 CONTRACTOR USE OF PREMISES A. Use of the Site: Limit use of the premises to work in areas indicated. Confine operations to areas within contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of the site beyond the areas in which the Work is indicated. ' B. Owner Occupancy: Allow for Owner occupancy and use by the public. C. Driveways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving the premises clear and available to the Owner,the Owner's employees,and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or storage of materials. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site. ' 1.8 OCCUPANCY REQUIREMENTS A. Partial Owner Occupancy: The Owner reserves the right to occupy and to place and install equipment in completed areas of the building prior to Substantial Completion,provided such occupancy does not interfere ' with completion of the Work. Such placing of equipment and partial occupancy shall not constitute acceptance of the total Work. 1. The Project Engineer will prepare a Certificate of Substantial Completion for each specific portion of the Work to be occupied prior to Owner occupancy. • 2. Prior to partial Owner occupancy, mechanical and electrical systems shall be fully operational. Required inspections and tests shall have been successfully completed. Upon occupancy,the Owner SUMMARY OF WORK 01010- 1 will operate and maintain mechanical and electrical systems serving occupied portions of the , building. • 3, Upon occupancy,the Owner will assume responsibility for maintenance and custodial service for ' occupied portions of the building. 1.9 PRODUCTS ORDERED IN ADVANCE(NOT APPLICABLE) , 1.10 OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE) 1.11 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS(NONE) , PART 2. PRODUCTS(NOT APPLICABLE) PART 3-EXECUTION(NOT APPLICABLE) , END OF SECTION 01010 SUMMARY OF WORK 01010-2 SECTION 01030-ALTERNATES ' PARTI -GENERAL I.l RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions,Bid ' Form and other Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements governing Alternates. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Definition: An alternate is an amount proposed by bidders and stated on the Bid Form for certain work defined in the Bidding Requirements that may be added to or deducted from the Base Bid amount if the Owner decides to accept a corresponding change in either the amount of construction to be completed,or in the products, materials, equipment, systems, or installation methods described in the Contract ' Documents. ' 1.4 PROCEDURES A. Coordination: Modify or adjust affected adjacent Work as necessary to completely and fully integrate that N Work Into the Project. I. Include as part of each alternate, miscellaneous devices, accessory objects, and similar items incidental to or required for a complete installation whether or not mentioned as part of the Alternate. B. Notification: Immediately following the award of the Contract,notify each party involved, in writing,of ' the status of each alternate. Indicate whether alternates have been accepted or rejected. Include a complete description of negotiated modifications to alternates. C. Execute accepted alternates under the some conditions as other Work of this Contract. ' D. Schedule: A "Schedule of Alternates"is included at the end of this Section. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 SCHEDULE OF ALTERNATES (See the Drawings for the description of the work included with each Alternate.} A. Alternate No. I -Furnish and install manual barrier gates at two locations as indicated on the drawings. ' B. Alternate No. 2 - Construct Room 109 and Mezzanic 110 as Indicated on the plans, including general, mechanical,and electrical work. ALTERNATES 01030- 1 C. Alternate No.3-Furnish and install new 18"by 24"bronze dedication plaque on the exterior of the building ' with layout to be provided by the Engineer. Plaque to be a commercial quality plaque rated for outdoor use, and shall be ordered from a company specializing in dedication plaques or as otherwise approved by the ' Engineer. The lettering of the plaque with the names of Councilpersons, the Mayor, an other persons Involved in the project will also be part of the scope of work. Scope of work to include all materials,labor, • equipment,and services necessary to complete the work. END OF SECTION 01030 ' 1 1 ALTERNATES 01030-2 ,• SECTION 01040-COORDINATION PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and supervisory requirements necessary forcoordinating construction operations including,but not necessarily limited to,the following: 1. Coordination with the Owner's: 1 a. Facility personnel. b. Construction personnel. C. Inspection personnel. ' d. Design and Construction Management personnel. 2. General project coordination procedures. N 3. Conservation. 4. Coordination Drawings. 5. Administrative and supervisory personnel. ' B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division I Section "Summary of Work". 2. Division 1 Section "Submittals" for preparing and submitting the Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Division 1 Section "Contract Closeout"for coordinating contract closeout. 1 1.3 COORDINATION ' A. Coordinate construction operations included in various Sections of these Specifications to assure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included under different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation,connections and operation. ' I. Schedule construction operations in the sequence required to obtain the best results where Installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components,before or after its own installation. ' 2. Coordinate installation of different components to assure maximum accessibility for required maintenance,service,and repair. 3. Make provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation. B. Where necessary,prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved,outlining special procedures • required for coordination. Include such items as required notices,reports,and attendance at meetings. 1 COORDINATION 01040- 1 1. Prepare sim flar memoranda for the Owner and separate contractors where coordination oftheir work , is required. • C. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative procedures with ' other construction activities to avoid conflicts and assure orderly progress of the Work. Such administrative activities include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Preparation of schedules. , 2. Installation and removal of temporary facilities. 3. Delivery and processing of submittals. ' 4. Progress meetings. 5. Project closeout activities. D. Conservation: Coordinate construction operations to assure that operations are carried out with ' consideration given to conservation of energy,water,and materials. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare coordination drawings where careful coordination is needed for ' installation of products and materials fabricated by separate entities. Prepare coordination drawings where limited space availability necessitates maximum utilization of space for efficient installation of different components. 1. Show the relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings. , 2. Indicate required installation sequences. 3. Comply with requirements contained in Section "Submittals." B. Staff Names: Within 10 days following receipt of the"Notice to Proceed",submit a list of the Contractor's principal staff assignments,Including the superintendent and other personnel in attendance at the Project ' Site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities. List their addresses and telephone numbers. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) ' PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 GENERAL COORDINATION PROVISIONS A. Inspection of Conditions: Require the Installer of each major component to inspect both the substrate and ' conditions under which Work is to be performed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected in an acceptable manner. ' B. Coordinate lempararyenclusurcs with required inspeclionsand tests to minimize the necessilyofuncovering completed construction for that purpose. END OF SECTION 01040 COORDINATION 01040-2 , SECTION 01300• SUBMITTALS '• PART 1 -GENERAL RELATED DOCUMENTS Drawings and general provisions oflhe Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and other ' Division I Specifications Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for submittals required for performance of work, including the following: ' 1. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Samples. 4. Quality Assurance Submittals. 5. Operating and Maintenance Manuals. 6. Warranties. ' B. Administrative Submittals:Refer to General and Supplementary Condition,other applicable Division 1 Sections and other Contract Documents for requirements for administrative submittals. Such submittals include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Construction Progress Schedule including Schedule of Values 2. Performance and Payment Bonds. 3. Insurance certificates. N 4. Application for Payment. S. Certified Payroll Reports. 6. MBE/WBE Reports. ' 7. Partial and Final Receipt of Payment and Release Forms. 9. Affidavit Compliance with Prevailing Wage Laws, 9. Notification,Permits,etc. ' 10. Record Drawings 1.3 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES A. The procedures shall comply with the General and Supplementary Conditions and other applicable sections of the Contract Documents. The Contractor shall submit,with such promptness as to cause no delay in his work or in that of any other contractors,all required submittals indicated in Part 3.1 of this ' section and elsewhere in the Contract Documents. Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construction activities. Transmit each submittal sufficiently in advance of performance of related construction activities to avoid delay. ' 1. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication,purchasing,testing,delivery,other submittals,and related activities that require sequential activity. ' 2. Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related elements of the Work so processing will not be delayed by the need to review submittals concurrently for coordination. ' a. The Designer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination with other submittals until all related submittals are received. 1.4 SHOP DRAWINGS ' A. B. Submit newly prepared information drawn accurately to scale. Highlight,encircle,or otherwise indicate deviations from the Contract Documents. Do not reproduce Contract Documents or dopy standard information as the basis of Shop Drawings. Standard information prepared without specific reference to ' the Project is not a Shop Drawing. C. Shop Drawings include fabrication and installation Drawings,settings diagrams,schedules,patterns, , templates and similar Drawings. Include the following information: 1. Dimensions. , 2. Identification of products and materials included by sheet and detail number. 3. Compliance with specified standards. 4. Notation of coordination requirements. 5. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. ' 6. Sheet size: Except for templates,patterns and similar full-size Drawings,submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-12 by 1 I inches(215 by 280 mm)but no larger than 36 by 48 inches(890 by 1220 mm). , 1.5 PRODUCT DATA A. , B. Collect Product Data into a single submittal for each element of construction or system. Product Data includes printed information,such as manufacturer's installation instructions,catalog cuts,standard color charts,roughing-in diagrams and templates,standard wiring diagrams,and performance curves. 1. Mark each copy to show applicable choices and options. Where printed Product Data includes , information on several products that are not required,mark copies to indicate the applicable information. Include the following information: a. Manufacturer's printed recommendations. ' b. Compliance with trade association standards. C. Compliance with recognized testing agency standards. d. Application of testing agency labels and seals. , C. Notation of dimensions verified by field measurement. F. Notation of coordination requirements. 2. Do not submit Product Data until compliance with requirements of the Contract Documents has ' been confirmed. 1.6 SAMPLES ' A. B. Submit full-size,fully fabricated Samples cured and finished as specified and physically identical with the ' material or product proposed. Samples include partial sections of manufactured or fabricated components, cuts or containers of materials,color range sets,and swatches showing color,texture,and pattern. 1. Submit Samples for review of size,kind,color pattern,and texture. Submit Samples for a final •' Submittals 01300-2 , 1i check of these characteristics with other elements and a comparison of these characteristics between the final submittal and the actual component as delivered and installed. ,• 2. Field samples are full-size examples erected on-site to illustrate finishes,coatings,or finish materials and to establish the Project standard. ' 1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE DOCUMENTS A. ' B. Submit quality-control submittals, including design data,certifications,manufacturer's instructions, manufacturer's field reports,and other quality-control submittals as required under other Sections of the Specifications. ' C. Certifications:Where other Sections of Specifications require certifications that a product,material,or installation complies with specified requirements,submit a notarized certification from the manufacturer ' certifying compliance with specified requirements. 1. Signature:Certification shall be signed by an officer of the manufacturer or other Individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of the company. D. Inspection and Test Reports: Submit the required inspection and test reports from independent testing agencies as specified in this section and in other sections of the Contract Documents. PART 2-PRODUCTS (Not Applicable) PART 3-EXECUTION N3.1 REQUIRED SUBMITTALS A. Contractor shall submit the following information for materials and equipment to be provided under this contract. ' B. Legend: CODE TYPE OF SUBMITTAL I. Shop Drawings 2. Product Data 3. Sample ' 4. Product Certifications,Weigh Tickets 5. Manufacturer's Instructions 6. Test Report ' 7. Field Report 8. Wiring Diagrams 9. Record Photographs 10. Operation&Maintenance Data ' if. Warranty 12. Special measures 13. Schedules 14. Special Drawings/Diagram 15. Personnel,Qualifications '• Submittals 01300-3 16. Proposal ' 17. Design Mixes C. List of required submittals: • SECTION DESCRIPTION CODE ' 03300 Cast-In-Place Concrete shop drawings of steel reinforcement and joint 1,2,14,17 , layout,as well as Product data for each manufactured material and design mixes as indicated. , 07901 Joint Sealant product data. 2 08110 Steel Doors and Frames samples for initial selection and verification, i 2,3 product data,and shop drawings. , 08211 Flush Wood Doors product data. 2 08331 Overhead Coiling Doors samples for initial selection and product data as 2,3 indicated. , 08361 Sectional Overhead Doors product data,shop drawings,samples and 1,2,3,15 installer certificates as indicated. 08520 Aluminum Windows samples for initial selection as indicated. 3 , 08710 JDoor Hardware product data,final hardware schedule. 2,13,14 09255 Gypsum Wallboard Assemblies Product Data. 2 ' 09653 Resilient Wall Base and accessories product data and samples for initial 2,3 selection and verification as indicated. 09900 Painting product data,and samples as indicated. 2,3 10800 Toilet and Bath accessories product data,and samples for initial selection 1,2,3 and setting drawings as indicated. ' 13125 Metal Buildings Systems 1,2,4,5,8,1 1,13,14 15000 General Requirements shop drawings as indicated,Product data,and special 1,2,14 ' drawings 15440 Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties product and maintenance data as 2,10 ' indicated. 15460 Water Heaters product data 2 ' 15500 Mechanical HVAC Equipment product and maintenance data,shop 1,2,8,10 drawings and wiring diagrams as indicated. 15610 Furnaces product and maintenance data. 2,10 ' 15672 Air cooled condensers Product&Maintenance data and shop drawings .1,2,10 16140 Wiring Devices product data,shop drawings,samples. 1,2,3 , 16442 Panelboards qualification data,product data,maintenance data,shop 1 ,10,13, drawings,and schedules as indicated. 15 ' Submittals 013004 •' 1 1 1 16476 Disconnect Switches product data as indicated. 2 ,• END OF SECTION 01300 i 1 �1 i 1 N ;1 1 1 1 1 1�1 Submittals 01300-5 1 SECTION 01500-TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS •' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1,1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and other , Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes requirements for temporary facilities and controls, including temporary utilities, , support facilities,and security and protection facilities. B. Permanent utilities currently available on site for use by the Contractor include the following: 1. Electrical power service. ' 2. Water 3. Natural Gas , C. Temporary utilities to be provided by the Contractor include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Telephone 2. Power 3. Sanitary Facilities D. Support facilities to be provided by the Contractor include,but are not limited to,the following: , I. Temporary signs. , 2. Waste disposal facilities. 3. Construction aids and miscellaneous services and facilities. E. Security and protection facilities to be provided by the Contractor include, but are not limited to, the ' following: 1. Environmental protection, ' 2. Stormwatcr control. 3. Tree and plant protection. 4. Pest control. •5. Barricades,warning signs,and lights. ' 6. Temporary enclosures, 7. Fire protection. 1 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Permanent Enclosure: As determined by Project Engineer,permanent or temporary roofing is complete, • Insulated,and weathertighh exterior walls are insulated and weathertight;and all openings are closed with permanent construction or substantial temporary closures. ' TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 01500- 1 1 ' 1.4 USE CHARGES • A. General: Cost or use charges for temporary facilities are not chargeable to Owner and shall be included in the Contract Sum. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilities without cost,including the following. 1. Owner's construction forces and personnel. 2. Occupants of the Project. 3. Project Engineer. 4. Testing agencies. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: Comply with ANSI A10.6,NECA's"Temporary Electrical Facilities,"and NFPA 241. 1. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70. 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Conditions of Use: The following conditions apply to use of temporary services and facilities by all parties engaged in the Work: 1. Keep temporary services and facilities clean and neat. 2. Relocate temporary services and facilities as required by progress of the Work. END OF SECTION 01500 1 1• TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CON' ONTROLS 01500-2 SECTION 01700-EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions oftheContract,Including General and Supplementary Conditions , and other Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes general procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: ' 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. General installation of products. , 4. Coordination of Owner-installed products. 5. Starting and adjusting. B. Protection of installed construction. , 7. Correction of the Work. B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 1 Section "Cutting and Patching" for procedural requirements for cutting and M patching necessary for the installation or performance of other components of the Work. 2. Division 1 Section"Closeout Procedures"for final cleaning. , PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Used) PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of site Improvements, utilities, and other ' construction Indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning work, investigate and verify the existence and location of mechanical and electrical systems and other construction affecting the Work. ' 1. Before construction, verify the location and points of connection of utility services. 2. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary sewer,storm sewer,and water-service piping;and underground electrical services. ' 3. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site. B. Acceptance of Conditions: Examine substrates,areas,and conditions,with Installer or Applicator ' present where indicated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other • conditions affecting performance. Record observations. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700- 1 , 1. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the • Work Is required by other Sections, Include the following: a. Description of the Work, b. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates, C. List of unacceptable Installation tolerances. ' d. Recommended corrections. 2. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, Including compatibility with existing finishes or primers. ' 3. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation. 4. Examine walls, floors,and roots for suitable conditions where products and systems are to ' be installed. 5. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work Indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions. 3.2 PREPARATION A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish Information to local utility or Owner that Is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurtenances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction. ' B. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner orothers unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: N1. Notify Project Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Engineer's written permission. C. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. D. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically on Drawings. E. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents, submit a request for information to Project Engineer. ' Include a detailed description of problem encountered, together with recommendations for changing the Contract Documents. 3.3 CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT A. Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work,verify layout information shown on Drawings, ' in relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Project Engineer promptly. ' B. General: The General Contractor shall perform lay out work using accepted surveying practices, • 1. Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project. ' EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-2 2. Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required , dimensions. • 3. Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply. 4. Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses. , 5. Notify Project Engineer when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances. C. Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site Improvements,Including pavements,grading,fill and , topsoil placement, utility slopes, and invert elevations. D. Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building ' foundations,column grids,and floor levels,including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfer survey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from two or more locations. , 3.4 FIELD ENGINEERING A. Identification:The Contractor shall use the existing structures as benchmarks,control points,and , reference points. Coordinate locations with the Contract Supervisor. 3.5 INSTALLATION A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and , elevation, as Indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas, unless otherwise Indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of(8 feet (2.4 m)j <Insert dimension> in spaces , without a suspended ceiling. B. Comply with manufacturer's written Instructions and recommendations for Installing products in applications Indicated. ' C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Maintain conditions required for product performance until Final Completion. , D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading In excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy. E. Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels. ' F. Anchors and Fasteners: Provide anchors and fasteners as required to anchor each component ' securely in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions of the Work. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated,mount components at heights directed by Project Engineer. , 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. G. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, ' arrange joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-3 ' H. Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and Installation materials that are not considered • hazardous. 3.6 OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction forces. B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner's construction forces. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable ' timetable. Notify Owner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress. 2. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction forces at preinstallation conferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend ' preinstallation conferences conducted by Owner's construction forces if portions of the Work depend on Owner's construction. STARTING AND ADJUSTING ' C. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest. ' D. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding. Adjust equipment for proper operation. N E. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. ' 3.7 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure Installed Work is without damage or ' deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. B. Comply with manufacturer's written Instructions for temperature and relative humidity. 3.8 CORRECTION OF THE WORK A. Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Restore damaged substrates and finishes. ' Comply with requirements in Division 1 Section"Cutting and Patching." 1. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,refinishing damaged surfaces,touching upwith ' matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. B. Restore permanent facilities used during construction to their specified condition, C. Remove and replace damaged surfaces that are exposed to view if surfaces cannot be repaired without visible evidence of repair. ' D. Repair components that do not operate properly. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. • E. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass or reflective surfaces. ' EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-4 1 END OF SECTION 01700 •' 1 1 EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS 01700-5 '• SECTION 02230-SITE CLEARING AND PREPARATION PARTI -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1,2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Protecting existing trees and vegetation to remain. 2. Removing trees and other vegetation. 3. Clearing and grubbing. 4. Topsoil stripping. S. Removing above-grade site improvements. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division I Section "Execution Requirements"for verifying utility locations and for recording field measurements. 2.2. Division 1 Section "Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls" for temporary utilities, temporary construction and support facilities, temporary security and protection facilities, and environmental protection measures during site operations. 3. Division 2 Section "Earthwork"for soil materials,excavating,backfilling,and site grading. 4. Division 2 Section "Landscaping" for finish grading, including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and planting. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Topsoil: Natural or cultivated surface-soil layer containing organic matter and sand,silt,and clay particles; friable,pervious,and black or a darker shade of brown,gray,or red than underlying subsoil;reasonably free of subsoil,clay lumps,gravel,and other objects more than 2 inches in diameter;and free of weeds,roots, ' and other deleterious materials. ' 1,4 SUBMITTALS A. Record drawings according to General Conditions. ' 1. Identify and accurately locate capped utilities and other subsurface structural, electrical, and mechanical conditions. ' 1.5 MATERIALS OWNERSHIP SITE CLEARING 02230- 1 ,• A. Except for materials indicated to be stockpiled or to remain Owner's property, cleared materials shall ' become Contractor's property and shall be removed from the site, 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Traffic; Minimize interference with adjoining roads,streets,walks,and other adjacent occupied or used facilities, ' 1. Do not close or obstruct streets, walks, or other adjacent occupied or used facilities without permission from Owner and authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Provide alternate routes around closed or obstructed traffic ways if required by authorities having jurisdiction. B. Notify utility locator service for area where Project is located before site clearing. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS(Not Applicable) PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 PREPARATION A. Protect and maintain benchmarks and survey control points from disturbance during construction. B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. Comply with local,state and federal ' regulations. C. Locate and clearly flag trees and vegetation to remain or to be relocated. ' D. Protect existing site improvements to remain from damage during construction. ' I. Restore damaged improvements to their original condition,as acceptable to Owner. 3.2 CLEARING LIMITS ' A. The clearing limits are five(5)feet outside the slope limits shown on the plans and five(5)feet either side of centerline for pipe installations. B. Protect all trees.not required to be removed for the project. ' 3.3 TREE PROTECTION A. If necessary for compliance with the following,erect and maintain a temporary fence around drip line of ' individual trees or around perimeter drip line of groups oftrees to remain. Remove fence when construction Is complete. '• 1. Do not store construction materials,debris,or excavated material within drip line ofremainingtrees. SITE CLEARING 02230.2 1 2. Do not permit vehicles,equipment,or foot traffic within drip line of remaining trees. •' B. Do not excavate within drip line of trees, unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.4 UTILITIES , A. Existing Utilities: Locate and identify all existing utilities. Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permittedunderthe following conditionsand then only after arranging ' to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Project Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Engineer's written permission. ' 3.5 CLEARING AND GRUBBING , A. Remove obstructions,trees,shrubs,grass,and other vegetation to permit installation of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and grubbing roots. 1. Do not remove trees,shrubs,and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be relocated. ' 2. Cut minor roots and branches of trees indicated to remain in a clean and careful manner where such roots and branches obstruct installation of new construction. , 3. Completely remove stumps,roots,obstructions,and debris extending to a depth of 18 inches below exposed subgrade. 4. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees. B. Pill depressions caused by clearing and grubbing operations with satisfactory soil material,unless further excavation or earthwork is indicated. I. Place fill material in horizontal layers not exceeding 8-inch loose depth,and compact each layer to ' a density equal to adjacent original ground. 3.6 TOPSOIL STRIPPING ' A. Remove sod and grass before stripping topsoil. ' B. Strip topsoil to whatever depths are encountered in a manner to prevent intermingling with underlying subsoil or other waste materials. ' 1. Strip surface soil of unsuitable topsoil, including trash, debris, weeds, roots, and other waste materials. C. Stockpile topsoil materials away from edge of excavations without intermixing with subsoil. Grade and ' shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust. 1. Limit height of topsoil stockpiles to 72 inches. ' 2, Do not stockpile topsoil within drip line of remaining trees. 3. Dispose of excess topsoil as specified for waste material disposal. , 4. Coordinate location of stockpile with Project Engineer. 3.7 SITE IMPROVEMENTS •' SITE CLEARING 02230-3 i 1� A. Remove existing above- and below-grade improvements as indicated and as necessary to facilitate new 1 construction. 1 B. Remove slabs,paving,curbs,gutters,and aggregate base as indicated. 1 1. Unless existing full-depth joints coincide with line of demolition,neatly saw-cut length of existing pavement to remain before removing existing pavement. Saw-cut faces vertically. 1 3.8 DISPOSAL . A. Burning on Owner's Property:Burning is not permitted on Owner's property. ' B. Removal from Owner's Property: Remove waste materials from Owner's property. ' END OF SECTION 02230 1 N 1 1 i 1 i 1 1 SITE CLEARING 02230-4 1 1 SECTION 02300-EARTHWORK PART 1 -GENERAL •' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and ' Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section Includes among other things the following: ' 1. Preparing subgrades, 2. Excavating and backfilling. 3. Drainage courses. , 4. Base courses. 5. Subsurface drainage backfill. 6. Excavating and backfilling trenches within building lines. , 7. Excavating and backfilling trenches for buried mechanical and electrical utilities and pits -for buried utility structures. 8. Aggregate surface and shoulder courses, , B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section 'Site Clearing' for site stripping, grubbing, removing topsoil, and protecting trees to remain. 2. Division 2 Section'Landscaping'for finish grading,including placing and preparing topsoil for lawns and plantings. , 3. Division 3 Section 'Cast-in-Place Concrete'for granular course over vapor retarder. 4. Division 13 Section "Metal Building Systems" for excavating and backfilling building footings and foundations. 5. Division 13 Section "Pre-engineered Wood Building Systems" for excavating and ' backfilling building footings'and foundations. 6. Division 15 and 16 Sections for excavating and backfilling buried mechanical and electrical utilities and buried utility structures. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Backfill: The replacement of material to raise the ground surface to subgrade elevations around structures and utilities. 1. Initial Backfill: Backfill placed beside and over pipe in a trench, Including haunches to ' support sides of pipe. 2. Final Backfill: Backfill placed over initial backfill to fill a trench. , B. Base Course: The layQr placed between the subgrade and the bottom surface of siBbs-on-grade, walks, curbs and pavements. C. Surface Course: The surface layer placed over base or subgrade as indicated on plans. •' D. Bedding Course: Layer placed over the excavated subgrade In a trench before laying pipe. , EARTHWORK 02300- 1 E. Borrow: Approved soil material obtained from a designated borrow area on-site when sufficient 1 approved soil material is not available from excavations. • F. Surplus Excavation (Waste): Excess soil material obtained from authorized excavation. ' G. Soil Foundation: The prepared subgrede surface upon which fill, backfill, or base course is placed. ' H. Porous Backfill: Course of washed granular material placed to cut off capillary flow of pore water. ' 1. Structures: Buildings,footings,foundations,retaining walls,slabs,tanks,curbs,mechanical and electrical appurtenances, or other man-made stationary features constructed above or below ground surface, ' J. Utilities: Utilities include on-site underground pipes, conduits, ducts, and cables, as well as underground services within buildings. ' K. Maximum Dry Density and Optimum Moisture Content: As determined by ASTM D69B (Standard Proctor). ' L. Drainage Course: Layer supporting slab-on-grade used to minimize capillary flow of pore water. M. Excavation: The authorized removal of material encountered above subgrede elevations. N. Fill: The placement of material to raise ground surface to subgrede elevations. O. Rock: Rock material in beds, ledges, unstratified masses, and conglomerate deposits and N boulders of rock materiel exceeding 1 cu,yd. (0.76 cu, m)for bulk excavation or 314 cu,yd.(0.57 CU. m) for footing, trench, and pit excavation that cannot be removed by rock excavating equipment equivalent to the following in size and performance ratings, without systematic ' drilling, ram hammering, ripping, or blasting,when permitted: P. Subgrade: The surface or elevation located immediately below base, porous backfill, drainage course, aggregate surfacing, or topsoil materials. a Waste Material: Waste material includes soil contaminated by construction activities, existing trash and debris located within the construction limits, trash and debris generated by ' construction activities,unused construction materials not incorporated into the work and other unwanted materials within the construction limits as designated by the Project Engineer. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The Contractor will perform compaction testing during the course of the work. ' 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Existing Utilities: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted in writing by Project Engineer and then only after arranging to provide temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Project Engineer not less than two days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. . 2. Do not proceed with utility interruptions without Project Engineer's written permission. ' 3. Contact utility-locator service for area where Project is located before excavating. EARTHWORK 02300-2 B. Demolish and completely remove from site existing underground utilities indicated to be ' removed. Coordinate with utility companies to shut off services If lines are active. , PART 2-PRODUCTS • 2.1 SOIL MATERIALS A. Satisfactory Soil Materials: Excavation free of debris,waste,frozen materials,vegetation,other ' deleterious matter and rock or gravel larger then the following 1. Three(3) Inches (76 mm) in any dimension for backfill. ' 2. Eight(8) inches (203 mm) in any dimension for fill. 3. One(1) Inch (25 mm) in any dimension for utility backfill. ' B. Fill and Backfill Materiels: Satisfactory soil materiels. ' 2.2 AGGREGATE MATERIALS A. Base Materials: Aggregate Base: MoDOT Section 1007, Type 5 aggregate(1996). , B. Drainage Course and Porous Backfill: MoDOT Section 1009, Grade 3,4 or 5 course aggregate , (1996). C. Aggregate Surfacing: MoDOT Section 1005, Course Aggregate, Gradation A(1996), D. Clean Rock Surfacing: MoDOT Section 1005, Course Aggregate, Gradation D (1996). E. Pipe Bedding Material: MoDOT Section 1007, Type 1 aggregate(1996). 2.3 ACCESSORIES , A. Warning Tape: Provide detectable warning tape for plastic piping and regular tape for metallic piping or cabling. Acid-end alkali-resistant polyethylene film warning tape with detectable wire ' as required,manufactured for marking and identifying underground utilities,6 inches(150 mm) wide end 4 mils(0.1 mm)thick,continuously inscribed with a description of the utility:colored as follows: 1. Red: Electric. ' 2. Yellow: Gas, oil,steam,and dangerous materials, 3. Orange: Telephone and other communications. , 4. Blue: Water systems. 5, Green: Sewer systems. B. Slit Fencing: Amoco Style 2130 or an approved equal. ' 2.4 EQUIPMENT ' ,A. General Requirements: • EARTHWORK 02300-3 ' i ' 1. Maintain all equipment,tools,and machines used in the performance of the work required by this Section in a satisfactory working condition at all times. 2. Equipment shall be subject to the approval of the Project Engineer. • B. Hauling Equipment: Pneumatic-tired vehicles and dump bodies suitable for dumping materials In windrows or layers on the subgrede. C. Miscellaneous Equipment: Scarifiers, tractors, spring-tooth or spike-tooth harrows,windrow equalizers,spreaders,and other equipment suitablefor construction of select material base(and ' surface) course. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION A. Identify required lines, levels, contours and datum. S. Identify and flag all utilities. C. Protect structures, utilities,sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities from damage caused by ' settlement,lateral movement,undermining,washout,and other hazards created by earthwork operations. D. Protect subgrades soils against freezing temperatures or frost. Provide protective insulating materials as necessary. E. Provide erosion control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge of Nsoil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways. F. Tree protection is specified in the Division 2 Section'Site Clearing' ' 3.2 DEWATERING ' A. Prevent surface water and ground water from entering excavations,from ponding on prepared subgrades, and from flooding Project site and surrounding area. ' B. Protect subgrades from softening, undermining, washout, and damage by rain or water accumulation. 1. Reroute surface water runoff away from excavated areas. Do not allow water to ' accumulate In excavations, Do not use excavated trenches as temporary drainage ditches, 2. Install a dewatering system to keep subgrades dry and convey ground water away from excavations. Maintain until dawatering Is no longer required. ' 3.3 EXPLOSIVES A. Explosives: Explosives are not to be used on this Project site. 3,4 EXCAVATION, GENERAL EARTHWORK 02300-4 A. Classified Excavation: Excavation to subgrade elevations classified as earth and rock. Rock 1 excavation will be paid for by adjusting the Contract Sum according to the provisions for changes in work Included in the Contract Documents. ' 1. Earth excavation Includes excavating pavements and obstructions visible on surface; • underground structures,utilities,and other items indicated to be removed;together with , soil, boulders, and other materials not classified as rock or unauthorized excavation. a. Intermittent drilling; ram hammering; or ripping of materiel not classed as rock excavation is earth excavation. ' 2. Rock excavation includes removal and disposal of rock. 3.5 STABILITY OF EXCAVATIONS ' A. Comply with federal,state and local codes, ordinances,and requirements of authorities having ' jurisdiction to maintain stable excavations. 3.6 EXCAVATION FOR STRUCTURES , A. Excavate to indicated elevations and dimensions within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 inch (25 ' mm). Extend excavations a sufficient distance from structures for placing and removing concrete formwork,for installing services and other construction, and for inspections. 1, Excavations for Footings and Foundations: ' a. Do not disturb bottom of excavation. b. Excavate by hand to final grade just before placing concrete reinforcement. C. Trim bottoms to required lines and grades to leave solid baseto receive otherwork. d. Subgrade shall be hand cleaned of all loose materials,or loose materials should be machine tamped into the subgrade with a tamping compactor. ' e. "Back dragging"a backhoe bucket to compact loose materials and to smooth teeth marks in the subgrade will not be allowed. f. Any loose materials, soil clods or crumbs should be removed before concrete placement. , g. Minimize drying of subgrades due to exposure, h. In areas of fill,the fill should be placed to a level above the top of footings and than excavated to allow the footing to be cast using earth forms. ' 2. Excavation for Underground Tanks,Basins,and Mechanical or Electrical Utility Structures: Excavateto elevations and dimensions indicated within a tolerance of plus or minus 1 Inch (25 mm). Do not disturb bottom of excavations intended for bearing surface. , 3,7 EXCAVATION FOR WALKS AND PAVEMENTS ' A. Excavate surfaces under walks and pavements to Indicated cross sections, elevations, and grades. ' 3,8 EXCAVATION FOR UTILITY TRENCHES A. Excavate trenches to indicated gradients, lines, depths, and elevations. •' 1 EARTHWORK 02300-5 ' 1. Beyond building perimeter, excavate trenches to allow installation of top of pipe below frost line. See typical pipe Installation detail on Plans, '• 3.9 APPROVAL OF SUBGRADE A. Notify Project Engineer when excavations have reached required subgrade. B. If Project Engineer determines that unsatisfactory soil is present,continue excavation and replace with compacted backfill,fill materiel or base material as directed. 1. Additional excavation and replacement material will be paid for according to Contract ' provisions for changes in the Work. C. Reconstruct subgrades damaged by freezing temperatures,frost, rain, accumulated water, or ' construction activities, as directed by Project Engineer. 3.10 UNAUTHORIZED EXCAVATION A. Fill unauthorized excavation under foundations or wall footings by extending bottom elevation of concrete foundation or footing to excavation bottom, without altering top elevation. Lean ' concrete fill may be used when approved by Project Engineer. 1. Fill unauthorized excavations under other construction or utility pipe as directed by Project ' Engineer. B. Where indicated widths of utility trenches are exceeded, provide stronger pipe, or special installation procedures, as required by the Project Engineer, N 3.11 STORAGE OF SOIL MATERIALS ' A. Stockpile borrow materiels and satisfactory excavated soil materials. Stockpile soil materials without Intermixing. Place,grade,and shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent ' windblown dust. B. Stockpile soil materiels away from edge of excavations. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees, 3.12 BACKFILL ' A. Place and compact backfill in excavations promptly, but not before completing the following: 1. Construction below finish grade including, where applicable, dampproofing, ' waterproofing, and perimeter Insulation. 2. Surveying locations of underground utilities for record documents. 3. Inspecting and testing underground utilities. ' 4. Removing concrete formwork. 6. Removing trash and debris. 6. Removing temporary shoring and bracing, and sheeting. 7. Installing permanent or temporary horizontal bracing on horizontally supported walls. B. Acceptance of construction below finish grade. • 9. Verification that adjacent structures have attained sufficient strength to resist the backfill and surcharge loadings without damage. 1 EARTHWORK 02300-6 B. Backfill within 5 feet of structures shall be compacted with a hand held mechanical tamper. , 3.13 UTILITY TRENCH BACKFILL •' A. General: See pipe Installation detail on Plans. ' S. Place and compact bedding course. Shape bedding course to provide continuous support for bells,joints, and barrels of pipes and for joints,fittings, and bodies of conduits, ' C. Concrete backfill trenches that carry below or pass under footings and that are excavated within 18 inches 1450 mm)of footings. Place concrete to level of bottom of footings. D. Provide 4 Inch (100 mm) thick concrete base slab support for piping or conduit less than 30 ' Inches (750 mm)below surface of roadways. After installation and testing, completely encase piping or conduit In a minimum of 4 inches (100 mm) of concrete before backfilling or placing ' roadway base. E. Backfill shall be compacted with a hand held mechanical tamper around and over all utilities to , a point 2 feet(610 mm)from the edge of the utility. F. Place and compact granular bedding material surrounding the utility pipe or conduit as shown on the pipe installation details. , 1. Carefully compact material under pipe haunches and bring backfill evenly up on both sides and along the full length of utility piping or conduit to avoid damage or displacement of ' utility system. G. Coordinate backfilling with utilities testing. H. Fill voids with approved backfill materials as shoring and bracing, and sheeting is removed. I. Place and compact final backfill of satisfactory soil material to final subgrade. , J. Install warning tape directly above utilities, 12 inches(300 mm)below finished grade, except 6 inches 050 mm)below subgrade under pavements and slabs unless shown otherwise on the , Plans. 3,14 FILL ' A. Preparation: Remove vegetation, topsoil, debris, wet, and unsatisfactory soil materials, obstructions, and deleterious materials from ground surface prior to placing fills. , 1. Disc, or break up (scarify) soil foundation surfaces to a depth not less than 6'(152 mm) so fill material will bond with existing surface. 2. The Contractor shall proof-roll all soil foundations before placement of fill materials, ' B. When soil foundation to receive fill has a density less then that required for fill,break up ground surface to depth required,pulverize,moisture-condition or aerate soil and recompact to required ' density. C. Place fill material in layers to required elevations. , D. Surfaces that become too smooth or hard for adequate bonding of the next lift shall be scarified • before placing the next lift. EARTHWORK 02300- 7 ' E. Fill within 5 feet of structures shall be compacted with a hand held mechanical temper. '• 3,15 MOISTURE CONTROL ' A. Uniformly moisten or aerate subgrade and each subsequentfill or backfill layer before compaction within +/-3%of the optimum moisture content as required to obtain the specified compaction. 1. Do not place backfill or fill material on surfaces that are muddy,frozen,or contain frost or ice, 2. Remove and replace, or scarify and air-dry satisfactory soil materiel that is too wet to compact to specified density. e. Stockpile or spread and dry removed wet satisfactory soil materiel. 3.16 COMPACTION ' A. Place ball and fill materials In layers not more than 8 inches (200 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by heavy compaction equipment,and not more then 4 Inches(100 mm) in loose depth for material compacted by hand-operated tampers, B. Piece backfill and fill materials evenly on all sides of structures to required elevations, and uniformly along the full length of each structure. C. Compact soil to not less then the following percentages of maximum dry unit weight according to ASTM D 698: 1. Under structures, building slabs, steps and pavements, scarify and recompact top 12 Inches (300 mm) of existing subgrade and each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 2. Under walkways and all other site improvements,scarify and recompecttop6 Inches(150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 95 percent. 3. Under lawn or unpaved areas, scarify and recompact top 6 inches (150 mm) below subgrade and compact each layer of backfill or fill material at 90 percent, ' D. Compact aggregate base, aggregate surfacing and porous backfill to not less than 95 percent relative density as determined in accordance with ASTM D4253 and D4254. Maintain within -3 percent and +3 percent of optimum moisture content. 3.17 GRADING ' A. General: Uniformly grade areas to a smooth surface, free from irregular surface changes. Comply with compaction requirements and grade to cross sections, lines, and elevations Indicated. ' 1. ' Provide a smooth transition between adjacent existing grades and new grades. 2. Cut out soft spots, fill low spots, and trim high spots to comply with required surface tolerances. B. Site Grading: Slope grades to direct water away from buildings and to prevent ponding. Finish ' subgrades to required elevations within the following tolerances: • 1. Lawn or Unpaved Areas: Plus or minus 1 inch (25 mm). 2. Walks and Pavements: Plus or minus 1h inch (13 mm). 1 EARTHWORK 02300-8 1 C. Grading inside Building Lines: Finish subgrade to a tolerance of 'h inch (13 mm)when tested ' with a 10-foot (3-m) straightedge. 3.18 AGGREGATE BASE, SURFACE AND SHOULDER COURSES •, A. As shown on Plans, place base, surface and shoulder course material on prepared subgrades. ' 1, Shape subgrade and base to required cross-slope grades. 2. When thickness of compacted base or surface course is 6 inches(150 mm)or less,place ' materials in a single layer, unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. 3. When thickness of compacted base,surface or shoulder course exceeds 6 inches (150 mm),place materials in equal layers,with no layer more than 6 inches(150 mm)thick or ' less then 3 Inches(75 mm) thick when compacted. S. Shoulders: Place shoulders along edges of base course to prevent lateral movement. Construct ' shoulders as shown on Plans and compact simultaneously with each subgrade and base layer. C. Delivery: 1. Excessive moisture In aggregate delivered to site will not be permitted. The Contract , Supervisor will visually inspect each load prior to dumping. Loads with a moisture content above that allowed for compaction will be rejected. , D. Stockpiles: 1. Stockpile only with approval of the Contract Supervisor. ' 2. Clear and level storage sites prior to stockpiling. 3. Place in a manner and at locations designated by the Contract Supervisor providing separate stockpiles for materials from separate sources. 4. Prevent aggregatefrom segregating during placement,storage,and handling at stockpiles. E. Cold-Weather Limitations: , 1. Base, surface and shoulder course construction shall be prohibited when atmospheric temperature is below 35 degrees Fahrenheit unless permitted otherwise by the Project Engineer. , 2. Do not place base or surface courses on wet or frozen subgrade. 3. Protect base, surface and shoulder courses and subgrade in freezing weather and repair areas damaged by freezing by reshaping and recompacting prior to placing pavements. ' F. Preparation of Subgrade: 1. Clean off all foreign substances which includes, but not limited to,debris,roots, organic matter, refuse, ashes, cinder, and rock with any dimension greater then 3 inches. 2. Correct any ruts or soft yielding spots or any areas with inadequate compaction, by , removing material and replacing with properly compacted fill or course granular base. 3. Contract Supervisor will inspect for adequate compaction and surface tolerances prior to placing aggregate base. , G. Placing: 1. General: ' EARTHWORK 02300-9 1 a. Deposit and spread material In a uniform layer and compact to the thickness indicated and as specified. Spread material uniformly on the prepared subgrade ' from moving vehicles or spreader boxes. • b. Level material to the required contour and grades. C. Remove those portions of the layer which become segregated or mixed with subgrade materiel in spreading and replace with new material. d. Hauling which may damage the subgrade or surfacing will be restricted. e. Remove and repair subgrade damaged during application of the aggregate base ' material. H. Shaping and Compacting Materials: 1. Compact In layers no less than 3 nor more than 6 inches thick. 2. Roll to specified compaction requirements throughout full depth of layer with power rollers. 3. Shape and smooth by blading and rolling with power roller. ' . 4. Hand tamp in pieces not accessible to rolling equipment. B. Degree of compaction shall be as follows: ' a. Compact base, surface and shoulder courses at optimum moisture content to required grades, lines, cross sections and thickness to not less then 95 percent of ASTM D4254 relative density. b. Remove or scarify and recompact materiels failing to meet required densities. C. Removal of in-piece materiel and replacement with approved new material will be required if scarifying and recompaction do not produce the required densities. ' 6. Smoothness Test: a. Finished surfaces shall not vary more that +/- 0.04 foot from the elevations N b. indicated on the Plans. Correct any deviation in excess of this amount by loosening, adding or removing material, reshaping,watering, and compacting. I. Maintenance: ' 1. Maintain finished base or surface courses In a condition as required by the Contract Documents. 2. Repair or replace base or surface courses not satisfying the Contract requirements. ' 3,19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Testing: Allow Contract Supervisor to inspect and test each subgrade,fill,backfill,base,surface and shoulder layer. Proceed with subsequent earthwork only after test results for previously completed work comply with requirements. ' 1. Field in-place density tests shall be performed by the Contract Supervisor using the nuclear method according to ASTM D2922. B. When Contract Supervisor reports that subgrades, fills, backfilis or base courses are below specified density, scarify and moisten or aerate, or remove and replace soil or base to the depth required, recompact and retest until required density is obtained. 1• 3.20 PROTECTION EARTHWORK 02300- 10 1 A. Protecting Graded Areas: Protect newly graded areas from traffic, freezing, and erosion. Keep r free of trash and debris. B. Repair and reestablish grades to specified tolerances where completed or partially completed •r surfaces become eroded, rutted, settled, or where they lose compaction due to subsequent construction operations or weather conditions, r 1. Scarify or remove and replace soil materiel to depth as directed by Project Engineer; reshape and recompact. r C. Where settling occurs before Project correction period elapses,remove finished surfacing,backfill with additional soil materiel, compact, and reconstruct surfacing. 1. Restore appearance,quality,and condition of finished surfacing to match adjacent work, r and eliminate evidence of restoration to the greatest extent possible. END OF SECTION 02300 r r . 1 r r r r r r EARTHWORK 02300- 11 r ' SECTION 02800-LANDSCAPING '• PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and ' Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: ; 1. Lawns. 2. Topsoil and soil amendments. 3. Fertilizers and mulches. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 2 Section Site Clearing' for protection of existing trees and planting, topsoil stripping and stockpiling, and site clearing. ' 2. Division 2 Section 'Earthwork' for excavation, filling, rough grading, and subsurface aggregate drainage and drainage backfill. ' 13 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product certificates signed by manufacturers certifying that their products complywith specified requirements. - 1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products. 2. Analysis for other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods ' established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists,where applicable. C. Certification of grass Bead from seed vendor for each grass-seed mixture stating the botanical and common name and percentage by weight of each species and variety, and percentage of purity, germination, and weed seed. Include the year of production and date of packaging. D. Labels from seed containers. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Packaged Materials: Deliver packaged materials In containers showing weight, analysis,and name of manufacturer. Protect materials from deterioration during delivery and while stored at site. ' B. Seed: Deliver seed in original sealed, labeled, and undamaged containers. C. Fertilizer:Deliver Fertilizer in waterproof begs showing weight, chemical analysis and name of manufacturer. • 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' LANDSCAPING 02900- 1 1 A. Utilities: Determine location of above grade and underground utilities and perform work in a manner which will avoid damage. Hand excavate, as required. Maintain grade stakes until ' removal Is mutually agreed upon by parties concerned, B. Excavation: When conditions detrimental to plant growth are encountered, such as rubble fill, •' adverse drainage conditions, or obstructions, notify Project Manager before planting. 1.6 COORDINATION AND SCHEDULING A. Coordinate installation of planting materiels during normal planting seasons for each type of ' plant materiel required, 1.7 LIMITS ' A. The Contractor shall seed all areas of exposed earth that have been disturbed by construction operations unless otherwise stated. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 GRASS MATERIALS ' A. Gress Seed: Fresh, clean, dry, new-crop seed complying with the Association of Official Seed ' Analysts"Rules for Testing Seeds'for purity and germination tolerances. 1. Seed Mixture: Provide seed of grass species and varieties, proportions by weight, and minimum percentages of purity,germination,and maximum percentage of weed seed as ' Indicated on Schedules at the end of this Section. 2. Comply with the state seed laws of the State of Missouri. 2.2 TOPSOIL A. Topsoil: Free of stones 2 Inch (60 mm) or larger in any dimension, and other extraneous materials harmful to plant growth. ' 1. Topsoil Source: Reuse surface soil stockpiled on the site, Clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods,stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous materiels harmful to plant growth. ' 2.3 SOIL AMENDMENTS A. Lime: ASTM C 602,Class T, agricultural limestone containing a minimum 80 percent calcium ' carbonate equivalent, with a minimum 99 percent passing a No. 8 (2.36 mm) sieve and a minimum 76 percent passing a No, 60(250 micrometer) sieve. 1. Provide lime in the form of dolomitic limestone. , B. Water: Potable, ' 2.4 FERTILIZER A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting of , fast-and slow-release nitrogen,50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea-form, phosphorous, and potassium In the following composition: ' 1. Composition: Nitrogen - 12%,phosphoric acid-18%and soluble potash-24%. • LANDSCAPING 02900-2 , PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION '• A. Examine areas to receive landscaping for compliance with requirements and for conditions affecting performance of work of this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 PLANTING SOIL PREPARATION A. Before mixing, clean topsoil of roots, plants, sods, stones, clay lumps, and other extraneous ' materials harmful to plant growth. B. Apply soil amendments on surface of topsoil and mix thoroughly before planting. 1. Mix lime with dry soil prior to mixing fertilizer. Prevent lime from contacting roots of acid- tolerant plants. 2. Apply fertilizer directly to subgrade before tilling. 3. A'Planting Soil Amendments Schedule'is Included at the end of this Section. 3.3 LAWN PLANTING PREPARATION A. Limit subgrade preparation to areas that will be planted in the immediate future, B. Loosen subgrade to a minimum depth of 4 Inches (100 mm). Remove stones larger then 2 ' inches (50 mm) in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous materials• C. Spread planting soil mixture to 8' minimum to bring surfaces to grades depth and elevations N shown, after light rolling and natural settlement. Do not spread if planting soil or subgrade is frozen. 1. Place approximately 1h the thickness of planting soil mixture required. Work into top of ' loosened subgrade to create a transition layer and then place remainder of planting soil mixture. D. Grade lawn and grass areas to a smooth, even surface with loose, uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish grades. Limit fine grading to areas that can be planted in the immediate future. Remove trash, debris, stones larger then 1=1/2 inches (38 mm) In any dimension, and other objects that may interfere with planting or maintenance operations, E. Moisten prepared lawn areas before planting when soil is dry. Water thoroughly and allow surface to dry before planting. Do not create muddy soil. P. Restore prepared areas if eroded or otherwise disturbed after fine grading and before planting. ' 3.4 SEEDING NEW LAWNS A. Sow seed with a spreader or a seeding machine. Do not broadcast or drop seed when wind ' velocity exceeds 5 mph (8 km/h), Evenly distribute seed by sowing equal quantities in 2 directions at right angles to each other. ' 1. Do not use wet seed or seed that is moldy or otherwise damaged in transit or storage. • S. Sow seed at the following rates: LANDSCAPING 02900-3 1. Seeding Rate: B lb per 1000 sq. ft. (4 kg per 100 sq. m). ' C. Rake seed lightly Into top 1/8 Inch (3 mm) of topsoil, roll lightly,and water after mulching with ' fine spray. • D. Protect all other seeded areas against erosion by spreading straw mulch after completion of ' seeding operations. Spread uniformly at a minimum rate of 2 tons per acre (45 kg per 100 sq. m)to form a continuous blanket 1-1/2 Inches (38 mm) loose depth over seeded areas. Spread by hand, blower, or other suitable equipment, ' 1. Anchor straw mulch by crimping into topsoil by suitable mechanical equipment, 3.5 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION ' A. . During landscaping, keep pavements clean and work area in an orderly condition. B. Protect landscaping from damage due to landscape operations,operations by other contractors ' and trades,and trespassers. Maintain protection during Installation and maintenance periods, Treat, repair, or replace damaged landscape work as directed. ' 3.6 DISPOSAL OF SURPLUS AND WASTE MATERIALS A. Disposal: Remove waste materiels, including unsuitable soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of It off the Owner's property. 3.7 PLANTING SOIL AMENDMENTS SCHEDULE ' A. Lawns: Provide soil amendments in not less than the following quantities: 1. Weight of lime per 1000 sq.ft. (100 sq. m): 115 lbs. 2. Weight of commercial fertilizer per 1000 sq,ft. (100 sq. m): 10lbs. 3.8 SEED MIXTURES SCHEDULE ' A. Seed Mixture: Provide certified grass-seed blends or mixes,proportioned byweight,as follows: Seeding Min. Min. Max. ' Rate per Pct. Pct. Pct. Proportion Name 1000 sq.ft. Germ. Pure Sd. Weed Sd. 26% Fine Blade Turf Fescue 2 Ibs./ft' 90 95 0.50 ' (Jaguar) 26% Fine Blade Turf Fescue 2 Ibs./ft' 90 95 0.50 , (Hound dog) 25% Fine Blade Turf Fescue 2 Ibs./ft' 90 95 0.50 (Rebel ' 21.876% Annual Rye 1.76 Ibs./(t2 80 95 0.60 ' 3.125% Buffalo(609) .26 Ibs,/ft' 90 95 0.50 END OF SECTION 0290D ' LANDSCAPING 02900-4 ' 1• SECTION 02910 - LAWN SEEDING SPECIFICATIONS PART 1 - GENERAL ' 1 .1 Scope of Work A. Furnish all materials, tools, equipment, and labor for ' preparation of the seed bed and seeding the lawn areas as shown on the plans and specified herein. All areas to be sodded are shown on the drawing. All other areas disturbed by construction, which are not shown as sod, are to be seeded. 1 .2 Submittals ' A. When requested by the owner or owner' s representative, submit samples of all materials for approval. Submit ' seeding schedule before beginning of construction. Show coordination of normal planting times with construction schedule, and other related work. Submit ' tags from seed mixtures showing percentages of seed types, weed seed and inert matter. 1 . 3 Seasons for Seeding NA. The season for seeding shall be from April 1 to May 15 and August 15 to October 30. The actual seeding of lawns shall be done, however, only during periods within this season which are normal for such work as determined by weather conditions and by accepted practice in the locality of the project and which are ' approved by the Architect. Only upon written instructions by the Architect may planting begin earlier or continue later than the dates specified. ' S. The preparation of lawn areas to be seeded may begin as soon as the area is designated by the Owner' s ' Representative. 1.9 Related Sections ' A. Section 02301 Topsoil. PART 2 - PRODUCTS ' 2. 1 Materials A. Commercial Fertilizer: shall meet the following requirements : 99811 SEEDING 02930-1 1. Shall be a complete fertilizer containing in ' available form by weight a minimum of 108 nitrogen, 108 phosphoric acid and 108 potash, a minimum of 508 of nitrogen to be derived from ' natural organic materials in a slow release form, of a neutral character. 2. The fertilizer shall be delivered to the site in , the original unopened containers which shall bear the manufacturer' s guaranteed statement of analysis. Fertilizer shall be stored in a , weatherproof place in such a manner that it shall be kept dry and its effectiveness will not be impaired. , 2.2 Seed Bed Materials A. Agricultural Limestone: shall be a finely ground ' limestone rock, containing a minimum of a combined total of "calcium and magnesium carbonate equivalent" ' of from 85 to 908. All the material shall pass a 3/16" screen, approximately 908 shall pass a 08 screen and approximately 15 to 208 shall pass a H100 screen. B. Water: The Contractor will furnish water at the M project site as required for the execution of all work until all work has been completed. * ' C. Topsoil: The Contractor shall insure that sufficient topsoil is incorporated into the seed bed to guarantee ' satisfactory turf growth. See Section 02301 Topsoil. 2.3 Seeding Materials ' A. Grass Seed: 1. Grass seed shall be fresh, clean, new-crop seed. , The Contractor shall furnish to the Owner' s Representative the dealer's guaranteed statement of the composition of the mixture and the , percentage of purity and germination of each variety, for approval prior to seeding. 2. Grass seed shall be composed of the following ' varieties which shall be mixed in the proportions and sown at the rate specified. ' 99811 SEEDING 02930-2 '• a. Low Maintenance Mix Purity Germination Rate Tall Fescue 958 908 30#/ac Red Top . 90% 808 , 7#/ac ' Oats or Wheat 958 Varies 30#/ac B. Straw: Shall be threshed straw of hay, oats, wheat, barley, or rye not chopped in short lengths. C. Mulch Overspray Tackifier: to be a slick-paper mulch ' overspray product that meets Illinois Highway Department Standards. ' D. Erosion Control Blanket: shall be a machine produced mat of 1008 agricultural straw covered with photodegradable polypropylene netting top and . bottom and sewn together with cotton thread. Blanket to be ' North American Green 5150 or approved equivalent. E. Permanent Erosion Control Mat: Shall be a flexible, non-woven mat of randomly oriented Ultra Violet (U.V. ) stabilized Polyvinylchloride (PVC) monofilaments thermally welded together , into a three-dimensional; porous web. Mat to be Pec-Mat by Greenstreak, Miramat by Mirafil, Inc. , or approved equivalent. ' PART 3 - EXECUTION 3. 1 Seedbed Preparation A. Repair any eroded areas and make minor grading adjustments to provide good drainage and to meet grade at all walks and paved surfaces. B. Spread ground limestone over all areas to be seeded at ' the rate of 50 lbs per 1000 s. f. (2200 lbs per acre) with an approved vehicular spreader. ' C. Spread commercial grade 10-10-10 fertilizer over all areas to be seeded at the rate of 15 lbs per 1000 s. f. (650 lbs per acre) with an approved spreader. D. Disc and harrow or otherwise cultivate all area thoroughly in at least two directions to thoroughly mix 99811 SEEDING 02930-3 the above fertilizers into the soil to a depth of 31' •' (inches) . Drag lawn areas with approved equipment to insure a smooth surface to all lawn areas. Surface shall be cleaned of all stones larger than one inch, and of all existing vegetation, roots, brush, wire, ' grade stakes, and other objects. E. Inspection:. The Owner's Representative shall be ' notified upon completion of seedbed preparation to examine and approve the grading and soil preparation and condition prior to start of seeding operations. 3.2 Seeding A. Sow grass seed by mechanical spreaders of approved , type, doing the work in two operations at right angles to each other. B. Keep mulch and seed out of plant beds and off of walks, ' structures, and areas not to be seeded. Clean up these areas to satisfaction of the Architect (Owner' s Representative) . ' C. Roll the seeded areas to firmly bed the seed and then spread threshed straw on the seeded areas at the rate of two (2) tons (dry weight) per acre or hydro-mulch according to manufacturer' s recommendations. It shall be spread evenly and without damage to the seeded area. , D. On areas with slopes of 3: 1 (3 horizontal: 1 vertical) or less, use a cultipac to crimp straw into soil or a slick-paper mulch overspray to tack straw. The slick- ' paper mulch overspray shall be mixed and applied according to Missouri Highway -Department standards. E. On designated slopes of 3: 1 or greater, as indicated on ' the drawings, and swale areas, use an approved erosion control blanket over the seeded area. The erosion control blanket shall be installed and staked according ' to manufacturer' s specifications. F. On the bank areas of the retention ponds, at four (9) , feet above and below the proposed water level. as indicated on the drawings, use an approved permanent erosion control mat over the seeded area. The erosion , control mat shall be installed and secured according to manufacturer' s specifications. G. Hydro-seeding will be acceptable upon submission of information related to mulch material, mixture, 99811 SEEDING 02930-4 1 equipment, and personnel performing the work by the contractor and approval by the Owner' s Representative. 3.3 Reseeding ' A. Bare patches or washouts due to heavy rains prior to establishment and acceptance of the new turf shall be . regraded as needed, scratched, reseeded, rolled and watered, or sodded, as often as may be necessary as herein specified at Contractor' s expense. B. The intention of the contract is to plant a first-class stand of grass. Acceptance of seeded areas shall be only when sufficient growth insures that a good stand ' of grass will protect the lawn areas from erosion. This shall be in not less than thirty (30) days following completion. ' 3.4 Maintenance And Guarantee: A. Protection - Protection shall begin immediately after each portion of the work is completed by the Contractor. Contractor shall use metal fence stakes and one-fourth (1/4) inch diameter ropes or 410 gauge galvanized wire as necessary to show areas where no trespassing is permitted during the rest of his or other Contractors' operations or after completion of ' the work. Brightly colored plastic flagging shall be tied to wire to make its presence known. B. The maintenance of the seeded turf areas shall be the Contractor's responsibility until the new grass is 4 inches high and thick enough to receive its first mowing by the Owner. Contractor shall water as necessary and reseed bare spots which are larger than one square foot in size. Contractor shall protect seeded areas by watering, fertilizing, removing weeds, and reseeding as necessary, for a uniform stand of ' established grass and until approved by the Owner' s Representative. ' C. Guarantee - The Contractor shall guarantee the production of a close stand of the specified species of grass, acceptable to the Owner's Representative. All repairs and reseeding are to be done as part of this Contract and at no extra cost to the Owners. END OF SECTION 99811 SEEDING 02930-5 SECTION 03300-CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE • PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section specifies cast-in place concrete,including formwork, reinforcement,concrete materials.mix design,placement procedures,and finishes, B, Cast-in-place concrete includes the following: ' I. Foundations and footings. 2. Slabs-on-gradc 3. Walkways and pavements. 4. Other miscellaneous concrete. C. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 2 Section"Earthwork"for drainage fill under slabs-on-grade. 2. Division 13 Section"Meta]Building Syocme for building footings and foundations, 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Cementitious Materials: Portland cement alone or in combination with one or more of blended hydraulic cement,fly ash and other povolans,grand granulated blast-furnace slag,and silica fume. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of manufactured material and product indicated. ' B. Design Mixes: For each concrete mix. Include alternate mix designs when characteristics of materials, project conditions,weather,test results,or other circumstances warrant adjustments. Include laboratory test reports for concrete materials and mix design test This shall include compressive test results for a ' minimum of three cylinders, 1. Indicate amounts of mix water to be withheld for later addition at Project site. ' C. Steel Reinforcement Shop Drawings: Details of fabrication,bending,and placement,prepared according to ACI 315, "Details and Detailing or Concrete Reinforcement." Include material, grade,bar schedules, stirrup spacing,bent bar diagrams,arrangement,and supports of concrete reinforcement include special ' reinforcement required for openings through concrete structures, D. Joint layout drawing showing locations of all joints for each item of work. L Joints for slabs-on-grade shall include all high saw points. 2. Joints shall be spaced a maximum of 36 times the thickness of the stab(18`for a 6'slab). 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE I ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-1 A. Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer who has completed concrete Work similar in material, 1 design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance. , B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing rcady-mixed concrete products • complying with ASTM C 94 requirements for production facilities and equipment ' C, Source Limitations: Obtain each type or class of cementitious material of the same brand from the same manufacturer's plant,each aggregate from one source,and each admixture from the same manufacturer. D. Codes and Standards: Comply with provisions of the following axles, specifications, and standards, ' except where morc stringent requirements arc shown or specified: E. ACI Publications: Comply with the following,unless more stringent provisions arc indicated: , 1. ACI 301,"Specification for Structuml Concrete." 2. ACI 318,"Building CodeRequircments for Reinforced Concrete." ' 3. ACI 117,"Specifications for Tolerances for Concrete Construction and Materials." 4. Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute(CRSI)"Manual of Standard Pmetfce." 5. American Society of Healing Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) IESNA ' Standard 90.1. PART 2-PRODUCTS , 2.1 FORM-FACING MATERIALS ' A. Smooth-Formed Finished Concrete: Form-facing panels that will provide continuous, true, and smooth concrete surfaces. Furnish in largest practicable sizes to minimize number of joints. 1. Exterior-grade plywood panels, suitable for concrete forms, complying with DOC PS 1, and as follows: a. High-density overlay,Class 1,or better. ' B. Rough-Formal Finished Concrete: Plywood, lumber, metal, or another approved material. Provide lumber dressed on at least two edges and one side for tight fit. 1. Plywood,metal,or other approved panel materials. ' C. Form-Release Agent: Commercially formulated Corm-release agent that will not bond with, slain, or ' adversely affect concrete surfaces and will not impair subsequent treatments of concrete surfaces. 1. Formulate form-release agent with rust inhibitor for steel form-facing materials. 2.2 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. Reinforcing Bars: ASTM A 615lA 615K Grade 60(Grade 420),deformed. ' B. Plain-Steel Welded Wire Fabric: ASTM A 185,fabricated from as-drawn steel wire into Bat sheets. 2.3 REINFORCEMENT ACCESSORIES A. Bar Supports: Bolsters, chairs, spacers, and other devices for spacing, supporting, and fastening reinforcing bars and welded wire fabric in place. Manufacture bar supports according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice" from steel wire, plastic, or precast concrete or fiber-reinforced concrete of greater compressive strength than concrete,and as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-2 ' 1. For concrete surfaces exposed to view where legs of wire bar supports contact forms, use CRSI ' Class I plastic-protected or CRSI Class 2 stain)ess-steel bar supports. • B. Joint Dowel Bars: Plain-steel bars, ASTM A 615 1A 615K Grade 60 (Grade 420). Cut bars true to length with ends square and free of burs. ' 2.4 CONCRETE MATERIALS ' A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I, I/II, 11, Ill, or V, or a blended hvdraulic cement (ASTM C 595K Type 1): 1. ' Ground Granulate!Blast-Furnace Slag: ASTM C 989,Grade 100 or 120. 2. Silica Fume: ASTM C 1240,amorphous silica. B. Normal-Weight Aggregate: ASTM C 33,uniformly graded,and as follows: 1. Class: Severe wcathering region,4S. 2. Nominal Maximum Aggregate Size: 1-1/2 inches(38 mm). 3. Do not use aggregates that contain substances that cause spatting. ' C. Water. Potable and complying with ASTM C 94. ' 2.5 ADMIXTURES A. Gcnemd: Admixtures certified by manufacturer to contain not more than 0.1 percent water-soluble ' chloride ions by mass of cementitious material and to be compatible with other admixtures and cementltious materials. Do not use admixtures containing calcium chloride. B. Air-Entraining Admixture: ASTM C 260. C. Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type A. ' D. High-Range,Water-Reducing Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type F. E. Water-Reducing and Accelerating Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type E. ' F. Water-Roducing and Retarding Admixture: ASTM C 494,Type D. ' 2.6 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Vapor Retarder. ASTM E 1745, Class C, of one of the following materials; or polyethylene shoot, ' ASTM D 4397,not lass Wan 10 mils(0.25 mm)total thicimess: 1. Nonwoven,polyester-reinforced,polyethylene coated sheet; 10 mils(0.25 mm)Wick 2. Three-ply, nylon- or polyester-cord-reinforced, laminated, high-density polyethylene sheet; 7.8 ' mils(0.18 mm)thick. ' 2.7 CURING MATERIALS A. Evaporation Retarder. Watenboruc, monomolecular film forming, manufactured for application to fresh concrete. B. Absorptive Cover: AASHTO M 182, Class$ burlap cloth made from jute or kenaf. Avigbing approximately 9 oz./sq.yd.(305 g/sq,in)dry. C. Moisture-Retaining Cover. ASTM C 171,polyethylene film or white burlap-polyethylene shcct. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-3 D. Water. Potable, ' E. Clear,Walerborne.Membrane-Forming Curing Compound: ASTM C 309,Type 1,Class B. , 2,8 RELATED MATERIALS •, A. Joint-Filler Strips: ASTM D 1751,asphalt-saturated cellulosic fiber. B. Bonding Agent: ASTM C 1059,Type 11,non•redispersible,acrylic emulsion or styrene butadiene. , C. Epoxy-Bonding Adhesive: ASTM'C881, two-componcnt epoxy resin, capable of humid curing and bonding to damp surfaces,of class and grade to suit requirements,and as follows: ' 1. Types I and 11, non-load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete. 2. Types IV and V, load bearing, for bonding hardened or freshly mixed concrete to hardened concrete.% , D. Sealing Compound: Clear,Water(wmc, Membrane-Forming Scaling Compound: ASTM c 309,Type 1. Class B. , E. Foundation Insulation: Provide a 24 inch high layer of extruded polystyrene board insulation with a thermal resistance value of R-8 installed vertically around the outside peritnetcr of tire foundation wall at such a depth that tire top of the board is 3 inches below grade as specified per ASHRAE/IESNA ' STANDARD 90.1. F. Joint Sealants: Dow Coming 888 or an approved equal.. , 2.9 REPAIRMATERIALS A. Repair Topping: Traffic-bpring, cement-based. polymer-modified, self-leveling product that can be applied in thiclmrsses from 1/4 inch(6 nmh). I. Cement Binder: ASTM C 150, Portland cement or hydraulic or blended hydraulic cement as ' defined in ASTM C 219. 2. Primer. Product of topping manufacturer recommended for substrate,conditions,and application. ' 3. Aggregate: Well-graded, washed gravel, 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 rant) or coarse sand as recommended by topping manufacturer. 4. Compressive Strength: Not less than 5700 psi (39 MPa) at 28 days when tested according to ASTM C 109/C 109NL ' 2.10 CONCRETE MIXES A. Prepare design mixes for each type and strength of concrete determined by either laboratory trial mix or ' field test data bases,as follows: I. Proportion normal-weight concrete according to ACI 211.1 and ACI 301. ' B. Use a qualified independent testing agency for preparing and reporting proposed mix designs for the laboratory trial mix basis. ' C. Footings and Foundation Walls: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 3500 psi(31 MPa). 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches(100 min). 3. Maximum Slump for Concrete Containing High-Range Water-Reducing Admixture: 8 inches (200 nom)after admixture is added to concrete with 2-to 4-inch(30•to I00•nhm)slump. D. • Slaban-Grade: Proportion normal-weight concrete mix as follows: CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033004 ' 1. Compressive Strength(28 Days): 4000 psi(27.6 MPa). ' 2. Maximum Slump: 4 inches(100 mm). • E. Maximum Water-Ccmentidous Materials Ratio: 0.45, F. Cementitious Materials: For concrete exposed to deicers, limit percentage, by weight, of cementitious materials other than portland cement according to ACI 301 and ACI 318 requirements. G. Air Content: Add air-entraining admixture at manufacturer's prescribed rate to result in concrete at point of placement having an air content as follows within a tolerance of plus 1 or minus 1,5 percent,unless otherwise indicated: ' 1. Air Content: 5.5 percent for 1-12-inch-(39-mm-)nominal maximum aggregate sine. 2. Air Content: 6 percent for 1-inch-(25-mm-)nominal maximum aggregate size. 3. Air ContenC 6 percent for 3/4-inch-(19-min-)nominal maximum aggregate size, R Do not air entrain concrete to trowel-finished interior floors. Do not allow entrapped air content to exceed 3 percent. ' 1. Admixtures: Use admixtures according to manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Use water-reducing admixture or high-range water-reducing admixture (supetplasticizcr) in concrete,as required,for placement and workability. 2. Use water-reducing and retarding admixture when required by high temperatures,low humidity,or other adverse placement conditions. 3. Use water-reducing admixture in pumped concrete, concrete for heavy-use industrial slabs and ' parking muctuurc slabs,concrete required to be watenighL and concrete with a water-cementidous materials ratio below 0.50. 2.11 FABRICATING REINFORCEMENT A. Fabricate steel reinforcement according to CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practiw." ' 2.12 CONCRETE MIXING ' A. Rcady-Mixod Concrete: Measure, batch mu, and deliver concrete according to ASTM C 94 and ASTM C 1116,and furnish batch ticket information. ' 1. When air temperature is between 85 and 90 deg F(30 and 32 deg C),reduce mixing and delivery time from 1-12 hours to 75 minutes;when air temperature is above 90 deg F(32 deg C), reduce mixing and delivery time to 60 minutes. ' 2. Provide batch ticket for each batch discharged and used in the Work, indicating Prqjcct identification name and number,date,mix type,mix time,quantity,any admixtures and amount of water added. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 GENERAL A. Coordinate the installati on of joint materials,vapor barrier,and other related materials with placement of forms and reinforcing steel. 12 SURFACE PREPARATION ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-5 A. Proof-roll prepared base surface to check for unstable areas and verify need for additional compaction Do not begin work until such conditions have been corrected and arc ready to receive concrete. B. Remove loose material from compacted subbase surface immediately before placing concrete. i 3.3 FORMWORK •I A. DcsigA crest, shore, brace, and maintain formwork, according to ACI301, to support vertical, lateral, static, and dynamic loads, and construction loads that might be applied, until concrete structure can support such loads. B. Construct formwork so concrete members and structures arc of size, shape, alignment, elevation, and position indicated,within tolerance limits of ACI 117. C. Limit concrete surface irregularities.designated by AC1347R as abrupt or gradual.as follows: 1. Concrete exposed to view-Class A, 1/8 inch(3 mm). 2. Concrete not exposed to view-Class C, 1/2 inch(13 nun). D, Construct forms tight enough to prevent loss of concrete mortar. E. Fabricate forms for easy removal without hammering or prying against concrete surfaces. Provide crush ' or wrecking plates where stripping may damage cast concrete surfaces. Kerr wood inserts for forming keyways,reglets,recesses,and the like,for easy removal. 1. Do not use rust-stained steel form-facing material. , F. Set edge forms, bulkheads, and intermediate screed strips for slabs to achieve required elevations and slopes in finished concrete surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips; use strike-off templates or compacting-type screeds. G. Chamfer exterior comers and edges of permanently exposed concrete. H. Form openings, chases, offsets,siNmges,keyways, rcglets,blocking, screeds, and bulkheads required in ' the Work. Determine sizes and locations from trades providing such items. 1. Clean forms and adjacent surfaces to receive concrete. Remove chips, wood sawdust, dirt. and other debris just before placing concrete, J. Refighten forms and bracing before placing concrete, as required, to prevent mortar leaks and maintain proper alignment. K. Coat contact surfaces of forms with form-release agent,according to manufaaurces written instructions. , before placing reinforcement. L. Earthen Forums: Footings may be cast using earthen forms. 3.4 EMBEDDED ITEMS A. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is , attached to or supported by cast-in-place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, instructions.and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts.accurately located,to elevations required. 3.5 PREPARING FORM SURFACES CAST-DJ-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-6 ' ' A. General: Coal contact surfaces of forms with an approved nonresidual, form-coaling compound before ' placing reinforcement. • B. Do not allow excess form-coating material to accumulate in forms or come into contact with in-place concrete surfaces against which fresh concrete will be placed. Apply according to manufacturer's ' instructions. 1. Coat steel forms with a nonstaining,rust-preventative material. Rust-stained steel formwork is not acceptable. 3.6 REMOVING AND REUSING FORMS A. General: Formwork, for sides of beams, walls, columns. and similar parts of the Work,that does not support weight of concrete may be removed after cumulatively wring at not less than 50 deg F(10 deg C) for 24 hours after placing concrete provided concrete is hard enough to not be damaged by form-removal ' operations and provided wring and protection operations are maintained. B. Clean and repair surfaces of forms to be reused in the Work. Split, frayed, delaminated, or otherwise damaged form-faring material will not be acceptable for exposed surfaces. Apply new form-rcleasc agent. C. When forms arc reused, clean surfaces, remove fins and laitance,and tighten to close joints. Align and ' secure joints to avoid offsets. Do not use patched forms for exposed concrete surfaces unless approved by Project Engineer. 3.7 DRAINAGE COURSE INSTALLATOION A. General: Place a minimum of a 4"thick aggregate drainage course under all building slabs. 3.9 VAPOR RETARDERS A. Gencml: Place vapor barrier shooting in position under all building slabs over the lop of the aggregate drainage course. Place with longest dimension parallel with direction of pour. Place in two directions if using two layers of vapor barrier. ' B. Vapor Retarder. Place, protect, and repair vapor-retarder shoos according to ASTM E 1643 and ruanufaeurces written instructions. C. Lap joints G inches and seal with manufacturer's recommended mastic or pressure-sensitive tape. 3.9 STEEL REINFORCEMENT A. General: Comply with CRSI's"Manual of Standard Practice'for placing reinforcement ' 1: Do not cut or puncture vapor retarder. Repair damage and reseal vapor retarder before placing concrete. ' B. Clean reinforcement of loose rust and mill scale,earth,icc,and otter foreign materials. C. Accurately position, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement Locate and support reinforcement with bar supports to maintain minimum concrete cover. Do not tack weld crossing reinforcing bars. D. Place reinforcement to maintain minimum coverages as indicated for concrete protection. Atmnge,space, and securely to bars and bar supports to hold reinforcement in position during concrete placement operations. ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033011-7 E. Set wiry des with ends directed into concrete,not toward exposed concrete surfaces. ' F. Install welded wire fabric in longest practicable lengths on bar supports spaced to minimize sagging. Lap ' edges and ends of adjoining shects at least one mesh spacing. Offset laps of adjoining she t widths to prevent continuous laps in either direction, Lace overlaps with wire. • 3.10 JOINTS ' A. General: Construct joints true to line with faces perpendicular to surface plane of concrete. Construct ' transverse joints at right angles to the centerline, unless indicated otherwise. When joining existing or previously installed work,place joints to align with previously'placcd joints,unless instructed otherwise. E. Construction Joints: Install so strength and appearance of concrete are not impaired, at locations indicated or as approved by Project Engineer. 1. Place joints perpendicular to main reinforcement. Continue reinforcement across construction ' joints,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Form from bulkhgd forms with keys, unless otherwise indicated. Embed keys at least 1-1 12 inches(38 mm)into concrete. ' 3. Locate horizontal joints in wails and columns at underside of floors,slabs,beams,and girders and at the top of footings or floor slabs. 4. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened concrete surfaces. ' C. Contraction Joints in Slabs-cn-Grade: Form wcakencxl-plane contraction joints,sectioning concrete into areas as indicated. Construct contraction joints for a depth equal to at (cast one-sixth of concrete , thickness.as follows: I. Sawed Joints: Form contraction joints with power saws equipped with sbaucrpmof abrasive or diamond-rimmed blades. Cut joints 1/8-inch-(3•mm-)wide by 1/6 of the slab depth into concrete. Saw the joints at a time when cutting action will not tear,abrade,or otherwise damage surface and before concrete develops random contraction cracks. 2. Location and Spacing: Locale joints as follows: a. Walkways: If contraction joints arc not shown, the joint spacing shall be approximately ' equal to the width of the walkway and at equal spacing between transitions. Maximum spacing shall be 8 ft.. b. Floor Slabs: If joint pattem is not shown, provide joints not exceeding 18 fl. in either direction and located to conform to bay spacing wherever possible(at column oemerlines, , half bays,third bays). D. Isolation Joints in Slabs-on-Grade: After removing formwork, install joint-filler strips at slab junctions , with vertical surfaces, such as column pedestals, foundation walls, grade beams, and other locations, as indicated. 1. Terminate full-width joint-filler strips not Itss than 1/2 inch(12 nun)or more than 1 inch(25 nun) ' below finished concrete surface where joint sealants, specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants,"arc applicable. 2. Install joint-filter strips in lengths as long as practicable. Where more than one length is required, ' lace or clip sections together. E. Dowel Joints: Install dowel sleeves and dowels or dowel bar and support assemblies at joints whom indicated. , 1. Use dowel sleeves or lubricate or asphah-coat one-half of dowel length to prevent concrete bonding to one side of joint. 2. Use doweled joints where aprons and walkways intersect building construction. 3. Space 2' x'h"dowels as indicated or 2'maximum. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-8 , ' 3.11 INSTALLING EMBEDDED ITEMS ' A. General: Set and build into formwotk anchomgc devices and other embedded items required for other • work that is attached to or supported by cast-in•placc concrete. Use setting drawings. diagrams, instructions,and directions provided by suppliers of items to be attached. B. Place and secure anchorage devices and other embedded items required for adjoining work that is attached to or supported by cast-in•place concrete. Use Setting Drawings, templates, diagrams, ' instructions.and directions furnished with items to be embedded. 1. Install anchor bolts,accurately located,to elevations required. C. Forms for Slabs: Set edge forms.bulkheads,and intermediate scred strips for slabs to achieve required ' elevations and contours in finished surfaces. Provide and secure units to support screed strips using strike-off templates or compaWngdype screeds. ' 3.12 CONCRETE PLACEMENT A. General: Comply with ACI 304,"Guide for Measuring. Mixing,Transporting,and Placing Concrete." ' and as specified. B. Before placing concrete, verify that installation of formwork, reinforcement, and embedded items is ' complete and that required inspections have been performed. C. Remove snow, ice or frost from subbase surface and reinforcing before placing condrete. Do not place concrete on surfaces that arc frozen. ' D, Moisten subbase to provide a uniform dampened condition at the time concrete is placed Do not place concrete around manholes or other structures until they arc at the required finish elevation and alignment. NE. Before placing concrete,water may be added at Project site,subject to limitations of ACI 301. 1. Do not add water to concrete after adding high-range water-reducing admixtures to mix. ' F. Deposit concrete continuously or in lavers of such thickness that no new concrete will be placed on concrete that has hardened enough to cause scams or planes of weakness. If a section cannot be placed continuously,provide construction joints as specified. Deposit concrete to avoid segregation. G. Use a bonding agent at locations where fresh concrete is placed against hardened or partially hardened surfaces. ' K Deposit concrete in forms in horizontal layers no deeper than 24 inches (600 mm) and in a manner to avoid inclined construction joints Place each layer while preceding layer is still plastic, to avoid cold ' joints. 1. Consolidate placed concrete with mechanical vibrating equipment. Use equipment and procedures for consolidating concrete recommended by ACI 309R. 2. Do not use vibrators to transport concrete inside forms. Inset and withdraw vibrators vertically at uniformly spaced locations no farther than due visible effectiveness of the vibrator. Place vibrators to rapidly penetrate placed layer and at least 6 inches (150 mm) into preceding layer. Do not ' insert vibrators into lower layers of concrete that have begun to lose plasticity. At each insertion, limit duration of vibration to time ncccssaty to consolidate concrete and complete embedment of reinforcement and other embedded items without causing mix constituents to segregate. ' 1. Deposit and consolidate concrete for floors and slabs in a continuous operation, Aithin limits of construction joints, until placement of a panel or section is complete. '• I. Consolidate concrete during placement operations so concrete is thoroughly worked around reinforcement and other embedded items and into comers. 2. Maintain reinforcement in position on chairs during concrete placcmenL ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033(X1-9 3. Screed slab surfaces with a straightedge and strike off to correct elevations. 4. Slope surfaces uniformly to drains where required. 5. Begin initial floating using bull Boats or darbies to form a uniform and open-tcalured surface , plane,free of humps or hollows,before excess moisture or bleedwater appears on the surface. Do not further disturb slab surfaces before starting finishing operations. • J. Cold-Weather Placement Comply with ACI 306.1 and as follows. Protect concrete work from physical , damage or reduced strength that could be caused by frost freezing actiom or low temperatures. I. When air temperature has fallen to or is expected to fall below 40 deg F (4.4 deg C), uniformly ' heat water and aggregates before mixing to obtain a concrete mixture temperature of not less than 50 deg F(10 deg Q and not more than go deg F(27 deg C)at point of placement 2. Do not use frozen materials or materials containing ice or snow. Do not place concrete on frozen ' subgrade or on subgradc containing frozen materials. 3. Do not use calcium chloride, salt or other materials containing amif re7m agents or chemical accelerators,unless otherwise specified and approval in mix designs. IG Hot-Weather Placement: Place concrete according to recommendations in ACI 305R and as follows, ' when hot-weather conditions exist: 1. Cool ingredients before mixing to maintain concrete temperature below 90 deg F (32 deg C) at ' time of placement Chilled mixing water or chopped ice may be used to control temperature, provided water equivalent of ice is calculated to total amount of mixing water. Using liquid nitrogen to cool concrete is Contractor's option. ' 2. Cover steel reinforcement with water-soaked burlap so steel temperature will not exceed ambient air temperature immediately before embedding in concrete. 3. Fog-spray forms, steel reinforcement,and subgrade just before placing concrete. Keep mbgrade , moisture uniform without standing water.soft spift or dty areas. 3.13 FINISHING FORMED SURFACES A. Schedule: 1. Surfaces that will not be exposed to public view or receive any further covering or eating shall ' receive a rough-formal finish. 2. Surfaces that will be exposed to public view or that are to be covered with a coating or covering material applied directly to concrete, such as waterproofing, dampproofrng, vencer plaster, or painting shall receive a smooth-formed finish and a smooth-Tubbed finish. ' B. Rough-Formed Finish: As-cast concrete texture impanel by form-facing material with tic holes and defective arras repaired and patched. Remove fins and other projections exceeding ACI 347R limits for ' class of surface speciGet C. Rubbed Finish: Apply the following to smooth-formal finished concrete: I. Smooth-Rubbed Finish: Not later than one day after form removal.moisten concrete surfaces and ' rub with carborundum brick or another abrasive until producing it uniform color and texture. Do not apply cement grout other titan that created by the Tubbing process. ' D. Related Unformed Surfaces: At tops of wails.horizontal offsets.and similar unformed surfaces adjacent to formed surfaces, strike off smooth and finish with a texture matching adjacent formed surfaces. Continue final surface treatment of formed surfaces uniformly across adjacent unformed surfaces, unless , otherwise indicated 3.14 FINISHING FLOORS AND SLABS ' A. General: Comply with recommendations in ACI 302.111 for screding, restraighuening, and finishing • operations for concrete surfaces. Do not wet concrete surfaces. , CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 033(1)-10 B. Float Finish: Consolidate surface with power-driven floats or by hand floating if area is small or ' inaccessible to power driven floats. Restraightcn, cut down high spots,and fill low spots, Repeat float passes and restraightening unfit surface is left with a uniform, smooth. granular texture free of trowel • marks. Finish to a tolerance of 1/4 inch (6.4 mm) in 10fcot as determined with a 10 foot straight edge placed anywhere on the slab,in any direction(ACI Class A tolerance). 1. Apply float finish to surfaces to receive trowel or broom finish. ' C. Trowel Finish: After applying float finish, apply first trowel finish and consolidate concrete by land or power-Mvcn trowel. Continue troweling passes and restraighten unfit surface is free of trowel marks and uniform in texture and appearance. Grind smooth any surface defects that would telegraph through applied coatings or floor coverings. 1. Apply a trowel finish to all interior floor surfaces, including all floor and slab surfaces exposed to view or to be covered with resilient flooring, carpet, ceramic or quarry file set over a cleavage ' membrane,paim,or another tun film-finish coating system 2. Finish and measure surface so gap at any point between concrete surfam and an unleveled freestanding 10-fool-(3.05•m-)long straightedge,testing on two high spots and placed anywhere ' on the surface.does not exceed the following: a. 1/8 inch(3.2 mm). ' D. Broom Finish: Apply a broom finish to exterior concrete platformm steps, and ramps,and elsewhere as indicated. 1. Medium-to-Fine-Textured Broom Finish: Slightly roughen trafficked surface by drawing a soft ' bristle broom across concrete surface perpendicular to main traffic route. Coordinate required final finish with Project Engineer before application. 3.15 MISCELLANEOUS CONCRETE ITEMS A. Filfaug In: Fill in holes and openings left in concrete structures,unless otherwise indicated,after work of other trades is in place. Mix,place,and cure concrete, as specified,to blend with in-place construction. Provide other miscellaneous concrete felting indicated or required to complete Work ' B. Equipment Bases and Foundations: Provide machine and equipment bases and foundations as shown on Drawings. Set anchor bolts for machines and equipment at corned ciceations,complying with diagrams or templates of manufacturer furnishing machines and equipment. ' 3.16 CONCRETE PROTECTION AND CURING A. General: Protect freshly placed concrete from premature drying and excessive cold or hot temperatures. Comply with ACI 306.1 for cold-weather protection and with recommendations in ACI 305R for Ihot- weather protection during curing. B. Evaporation Retarder: Apply evaporation retarder to unformed concrete surfaces if hot. dir, or windy conditions cause moisture loss approaching 0.2 Ib/sq, ft. x b(I kg/sq, m x h)before and during finishing operations. Apply according to manufacturer's written instructions alter placing, scrceding. and bull ' floating ordarbying concrete.but before float finishing. C. Formed Surfaces: Cure formed concrete surfaces, including underside of beams, supported slabs, and other similar surfaces. If forms remain during wring period, moist cure after loosening forms. If ' removing forms before end of curing period, continue curing by one or a combination of the following • methods: ' D. Unformed Surfaces: Begin curing immediately after finishing concrete. Cure unformed surfaces, including floors and slabs, concrete floor toppings, and other surfaces, by one or a combination of the following methods: ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-11 1. Moisture Curing: Keep surfaces continuously moist for not less than seven days with the following materials: , a. Water. • b. Continuous water-fog spray. C. Absorptive cover,water saturated,and kept continuously wet. Cover concrete surfaces and ' edges with 12-inch(300-mm)lap over adjacent absorptive covers. 2. Moisture-Retaining-Cover Curing: Cover concrete surfaces with moisture-retaining cover for , curing concrete,placed in widest practicable width, with sides and ends lapped at least 12 inches (300 mm), and scaled by waterproof tape or adhesive. Cute for not less than seven days. Immediately repair any holes or tears during curing period using cover material and waterproof tape. , 3. Curing Compound: Apply uniformly in continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas subjected to heavy rainfall within Wren hours ' after initial application. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. E. Scaled Concrete: Seal all exposed concrete floors within the building after they arc enclosed and all other construction operations that would damage floor finish are completed. Apply a minimum of two coals as , recommended by the manufacturer and as necessary to produce a high gloss sheen 1. Curing and Scaling Compound: Apply uniformly to floors and stabs indicated in a continuous operation by power spray or roller according to manufacturer's written instructions. Recoat areas ' subjected to heavy rainfall within three hours after initial application. Repeat process 24 hours later and apply a second coat. Maintain continuity of coating and repair damage during curing period. 1 3.17 JOINT FILLING •A. Prepare,clean.and install joint filler according to manufacturer's written instructions. N 1. Do not fill joints until construction traffic has permanently ceased. B. Remove dirt debris,saw cuttings,curing compounds,and scalers from joints;leave contact fates of joint clean and dry. 3.18 CONCRETE SURFACE REPAIRS , A. Defective Concrete: Repair and patch defective areas when approved by Project Engineer. Remove and ' replace concrete that cannot be repaired and patched to Project Engincer's approval. B. Patching Mortar. Mix dry-pack patching mortar,consisting of one part Portland cement to two and one- ' half pans fine aggregate passing a No. IG (1.2-min) sieve, using only enough water for handling and placing. C. Repairing Formed Surfaces: Surface defects include color and texture irregularities, cracks, spolls, air ' bubbles, honeycombs, rock pockets, fins and other projections on the surface, and stains and other discoloration that cannot be removed by cleaning. 1, lmmodialcly after form removal, cut out honeycombs, rock pockets, and voids more than 1/2 inch ' (13 ntm) in any dimension in solid concrete but not less than 1 inch (25 nun) in depth. Make edges of cuts perpendicular to concrete surface. Clean, dampen with water, and brush-coat holes , and voids with bonding agcnL Fill and compact with patcldng mortar before bonding agent has dried. Fill form-tic voids with patching mortar or cone plugs secured in place with bonding agcnL • 2. Repair defects on surfaces exposed to view by blending white portland cement and standard panWd cement so that,when dry,patching mortar will match surrounding color. Patch a tat area , at inconspicuous location to verify mixture and color match before proceeding with patching. Compact mortar in place and strike off slightly higher than surrounding surface. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300-12 , 3. Repair defects on concealed formed surfaces that affect concrete's durability and structural ' performance as determined 1)),Project Engineer, D, Repairing Unformed Surfaces: Test unformed surfaces, such as floors and slabs, for finish and verify surface tolerances specified for cacti surface. Correct low and high areas. Test surfaces sloped to drain for trueness of slope and smoothness;use a sloped template. 1, Repair finished surfaces containing defects. Surface defects include spalls, popouts,honeycombs, ' rock pockets, crazing and cracks in excess of 0.01 inch (0;25 mm) wide or that penetrate to reinforcement or completely through unminforced sections regardless of width, and other objectionable conditions. 2. After concrete has cured at least 14 days,conw high areas by grinding. 3. Correct localized low areas during or immediately after completing surface finishing operations by tufting out low areas and replacing with patching mortar. Finish repaired areas to blend into adjacent concrete. ' 4. Correct other low areas scheduled to receive floor coverings with a repair underlayment. Prepare, mix,and apply repair underlayment and primer according to manufacturer's written instructions to produce a smooth, uniform plane, and level surface. Feather edges to match adjacent floor elevations. 5. Correct other low areas scheduled to remain exposed with a repair topping, Cut out low areas to ensure a minimum repair topping depth of 114 inch (6 mm) to match adjacent floor elevations. Prepare,mix,and apply repair topping and primer according to manufacturer's written instruction to produce a smooth,uniform,plane,and level surface. 6. Repair defective areas,except random cracks and single holes 1 inch(25 mnh)or less in diameter, by cutting out and replacing with fresh concrete. Remove defective arras with clean,square cuts and expose sleet reinforcement with at least 3/4 inch (19 mm) clearance all around. Dampen ' concrete surfaces in contact with patching concrete and apply bonding agent. Mix patching concrete of same materials and mix as original concrete except without coarse aggregate. Place, compact, and finish to blend with adjacent finished concrete. Cure in same manner as adjacent concrete. 7.7. Repair random cracks and single hotel 1 inch (25 mint or less in diameter with patching mortar. Groove top of cracks and cut out holes to sound concrete and clean off dust, dirt, and loose particles. Dampen cleaned concrete surfaces and apply bonding agent. Place patching mortar before bonding agent has dried Compact patching mortar and finish to match adjacent concrete. Keep patched area continuously moist for at least 72 hours. ' E. Perform structural repairs of concrete, subject to Project Engineer's approval, using epoxy adhesive and patching mortar. F. Repair materials and installation not specified above may be used,subject to Project Engineer's approval. ' 3.19 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. General: During the progress of construction,tests will be made by the Contract Supervisor to determine whether the concrete conforms to the requirements of the Contract Documents. Test specimens shall be considered representative of the concrete from the batch in winch they are taken ' B. Sampling and testing for quality control during concrete placement may include the following.as directed by Project Engineer. ' I. All test cylinders shall be tested at an independent testing lab selected by the Project Engineer. 2. Test cylinders shall be taken in sets of four,unless it is requested by the Contractor that additional cylinders be taken The four cylinders are reserved for use by the Project Engineer,for standard 7 and 28 day compressive strength test. At the Contractors option and expense,additional cylinders ' may be taken. Before requesting die taking of any extra cylinders.the Contractor must execute an agreement with the testing lab to pay directly for all storage and testing of all extra cylinders. The • Contractor shall then request in writing to the Project Engineer that additional cylinders be taken. The Contractor should also specify in Ids letter, die antes or concrete work for which the extra cylinders should betaken and the number of extra cylinders requested. h will be tihc Contractor's responsibility to coordinate with the testing lab the date and time for testing any extra cylinders. 3. Sampling Fresh Concrete: ASTM C 172,except modified for slump to comply widi ASTM C 94. CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300.13 a. Slump: ASTM C 143;a minimum of one test at point of discharge for each day's pour of 1 each type of concrete;additional tests when concrete consistency seems to have changed 1 b. Air Content: ASTM C 173,volumetric method for lightweight or normal weight concrete; ASTM C 231, pressure method for normal weight concrete; a minimum of one for each • day's pour of each type of air-entrained concrete. C. Concrete Temperature: ASTM C 1064; a minimum of one test hourly when air 1 tempcmture is 40 deg F and below,when 80 deg F and above,and one test for each set of compressive-strength specimens. d. Compression Test Specimen: ASTM C 31; one set of four standard cylinders for each 1 oomprcssive-strength test, unless otherwise direr. Mold and store cylinders for laboratory-cured test specimens except when field-cured test specimens arc requital as directed by the Project Engineer. C. Slump,air content and temperature test shall be performed for each set of cylinders. 1 4. Test results will be reported in writing to Project Engineer, ready-mix producer, and Contractor. Reports of compressive strength tests shall contain the Project identification twnc and number, date of concrete placement,name of concrete testing service,concrete type and class, location of concrete batch in structure,design compressive strength at 28 days,concrete mix proportions and 1 materials,compressive braking strength,and type of break for both 7-day tests and 28-day rests. 5. Nondestructive Testing: impact hammer, sonoscope, or other nondestruaivc device may be permitted but shall not be used as the sale basis for acceptance or rejection. 1 1 1 N 1 1 1 1 1 1 �1 1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRE'T'E 03300-14 1 ' Copyright 1997 AIA MASTERSPEC 11/97 3.20 LOW STRENGTH CONCRETE A. When a 7-day test specimen for a particular pour has a brealting strength of less than 75%of the required minimum compressive strength, the concrete represented by die 74ay specimen will be classified as ' potential low-strength concrete. If any 28-day strength test (average of two cylinders)falls below the required minimum compressive strength by more than 500 psi, the concrete represented by those cylinders shall be classed as low-strength concrete. B. TC in the opinion of the Project Engineer, low-strength concrete impairs the proper function of the structure,the Owner will require,at the Contractor's expense,replacement of the portions of the structure ' where low-strength concrete was placed. C. The Contractor shall have the opportunity to prove the concrete meets the specified strength by taking ' drilled cores. Three cores will be required for each strength test more than 500 psi below the requited minimum compressive strength. Concrete in an area represented by core tests shall be considered structurally adequate if the average of the three cores is equal to at least 85°/6,and if no single core is less ' than 75% of the required minimum compressive strength Obtaining and testing drilled cores shall comply with ASTM C42. All costs associated with the drillod cons shall be born:by the Contractor. NEND OF SECTION 03300 ' CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE 03300- 15 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02(R 05105) SECTION 042000-UNIT MASONRY PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY A. This Section includes unit masonry assemblies consisting of the following: , 1. Concrete masonry units(CMUs). 2, Decorative concrete masonry units, ' 3. Pre-faced concrete masonry units, 4. Concrete brick. 5. Face brick. , 6. Building(common) brick. 7. Hollow brick. 8. Glazed Structural clay facing tile. ' B. See Division 05 Section "Metal Fabrications" for furnishing steel [lintels] [and] [shelf angles] for unit masonry, , C. See Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim" for furnishing manufactured reglets installed in masonry joints for metal flashing. 112 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' B. Shop Drawings: For reinforcing steel. Detail bending and placement of unit masonry , reinforcing bars. Comply with ACI 315, "Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforeement". C. Samples for each type and color of brick and mortar. ' D. Material Certificates: For each type of product indicated. Include statements of material properties indicating compliance with requirements including compliance with standards and type designations within standards. ' 1. For masonry units include material test reports substantiating compliance with requirements. , E. Mix Designs: For each type of mortar. Include description of typo and proportions of ingredients. , 1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide materials and construction identical to those • of assemblies with fire-resistance ratings determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and UNIT MASONRY 042000- 1 , Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02(R 05105) ,• inspecting agency, by equivalent concrete masonry thickness, or by other means, as acceptable 1 to authorities having jurisdiction. ' 1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not use frozen materials or materials mixed or coated with ice or frost. Do not build on frozen substrates. Remove and replace unit masonry damaged by frost ' or by freezing conditions. ]. B. Hot Weather Requirements: Comply with hot-weather construction requirements contained in ' ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/PMS 602. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where titles below introduce lists, the following requirements apply to product selection: ' 1. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to,products specified. 2. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the products specified. 3. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers ' offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, manufacturers spocified. 4. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the manufacturers specified. 2.2 COLORS,TEXTURES,AND PATTERNS iA. Exposed Masonry Units: As selected by Owner. ' 2.3 CONCRETE MASONRY UNITS (CMUs) A. Shapes: Provide special shapes for Hotels, comers, jambs, sashes, movement joints, headers, ' bonding,and other special conditions. ' 2.4 LINTELS A. General: Provide either concrete or masonry lintels, at Contmctoes option, complying with requirements below. • B. Concrete Lintels: Precast units matching concrete masonry units and with reinforcing bars ' indicated or required to support loads indicated. ' UNIT MASONRY 042000-2 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05105) C. Concrete Lintels: Precast or formed-in-place concrete lintels complying with requirements in •, Division 03 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete," ' D. Masonry Lintels: Made from bond beam'concrctc masonry units with reinforcing bars placed as indicated and filled with coarse grout. 1 2.5' BRICK A. General: Provide shapes indicated and as follows: ' 1. For ends of sills and caps and for similar applications that would otherwise expose ' unfinished brick surfaces, provide units without cores or frogs and with exposed surfaces finished. 2. Provide special shapes for applications where shapes produced by sawing would result in , sawed surfaces being exposed to view. 2.6 MORTAR AND GROUT MATERIALS ' A. Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I or 11, except Type III may be used for cold-weather construction. ' B. Mortar Pigments: Iron oxides and chromium oxides,compounded for use in mortar mixes. Use only pigments with a record of satisfactory performance in masonry mortar. 2.7 TIES AND ANCHORS A. Materials: 1 1. Hot-Dip Galvanized, Carbon-Steel Wirc: ASTM A 82; with ASTM A 153/A 153M, ' Class B-2 coating. 2. Steel Sheet, Galvanized after Fabrication: ASTM A 1008 1A 1008M, Commercial Steel, hot-dip galvanized after fabrication to comply with ASTM A 153 1A 153M. ' 3. Steel Plates, Shapes,and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M, B. Adjustable Anchors for Connecting to Structure: Provide anchors that allow vertical or , horizontal adjustment but resist tension and compression forces perpendicular to plane of wall. 2.8 EMBEDDED FLASHING MATERIALS A. Metal Flashing: Provide metal flashing, where flashing is exposed or partly exposed and where ' indicated,complying with Division 07 Section "Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim." 1. Metal Drip Edges: Fabricate from stainless steel, Extend at least 3 inches (75 mm) into , wall and 1/2 inch out from wall, with outer edge bent down 30 degrees and hemmed). 2. Metal Flashing Terminations: Fabricate from stainless steel. Extend at !cast 3 inches into wall and out to exterior face of wall. At exterior fact of wall, bend metal back on ' UNIT MASONRY 042000-3 , ' Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02 (R 05105) '• itself for 3/4 inch and down into joint 3/8 inch (10 mm) to form a stop for retaining sealant backer rod. 1 3. Metal Expansion-Joint Strips: Fabricate from to shapes indicated. ' PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Use full-size units without cutting if possible. If cutting is required, cut units with motor-driven saws;provide clean,sharp,unshipped edges. Allow units to dry before laying unless wetting of ' units is specified, Install cut units with cut surfaces and,where possible, cut edges concealed. B. Select and arrange units for exposed unit masonry to produce a uniform blend of colors and textures. C. Comply with tolerances in ACI 530.1/ASCE 6/fMS 602 and with the following: ' 1. For conspicuous vertical lines, such as external comers, door jambs, reveals, and expansion and control joints,do not vary from plumb by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. ' 2. For conspicuous horizontal lines, such as lintels, sills, parapets, and reveals, do not vary from level by more than 1/8 inch in 10 feet. N3.2 LAYING MASONRY WALLS A. Lay out walls in advance for accurate spacing of surface bond patterns with uniform joint thicknesses and for accurate location of openings, movement-type joints, returns, and offsets. Avoid using less-than-half-size units, particularly at comers, jambs, and, where possible, at other locations. B. Bond Pattern for Exposed Masonry: Unless otherwise indicated, lay exposed masonry in running bond; do not use units with less than nominal 4-inch horizontal face dimensions at comers or jambs, 1 C. Built-in Work: As construction progresses, build in items specified in this and other Sections. Fill in solidly with masonry around built-in items. ' D. Fill space between steel frames and masonry solidly with mortar,unless otherwise indicated. ' E. Fill cores in hollow concrete masonry units with grout 24 inches under bearing plates, beams, lintels,posts,and similar items,unless otherwise indicated. ' 3.3 MORTAR BEDDING AND JOINTING A. Lay hollow brick as follows: '• I. With face shells fully bedded in mortar and with head joints of depth equal to bed joints. 2. With webs fully bedded in mortar in all courses of piers,columns,and pilasters. ' UNIT MASONRY 042000-4 Copyright 2002 and 2005 AIA MASTERSPEC Short Form 08/02(R 05/05) , 3. With webs Polly bedded in mortar in grouted masonry, including starting course on •' footings. 4. With entire units, including areas under cells, fully bedded in mortar at starting course on ' footings where cells are not grouted. B. Lay solid masonry units with completely filled bed and head joints; butter ends with sufficient , mortar to fill head joints and shove into place. Do not deeply furrow bed joints or slush head joints. 3.4 CLEANING ' 'A. In-Progress Cleaning: Clean unit masonry as work progresses by dry brushing to remove ' mortar fins and smears before tooling joints. B. Final Cleaning: After mortar is thoroughly set and cured,clean exposed masonry as follows: , 1. Test cleaning methods on sample wall panel; [cave one-half of panel uncleaned for comparison purposes. ' 2. Protect adjacent surfaces from contact with cleaner. 3. Wet wall surfaces with water before applying cleaners; remove cleaners promptly by rinsing surfaces thoroughly with clear water. ' 4. Clean brick by bucket-and-brush hand-cleaning method described in BIA Technical Notes 20. 5. Clean masonry with a proprietary acidic cleaner applied according to manufacturer's written instructions. 6. Clean concrete masonry by cleaning method indicated in NCMA TEK 8-2A applicable to type of stain on exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION 042000 UNIT MASONRY 042000-5 ' '• SECTION 06100-ROUGH CARPENTRY PART 1 -GENERAL ,1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Framing with dimension lumber, 2. Fmming with engineered wood products. 3. Wood blocking and milers. 4. Utility shelving. 5. Wood furring and grounds. ' 6.' Sheathing and SubBooring, B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 6 Section "Finish Carpentry" for nonstructural carpentry items exposed to view and not specified in another Section. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Rough Carpentry: Carpentry work not specified in other Sections and not exposed, unless otherwise indicated. B. Exposed Framing: Dimension lumber not concealed by other construction. C. Lumber grading agencies,and the abbreviations used to reference them,include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufactures Association. 2. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. ' 3. RIS-Redwood Inspection Service. 4. SPIB-Southern Pine Inspection Bureau. 5. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau. 6. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Stack lumber, plywood, and other panels; place spacers between each bundle to provide air circulation. Provide for air circulation around stacks and under coverings. '• PART 2-PRODUCTS I ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100- 1 2.1 WOOD PRODUCTS,GENERAL •1 A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of lumber grading agencies certified by the American Lumber ' Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency. ' 2, For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or back of each piece. 3. Micro nominal sizes arc indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture content speed. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for dry, ' lumber. 4. Provide dressed lumber,S4S,unless otherwise indicated. 5. Provide dry lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content at time of dressing for 2-inch nominal(38-mm actual)thickness or less.unless otherwise indicated. ' B. Engineered Wood Products: Provide engineered wood products acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and for which current model code research or evaluation reports exist that show compliance ' with building code in effect for Project. I. Allowable Design Stresses: Provide engineered wood products with allowable design stresses,as ' published by manufacturer,that meet or exceed those indicated. Manufacturer's published values ' shall be determined from empirical data or by rational engineering analysis and demonstrated by comprehensive testing performed by a qualified independent testing agency. C. Wood Structural Panels: ' 1. Plywood: DOC PS N 2. Oriented Strand Board: 1)()C PS 2. 3. Thickness: As needed to comply with requirements specified but not less than thickness indicated. 4. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions in APA Form No.E30K, "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential&Commercial." ' 5. Factory made panels according to indicated standard. 2.2 WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALS , A. Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA C2 (lumber), except that lumber that is not in contact with the ground or concrete and is continuously protected from liquid water. ' 1. Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jrusdiction and the following: u. Chromated copper arsenate(CCA). ' 2. For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do not require incising,contain colorants,bleed through,or otherwise adversely affect finishes. ' B. Kiln-dry material after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent for lumber. Do not use material find is warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material. ' C. Mark each treated item with the treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the American Lumber Standards Committee Board of Review. 1. For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finis), mark end or back of each ' piece, or omit marking and provide certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection • agency. ' 1 ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-2 ' ,• D. Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings,and the following: ' 1. Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, forting, stripping, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or concrete. 2. Wood framing members less than 18 inches (460 mm) above grade, exposed to weather or exposed to water. ' 3. Wood floor plates and base boards that are installed over concrete slabs directly in contact with earth. ' 2.3 DIMENSION LUMBER y., A. General: Provide dimension lumber of grades indicated according to the American Lumber Standards ' Committee National Grading Rule provisions of the grading agency indicated. B. Non-Load-Bearing Interior Partitions: Construction.Stud,or No.2 grade and the following species: ' 1. Mixed southern pine;SPIB. ' C. All other framing including Load-Bcaring Walls and Ceiling Joists: Construction or No,2 grade and the ' following species: 1. Southern pine: SPIB. ' 2.4 MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER A. General: Provide lumber for support or attachment of other construction•including the following: N 1. Blocking 2. Cants. 3. Nailcrs. ' 4. Furring, 5. Grounds. B. For exposed boards,concealed boards, and items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction, Stud, ' or No.2 grade lumber with 19 percent maximum moisture content and the following species: 1. Mixed southern pine;SPIB. ' C. For furring strips for installing plywood,select boards with no knots capable of producing bent-over nails and damage to panel. ' 2.5 ENGINEERED WOOD PRODUCTS 2.6 SHEATHING A. Plywood Wall Sheathing: Exterior,Structural I sheathing. ' 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32116. 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch (13 mm). B. Oriented-Strand-Board Wall Sheathing: Exposure 1.Structural I sheathing. • 1. Span Rating: Not less than 32/16. ' 2. Thickness: Not less than 1/2 inch(13 mm). ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-3 2.7 SUBFLOORING AND UNDERLAYMENT •' A. Plywood Combination SuMloor-Underlayment: DOC PS 1,Exposure 1.Structural I single-floor panda ' 1. Span Rating: Not less than 24 oc, 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch(18.3 mm). , 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. B. Oticnied-Stand-Board,Combination Subitoor-Undedaymcnt: Exposure 1 single-floor panels. 1. Span Rating: Not less alum 24 oc. , 2. Thickness: Not less than 23/32 inch(18.3 mm. 3. Edge Detail: Tongue and groove. ' 2.8 PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS A. Telephone and Electrical Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, Exposure 1, C-D Plugged, fire- retardant treated,in thickness indicated or,if not indicated,not less than 1/2 inch(12.7 mm)thick. 2.9 FASTENERS ' A. General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this ' Article for material and manufacturc. 1. Where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, or in area of high relative humidity,provide fasteners with hol-dip 73nc coating complying with ASTM A 153/A 153ML B. Nails,Brads,and Staples: ASTM F 1667. ' C. Power-Driven Fasteners: CABO NER-272. D. Woad Screws: ASME B18.6.1. ' E. Screws for Fastening to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954,except with wafer heads and reamer wings,length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material being fastened, ' F. Lag Bolls: ASMEB18. A (ASMEB18.2.3.8M). G. Bolls: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568M. Properq• Class 4,6); with , ASTM A 563(ASTM A 563M)hex nuts and,where indicated,flat washers, H. Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability to ' sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 limes the load imposed whcti installed in unit masonry assemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when ii=llcd in concrete as determined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency. 1. Material: Carbon-steel components,zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,Gass Per&S. ' 2.10 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-4 , ,• A. Sill-Scaler Gaskets: Glass-fiber-resilient insulation, fabricated in strip form, for use as a sill scale; I- inch (25-mm) nominal thickness, compressible to 1132 inch (0.8 mm); selected from manufacturer's standard widths to suit width of sill members indicated. B. Adhesives for Field Gluing Panels to Framing: Formulation complying with APA AFG 4)1 that is approved for use with type of concoction panel indicated by both adhesive and panel manufacturers. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION,GENERAL ' A. Set rough carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb. true to line, cuL and fitted. Fit rough carpentry to other construction;scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, milers, blocking•grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction. B. Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of rough carpentry or pieces that am too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangemcaL ' C. Apply field treatment complying with AWPA M4 to cut surfaces of preservative-Ircated lumber and plywood. D. Securely attach rough carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with the following: I. Table 2305.2."Fastening Schedule,"in the BOCA National Building Cede. NE. Use common wire nails, unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight ' connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood;predrill as required. F. Use hot4p galvanized or stainless-steel nails where rough carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact,or in area of high relative humidity. ' G. Countersink trail heads and fill holes with wood filler. ' H. No grade stamps or mill marks shall be exposed to view on exposed work. 3.2 WOOD GROUND,SLEEPER,BLOCKING,AND NAILER INSTALLATION ' A. Install where indicated and where required for screeding or attaching other work. Form to shapes indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other ' work involved. B. Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolls and nuts flush with surfaces, unless otherwise indicated. Build anchor bolts into masonry during installation of masonry work, Where ' possible,secure anchor bolts to formwork before concrete placement. C. Provide permanent grounds of dressod,pressure-preservative-treated.key-beveled lumber not less than I- ' 112 incites (38 mm) wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material. Remove temporary grounds when no longer required. • ' 3.3 WOOD FRAMING INSTALLATION,GENERAL ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100-5 1 A. Framing Standard: Comply with AFPA's "Manual for Wood Frame Construction." unless otherwise •' indicated. B. Framing with Engineered Wood Products: Install engineered wood products to comply with ' manufacturer's written instructions. C. Do not splice structural members between supports. ' D. Where built-up beams or girders of 2-inch nominal- (38-mm actual-) dimension lumber on edge are required,fasten together with 2 rows of 20d(100-rant)nails spaced not less than 32 inches(812 mm)ox, , Locate one row near top edge and other near bottom edge. 1. For continuous members, stagger end joints at quarter points between supports locale end joints , over supports. 3.4 WALL AND PARTITION FRAMING INSTALLATION ' A. General: Arrange studs so wide face or stud is perpendicular to direction of wall or partition and narrow face is parallel. Provide single bottom plate and double top plates using members of 2-inch nominal(39- , tarn actual)thickness whose widths equal that of studs,except single top plate may be used for non-load- bearing partitions. Anchor or nail plates to supporting construction,unless otherwise indicated. 1. For exterior walls,provide 2-by-4-inch nominal-(38-by-89-mm actual-)size wood studs spaced ' 16 inches(406 mm)o.c.,unless otherwise indicate!. 2. For interior partitions and walls,provide 2-by-4-inch nominal-(38-by-99-mm acitml-)size wood studs spaced 16 inches(406 mm)o.c.,unless otherwise indicated. B. Construct comers and intersections with three or more studs. Provide blocking and rimming as indicated and as required to support facing materials,fixtures,specialty items,and trim. 1. Provide continuous horizontal blocking at midhcigitt of partitions more than 96 inches(2438 nun) ' high, using members of 2-inch nominal (38-nim actual) thickness and of same width as wall or partitions. ' C. Frame openings with multiple studs and headers. Provide nailed header members of thickness equal to width of studs. Set headers on edge and support on jamb studs. I. For non-load-bearing partitions, provide double-jamb studs with headers not less than 6-inch , nominal (140-mat actual) depth for openings Less than 48 inches (1200 mm) in width, 8-inch nominal(184-ntm actual)depth for openings 48 to 72 inches(1200 to 1 NOO mm)in width and not , less than 10-inch nominal (235-mat actual) depth for openings 72 to 120 inches (180(1 to 3(100 mm)in width 2. For load-bearing walls,provide double jamb studs for openings 72 incites (180()nim)and less in width,and triple jamb studs for wider openings. Provide headers or depth indicated. ' D. Provide bracing in exterior walls,at troth walls of cacti external come,full-story height unless otherwise indicated. Provide one of the following: , E. Provide bracing in walls,at locations indicated,full-story height,unless otherwise indicated. Provide one of the following: 1. Plywood panels not less titan 41,by 96 inches(1219 by 2438 mm)applied vertically. ' 2. Oriented-strand-board panels not less Oran 48 by 96 incites(1219 by 2438 min)applied vertically. ROUGH CARPENTRY 061100-6 ' ,• 3.5 CEILING JOIST AND RAFTER FRAMING INSTALLATION A. Ceiling Joists: Install ceiling joists with crown edge up and complying with requirements for floor joists, Face nail to ends of parallel rafters. ' 1, Whcre ceiling joists arc at right angles to rafters, provide additional short joists parallel to rollers from wail plate to first joist; nail to ends of rollers and to top plate and nail to first joist or anchor with framing anchors or metal straps. Provide 1-by-8-inch nominal-(19-by-184-mm actual-)size or 2-by4-inch nominal- (38-by-89-mm actual-) size stringers spacer! 48 inches (1200 mm)o.c. crosswise over main ceiling joists. B. Rafters: Notch to fit exterior wall plates and toe nail or use metal forming anchors. Double mftcrs to ' form headers and trimmers at openings in roof framing, if any, and support with metal hangers. Where rafters abut at ridge, place directly opposite each other and nail to ridge member or use metal ridge hangers. ' 1. At valleys,provide double-valley rafters of size indicated or,if not indicated of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches (50 nun)deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against valley rafters. 2. At hips,provide hip ratter of size indicated or,if not indicated,of same thickness as regular rafters and 2 inches(50 nun)deeper. Bevel ends of jack rafters for full bearing against hip mflcr. ' C. Provide collar beams(ties)as indicated or,if not indicated,provide 1-by-6-inch nominal-(19-by-140-mm actual-) size boards between every third pair of rafters, but not more than 48 inches (1219 mm) o.c. Locate below ridge member,at third point of rafter span. Cut ends to fit roof slope and nail to rafters. ND. Provide special framing as indicated for eaves,overhangs,dormers,and similar conditions,if any, ' 3.6 WOOD STRUCTURAL PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with applicable recommendations contained in APA Form No.E30IC "APA Design/Construction Guide: Residential &. Commercial," for types of structural-use panels and applications indicated 1. Comply with"Code Plus"provisions in above-referenced guide. B. Fastening Methods: Fasten panels as indicated below: 1. Combination Subfloor-Undcrlayment: ' a. Glue and nail to wood framing. b. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 nun)apart at edges and ends. 2. Sheathing: a. Nail to wood framing. ' b. Screw to cold-formed metal framing. C. Space panels 1/8 inch(3 mm)apart at edges and ends. ' 3. Plywood Backing Panels: Nail or screw to supports. • END OF SECTION 06100 ' ROUGH CARPENTRY 06100.7 1 �1 SECTION 06200-FINISH CARPENTRY PART1-GENERAL 1 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A Drawings and general provisions of the Contract. including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: 1. Interior standing and running ring trim B, Related Sections include the following: , 1. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for furring,blocking,and other carpentry work not exposed to view and for structural wood decking and framing exposed to view. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Inspection agencies.and the abbreviations used to reference them include the following: 1. NELMA-Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers Association. 2. NHLA-National Hardwood Lumber Association. 3. NLGA-National Lumber Grades Authority. 4. RIS-Redwood Inspection Service. S. SCMA-Southem Cypress Manufacturers Association. , 6. SPIB-Southern Pinc Inspection Bureau. 7. WCLIB-West Coast Lumber inspection Bureau. 8. WWPA-Western Wood Products Association. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Samples for Verification: ' 1. 18" long x full board for each type of interior and exterior standing and naming trim showing details of construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual oomponems, profiles, ' textures,etc. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Protect materials against weather and contact with damp or wet surfaces. Stacie lumber, plywood, and other panels. Provide for air circulation within and around stacks and under tempomty coverings. B. Deliver interior finish carpentry only when environmental conditions meet requirements specified for • installation amas. If finish carpentry, must be stored in other than installation areas, store only where ' environmental conditions meet requirements specified for installation areas. FINISH CARPENTRY 06200- 1 , �• PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable grading rules of inspection agencies certified by the American Lumber Standards'Committee Board of Review. 2.2 INTERIOR STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM A. SoilvmW Lumber Trim for Transparent Finish(Slain or Clear Finish): Kiln-dried finished lumber(94S) ' of the following species and grade: 1. Grade Prime Finish(clear)eastern while pine:NELMA or Idaho white,lodgepole,ponderosa, or sugar pine:W WPA. B. Moldings: Made to patterns included in WMMPA WM 7. Wood moldings made from kiln4del stock and graded under WMMPA WM 4. ' 1. Moldings for Transparent Finish (Stain or Clear Finish): N-grade eastern white, Idaho white, lodgepole,ponderosa,or sugar pine. a. Provide material selected for compatible grain and color. N2.3 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Fasteners for Exterior Finish Carpentry: Provide nails or screws of the following materials,in sufficient length to penetrate minimum of 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) into substrate, unless otherwise recommended by ' manufacturer: 1. Hot-dip gahanized steel. ' B. Fas(encts for hmerior Finish Carpentry: Nails,screws,and other anchoring devices of type,size,material, and fudsh required for application indicated to provide secure attachment,con=ed where possible. I. Where finish carpentq• materials are exposed in areas of high humidity, provide fasteners and anchorages with hot-dip galvanized mating complying with ASTM A 1531A 153K 2.4 FABRICATION A. Wood Moisture Content: Comply with requirements of specified inspection agencies and with manufamaces written recommendations for moisture content of finish caipcntrv, at relative humidity conditions existing during time of fabrication and in installation arras. ' B. Ease edges of lumber less titan 1 inch (25 nun) in nominal thickness to 1116-inch (1.5-mm) radius and edges of lumber I inch(25 min)or more in nominal thickness to 1/8-inch(3-mm)radius, PART 3-EXECUTION '• 3.1 EXAMINATION FINISH CARPENTRY 06200.2 A, Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances •' and other conditions affecting performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3,2 PREPARATION ' A. Clean substrates of projections and substances detrimental to application. B. Before installing finish carpentry,condition materials to average prevailing humidity in installation areas , for a minimum of 24 hours,unless longer conditioning is recommended by manufacturer. 3.3 INSTALLATION,GENERAL , A. Do not use materials that are unsound,warped,improperly treated or finished inadequately seasoned.or too small to fabricate with proper jointing arrangements. ' 1. Do not use manufactured units with defective surfaces,sizes,or patterns. B. Install finish carpentry level, plumb, true, and aligned with adjacent materials. Use concealed shims ' where ne rmary for alignment. 1. Scribe and cut finish carpentry to fit adjoining work. Refinish and seal cuts as recommended by ' manufacturer. 2. Countersink fasteners,fill surface flush.and sand where face fastening is unavoidable. 3. Install to tolerance of 1/9 inch in 96 inches (3 mm in 2339 mm) for level and plumb. Install adjoining fetish carpentry with 1132-inch (0.9-rum) maximum offset for flush installation and 1 116-inch(1.5-mm)maximum offset for reveal installation 4. Coordinate finish carpentry with materials and systems in or adjacent to it. Provide cutouts for mechanical and electrical items that penetrate finish carpentry. ' C. Rcfcr to Division 9 Sections for final finishing of finish carpentry. 3.4 STANDING AND RUNNING TRIM INSTALLATION , A. Install with minimum number of joints practical, using full-length pieces from maximum lengths of ' lumber mailable. Do not use pieces less than 24 inches(0 10 mm)long,except where necessary. Stagger joints in adjacent and related standing and running rim Cope at returns and miter at comas to produce tight-fitting joints with full-surface contact throughout length of joint. Use scarf joints for cnd-to-and ' joints. Plane backs of casings to provide uniform thickness across joints,where necessary for alignment I. Motel)color and gain pattern across joints. 2, install trim after gypsum board joint finishing operations are completed. ' 3. Drill pilot holes in hardwood before fastening to prevent splitting. Fasten to prevent movement or warping. Countersink fastcucr heads on exposed carpentry work and fill holes. 4. Fit exterior joints to exclude water. Apply flat gain lumber with bark side exposed to weather. , 3.5 ADJUSTING A. Replace finish carpentry that is damaged or does not comply with requirements. Finish cups ntry may be •, repaired or refinished if work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance, ' FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-3 , 1 1• 3.6 CLEANING ,1 A. Clean finish carpentry on exposed and semiexposed surfaces. Touch up factory-applied finishes to restore damaged or soiled arras. 1 END OF SECTION O6200 1 . 1 i 1 i 1 1 1� 1 1 FINISH CARPENTRY 06200-4 DIVISION 7—THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION ' SECTION 07900—JOINT SEALERS 1 GENERAL • 2 '3 Related Documents: Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, Including General and 4 Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. 5 , 8 Summary:This section Includes sealant at base of benches. 7 8 Submtttalsi In addition to product data submit the following: 9 '10 Samples of each type and color of joint sealer required. 11 12 Certified test reports for joint sealers evidencing compliance with requirements , 13 14 15 PRODUCTS 18 '17 Compatibility: Provide joint sealers, joint fillers and other related materials that are compatible 18 with one another and with joint substrates under service and application conditions. Colors: 19 Provide color of exposed joint sealers indicated, or if not otherwise indicated, as selected by 20 Architect from manufacturer's standard colors. ' 21 22 Exterior Sealant in vertical loints: 23 ' 24 Tremce'Dymeric',Vulkem 118 or approved equal. 25 28 Primer. 27 28 Non-staining type recommended by sealant manufacturer,to suit application. 29 30 Joint Cleaner. ' 31 32 Non-corrosive and non-staining; recommended by sealant manufacturer, compatible with joint 33 forming materials. 34 '35 38 Sealant Baddnas. General: Non-staining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers and 37 other joint fillers; approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on field 38 experience and laboratory testing. ' 39 40 Plastic Foam Joint-Fillers: Not Permitted. 41 42 ,43 EXECUTION 44 45 General: Comply with joint sealer manufacturers printed installation instructions applicable to ' 48 products and applications indicated. 47 48 Elastomeric Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with ASTM C 982. ' 49 50 51 END OF SECTION 0790D •1 JOINT SEALERS 07900-1 SECTION 08110-STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES '• PARTI -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Dtawingsand general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes steel doors and frames. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ' 1. Section 08211=Flush Wood Doors" 2. Section 08710-"Door Hardware" 3. Section 09900-"Painting" 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data for each type of door and frame specified, including details of construction, materials, dimensions,hardware preparation,core, label compliance,sound ratings,profiles,and finishes. ' B. Shop Drawings showing fabrication and installation of steel doors and frames. include details of each frame type,elevations ofdoor design types,conditions at openings,details ofconstruction,location and installation requirements of door and frame hardware and reinforcements,and details ofjoints and connections. Show N anchorage and accessory items. C. Samples for initial selection in the form of manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for factory-finished doors and frames. ' D. Samples for verification of each type of exposed finish required,prepared on Samples not less than 3 by 5 inches(75 by 125 mm)and ofsame thickness and material indicated for final unit of Work. Where finishes ' involve normal color and texture variations, include Sample sets showing the full range of variations expected. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Providedoorsand frames complying with ANSI/SDI i00"Recommended Specifications for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"and as specified. ' 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Deliverdoorsand frames cardboard-wropped or crated to provide protection during transit andjob storage. Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished doors and frames. B. Inspect doors and frames on delivery for damage. Minor damages may be repaired provided refinished ' items match new work and are acceptable to Architect;otherwise,remove and replace damaged items as directed. ' C. Store doors and frames at building site undercover. Place units on minimum 4-inch-(100-mm-)high wood blocking. Avoid using nonvented plastic or canvas shelters that could create a humidity chamber. If • cardboard wrappers on doors become wet,remove cartons immediately. Provideminimum 1/4-inch(6-mm) ' spaces between stacked doors to promote air circulation. STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110- 1 PART2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS , A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufactureis offering products that • may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' I. Exterior Steel Doors and Frames: a. Amweld Building Products,Inc. ' b. Ceco Door Products. C. Curries Co. d. Fenestru Corp. ' C. Kewanee Corp. E Mesker Door,Inc. g. Republic Builders Products. ' h. Steelcraft. 2. Prefinisbed Interior Steel Frames: a. Timely Industries. ' 2.2 MATERIALS ' A. Hot-Rolled Steel Sheets and Strip: Commercial-quality carbon steel,pickled and oiled,complying with ASTM A 569(ASTM A 569M). ' B. Cold-Rolled Steel Sheets: Carbon steel complying with ASTM A 366(ASTM A 366M). C. Galvanized Steel Sheets: Zinc-coated carbon steel sheets of commercial quality complying with ASTM A 526(ASTM A 526M),with ASTM A 525,G60 zinc coating,mill phosphatized. D. Supports and Anchors: Fabricated from not less than 18-gage thick galvanized sheet steel. ' E, Inserts,Bolts,and Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard units. Where items are to be built into exterior walls, hot-dip galvanize complying with ASTM A 153,Class C or D as applicable. ' F. Glazing:Provide manufacturer's standard materiel§for indicated application. See door schedule. 2.3 DOORS ' A. Steel Doors: Provide l-3/4-inch-(44-mm-)thick doors of materials and ANSt/SD1100 grades and models specified below,or as indicated on Drawings or schedules: , I. Exterior Door:Fabricate with 0.0478-inch-1.2-mm-thick(18 gage),zinc-coated(galvanized)steel face sheets;of styles indicated. a. Core: Polyurethane foam with U-value rating of at least 0.07 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F,0.40 , W/sq.to x K. 2. Interior Doors: Fabricate with 0.0359-inch-0.9-mm- thick (20 gage), steel face sheets; of styles , indicated. a. Core(Door Separating the Of ce[Restroom from the Garage Area): Polystyrene foam with ' U-value rating of at least 0.16 Btu/sq.ft,x h x deg F.0.91 W/sq.m x K. • STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 09110-2 ' 2.4 FRAMES A. Provide metal frames for doors, and other openings,according to ANSI/SDI 100,and of types and styles • as shown on Drawings. Fabricate frames of cold-rolled or hot-rolled steel sheet(at fabricator's option). ' 1. Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners, continuously welded construction for exterior applications and knocked down for field assembly at interior applications. 2. Providckcrft frames to receive manufactures standard weather stripping for extcriordoors as shown ' on drawings and schedule. 3. Form hollow metal frames from 16-gaugc thick galvanized steel sheet. 4. Form prcfinished metal frames from 20 gauge steel sheet. ' B. Weather Stripping:Provide manufacturers standard continuous weather stripping for kerft frames injambs and head. ' C. Door Silencers: Except an weathcrstrippcd frames, drill stops to receive 3 silencers on strike jambs of single-door frames and 2 silencers on heads of double-door frames. 2.5 FABRICATION A. General: Fabricate steel door and frame units to be rigid,neat in appearance,and free from defects,warp, or buckle. Where practical, fit and assemble units in manufacturer's plant. Clearly identify work that ' cannot be permanently factory assembled before shipment,to assure proper assembly at Project site. Comply with ANSI/SDI 100 requirements. ' B. Clearances: Not more than 1/8 inch (3.2 mm)at jambs and heads. Not more than 3/4 inch(19 mm)at bottom or where doors have thresholds,as per threshold manufacturers recommendations. N C. Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from only cold-rolled steel sheet. D. Exterior Door Construction: For exterior locations and elsewhere as indicated,fabricate doors,panels,and frames from galvanized steel sheet according to SDI 112. Close top and bottom edges of doors flush as an ' integral part of door construction or by addition of m inimum 0.0635-inch-(1.6-mm-)thick galvanized steel channels, with channel webs placed even with top and bottom edges. Seal joints in top edges of doors against water penetration. E. Interior Door Faces: Fabricate exposed faces of doors and panels from the following material: 1. Cold-rolled steel sheet. ' 2. Metallic-coated steel sheet where indicated. F. Core Construction:Fabricate using the following manufacturer's standard rare materials that produce a door ' complying with SDI standards: I. Polyurethane. 2. Polystyrene G. Tolerances: Comply with SDI 117 "Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames." ' H. Fabricate concealed stiffeners,reinforcement,edge channels,louvers,and moldings from either cold-orhot- rolled steel sheet. ' 1. Exposed Fasteners: Unless otherwise indicated,provide countersunk flat or oval heads for exposed screws and bolls. • J. Thermal-Rated(Insulating)Assemblies: At exterior and interior cold wall locations and elsewhere as shown ' or scheduled,provide doors fabricated as thermal-insulating door and frame assemblies and tested according to ASTM C 236 or ASTM C 976 on fully operable door assemblies. ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-3 1 I. For exterior door and door separating the heated bay from the unheated bay provide thermal-rated assemblies with U-value rating of at least 0.07 Btu/sq. ft.x h x deg F,0.40 W/sq.in x K. ' 2. For interior door separating the office from the maintenance bay,provide thermal-rated assemblies • with U-value rating of at least 0.16 Btu/sq. ft.x It x deg F,0.91 W/sq.in x K. K. Hardware Preparation: Prepare doors and frames to receive mortised and concealed hardware according 1 to Section 08710"Door Hardware"and templates provided by hardware supplier. Comply with applicable requirements of SDI 107 and ANSI A]15 Series specifications for door and frame preparation for hardware. 1 L. Reinforce doors and frames to receive surface-applied hardware. Drilling and tapping for surface-applied hardware may be done at Project site. M. Locate hardware as indicated on Shop Drawings or,if not indicated,according to the Door and Hardware 1 Institute's (DHI) "Recommended Locations for Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames." 1 N. Casing retainer clips:Pre-finished metal frames for interior arc to be furnished with mechanically fastened casing retainer clips. Field install casing retainer clips on interior face of hollow metal frames per manufacturers recommendations. , 2.6 FINISHES,GENERAL A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual" for recommendations relative to applying and 1 designating finishes. B. Comply with SSPC-PA 1, "Paint Application Specification No. I; for steel sheet finishes. 1 C. Apply primers and organic finishes to doors and frames after fabrication. 2.7 GALVANIZED STEEL SHEET FINISHES M A. Surface Preparation: Clean surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so that surfaces are free of oil or other 1 contaminants. After cleaning,apply a conversion coating of the type suited to the organic coating applied over it. Clean welds, mechanical connections, and abraded areas, and apply galvanizing repair paint specified below to comply with ASTM A 780. 1 I. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint for rcgalvanizing welds in galvanized owl, with dry film containing not less than 94 percent zinc dust by weight,and complying with DOD-P- 21035 or SSPC-Paint 20. ' B. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish:Applyair-dried primerspecified below immediately after cleaning and pretreatment. 1 I. Shop Primer: Zinc-dust, zinc-oxide primer paint complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-641,Type II. 2.8 STEEL SHEET FINISHES 1 A. Factory Priming for Field-Painted Finish: Apply shop primer that complies with ANSI A224.1 acceptance 1 criteria,is compatible with finish paint systems indicated,and has capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats. Apply primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. B. Baked-Enamel Finish: Where indicated provide for interior pre-finished metal frames, manufacturer's 1 standard 2-coat,baked-enamclfiinish consisting ofprimecoat and thermose tting topcoat that complies with • ANSI A250.3. Comply with paint manufacturer's instructions for applying and baking to achieve a minimum dry film thickness of 2 mils(0.0508 mm). ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-4 1 ' 1, Colorand Gloss: As selected by Project Engineer from manufacturer's full range ofchoices for color and gloss. • PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install steel doors,frames,and accessories according to Shop Drawings,manufacturer's data,and as specified. B. Placing Frames: Comply with provisions of SDI 105,unless otherwise indicated, I. Place frames before constructing enclosing walls and ceilings. Set frames accurately in position, plumed,aligned,and braced securely until permanent anchors are set. After wall construction is ' completed,remove temporary braces and spreaders leaving surfaces smooth and undamaged. 2. At gypsum board partitions,install knock-down,slip-on,drywall frames. 3. Install casing on all interior frames and interior face of exterior hallow metal frames. ' 3.2 DOOR SCHEDULE A. See Drawings 1 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Prime Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection,sand smooth any rusted or damaged areas of prime coat and apply touchup of compatible air-drying primer. N B. Protection Removal: Immediately before final inspection,remove protective wrappings from doors and frames. ' END OF SECTION 08110 1 1 1 ' STEEL DOORS AND FRAMES 08110-5 SECTION 08211 -FLUSH WOOD DOORS ' PARTI -GENERAL •' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: , 1. Hollow core doors with wood veneer faces. 2. Factory finishing of flush wood doors. ' 3. Factory-fitting to frames and factory-prematching for hardware for wood doors. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 8 Section "Steel Doors and Frames"for flush wood doors. 1 2. Division 8 Section "Door Hardware". 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product data for each type of door,including details of care and edge construction,trim for openings,and ' factory-finishing specifications. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Quality Standard: Comply with the following standard: N 1. AWI Quality Standards: "Architectural Woodwork Institute Quality standards,"including Section , 1300"Architectural Flush Doors,"of Architectural Woodwork Institute(AWI)for grade of door, core construction,finish and other requirements exceeding those ofNWWDA quality standard. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Protect doors during transit,storage,and handling to prevent damage,soiling,and deterioration. Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's instructions. ' 1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Conditioning:Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity have , been stabilized and will be maintained in storage and installation areas during the remainder of the construction period to comply with the following requirements applicable to Project's geographical location: I. AWI quality standard Section 100-S-1 I "Relative Humidity and Moisture Content." ' 1.7 WARRANTY , A. General Warranty: Door manufacturer's warranty specified in this Article shall not deprive the Owner of other rights the Owner may have under other provisions ofthc Contract Documents and shall be in addition ' to,and run concurrent with,other warranties made by the Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents. • B. Door Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit wriuen agreement on door manufacturer's standard form signed ' by manufacturer,Installer,and Contractor,agreeing to repair or replace defective doors that have warped FLUSH WOOD DOORS 09211 - 1 ' (bow,cup,or twist)more than Il4 inch(6.35 mm)in a 42-by-84-inch (1067-by-2134-mm)section or that show telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch(0.25 mm in a 75- mm)span,or do not conform to tolerance limitations of referenced quality standards. • 1. Warranty shall be in effect during the following period of time after date of Substantial Completion. a. Hollow Core Interior Doors: One year. ' C. Contractor's Responsibilities: Replace or refinish doors where Contractor's work contributed to rejection or to voiding of manufacturer's warranty. ' PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering doors that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' I. Hollow Core Doors: a. Algoma Hardwoods Inc. ' b. Artifice,Products,Inc. C. Eggers Industries,Architectural Door Division. d. The Maiman Co. C. Weyerhauser Co. f. Or equal B. Hollow Core Doors for Transparent Finish: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Faces: White birch,rotary cut. 2. Grade: Custom. 3. Core: Standard hollow core. ' 2.2 FACTORY FINISHING A. General: Comply with referenced quality standard's requirements for factory finishing. B. Finish wood doors at factory. ' C. Transparent Finish: Comply with requirements indicated for grade, finish system, staining effect, and sheen. ' I. Grade: Custom. 2. Finish: AWI System TR-6 catalyzed polyurethane. 3. Staining: Match approved sample for color. ' 4. Effect: Filled finish. 5. Sheen: Satin. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine installed door frames prior to hanging door: • 1. Verify that frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing ' characteristics and have been installed with plumb jambs and level heads. 2. Reject doors with defects. FLUSH WOOD DOORS 09211 -2 B. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION • A. Hardware: For installation see Division 8 Section "Door Hardware." , B. Prefil Doors:Fit to frames for uniform clearance at each edge. C. Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation,if fitting or machining is required atthejob site. , 3.3 DOOR SCHEDULE , A. See Drawings 3A ADJUSTING AND PROTECTION ' A. Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely. B. Finished Doors: Refinish or replace doors damaged during installation. ' C. Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure that wood doors will be without damage or ' deterioration at the time of Final Acceptance. END OF SECTION 08211 ' 1 ,. 1 1 •1 FLUSH WOOD DOORS 08211 -3 ' SECTION 08361 -SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS • PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following types of sectional overhead doors: 1. Electric motor operated doors. ' 2. Manually operated doors. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Operation Cycle: One complete cycle ofa door begins with the door in the closed position. Thedooristhen moved to the open position and back to the closed position. ' 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Structural Performance: Provide sectional overhead doors capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses without evidencing permanent deformation of door components: ' 1. Wind Load: Uniform pressure(velocity pressure)of 20 lbf/sq, ft. (960 Pa), acting inward and outward. B. Operation-Cycle Requirements: Design sectional overhead door components and operator to operate for not less than 10,000 cycles. C. Thermal Insulation: Provide a door in the heated maintenance bay with a minimum thermal resistance ' value(R-value)of R-12. 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type and size of sectional overhead door and accessory. Include details of ' construction relative to materials, dimensions of individual components, profiles, and finishes. Provide roughing-in diagrams,operating instructions,and maintenance information. Include the following: I. Setting drawings,templates,and installation instructions for built-in or embedded anchor devices. 2. Motors: Show nameplate data and ratings; characteristics; mounting arrangements; size and location of winding termination lugs,conduit entry,and grounding lug;and coatings. ' B. Shop Drawings: For special components and installations not dimensioned or detailed in manufacturer's data sheets. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - I 1 1. Wiring Diagrams: Detail wiring for power, signal, and control systems. Differentiate between manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring and between components provided by door ' manufacturer and those provided by others. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for •' units with factory-applied finishes. D. installer Certificates: Signed bymanufacturcr certifying that installers comply with specified requirements. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer who is an authorized representative of the , sectional overhead door manufacturer for both installation and maintenance of units required for this Project. , B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Engage a firm experienced in manufacturing sectional overhead doors similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance. C. Source Limitations: Obtain sectional overhead doors through one source from a single manufacturer. ' I. Obtain operators and controls from the sectional overhead door manufacturer. ' D. Product Options: Drawings indicate size, profiles, and dimensional requirements of sectional overhead doors and accessories and are based on the specific system indicated. Other manufacturers'systems with equal performance and dimensional characteristics may be considered. Refer to Division 1 Section , "Substitutions." PART 2-PRODUCTS N 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: , B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: I. Clopay Building Products Co. ' 2. Overhead Door Corporation. 3. Raynor Garage Doors. , 2.2 STEEL SECTIONS A. Construct door sections from galvanized, structural-quality carbon steel sheets complying with , ASTM A 653 (ASTM A 653M), commercial quality,with a minimum yield strength of 33.O00 psi(225 MPO and a minimum G60(Z ISO)zinc coating. ' 1, Steel Sheet Thickness:20 gage. 2. Exterior Section Face: Flat,grooved,ribbed,or fluted,to suit manufacturer's standards. SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 - 2 ' 1 ' B. Fabricate door panels from a single sheet to provide sections not more than 24 inches(600 nun)high and nominally 2 inches(50 rum)deep. Roll horizontal meeting edges to a continuous, interlocking, keyed, . rabbeted,shiplap,or tongue-in-groove weathertight seal,with a reinforcing flange return. ' 1. For insulated doors,provide door sections with continuous thermal-break construction,separating faces of door. ' C. Enclose open section with not less than 0,064-inch(1.6-urm)galvanized steel channel end stiles welded in place. Provide not less than 0.001-inch(1.6-mm)galvanized intermediate stiles,cut to door section profle, spaced at not more than 48 inches(I 20t)nett)o.c.,and welded in place. ' D. Reinforce bottom section with a continuous channel or angle complying with bottom section profile and allowing installation of astragal. ' E. Reinforce sections with continuous horizontal and diagonal reinforcement,as required to stiffen door and for wind loading. Provide galvanized steel bars,struts,trusses or strip steel,formed to depth and baited or welded in place. F. Provide reinforcement for hardware attachment. G. Insulation: For heated bay door, provide manufacturer's standard rigid cellular polystyrene or polyurethane-foam-type thermal insulation,foamed in place to completely rill inner core ofsection,pressure bonded to face sheets to prevent delamination under wind load and with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of 75 and 450, respectively, according to ASTM E 84. Enclose insulation ' completely,with no exposed insulation material evident. 1. Steel Sheet Thickness for Interior Skin of Insulated Door:26 gage. 2. Minimum Thermal Resistance Value:R-12. NIL Fabricate sections so finished door assembly is rigid and aligned,with tight hairline joints,and free ofwarp, twist,and deformation. ' 1. Finish galvanized steel door sections as follows: 1. General: Comply with NAAMM's"Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. 2. Surface Preparation: Clean galvanized surfaces with nonpetroleum solvent so surfaces are free of oil and surface contaminants. ' 3. Pretreat zinc-coated steel,after cleaning,with a conversion coating of type suited to organic coating applied over it. 4. Apply manufacturer's standard primer to both door faces after forming, according to coating ' manufacturer's written instructions for application and minimum dry film thickness. 5. Apply manufacturer's standard primer and finish coats to interior and exterior door faces after forming,according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for application,thermosetting,and ' minimum dry film thickness. 6. Apply manufacturer's standard primer and powder-coat-applied finish coats to interior and exterior door faces after forming,according to coating manufacturer's written instructions for application, thermosetting,and minimum dry film thickness. ' a. Color and Gloss: As indicated by manufacturer's color and gloss designations. ' 2.3 TRACKS,SUPPORTS,AND ACCESSORIES SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -3 A. Tracks: Provide manufacturer's standard,galvanized steel track system, sized for door size and weight, designed for lift type indicated and clearances shown,and complying with ASTM A 653(ASTM A 653M), ' for minimum G60(Z 180)zinc coating. Provide complete track assembly including brackets,bracing,and reinforcement for rigid support of ball-bearing roller guides for required door type and size. Slot vertical • sections of track at 2 inches(50 mm)o.c. for door-drop safety device. Slope tracks at proper angle from ' vertical or otherwise design to ensure tight closure atjambs when door unit is closed. Weld or bolt to track supports. B. Track Reinforcement and Supports: Provide galvanized steel track reinforcement and support members, , complying with ASTM A 36(ASTM A 36M)and ASTM A 123. Secure,reinforce,and support tracks as required for door size and weight to provide strength and rigidity without sag,sway,and vibration during opening and closing of doors. , C. Weather seals: Provide replaceable, adjustable, continuous, compressible weather-stripping gaskets of flexible vinyl,rubber,or neoprene fitted to bottom and at top of overhead door. ' I. Provide motor-operated door with combination bottom weather seal and sensor edge for heated bay only. 2. Provide manually operated doors with bottom weather seal for all unheated bays. ' 3. In addition, provide all doors with continuous flexible seals at door jambs for a weathertight installation. 2.4 HARDWARE , A. General: Provide heavy-duty,corrosion-resistant hardware,with hot-dip galvanized,stainless-steel,or other , corrosion-resistant fasteners,to suit door type. B. Hinges: Provide heavy-duty galvanized steel hinges,of not less than 0.0747-inch-(1.9-mm-)thick uncoated steel,at each end stile and at each intermediate stile,per manufacturer's written recommendations for door size. Attach hinges to door sections through stiles and rails with bolts and lock nuts or lock washers and nuts. Use rivets or self-tapping fasteners where access to nuts is not possible. Provide double-end hinges, , where required,for doors exceeding 16 feet (4.87 m)in width, unless otherwise recommended by door manufacturer. C. Rollers: Provide heavy-duty rollers, with steel ball bearings in case-hardened steel races,mounted with ' varying projections to suit slope of track. Extend roller shaft through both hinges where double hinges are required. Provide 3-inch- (75-nun-) diameter roller thus for 3-inch (75-mm) track, 2-inch- (50-mm-) diameter roller tires for 2-inch(50-nun)track.and as follows: , 1. Case-hardened steel tires. D. Push/Pull Handles: For push-up-operated or emergcncyoperated doors, provide galvanized steel lifting ' handles on each side of door. E. Fabricate locking device assembly with lock, spring-loaded dead bolt, operating handle, cum plate,and ' adjustable locking bar to engage through slots in tracks. 1, Locking Bars: Full-disc Cremona type,both jamb sides,operable from inside and outside. ' 2. Lock cylinders are specified in Section 8710 Door Hardware. F. Where door unit is power operated,provide safety interlock switch to disengage power supply when door is locked. , SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -4 2.5 COUNTERBALANCING MECHANISM A. Torsion Spring: Operation by torsion-spring counterbalance mechanism consisting of adjustable-tension • torsion springs,fabricated from oil-tempered-steel wire complying with ASTM A 229(ASTM A 229M), ' Class 11,mounted on a cross-header tube or steel shaft. Connect to door with galvanized aircraft-type lift cables with cable safety factor of at least 5 to 1. Provide springs calibrated for 10,000 cycles minimum. B. Cable Drums: Provide cast-aluminum or gray-iron casting cable drums grooved to receive cable. Mount ' counterbalance mechanism with manufacturer's standard ball-bearing brackets at each end ofshaft. Provide 1 additional midpoint bracket for shafts up to 16 feet(3.87 m)long and 2 additional brackets at one-third points to support shafts more than 16 feet (4.87 m)long, unless closer spacing is recommended by door ' manufacturer. C. Cable Safety Device: Include a spring-loaded,steel or bronze cam mounted to bottom door roller assembly on each side,designed to automatically stop door if either cable breaks. D. Bracket: Provide anchor support bracket,as required to connect stationary end of spring to the wall,to level shaft and prevent sag. E. Provide a spring bumper at each horizontal track to cushion door at end of opening operation. ' 2.6 MANUAL DOORS ' A. General: For all unheated bays,provide manually operated,uninsulated,doors as specified herein. B. Push-up Operation: Provide lift handles and pull rope for raising and lowering doors,operating with not more than 25-lbf(I l I-N)lift or pull. N2.7 ELECTRIC DOOR OPERATORS ' A. General: For heated maintenance bay only, provide electric door operator assembly of size and capacity recommended and provided by door manufacturer for door and operational life specified,complete with electric motor and factory-prewired motor controls,starter,gear-reduction unit,solenoid-operated brake, ' clutch,remote-control stations,control devices,integral gearing for locking door,and accessories required for proper operation. ' B. Comply with NFPA 70. C. Design operator so motor may be removed without disturbing limit-switch adjustment and without affecting ' emergency auxiliary operator. D. Provide control equipment complying with NEMA ICS 1,NEMA ICS 2,and NEMA ICS 6,with NFPA 70 Class 2 control circuit,maximum 244,ac or dc. ' E. Door-Operator Type: Provide unit consisting of electric motor and the following: ' 1. Trolley or drawbar type,with V-belt primary drive,chain and sprocket secondary drive,and quick disconnect-release for manual operation. F. Electric Motors: Provide high-starting torque, reversible, continuous-duty, Class A insulated, electric motors,complying with NEMA MG I,with overload protection,sized to start,accelerate,and operate door in either direction,from any position,at not less than 2/3 fps(0.2 in/s)and not more than 1 fps(0.3 m/s), • without exceeding nameplate ratings or considering service factor. ' SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -5 I, Type: Polyphase, medium-induction type. t 2 Service Factor: According to NEMA MG 1, unless otherwise indicated. 3. Coordinate wiring requirements and electrical characteristics of motors with building electrical • system. ' 4. Provide open dripproof--type motor,and controller with NEMA 105 6,Type I enclosure. S. Provide totally enclosed, nonvcntilatcd or fan-cooled motors, fitted with plugged drain, and controller with NEMA ICS 6, Type 4 enclosure where indicated. G. Remote-Control Station: Provide momentary-contact,3-button control station with push-button controls , labeled"Open,""Close," and"Stop." 1. Provide• interior units, full-guarded, surface-mounted, heavy-duty type, with general-purpose ' NEMA ICS 6,Type I enclosure. H. Obstruction Detection Device: Providectich motorized doorwith indicated external automatic safety sensor ' able to protect full width of door opening. Activation of sensor immediately stops and reverses downward door travel. I. Photoelectric Sensor: Manufacturer's standard system designed to detect an obstruction in door , opening without contact between door and obstruction. a. Self-Monitoring Type: Provide self-monitoring sensor designed to interface with door ' operator control circuit to detect damage to or disconnection of sensing device. When scat-monitoring feature is activated, door operates to close only with constant pressure on close button. ' 1. Limit Switches: Provide adjustable switches,interlocked with motor controls and set to automatically stop door at fully opened and fully closed positions. J. Radio Control: Provide radio control system consisting of the following: 1. 3-channel universal coaxial receiver to open,close,and stop door, I per operator. ' 2. Keypad remote entry system mounted on exterior jamb of door. PART 3-EXECUTION , 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine wall and overhead areas, including opening framing and blocking, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances, clearances, and other conditions affecting , performance of Work of this Section. 1. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. General: Install door,track,and operating equipment complete with necessary hardware,jamb and head mold strips,anchors,inserts,hangers,and equipment supports according to Shop Drawings,manufacturer's written instructions,and as specified. ' SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -6 B. Mount door tracks to provide the maximum amount of vertical clearance below the door when opened using ' the manufacturer's standard headroom or high lift tracks as required for the particular application. • C. Fasten vertical track assembly to framing at not less than 24 inches(600 mm)o.c. Hang horizontal track from structural overhead framing with angle or channel hangers welded and bolt fastened in place. Provide sway bracing, diagonal bracing, and reinforcement as required for rigid installation of track and door-operating equipment. ' 3.3 ADJUSTING A. Lubricate bearings and sliding parts;adjust doors to operate easily,free from warp,twist,or distortion and fitting weathertight for entire perimeter. ' B. Adjust belt-driven motors as follows: 1. Use adjustable motor-mounting bases for bell-driven motors. 2. Align pulleys and install belts. 3. Tension belt according to manufacturer's written instructions. ' 3.4 DEMONSTRATION A. Startup Services: Engage a factory-authorizcd service representative to perform startup services and to train ' Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below: 1. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, M troubleshooting,servicing,and preventive maintenance. 3. Review data in the maintenance manuals. END OF SECTION 08361 SECTIONAL OVERHEAD DOORS 08361 -7 SECTION 08520-ALUMINUM WINDOWS , PART 1 -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and , Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section, 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes Commercial Grade aluminum windows of the performance class indicated. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS , A. Pcribmance class number,included as part ofthe window designation system,is the actual design pressure in pounds force per square foot(pascals)used to determine structural test pressure and water test pressure. I. Structural test pressure,wind load test, is equivalent to 150 percent of the design pressure. ' 2. Water-leakage-resistance test pressure is equivalent to 15 percent of the design pr ss=with 2.86 Ibf/sq. ft. (137 Pa) as a minimum for Residential, Commercial, and Heavy-Commercial Grade ' windows. 3. Water-leakage-resistancctest pressure iscquivalcmto20 percent ofthe design press=with 8lbdsq. fl. (383 Pa)as a minimum for Architectural Grade windows. 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS - A. Windows shall be V insulated glass with aluminum frames t 1.5 SUBMITTALS ' A. General; Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. , 1 ALUMINUM WINDOWS 08510- 1 SECTION 08710-DOOR HARDWARE '• PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes items known commercially as finish or door hardware that are required for swing, sliding,folding and sectional overhead doors,except special types ofunique hardware specified in the same sections as the doors and door frames on which they are installed. ' B. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Hinges and Closers. 2. Lock/Latch sets,dead bolts and keys. 3. Miscellaneous door control devices. ' 4. Weatherstripping for exterior doors. 5. Thresholds. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: 1. Division 8 Section "Standard Steel Doors and Frames" 2. Division 8 Section "Flash Wood Doors" N 3. Division 8 Section "Sectional overhead Doors" 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product data including manufacturers'technical product data for each item of door hardware, installation instructions,maintenance ofoperating parts and finish,and other information necessary to show compliance with requirements. ' B. Final hardware schedule coordinated with doors,frames,and related work to ensure proper size,thickness, hand,function,and finish of door hardware. ' I. Final Hardware Schedule Content: Based on hardware indicated,organize schedule into"hardware sets"indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening. Include the following information: ' a. Type,style,function,size,and finish of each hardware item. b. Name and manufacturer of each item. C. Fastenings and other pertinent information. 'd. Location ofeach hardware set cross referenced to indicationson Drawingsboth on floorplans and in door and frame schedule. C. Explanation of all abbreviations,symbols,and codes contained in schedule. ' f. Mounting locations for hardware. g. Door and frame sizes and materials. 2. Keying Schedule: Submit separate detailed schedule indicating clearly how the Owner's final instructions on keying of locks has been fulfilled. '• C. Furnish templates to each fabricator of doors and frames,as required for preparation to receive hardware. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' DOORHARDWARE 08710. 1 A. Single Source Responsibility: Obtain each type of hardware(latch and lock sets,hinges,closers,etc.)from a single manufacturer,unless specified otherwise. B. Fire-Rated Openings: Provide door hardware for fire-rated openings that complies with NFPA Standard , No. 80 and requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide only items of door hardware that are • listed and are identical to products tested by UL, Warnock Hersey, FM,or other testing and inspecting ' organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction for use on types and sizes of doors indicated in compliance with requirements of fire-rated door and door frame labels. 115 MAINTENANCE , A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment,maintenance,and removal and replacement of door hardware. PART2-PRODUCTS , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers and Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering ' products that may be incorporated in the work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Hinges: Hager or equal , a. Type: Provide full mortise template-produced units. 1) Swaged ' 2) Rounded comers 3) Plain bearing except provide ball-bearing for doors with closers. b. Hinge Pins:Except as otherwise indicated,provide hinge pins as follows: N 1) Out-Swing Exterior Doors:Nonremovable pins 2) Interior Doors:Nonrising pins ' 3) Tips:Flat button and matching plug,finished to match leaves C. Screws: Provide Phillips flat-head screws complying with the following requirements: 1) For metal doors and frames install machine screws into drilled and tapped holes. ' 2) For wood doors and frames install wood screws. 3) Finish of screw heads to match surface of hinges. d. Size:4 'h"X 4 %," , C. Finish: 26D-SatinChromePlated,exceptaluminumeurancedoors finish tomatchframe. 2. Lock/Latch Sets, Including Cylinders: Schloge or equal: a. Lock/Latch Sets:AL Series,"Saturn". ' b. Dradbolt Locks:B Series,single cylinder C. Cylinders: , 1) 6-pin tumbler cylinders. 2) Construct lock cylinder parts from brass or bronze,stainless steel,or nickel silver. d. Keying: •' 1) Review the keying system with the Owner and provide the type required(master, grandmaster or great-grandmaster). ' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-2 ' 2) Comply with Owner's instructions for masterkeying and, except as otherwise indicated, provide individual change key for each lock that is not designated to be keyed alike with a group of related locks. • 3) Permanently inscribe each key with number of lock that identifies cylinder manufacturer's key symbol,and notation,"DO NOT DUPLICATE." 4) Key Material: Provide keys of nickel silver only. 5) Key Quantity: Furnish 3 change keys for each lock, 5 master keys for each master system,and 5 grandmaster keys for grandmaster system. ' 6) Deliver keys to Owner. C. Strikes: Provide manufacturer's standard wrought box strike for each latch or lack bolt,with curved lip extended to protect frame,except open strike plates may be used in wood frames. Finish to match hardware set,unless otherwise indicated. C Finish: 626-Satin Chromium Plated except aluminum entrance doors finish to match frame. ' 3. Flush Bolts:Glynn-Johnson or equal a. Manual flush bolt,forged brass construction,'/1" flattened bolt tip and standard 12"Tod. b. Provide dust proof strike for bottom bolt,finish to match bolt. C. Finish,26D 4. Closers:LCN or equal ' a. Type:Overhead b. Size of Units: Except as otherwise specifically indicated,comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for size of door control unit depending on size of door, exposure to weather,and anticipated frequency of use. 1) Provide parallel arms for all overhead closers,except as otherwise indicated. ' C. Access-Free Manual Closers: Provide adjustable units complying with ANSI A117.1 provisions for door opening force and delayed action closing. ' d. Finish: Brushed Chrome except aluminum entrance doors finish to match frame. 5. Stops:Hager or equal a. Dome stop 1) Provide dome stop riser if required at thresholds,etc. ' b. Provide black resilient parts for exposed bumpers. C. Finish: to match other hardware. ' 6. Kick,Mop,and Armor Plates:Hager or equal ' a. .050"thick brass,beveled b. Size: 8"x 2"smaller than actual door width dimension ' C. Finish:26D Dull Chrome Plate • 7. Weather Stripping: Pemko Manufacturing Co.,Inc.or equal ' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-3 a. Head and Jambs: Per hollow door frame manufacturer , b. Door Bottom: ' 1) Type: Threshold stop strip with seal • 2) Material: Aluminum 3) Mill finished aluminum ' 4) Silicone seal 8. Thresholds:Pcmko Manufacturing Co.,Inc,or equal ' a. Type: Saddle Threshold b. Material: Aluminum ' C. Mill finished aluminum 9. Silencer:Hager or equal ' a. Type: 307D ' 2.2 MATERIALS AND FABRICATION A. Base Metals: Produce hardware units of basic metal and forming method indicated using manufacturer's ' standard metal alloy,composition,temper,and hardness,but in no case of lesser(commercially recognized) quality than specified for applicable hardware units for finish designations indicated, B. Fasteners: Provide hardware manufactured to conform to published templates, generally prepared for ' machine screw installation. Do not provide hardware that has been prepared for self-tapping sheet metal screws,except as specifically indicated. C. Furnish screws for installation with each hardware item. Provide Phillips Bat-head screws except as otherwise indicated. Finish exposed(exposed under any condition)screws to match hardware finish or,if exposed in surfaces of other work, to match finish of this other work as closely as possible including , "prepared for paint"surfaces to receive painted finish. D. Provide concealed fasteners(unless specified otherwise)for hardware units that are exposed when door is ' closed except to the extent no standard units of type specified arc available with concealed fasteners. Do not use thru-bolts far installation where bolt head or nut on opposite face is exposed in'other work unless their use is the only means of reinforcing the work adequately to fasten the hardware securely. Wherethru- bolts are used as a means of reinforcing the work, provide sleeves for each thru-bolt or use sex screw ' fasteners. PART 3-EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION , A. Mount hardware units at heights indicated in following applicable publications, except as specifically indicated or required to comply with governing regulations and except as otherwise directed by Architect. I. "Recommended Locations for Builders Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames"by the Door ' and Hardware Institute. 2. NWWDA Industry Standard LS.1.7."Hardware Locations for Wood Flush Doors." ' B. Install each hardware item in compliance with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations. •' Where cutting and fitting is required to install hardware onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or DOOR HARDWARE 09710-4 ' ' finished in another way,coordinate removal,storage,and reinstallation or application orsurface protection with finishing work specified in the Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes have been completed on the substrates involved. • C. Set units level, plumb, and true to line and location. Adjust and reinforce the attachment substrate as necessary for proper installation and operation. D. Drill and countersink units that are not factory prepared for anchorage fasteners. Space fasteners and anchors in accordance with industry standards. E. Set thresholds for exterior doors in full bed of butyl-rubber or polyisobutylene mastic sealant. ' F. Weatherstripping and Seals: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations to the extent installation requirements are not otherwise indicated. 3.2 ADJUSTING,CLEANING,AND DEMONSTRATING A. Adjust and check each operating item of hardware and each door to ensure proper operation or function of ' every unit. Replace units that cannot be adjusted to operate freely and smoothly or as intended for the application made. 1. Where door hardware is installed more than one month prior to acceptance or occupancy ofa space ' or area,return to the installation during the week prior to acceptance or occupancy and make final check and adjustment of all hardware items in such space or area. Clean operating items as necessary to restate proper function and finish of hardware and doors. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final operation of heating and ventilating equipment. B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by hardware installation. 3.3 HARDWARE SCHEDULE A. General: Provide hardware for each door to comply with requirements of Section "Door Hardware," ' hardware group numbers indicated in door schedule,and in the following schedule orhardware groups. B. Requirements for design,grade,function,quantity,item,manufacturer and/or productdesignation,size,and ' finish or color,are indicated in the Hardware Groups for establishing minimum requirements. C. Hardware Group No.1:Sectional Overhead Doors(2,3,4,5). ' 1. Keyed cylinder locks. D. Hardware Group No.2: Interior doors 1. I '/,Pair Hinges-No,BB1279 2. 1 Closer-Super Stock, 1461H Series 3. 3 Silencers-307D 4. 1 Threshold-No.272A 5. E. Hardware Group No.3: Exterior doors.(Same as Group No.2,except add the following.) ' 1. 1 Dead Bolt-8661 P 2. Weatherstripping- -Head and Jamb: included in door frame ' 1-Door Bottom:stop strip 290ASSTOP • F. Hardware Group No.5:Restroom doors. I. I %, Pair Hinges-No. 1279 ' 2. 1 Latchset-AL40s 3. 1 Stop-240F ' DOOR HARDWARE 08710-5 END OF SECTION 08710 1 1 �i 1 1 1 . i 1 1 tl , 1 . 1 1. i . 1 1 �i DOOR HARDWARE 08710.6 SECTION 09255 -GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES PART GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: I. Gypsum board assemblies attached to wood framing. ' B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 6 Section"Rough Carpentry"for wood framing and furring,and gypsum sheathing applied over wood framing. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Gypsum Board Construction Terminology: Refer to ASTM C 11 and GA-505 for definitions of terms for gypsum board assemblies not defined in this Section or in other referenced standards. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data for each type of product specified. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire-Resistance Ratings:Where indicated,provide materials and construction which are identical to those of assemblies whose fire resistance rating has been determined per ASTM E 119 by a testing and inspecting organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' I. Provide fire-resistance-rated assemblies identical to those indicated by reference to GA File No's in BA-600 "Fire Resistance Design Manual" or to design designations in U.L. "Fire Resistance Directory"or in listing of other testing agencies acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Single Source Responsibility:Obtaining each type of gypsum board and related joint treatment materials from a single manufacturer, ' 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials in original packages, containers, or bundles bearing brand name and identification of ' manufacturer or supplier. B. Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather,direct ' sunlight,surface contamination,corrosion, construction traffic,and other causes. Neatly stack gypsum panels Bat to prevent sagging. ' GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255- 1 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS , A. Environmental Conditions, General: Establish and maintain environmental conditions for applying and ' finishing gypsum board to comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer's • recommendations,whichever are more stringent. B. Room Temperatures: For nonadhesive attachment of gypsum board to framing,maintain not less than 40 ' deg F(4 deg C). For adhesive attachment and finishing of gypsum board,maintain not less than 50 deg F (10 deg C)for 48 hours before application and continuously after until dry. Do not exceed 95 deg F(35 , deg C)when using temporary heat sources. C. Ventilation: Ventilate building spaces its required todryjoin t treatment materials. Avoid drafts during hot, dry weather to prevent finishing materials from drying too rapidly. , PART2-PRODUCTS , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that ' may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Gypsum Board and Related Products: ' a. Georgia-Pacific Corp. b. Louisiana-Pacific ' C. National Gypsum Co.;Gold Bond Building Products Division. d. United States Gypsum Co. 2.2 GYPSUM BOARD PRODUCTS A. General: Provide gypsum board oftypes indicated in maximum lengths availablethat will minimize end-to- end butt joints in each area indicated to receive gypsum board application. , I. Widths: Provide gypsum board in widths of 48 inches(1219 mm). B. Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 36 and as follows: , 1. Type: Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Edges: Tapered. ' 3. Thickness: a. Walls: %, inch(12.7 mm). b. Ceilings:5/8 inch (15.9 mm). ' C. Glass-Mat,Water-Resistant Gypsum Backing Board: ASTM C 1178 and as follows: 1. Type:Regular for vertical surfaces,unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. Edges: 'tapered. 3. Thickness: ' a. Walls: %, inch(12.7 mm). b. Ceilings:518 inch(15.9 mm). 4. Location:Restroom area. ' 2.3 TRIM ACCESSORIES • A. Provide manufacturer's standard trim accessories of types indicated fordrywall work,formed ofgaivanized ' GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-2 , steel with either knurled and perforated or expanded flanges for nailing or stapling, and beaded for concealment of flanges in joint compound. Provide cornetheads and J-type trim casing. ,• 2.4 JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS A. General: Providejoint treatment materials complying with ASTM C 475 and the tecommendationsof both the manufacturers of sheet products and orjoint treatment materials for each application indicated. ' B. Joint Tape for Gypsum Board: Paper reinforcing tape. C. Setting-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-packaged, job-mixed, chemical-hardening powder products formulated for uses indicated. 1. Where setting-type joint compounds are indicated as a taping compound only or for taping and filling only,use formulation that is compatible with other joint compounds applied over it. ' 2. For preftlling gypsum boardjoints,use formulation recommended by gypsum board manufacturer. D. Drying-Type Joint Compounds: Factory-packaged vinyl-based products complying with the following requirements for formulation and intended use. I. Ready-Mixed Formulation: Factory-mixed product. ' a. Taping compound formulated for embedding tape and for first coat over fasteners and fare flanges of trim accessories. b. Topping compound formulated for fill(second)and finish(third)coats. 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. General: Provide auxiliary materials forgypsum board construction that camplywith referenced standards Nand recommendations of gypsum board manufacturer. B. Laminating Adhesive: Special adhesive orjoint compound recommended for laminating gypsum panels. C. Steel drill screws complying with ASTM C 1002,corrosion resistant for exterior work. ' D. Primer: Shcetrock "First Coat"or equal. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates to which gypsum board assemblies attach orabut,installed hollow metal frames,cast-in- anchors,and structural framing,with Installer present,for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of assemblies specified in this Section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' 3.2 APPLYING AND FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD,GENERAL A. Gypsum Board Application and Finishing Standards: Install and finish gypsum panels to comply with ASTM C 840 and GA-216. B. Install ceiling board panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abutting endjointsin the central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints ofadjacent panels not less • than one framing member. ' C. Install gypsum panels with face side out. Do not install imperfect,damaged,or damp panels. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not more than 1/16 inch(1.5 mm)of open space between ' GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255 -3 panels. Do not force into place. ' D. Locate both edge or end joints over supports,except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports or , gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edges • or ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Avoid joints other than control joints at comers of framed openings where possible. ' E. Attach gypsum panels to framing provided at openings and cutouts. F. Do not attach gypsum panels across the flat grain of wide-dimension lumber, including floor joists and , headers. Instead,float gypsum panels over these members using resilient channels or provide control joints to counteract wood shrinkage. G. Spot grout hollow metal door frames for solid-core wood doors, hollow metal doors, and doors over 32 , inches(913 mm)wide. Apply spot grout at each jamb anchor clip and immediately insert gypsum panels into frames. ' H. Isolate perimeter of nonload-bearing gypsum board partitions at structural abutments, except floors, as detailed. Provide'A-inch-(12.7-mm-)wide spaces atthese locations and trim edges with J edge trim where ' edges of gypsum panels are exposed, 1. Floating Construction: Where feasible, including where recommended by manufacturer, install gypsum panels over wood framing,with floating internal corner construction. ' J. Space fasteners in gypsum panels according to referenced gypsum board application and finishing standard and manufacturer's recommendations. ' 1. Space screws a maximum of 12 inches(305 mm)o.c.for ceiling applications, and 16 inches(406 mm)mc, for wall applications, 3.3 GYPSUM BOARD APPLICATION METHODS A. Single-Layer Application: Install gypsum wallboard panels as follows: , 1. On ceilings, apply gypsum panels prior to wall/partition board application to the greatest extent possible and at right angles to framing,unless otherwise indicated. ' 2. On partitions/walls,apply gypsum panels horizontally(perpendicular to framing), unless parallel application isrequired for fire-resistance-rated assemblies.Usemaximum-length panelsto minimize end joints. a. Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses of board. ' B. Single-Layer Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports as follows: ' 1. Fasten with screws. 3.4 INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES ' A. General: For trim accessories with back flanges,fasten to framing with the some fasteners used to fasten ' gypsum board. Otherwise,fasten trim accessories according to accessory manufacturer's directions for type, length,and spacing of fasteners. B. Install comerbead at external comers. ' C. Install edge trim where edge of gypsum panels would otherwise be exposed. Provide edge trim type with • face flange formed to receive joint compound,except where other types are indicated. , GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-4 , ' I. Install J-Trim where indicated. 3.5 FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES • A. General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, flanges of comerbead, edge trim, control joints, penetrations,fastener heads,surface defects,and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. ' B. Prefill open joints,rounded or beveled edges,and damaged areas using setting-type joint compound. C. Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints,except those with trim accessories having flanges not requiring tape. D. Finish interior gypsum wallboard by applying the followingjoint compounds in 3 coats(not including prefill of openings in base),and lightly sand or scrape Imperfections from the joints between coats and sand after last coat: 1. Embedding and First Coat: Ready-mixed, drying-type, all-purpose or taping compound. Fill (Second)Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or topping compound. Finish(Third)Coat: Ready-mixed,drying-type,all-purpose or topping compound. E. Prepare gypsum wallboard for painting with primer after all taping,joints compound and sanding has been ' completed. 3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Promptly remove any residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces. B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions,in a manner acceptable to Installer,that ensure gypsum Nboard assemblies are without damage or deterioration at the time of Final Acceptance. ' END OF SECI7ON 09255 1 1 1 GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES 09255-5 SECTION 09678-RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES , PARTI -GENERAL •' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' I. Resilient wall base and accessories. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ' 1. Division 9 Section "Resilient Tile Flooring." ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product data for each type of product specified, B. Samples for verification purposes in manufacturer's standard sizes, but not less than 12 inches(300 mm) long,of color and pattern of product specified. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility for Products: Obtain each type and color of product specified from a single source with resources to provide productsofconsistent quality in appearance and physical properties without delaying progress of the Work. 1.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING , A. Deliver products to Project site in original manufacturer's unopened cartons and containers, each bearing , names of product and manufacturer,Project identification, and shipping and handling instructions. B. Move products into spaces where they will be installed at least 48 hours in advance of installation. 1,6 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Maintain a minimum temperature of 70 deg F(21 deg C) in spaces to receive products specified in this ' Section for at least 48 hours prior to installation,during installation,and for not less than 48 hours after installation. After this period,maintain a temperature of not less than 55 deg F(13 deg C). 1.7 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ' A. Sequence installing products specified in this Section with other construction to minimize possibility of damage and soiling during remainder of construction period. , 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials matching products installed as described below, ' packaged with protective covering for storage,and identified with labels clearly describing contents. • I. Furnish not less than 10 linear feet(3 linear meters)for each 500 linear feet(150 linear meters)or ' fraction thereof of resilient wall base installed. RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678- 1 , 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS ,• 2.1 RESILIENT WALL BASE A. Type:Vinyl cove base complying with ASTM F-1861.98,Type TV,Group I (solid)and FS SS-W-40a. I. Size:4"height x 1/8"thickness. 2. Color:To be selected from manufacturer's full range of colors. B. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers with products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to: 1. Iohnsonite. 2. Armstrong World Industries,Inc. 3. Azrock Floor Products Div.,Azrock Industries,Inc. 2.2 RESILIENT ACCESSORIES A. Resilient edge strips, 1/8"thick,homogeneous vinyl or rubber composition,tapered edge,color black.not less than I"wide. ' 2.3 INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES A. Concrete Slab Primer: Nonstaining type as recommended by flooring manufacturer. B. TrowelableUnderlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified,portland-cement-based formulation provided or approved by flooring manufacturer for applications indicated. C. Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by manufacturer to suit resilient flooring product and substrate conditions indicated. ' PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas where installation of products specified in this Section will occur,with Installer present,to verify that substrates and conditions are satisfactory for installation and comply with manufacturer's ' requirements and those specified in this Section. 3.2 PREPARATION A. General:Complywith manufacturces installation specifications for preparing substrates indicated to receive products indicated. ' B. Use trowelabie patching compounds per manufacturers directions to fill cracks,holes,and depressions in substrates. ' C. Broom or vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing products specified in this Section. Following cleaning, examine substrates for moisture,alkaline salts,carbonation,or dust. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION • A. General: Install products specified in this Section using methods indicated according to manufacturer's installation directions. ' B. Apply resilient wall base to walls,casework,and other permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678-2 is required. Install wall base in lengths as long as practicable. Tightly adhere wall base to substrate ' throughout length of each piece.with base in continuous contact with horizontal and vertical substrates. , 1. On concrete and masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates,fill voids along top edge of - resilient wall base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material. 2. Form inside comers on job from straight pieces ofmaximum lengths possible by cutting an inverted , V-shaped notch in toe of wall base at the point where corner is formed. Shave back of base where necessary to produce snug fit to substrate. 3. Form outside comers on job from straight pieces of maximum lengths possible by shaving back of ' base at point where bending will occur. Remove a strip perpendicular to length of base and only deep enough to produce a snug fit without bends whitening or removal of more than half the thickness of wall base. C. Place resilient accessories so they are butted to adjacent materials of type indicated and bond to substrates with adhesive. Install reducer strips at edges of floating that otherwise would be exposed. 3.4 SCHEDULE , A. Install resilient wall base in Lobby and Restrooms. 3.5 CLEANING AND PROTECTION ' A. Perform the following operations immediately after completing installation: , I. Remove visible adhesive and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended by manufacturers of resilient product involved. ' 2. Sweep or vacuum floor thoroughly. 3. Do not wash floor until after time period recommended by manufacturer. B. Protect against mars,marks,indentations,and other damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended by manufacturer of resilient product involved. C. Clean products specified in this Section not more than 4 days prior to dates scheduled for inspections , intended to establish date of Final Acceptance in each area of Project. Clean products using method recommended by manufacturer. ' END OF SECTION 09678 ' 1 RESILIENT WALL BASE AND ACCESSORIES 09678-3 ' SECTION 09900- PAINTING PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawingsand general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 ' Specification Sections,apply to this Sectign, _ . .- -._.1.2 ....._-.SUMMARY A. This Section includes surface preparation and field painting of the following: I. Exposed exterior items and surfaces. 2. Exposed interior items and surfaces. This does not include exposed concrete or structural framing in garage area. 3. Surface preparation, priming, and finish coots specified in this Section are in addition to shop priming and surface treatment specified in other Sections. 4. Exterior pavements. ' B. Paint exposed surfaces, except where the paint schedules indicate that a surface or material is not to be painted or is to remain natural. lfthc paint schedules do not specifically mention an item or a surface,paint the item or surface the same as similar adjacent materials or surfaces whether or not schedules indicate colors. Ifthe schedules do not indicate color or finish,the Project Engineer will select from standard colors and finishes available. N 1. Painting includes field painting of exposed bare and covered pipes and ducts (including color coding), hangers, exposed steel and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment. C. Do not paint prefinished items,concealed surfaces, finished metal surfaces,operating parts,and labels. I. Prefrnishal items include factory or installer finishing for such items as(but not limited to)metal ' toilet partitions,prefinished partition systems,acoustic materials,architectural woodwork,laboratory casework,elevator doors,frames and equipment,prefinished interior metal door frames,wood doors, exterior claddingofwood windows,louvers,and mechanical and electrical equipment including light fixtures,switchgcar and distribution cabinets. 2. Concealed surfaces include walls or ceilings in concealed areas and generally in inaccessible areas, furred areas,utility tunnels,pipe spaces,duct shafts and elevator shafts. 3. Finished metal surfaces include anodized aluminum,stainless steel,chromium plate,copper,bronze and similar finished materials will not require finish painting. ' 4. 'Operating parts include mechanical and electrical parts, such as valve and damper operators, linkages,sensing devices,motor and fan shafts. ' 5. Code-required labels include Underwriters' Laboratories and Factory Mutual,or any equipment identification,performance rating,name or nomenclature plates. ' D. Related Sections include the following: • I. Division 8 Section 'Steel Doors and Frames"for shop priming steel doors and frames, ' 2. Division 9 Section"Gypsum Board Assemblies"for surface preparation for gypsum board and primer type and application. 3. Divisions 15 and 16: Painting ofmcchanical and electrical work is specified in Divisions 15 and 16, ' PAINTING 09900- 1 respectively. , 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Standard coating terms defined in ASTM D 16 apply to this Section. • 1. Flat refers to a lusterless or matte finish with a gloss range below 15 when measured at an 85-degree ' meter. 2. Satin refers to low-sheen finish with a gloss range between 15 and 35 when measured at a 60-degree , meter. 3. Semigloss refers to medium-sheen finish with a gloss range between 30 and 65 when measured at a 60-degree meter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data:Submit manufacturer's technical information including paint label analysis and application , instructions for each material proposed for use. B, Samples: Prior to beginning work, Project Engineer will furnish color chips for surfaces to be painted. Submit samples for Project Engineer's review of color and texture only. Provide a listing of material and ' application for each coat of each finish sample. I. On 12"x12"hardboard,provide two samples of each color and material,with texture to simulate , actual conditions. Resubmit samples as requested by Project Engineer until acceptable sheen,color and texture is achieved. 2. On actual wood surfaces,provide two 4"x8"samples of natural and stained wood finish. Label and ' identify each as to location and application. 3. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on the job. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain block fillers,primers,and undercoat materials for each coating system from the same manufacturer as the finish coats. ' 1.6 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND 14ANDLING A. Deliver materials to the Project Site in manufacturer's original,unopened packages and containers bearing ' manufacturer's name and label,and the following information: I. Product name or title of material. ' 2. Product description (generic classification or binder type). 3. Manufacturer's stock number and date of manufacture. 4. Contents by volume, for pigment and vehicle constituents. ' 5. Thinning instructions. 6. Application instructions. 7. Color name and number. B. Store materials not in use in tightly covered containers in a well-ventilated area at a minimum ambient ' temperature of45 deg F(7 deg C). Maintain containers used in storage in a clean condition,free of foreign materials and residue. ' 1. Protect from freezing. Keep storage area neat and orderly. Remove oily rags and waste daily. Take nemsarymeasures to ensure that workers and work areas are protected from fire and health hazards ' resulting from handling,mixing,and application. 1,7 PROJECT CONDITIONS • A. Apply water-based paints only when the,temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air ' PAINTING 09900-2 temperatures are between 50 and 90 deg F(10 and 32 deg C). B. Apply solvent-thinned paints only when the temperature of surfaces to be painted and surrounding air temperatures are between 45 and 95 deg F(7.2 and 35 deg C). C. Do not apply paint in snow, rain, fog,or mist: or when the relative humidity exceeds 85 percent; or at temperatures less than 5 deg F(3 deg C)above the dew point;or to damp or wet surfaces. ' I. Painting may continue during inclement weather it'surfaces and areastobepainted are enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified by manufacturer during application and drying periods. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide one of the products in the paint schedules. ' B. Manufacturers Names: The following manufacturers are referred to in the paint schedules by use of shortened versions of their names,which are shown in parentheses: 1. Glidden Co.(The)(Glidden). 2. Benjamin Moore&Co.(Moore). 3. PPG Industries,Inc.(PPG). 4. Pratt&Lambert,Inc.(P&L). 5. Sherwin-Williams Co.(S-W). 6. Vanex, Inc.(Vanex) N 2.2 PAINT MATERIALS,GENERAL A. Material Compatibility: Provide block fillers, primers, undercoats, and finish-coat materials that arc compatible with one another and the substrates indicated under conditions of service and application,as ' demonstrated by manufacturer based on testing and field experience. B. Material Quality: Provide manufacturer's best-quality paint material ofthe various coating types specified. Paint-material containers not displaying manufacturer's product identification will not be acceptable. 1. ProprietaryNames:Use ofmanufacturer's proprietary product names to designate colors or materials is not intended to imply that products named are required to be used to the exclusion ofequivalent products of other manufacturers. Furnish manufacturer's material data and certificates of performance for proposed substitutions. ' C. Colors: Provide color selections made by the Project Engineer. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with the Applicator present, under which painting will be performed for compliance with paint application requirements. 1. Do not begin to apply paint until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected and surfaces receiving paint are thoroughly dry. • 2. Start of painting will be construed as the Applicator's acceptance ofsurf Lm and conditions within ' a particular area. B. • Coordination of Work: Review other Sections in which primers are provided to ensure compatibility of the ' PAINTING 09900-3 total system for various substrates. On request, furnish information on characteristics of finish materials ' to ensure use of compatible primers. ' I. Notify the Project Engineer about anticipated problems using the materials specified over substrates • primed by others. PP.EPARATION ' A. General: Remove hardware and hardware accessories, plates,machined surfaces, lighting fixtures,and ' similar items already installed that are not to be painted. If removal is impractical or impossible because ofthe size or weight ofthe item,provide surface-applied protection before surface preparation and painting. 1. Aber completing painting operations in each space or area,reinstall items removed using workers , skilled in the trades involved. B. Cleaning: Before applying paint or other surface treatments,clean the substrates of substances that could , impair the bond of the various coatings. Remove oil and grease before cleaning. I. Schedule cleaning and painting so dust and other contaminants from the cleaning process will not ' fall on wet,newly painted surfaces. C. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written instructions for each particular substrate condition and as specified. , I. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and reprime. 2. Wood: Clean surfaces of dirt,oil,and other foreign substances with scrapers,mineral spirits,and , sandpaper,as required. Sand surfaces exposed to view smooth and dust off. a. Scrape and clean small.dry,seasoned knots,and apply a thin coat of white shellac or other recommended knot sealer before applying primer. After priming,fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic wood filler. Sand smooth when dried. b. Prime,stain,or seal wood to be painted immediately on delivery. Prime edges,ends,faces, , undersides,and backsides of wood, including cabinets,counters,cases,and paneling. 3. Ferrous Metals:Clean ferrous metal surfaces,which are not galvan ized or shop-coated.ofail,grease, ' dirt,lame mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical means. a. Treat bare and sandblasted or pickled clean metal with a metal treatment wash coat before priming. ' b. Touch up bare areas and shop-applied prime coats that have been damaged. Wire-brush, clean with solvents recommended by paint manufacturer,and touch up with the sameprimcr as the shop coat. ' D. Materials Preparation: Mix and prepare paint materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. I. Maintain containers used in mixing and applying point in a clean condition.free of foreign materials ' and residue. 2. Stir material before application to produce a mixture of uniform density. Stir as required during application. Do not stir surface film into material. If necessary, remove surface film and strain ' material before using. 3. Use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer and only within recommended limits. 3.3 APPLICATION ' A. General: Apply paint according to manufacturer's written instructions. Use applicators and techniques best • suited for substrate and type of material being applied. , PAINTING 09900-4 ' 1. Paint colors,surface treatments,and finishes arc indicated in the schedules. 2. Provide finish coats that are compatible with primers used. 3. The term"exposed surfaces"includes areas visible when permanent or built-in fixtures are in place. • Extend coatings in these arras, as required, to maintain the system integrity and provide desired ' protection. 4. Paintsurfaces behind movable equipment and furniture the same as sim ilar exposed surfaces.Before the final installation of equipment,paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment or furniture with prime coat only. ' 5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match exposed surfaces. 6. Finish exterior doors on tops, bottoms,and side edges the same as exterior faces. 7. Sand lightly between each succeeding enamel or varnish coat. ' B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned,pretreated,or otherwise prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation and before subsequent surface deterioration. ' I. Omit primer on metal surfaces that have been shop primed and touchup painted. C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply paint materials no thinner than manufacturer's recommended spreading rate. Provide the total dry film thickness of the entire system as recommended by the manufacturer. ' D. Prime Coats: Before applying finish coats, apply a prime coat of material, as recommended by the manufacturer,to material that is required to be painted or finished and that has not been prime coated by others. Recoat primed and sealed surfaces where evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat appears,to ensure a finish coat with no burn through or other defects due to insufficient sealing. ' E. Pigmented(Opaque)Finishes: Completely cover surfaces as necessary to provide a smooth,opaque surface of uniform finish,color,appearance,and coverage. Cloudiness,spotting,holidays,laps,brush marks,runs, Nsags,ropiness,or other surface imperfections will not be acceptable. F. Transparent(Clear) Finishes: Use multiple coats to produce a glass-smooth surface film ofcven luster. ' Provide a finish free of laps,runs, cloudiness,color irregularity,brush marks,orange peel,nail holes,or other surface imperfections. 1. Provide satin finish for final coats. G. Completed Work: Match approved samples for color,texture,and coverage. Remove,refinish,or repaint work not complying with requirements. 3.4 CLEANING A. Cleanup: At the end of each workday, remove empty cans, rags, rubbish, and other discarded paint ' materials from the site. 1. After completing painting, clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces. Remove spattered paint by washing and scraping. Be careful not to scratch or damage adjacent finished surfaces. 3.5 PROTECTION ' A. Protect work of other trades,whether being painted or not.against damage by painting. Correct damage by cleaning,repairing or replacing,and repainting,as approved by Project Engineer. ' B. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes, Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others to protect their work afier completing painting operations. ,• 1. At completion of construction activities of other trades,touch up and restore damaged or defaced painted surfaces. Comply with procedures specified in PDCA 111. ' PAINTING 09900.5 3.6 EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior ferrous metal. Primer is not required on , shop-primed items. • I. Satin,Acrylic-Latex Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. ' a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). ' b. First and Second Coats: Satin,exterior,acrylic-latex applied atspreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve n total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 max). 1) PPG: Pitt-Tech One Pack High Performance Acrylic DTM Enamel,90.400 Series ' B. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over exterior zinc-coated (galvanized) metal , surfaces: 1. Full-Gloss, Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the ' manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(0.031 mm). b• First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm). ' 1) PPG: 6-282 Speedhide Interior/Exterior Gloss-Oil Enamel. C. Pavements: Provide the following finish systems for pavement markings: 1. Paint for pavement marking asper MoDOT section 620 and shall be alkyd-resin type,ready-mixed, complying with FS TT-P-115,Type 1,or AASHTO M-248,Type N. ' 1 1 •1 PAINTING 09900-6 , ' 2. Color: As indicated by the"Manual of Uniform Traffic Control Devices"and the following. ' a. All markings for disabled parking spaces,symbols and access aisles shall be blue. • 33 INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE A. Gypsum Board: Provide the following finish systems over interior gypsum board surfaces: I. Semigloss/Satin, Acrylic-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a primer. a. Primer: See Division 9 Section 09255 Gypsum Board Assemblies. ' b. First and Second Coats: Semigloss/Satin,acrylic-latex,interior enamel applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm). ' I) Vanex: Breakthrough Satin 2) PPG: 88-110 Satinhide Interior Enamel Wall&Trim Lo-Lustre Semi-Gloss Latex. ' B. Stained Woodwork: Provide the following stained finishes over new,interior woodwork: I. Polyurethane-Based,Satin-Finish: 2 finish coatsofan Polyurethane-based,clear-polyurethane satin ' over a scaler coat and an alkyd-based,interior wood stain. Wipe wood filler before applying stain. a. Filler Coat: Paste-wood filler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. ' 1) PPG: None required. N b. Stain Coat: Alkyd-based,interior wood stain applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer, I) PPG: 77-302 Rcz Interior Semi-Transparent Stain. C. Sealer Coat,, Clear sanding scaler applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. ' 1) PPG: 77-30 Rez Interior Quick-Drying Sealer and Finish. ' d. First and Second Finish Coats:Polyurethane,applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer. 1) PPG: 77.89 Rcz Polyurethane,Satin Clear interior. ' C. Ferrous Metal: Provide the following finish systems over ferrous metal: ' 1. Satin,Acrylic-Latex Finish: 2 finish coats over a rust-inhibitive primer. a. Primer: Rust-inhibitive metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.3 mils(0.033 mm). ' h. First and Second Coats: Satin,exterior,acrylic-latex applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 2.6 mils(0.066 mm). I) PPG: Pitt-Tech One Pack High Performance Acrylic DTM Enamel,90.400 Series '• D. Zinc-Coated Metal: Provide the following finish systems over zinc-coated(galvanized)metal surfaces: I. Full-Gloss,Alkyd-Enamel Finish: 2 finish coats over a galvanized metal primer. PAINTING 09900-7 a. Primer: Galvanized metal primer applied at spreading rate recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less than 1.2 mils(D.031 mm). b. First and Second Coats: Full-gloss, exterior, alkyd enamel applied at spreading rate •' recommended by the manufacturer to achieve a total dry film thickness of not less then 2.6 ' mils(0.066 mm). I' 1) PPG: 6-2142 Speedhide interiorlExterior Gloss-Oii Enamel. END OF SECTION 09900 1 1 PAINTING 09900. 8 ' SECTION 10800-TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES ,• PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division ' 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes toilet and bath accessory items as scheduled. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product data for each toilet accessory item specified,including construction details relative to materials, dimensions,gages,profiles,mounting method,specified options,and finishes. B. Samples of each toilet accessory item to verify design,operation,and finish requirements. Acceptable fall- size samples will be returned and may be used in the Work. ' C. Setting drawings where cutouts are required in other work,including templates,preparation instructions, and directions for preparing cutouts and installing anchorage devices. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Single-Source Responsibility: Provide products of same manufacturer for each type of accessory unit N exposed to view in same areas,unless otherwise acceptable to Project Engineer. B. Products of other manufacturers listed in Part 2 with equal characteristics, as judged solely by Project Engineer,may be provided. 1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Coordination: Coordinate accessory locations, installation, and sequencing with other work to avoid interference with and ensure proper installation,operation,adjustment,cleaning,and servicing of toilet accessory items. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering toilet accessories that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide toilet accessories by one ofthc following; ' 1. American Specialties,Inc. 2. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc. 3. Bradley Corporation, ' 2.2 MATERIALS, GENERAL '• A. Stainless Steel: AISI Type 3021304,with satin finish,0.034 inch(0.9 mm)minimum thickness. B. Brass: Leaded and unleaded, flat products, ASTM B 19; rods, shapes, forgings, and flat products with ' TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10800- 1 finished edges,ASTM B 16(ASTM B 16M);Castings, ASTM B 30. C. Chromium Plating: Nickel and chromium clectro-deposited on base metal,ASTM B 456,Type SC 2. ' D. Galvanized Steel Mounting Devices: ASTM A 153,hot-dip galvanized after fabrication. • E. Fasteners: Screws,bolts,and other devices of same material as necessary unit,or of galvanized steel where ' concealed. F. Mirror Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type 1, Class 1, Quality q2, nominal 6.0 mm thick, with silvering, ' electroplated copper coating,and protective organic coating complying with FS DD-M 2.3 TOILET TISSUE DISPENSERS ' A. Recessed Toilet Paper Holder: , 1. AS),Model 7402.5 or approved equal. 2.4 FABRICATION , A. General: Only a maximum 1-1l2 inch (38 mm)diameter, unobtrusive stamped manufacturer logo, as , approved by Project Engineer, is permitted on exposed face of toilet or bath accessory units. On either interior surface not exposed to view or back surface,provide additional identification by either a printed, waterproof label or a stamped nameplate.indicating manufacturer's name and product model number. , PART 3 -EXECUTION 3:1 INSTALLATION N A. Install toilet accessory units according tomanufacturere instructions,using fasteners appropriate to substrate ' as recommended by unit manufacturer. Install units plumb and level,firmly anchored in locations and at heights indicated. B. Seeuremirrorsto walls in concealed.tamper-resistant mannerwith special hangers,toggle bolts,or screws. ' Set units level,plumb,and square at locations indicated,according to manufacturer's written instructions for substrate indicated. C. Install grab bars to withstand a downward load of at least 250 lbf(I 100 N),complying with ASTM F 446. ' 3.2 SCHEDULE ' A. Provide toilet paper holders for each water closet. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND'CLEANING , A. Adjust toilet accessories f or proper operation and verify that mechanisms function smoothly. Replace damaged or defective items. ' B. Clean andpolish all exposed surfaces strictlyarcording tomanufacturces recommendations after removing temporary labels and protective coatings. •' END OF SECTION IOBOD ' TOILET AND BATH ACCESSORIES 10900-2 ' 1 SECTION 13125-METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes the following: 1. Structural framing. 2. Anchor Bolts. 3. Roof panels. 4. Wall panels and liners. 5. Insulation and vapor barriers. ' 6. Building components,accessories and trim,as follows: a. Louvers,vents,and ventilators. b. Connection hardware. C. d Ridge ge c d. Ridge and ridge lights. C. Gutters,downspouts and fleshings. G Trims and closures,cte. ' B. Related Sections include the following: ' I. Division 3 Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete"for concrete foundations and anchor-bolt installation. 2. Division g Section"Sedional Overhead Doors." 3. Division g Section"Door Hardware"for finish door hardware and keying not standard with metal building system manufacturer. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Bay Spacing: Dimension between main frames measured normal to frame (at centerline of frame) for interior bays,and dimension from centerine of first interior main frame measuriA perpendicular to end ' wall(outside face of end-wall girt). B. Building Length: Dimension of the building measured perpendicular to main framing from end wall to end wall(outside face of girt to outside face of girt). C. Building Width: Dimension of the building measured pamUel to main framing from sidewall to sidcwali (outside face of girt to outside face of gin). ' D. Clear Span: Distance between supports of beams, girders, or trusses (measured from lowest level of . connecting area of a column and a taftcr frame,or knee). ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 1 1 E. Eave Height: Vertical dimension from finished floor to cave (the line along the sidewall formed by •, Intersection of the planes of the roof and wall). F. Clear Height under Structure: Vertical dimension from finished floor to lowest point of any pall of ' primary or secondary structure,not including crane supports,located within clear span. G. Terminology Standard: Refer to MBMA's"Low Rise Building Systems Manual"for definitions of terms ' for metal building system construction not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS , A. General: Provide a complete, integrated set of metal building system manufacturer's standard mutually ' dependent components and assemblies tlmt form a metal building system capable of withstanding structural and other loads, thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure or infiltration of water into building interior. Include primary and secondary framing,roof and wall panels, and accessories complying with requirements indicated,including those in this Article. ' B. Metal Building System Design: Of size,spacing,slope,and spans indicated,and as follows: 1. Code Requirements: The building stall be designed according to the contract requirements and ' the following: a. BOCA National Building Code/1999 and all references within. b, AISI"Specifications for the Design of Light-Gauge,Cold-Formed Structural Members'. ' C. American with Disabilities Act(ADA)of 1990,Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities,as amended. 2. Design Documents: Scaled design documents adequate to represent the design of the pre- engineered metal building system and to prove conformance with the code requirements shall be submitted to the Owner and approved in writing by the Project Engineer as to conformance with the contract Documents before the metal building manufacturer proceeds with the fabrication of ' the metal building system. The design documents shall include but shall not be limited to the following: a. Structural loadings: For installed components indicated to comply with design loads, ' include structural analysis data signal and scaled by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. b. Floor Plans and finish schedule. , C. Exterior elevations. d. Building and construction details,sections and elevations. C. Design foundation loads. ' E Anchor-Bolt Plans: Include location,diameter,and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. g. Structural-Framing plans and details: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing. Indicate welds and bollcd connections, distinguishing between shop and field , applications, Include transverse cross-sections. It Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of panels on support framing,details of edge conditions,joints, panel profiles, corners, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, (lashings, closures, and special details. Distinguish between factory- and field- assembled work, I. Erection Drawings, J. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items,at a scale of not less than I- ' 1/2 inches per 12 inches(1:8): 1) Connection hardware. • 2) Ridge cap and ridge lights. ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-2 ' '• 3) Gutters,downspouts and flashings. 4) Trims and closures.,etc. ' 3. Primary Frame Type: Provide the following: a. Long Bay: Solid-or truss-member structural-framing system without interior columns. 4. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard, for buildings not required to be expandable, as follows: a. Provide load-bearing end-wall and comer columns,and rafters. 5. Secondary Frame Type: Manufacturers standard rafters and one of the following girls: a. Flushdramed girts. ' b. Partially inset-framed girls. C. Exterior-framed(bypass)gins. ' 6. Eave Height: a. 18 minimum on front(cast)face of building. 7. Bay Spacing: As determined by manufacturer to conform to layout of design drawings. 8. Roof Slope: Contractor's option of manufacturers standard 9. Roof System: Manufacturers standard lap-scam 24 gauge roof panels with insulation. 10. Exterior Wall System: Manufacturers standard field-assembled 26 gauge wall panels. ' C. Structural Performance: Provide metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of gravity loads and the following loads and stresses within limits and under conditions indicated: N 1. Engineer metal building systems according to procedures in MBMA's "Low Rise Building Systems Manual." 2. Design Loads: Comply with load requirements of MBMA's "Low Rise Building Systems Manual",the"BGCA National Building Codd1999"and the following: 3. Live Loads: Include vertical loads induced by the building occupancy indicated on Drawings. Include loads induced by maintenance workers,materials,and equipment for roof live loads. 4. Roof Snow Loads: Include vertical loads induced by a 20 psf ground snow toad,as determined by 50-year mean-recurrence-interval ground snow load at Project site. Allow for unbalanced and drift loads. 5. Wind Loads: include horizontal loads induced by a basic wind speed corresponding to a 10-year mean-recurrence interval at Project site. 6. Collateral Loads: Include additional dead loads other titan the weight of metal building system for pcmtartett items such as sprinklers,mechanical systems,electrical systems,and ceilings. 7. Load Combinations: Design metal building systems to withstand the most critical effects of load factors and load combinations as required by the rcfcmnced codes. 8. Deflection Limits: Engineer assemblies to withstand design loads with deflections no greater than the following: a. Purlins and Rakers: Vertical deflection of 1/240 of the span. b. Girts: Horizontal dellection of 1/180 of the span. C. Roof Panels: Vertical deflection of 1/180 of the span. d. Wall Panels: Horizontal deflection of 1/180 of the span. ' 9. Design secondary framing system to accommodate deflection of primary building structure and construction tiion tolerances,and to maintain clearance at openings, ' 10. Metal Roof And Wall Panels: ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-3 a. Design in accordance with AISI "Specifications for the Design of Lighl-Gauge, Cold- •' Farmed Steel Slmcluml Members"and in accordance with sound engineering methods and practices ' b. Design to support a 200 pound load evenly distributed over a 2 foot square arcs centered between purlins and limit the deflection to IJ180 in a two span condition. D. Seismic Performance: Design and engineer metal building systems capable of withstanding the effects of ' earthquake motions determined according to "BOCA National Building Code/1999", or ASCE 7, "Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures": Section 9,"Earthquake Loads,"whichever is more stringent. ' E. Themal Movements: Provide metal building roof and wall panel systems that allow for thermal movements resulting from the following maximum change (range) in ambient and surface temperatures ' by preventing buckling,opening of joints,overstressing of components,failure of joint sealants,failure of connections, and oilier detrimental effects. Base engineering calculation on surface temperatures of materials due to both solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss. 1. Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F (67 deg C), ambient; 180 deg F (100 deg C), material ' surfaces. F. Thermal Pcrfomunce: Provide metal building roof and wall assemblies with the following thermal- ' resistance values(R-value): 1. Roof Assemblies(R-Value): 30 deg F x h.x sq. fl./Btu(5.28 K x sq.ndW)• , 2. Wall Assemblics(R-Valuc): 19 deg F x h.x sq.ft./Btu(3.35 K x sq.m/W). G. Air Infiltration for Roof Panels: Provide roof panel assemblies with permanent resistance to air leakage through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 Ws per sq. m) of fixed roof area when tested according to ASTM E 1680 at a static-air-pressure difference of 4 lbf/sq,fl. (192 Pa). H. Air Infiltration for Wall Panels: Provide wall panel assemblies with permanent resistance to air leakage , through assembly of not more than 0.09 cfm/sq. ft. (0.45 Ws per sq, m)of fixed wall area when tested according to ASTM E 283 at a static-air-pressurc difference of 4 lbf/sq.ft.(192 Pa). 1. Water Pcnctmdon for Roof Panels: Provide roof panel assemblies with no water penetration as defined in ' the test method when tested according to ASTM E 1646 at a minimum differential press=of 20 percent of inward-acting,wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 ibf/sq.fl. (300 Pa)and not more than 12 ibf/sq.ft.(575 Pa). ' J. Water Penetration for Wall Panels: Provide wall panel assemblies with no water penetration as defined in the test method when tested according to ASTM E 331 at a minimum differential pressure of 20 percent ' of inward-acting, wind-load design pressure of not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft. (300 Pa)and not more than 12 ibf/sq.lt.(575 Pa). K. Wind-Uplift Resistance: Provide roof panel assemblies that meet requirements of UL 580 for the ' following wind-uplift resistance: h. Class 90. ' L. Gullets and Downspouts: 1. Provide a continuous,seamless gutter along each cave,sized per code requirements. ' 2. Provide a down-spout at each building comer and at 50'maximum spacing or closer if required by drainage calculations. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-4 ' ,• 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles,and finishes for each type of the following metal building system components: ' 1. Structural-framing system. 2. Roof panels. 3. Wall panels and liners. 4. Translucent Ridge Cap. 5, insulation. 6. Vapor retarders. 7, Trim and closures. ' 8. Louvers. 9. Accessories. B. Shop Drawings: For the following metal building system components. Include plans, elevations, ' sections,details,and attachments to other Work. 1. For installed components indicated to comply with design loads, include structural analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation. 2. Anchor-Bolt Plans: Include location, diameter, and projection of anchor bolts required to attach metal building to foundation. Indicate column reactions at each location. 3. Structural-Framing Drawings: Show complete fabrication of primary and secondary framing. ' Indicate welds and bolted connoctions, distinguishing between shop and field applications. Include transverse cross-sections. 4. Roof and Wall Panel Layout Drawings: Show layouts of panels on support framing, details of N edge conditions, joints, panel profiles, comers, custom profiles, supports, anchorages, trim, fleshings,closures,and special details. Distinguish between factory-and field-assembled work. 5. Personnel Door Schodulc: Provide schedule of doors and frames, using the same reference numbers as indicated on Drawings. Include details of reinforcement and installation requirements ' for finish hardware. 6. Accessory Drawings: Include details of the following items, at a scale of not loss than 1-1/2 ' inches per 12 inches(1:8): a. Ventilators. b. Louvers. C. Gutters. d. Downspouts. C. Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts showing the full range of colors available for ' each type of the following products with faclory-applied color finishes: 1. Roof panels. ' 2. Wall panels. 3. Trim and closures. 4. Doors. S. Accessories. D. Samples for Verification: For(lie following products, in manufacturers standard sizes, showing the full range of color, texture, and pattern variations expected, in the profile and style indicated. Prepare Samples from the same material to be used for the Work. • 1. Roof Panels: 12 inches (300 mm) long by actual panel width. Include clips, caps, battens, fasteners,closures,and other exposed panel accessories, ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-5 2. Wall Panels: 12 inches (300 min) long by actual panel nidlh. Include clips, caps, battens, •, fasteners,closures,and other exposed panel accessories. 3. Translucent Panels: 12 inches(300 min)long by actual panel width. , 4. Trim and Closures: 12 inches(300 mm)tong. Include fasteners and other exposed accessories. 5. Vapor Retarders: 6-inch-(150-mm-)square samples. G. Accessories: 124nch-(300-mm-)long samples for each type of accessory. ' E. Product Certificates: Signed by manufacturers of metal building systems certifying that products furnished comply with requirements. 1. Letter of Design Certification: Signed and scaled by a qualified professional engineer. Include ' the following: a. Name and location of Project. ' b. Order number. C. Name of manufacturer. d. Name of Contractor. , C. Building dimensions,including width,leng0t,height,and roof slope. E Indicate compliance with AISC standards for hot-rolled steel and AISI standards for cold- roiled steel,including edition dates of each standard. ' g. Governing building code and year of edition. IL Design Loads: Include dead load, roof live load, collateral loads, roof snow load, deflection,wind loads/spoeds and exposure,seismic zone or effective peak velocity-related acccleration/pcak acceleration,and auxiliary loads. ' I. Load Combinations: indicate that loads were applied acting simultaneously with concentrated loads,according to governing building code. J. Building-Use Category: Indicate category of building use and its effect on load importance factors. k. AISC Certification for Category MB: Include statement that metal building system and components were designed and produced in an AISC-Certified Facility by an AISC- Certified Manufacturer. , F. Welding Certificates: Copies of certificates for welding procedures and personnel. G. Erector Certificates: Signed by manufacturer certifying that ercclors comply with requirements, ' H. Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that they comply with requirements. Include evidence of manufacturing experience. ' I. Qualification Data: For firths and persons specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, names ' and addresses of Project Engineers and owners,and other information specified. J. Material Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that each of the following items complies with requirements: , I. Thermal insulation. 2. Vapor retarders. , K. Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, indicating the following current products comply with requirements: ' 1. Insulation and Vapor Retarders: Include reports for thermal resistance, fire-lest-response • chamctcristics,water-vapor transmission,and water absorption. 1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-6 ' ,• L. Warranties: Special warranties specified in this Section. ' 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Erector Qualifications: An experienced erector who has specialized in erecting and installing work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project and who is acceptable to manufacturer. ' B. Professional License and Scat Requirements: The metal building system and all system components shall be designed and the design documents scaled by a professional engineer licensed to practice engineering In the state of Missouri as required by Missouri Revised Stalutcs,Chapter 327. ' C. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations or metal building systems ' that arc similar to those indicated for this Project in material,design,and extent. D. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing metal building systems similar to ' those indicated for this Project and with n record of successful in-service performance. L Member of MBMA. 2. AISC Certification for Category MB: An AISC-Certified Manufacturer that designs and products ' metal building systems and components in an AISC-Certified Facility. 3. Engineering Responsibility: Preparation of Shop Drawings, testing program development, test result interpretation,and comprehensive engineering analysis by a qualified professional engineer. N E. Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency, acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, qualified according to ASTM E 329 to conduct the testing indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 548. ' F. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of metal building system component through one source from a single manufacturer. ' G. Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for system's aesthetic effects and performance characteristics. Aesthetic effects arc indicated by dimensions, arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlincs, to one ' another, and to adjoining construction. Performance characteristics are indicated by criteria subject to verification by one or more methods including preconstruction testing, field testing, or in-service performance. ' L Do not modify intended aesthetic effects,as judged solely by Project Engineer,except with Project Engineer's approval. If modifications are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Project Engineer for review. ' H. Welding: Qualify procedures and pesonnel according to AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Cade—Steel"; and AWS D1.3,"Structural Welding Code—Shcel Sled." ' 1. Regulatory Requirements: Fabricate and label structural framing to comply with special inspection requirements at point of fabrication for welding and other connections required by authorities leaving jurisdiction. J. Structural Steel: Comply with AISC 5335, "Specification for Structural Steel Buildings—Allouuble • Stress Design, Plastic Design"; or AISC 5342, "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for ' Structural Steel Buildings,"for design requirements and allowable stresses. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-7 K. Cold-Formed Steel: Comply with A1SI SG-671, "Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel •' Structural Members," and AISI SG-91 I, "Load and Resistance Facet Design Specification for Steel Structural Members,"for design requirements and allowable stresses. , L. Deliver, store, install and maintain the metal building system and all building components as recommended or required by the manufacturers. , 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver components, sheets,panels,and other manufactured items so as not to be damaged or deformed. ' Package roof and wall panels for protection during transportation and handling. B. Handling: Unload, store, and erect roof and wall panels to prevent bending, warping, twisting, and ' surface damage. C. Stack materials on platforms or pallets, covered with tarpaulins or other suitable weathertight and , ventilated covering. Store roof and wall panels to ensure dryness. Do not store panels in contact with other materials that might cause staining,denting,or other surface damage. 1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS ' A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when weather conditions permit roof and wail panel , installation to be performed according to manufacturers written instructions and warranty requirements. B. Field Measurements: Verify metal building system foundations by field measurements before metal building fabrication and indicate mcasuremerds on Shop Drawings. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work. 1. Established Dimensions for Foundations: Where field measurements cannot be made without , delaying the Work, establish foundation dimensions and proceed with fabricating structural framing without field measuremens. Coordinate anchor-bolt installation to ensure diet actual anchorage dimensions correspond to established dimensions, ' 2. Established Dimensions for Panels: Where field mcasurcments cannot be made without delaying the Work,either establish framing and opening dimensions and proceed with fabricating roof and wall panels without field mcasurcmeNs, or allow for field-trimming panels. Coordinate roof and wall construction to ensure that actual building dimensions, locations of structural members,and , openings correspond to established dimensions. 1.9 COORDINATION , A. Coordinate size and location of concrete foundations and casting of anchor-bolt inserts into foundation walls and footings. Concrete, reinforcement, and formwork requirements are specified in Division 3 ' Section"Cast-in-Place Concrete." B. Coordinate with the Project Engineer to locate and provide the required rough openings and liner panel ' accessories for the exhaust fans and mechanical wall units as shown on the drawings. C. Coordinate location and install manufacturer's standard pipe ilashings for plumbing and flue vent roof penetrations as shown on the drawings. ' 1.10 WARRANTY •' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-8 1 1 '. A. General Warranty: Special warranties specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to,and run ' concurrent will,other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the Contract Documents, B. Special Warranty on Panels: Written warranty, executed and signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair or replace roof and wall panels that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period. 1, Warranty Period: Three years from date of Substantial Completion. C. Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Written warranty, signed by manufacturer agreeing to repair finish of replace metal panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period. ' 1, Deterioration of finish includes,but is not limited to: a. Color fade,(color change)more than 5 color difference units per ASTM D2244. b. Chalking,in excess of ASTM D4214 No.8 rating. C. Cracking,check,peel,or loss of film integrity(loose adhesion). ' d. Decline in gloss more than 50%per ASTM D523. C. Perforation due to corrosion. ' 2. Wanartty Period for Roof Panels: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. 3, Warranty Period for Wall Panels: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion. D. Special Warranty on Roof Panel Weathertighmess: Written warranty,signed by manufacturer agreeing to ' repair or replace roof panel assemblies that fail to remain weathertight within specified warranty period, with the minimum cost limitations to be equal to or greater than the original cost of the roof. 1, Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but arc not limited to, the following: ' S. Manufacurers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Alliance Steel, Inc. ' 2. American Buildings Company. 3, American Steel Building Company, Inc, 4. Behlcn Mfg.Co, 5, Butler Manufacturing Company. ' G, Can Building Systems. 7, Crown Metal Buildings,Inc, 8, Dean Steel Buildings. ' 9. Garco Building Systems. 10. Gulf States Manufacturers,Inc. 11. Mesco Metal Buildings. 12. Metal Building Products,Inc. 13. Package Steel Building Systcros. 14. Southern Structures,Inc. • 15. Star Building Systems. ' 16. Steelox Systems Inc. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-9 17. Varco-Pruden Buildings;a United Dominion Company. •, 2.2 STRUCTURAL-FRAMING MATERIALS A. Structural-Steel Shapes: ASTM A 361A 36M or ASTM A 529/A 529M. , B. Steel Plate, Bar, or Strip: ASTM A 529/A 529M, ASTM A 570/A 570K or ASTM A 577/A 572M; 50,000-psi(345-MPa)minimum yield strength. C. Steel Tubing or Pipe: ASTM A 500,Grade B;ASTM A 501;or ASTM A 53,Grade B. 1 D. Structural-Steel Street: Hot-rolled, ASTM A 570/A 570M, Grade 50 or Grade 55; hot-rolled, , ASTM 568/A 568M;or cold-rolled,ASTM A 611,structural quality,matte(dull)finish. E. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural quality, Grade 50, with G60 , (Z180)coating designation;mill phosphatized. F. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coaling: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepainted by the coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 7551A 755M and the ' following requirements: 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; , structural quality. 2. Aluminum-Zinc Alloy Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792M,Class AZ50 coating,Grade 40 (Class AZ150 coaling,Grade 275);structural quality. G. Joist Girders: Provide girders, complying with SDI's"Standard Speeificalions, Load Tables, and Weight N Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders," manufactured with steel-angle top and bottom chord members, to produce girder types, end arrangements, and top chord arrangements indicated and required for primary framing. , H. Steel Joists: Provide joists, complying with SJI's "Standard Specifications, Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders,"manufactured with steel-angle top and bottom chord members, , to produce joist types, end arrangements, and top chord arrangements indicated and required for secondary framing. L Non-High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 307, Grade A (ASTM F 568K Property ' Class 4.6);carbomstecl,hex-head bolts;carbon-steel nuts;and flat,unlwrdened steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain,uncoated. ' 2. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating,ASTM A 153,Class C. 3. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating,ASTM B 695,Class 50. J. High-Strength Bolts, Nuts, and Washers: ASTM A 325 (ASTM A 325M), Type 1, heavy hex steel ' structural bolls,heavy hex carbon-steel nuts,and hardened carbon-steel washers. 1. Finish: Plain,uncoated. ' 2. Finish: Hot4p zinc coaling,ASTM A 153,Class C. 3. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating,ASTM B 695,Class 50. 4. Dirocl-Tcnsion Indicators: ASTM F 959,Typc 325 or Type 490 (ASTM F 959M,Type 325M or Type 490M). ' a. Finish: Plain,uncoated. b. Finish: Hot-dip zinc coating,ASTM B 695,Class 50. • C. Finish: Mechanically deposited zinc coating,ASTM B 695,Class 50,epoxy coated. ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 10 , 1 i K. Anchor Rods Bolts Nuts and Washers: As follows: '• 1. Finish: Hot4p zinc coating,ASTM A 153,Class C. 2. Unheaded Rods: ASTM A 361A 36M. 3. Unheeded Rods: ASTM A 57VA 572M,Grade 50(Grade 345). 4. Unheaded Bolts: ASTM A 687,high strength. 5. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 307,Grade A(ASTM F 568,Property Class 4.6);carbon-steel,hex-head bolts;and carbon-steel nuts. 6. Headed Bolts: ASTM A 325(ASTM A 325M),Type I,heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carton-steel nuts. 7. Headed Bolls: ASTM A 490(ASTM A 490M),Type 1,heavy hex steel structural bolts and heavy hex carbon-steel nuts. ' 81 Washers: ASTM A 36/A 36M. L. Primers: As selected by manufacturer for resistance to normal atmospheric corrosion,compatibility with finish paint systems,capability to provide a sound foundation for field-applied topcoats despite prolonged ' exposure,and as follows: 1. Primer: Fast-curing, Iced-and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer, complying with performance requirements of FS TT-P-664. 2. Primer: SSPC-Paint 25;rod iron oxide,zinc oxide,raw linseed oil and alkyd primer. 3. Primer: SSPC-Paint 23,latex primer. 4. Primer: SSPC-Paint 15,Type I,red oxide, 5, Primer: Manufacturer's standard,lead-and chromate-free,tionasptmltic,rust-inhibiting primer, 6. Primer: Nouasphaltic primer complying with SSPC's "Painting System Guide No.7.00: Guide for Selecting One-Coat Shop Painting Systems." 2.3 PANEL MATERIALS ' A. Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet Prepainted with Coil Coating: Steel sheet metallic coated by the hot-dip process and prepaimod by the coi)-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M and the following requirements: ' 1. Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) Steel Sheet: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 (Z275) coating designation; structural quality. 1 Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel Sheet: ASTM A 792/A 792K Class AZ50 coating,Grade 40 (Class AZ 150 coating,Grade 275);structural quality. 3. Aluminum-Coated Steel Shwa: ASTM A 4031A 463K T1-40(T1-120)coating. 4. Surface: Smooth,flat,mill finish. B. Panel Sealants: Provide the following: 1. Sealant Tape: Pressure-sensitive, 100 percent solids,gray polyisobutylene compound sealant tape ' with release-paper backing. Provide permanently elastic, nonsag,nontoxic, nonstaining tape 1/2 inch(13 mm)wide and I/8 inch(3 mm)Quick. 2. Joint Sealant: ASTM C 920; one-part clastomeric polyurethane, polysuifude, or silicone-rubber sealant; of type, grade,class, and use classifications required to scat joints in panels and remain wcatherlight;and as recommended by metal building system manufacturer. 2.4 INSULATION MATERIALS • A. Fire Tcst-Response Characteristics for Insulation: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire- , test-response ciwmcleristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 11 indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having •' Jurisdiction. Identify materials with appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency. 1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84. , 2. Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136. B. Glass-Fibcr-Blankcl Insulation: Thermal insulation, complying with ASTM C 991, Type I, or ' NAIMA 202, of 0.5-lb/co. ft. (g-kg/cu. m) density, thickness as indicated, with a flame-spread rating of 25 or less,and 2-inch-(50-mm-)wide,continuous,vapor-tight edge tabs. C. Vapor-Retarder Facing: Complying with ASTM C 1136,with permcance not greater than the following ' when tested according to ASTM E 96,Desiccant Method: I. Composition: Polypropylene-faced,scrim-reinforced kmft paper,with permcance not greater than , 0.02 pens(1.15 ng/Pa x s x sq.m). 2. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but arc not limited to,die following: ' 3. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. CGI Silvercoic, Ina , b. Lamlec Corporation. C. Mizell Bros.Co. d. Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation, ' D. Retainer Strips: 0.019-inch-(0.5-mm-)thick,formal, galvanized steel or PVC retainer clips colored to match insulation facing. N 2.5 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt mastic, SSPC-Paint 12,compounded for 15-mil(0.4-mm)dry , film thickness per coat. Provide inert-type noncorrosive compound free of asbestos fibers, sulfur components,and other deleterious impurities. , B. Nonmetallic, Shrinkage-Resistant Grout: Premixed, nonmetallic, noncorrosive, nonstaining grout containing selected silica sands,Portland cement,shrinkage compensating agents,plasticizing and water- reducing agents, complying with ASTM C 1107, of consistency suitable for application, and with a 30- , minute working time. C. Shop Primer for Galvanized Metal Surfaces: Zinc dust, zinc-oxide primer selected by manufacturer for compatibility with substrate. Comply with ITS TT-P-641. ' 2.6 FABRICATION,GENERAL ' A. Genen d: Design components and Geld connections required for erection to permit easy assembly and disassembly. ' 1. Fabricate components in a manner that once assembled in the shop, they may be disassembled, repackaged,and reassembled in the field. 2. Mark each piece and part of the assembly to correspond with previously prepared erection ' drawings,diagrams,and instruction manuals. 3. Fabricate framing to produce clean, smooth cuts and bends. Punch holes of proper size, shape, • and location. Cold-formed members shall be free of cracks,tars,and ruptures. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 12 , '• B. Primary Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section with bascplatcs, bearing plates,stiffeners,and other items required for erection welded into place. Cut,form,punch,drill, and weld framing for bolted field assembly. 1. Make shop connections by welding or by using high-strength bolts. 2. Join flanges to webs of built-up members by a contifiuous submerged arc-welding process. 3. Brace compression flange of primary framing by angles connected between frame web and purlin or gin web, so flange compressive strength is within allowable limits for any combination of loadings, 4. Weld clips to frames for attaching secondary framing members, 5. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime primary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. C. Secondary Framing: Shop-fabricate framing components to indicated size and section by roll-forming or break-forming, with bascplates, bearing plates, stiffeners, and other plates required for erection welded into place. Cut, form,punch,drill, and weld secondary framing for bolted field connections to primary ' framing. 1. Make shop connections by welding or by using non-high-strength bolts. ' 2. Shop Priming: Prepare surfaces for shop priming according to SSPC-SP 2. Shop prime secondary structural members with specified primer after fabrication. D. Factory Priming for Ficld-Painted Finish: Where field painting after installation is indicated, apply the specified air-dried primer immediately after cleaning and preventing. 1. Prime primary, secondary, and cnd-wall steel framing members with specified primer to a minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil(0.025 mm). a. Prime secondary steel framing formed from metallic-coated steel sheet with rcd-oxide polyester paint,with a minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil(0.013 mm)on each side. ' 2. Prime galvanized members,after phosphoric acid pretreatment, with manufacturer's standard zinc dust,zinc-oxide primer. E. Tolerances: Comply with MBMNs "Low Rise Building Systems Manual": Chapter IV, Section 9, "Fabrication and Erection Tolerances." 2.7 STRUCTURAL FRAMING A. Primary Framing: Manufacturers standard structural primary framing system, designed to withstand required loads and specified requirements. Primary framing includes transverse and Iran-to frames; ratter,rake,and canopy beams;sidewall,intermediate,cod-wail,and comer columns;and wind bracing. ' 1. General: Provide frames with attachment plates,bearing plates,and splice members. Factory drill for field-bolted assembly. Provide frame span and spacing indicated. ' a. Slight variations in span and spacing may be acceptable if necessary to meet manufacturer's standard,as approve!by Project Engineer. 2. Rigid Clear-Span Frames: I-shaped frame sections fabricated from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes. • 3. Truss-Frame Clear-Span Frarnes: Rafter frames fabricated from joist girders, and I-slurped oolumn sections from shop-welded,built-up steel plates or structural-ste l shapes. ' 4. Frame Configuration: Gable roof with ridge located as shown on the drawings. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 13 S. Exterior Column Type: Uniform depth or tapered. •, 6. Raker Type: Uniform depth or tapered B. End-Wall Framing: Manufacturer's standard primary end-wall framing fabricated for field-bolted ' assembly to comply with the following: 1. End-Wall and Comer Columns: I-shaped sections fabricated from structural-steel shapes; shop- , welded, built-up steel plates; or C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of 0.0747 inch(1.9 mm). 2. End-Wall Rafters: C-shaped, cold-formed, structural-steel sheet; with minimum thickness of ' 0.0598 inch(1.5 nun). C. Secondary Framing Manufacturces staMard secondary framing members,including purlins, girls,cave struts, flange bracing, base members, gable angles, clips, headers, jambs, and other miscellaneous ' structural members. Fabricate framing from cold-formed, structural-steel sheet or roll-formed, metallic- coated steel sheet prcpainted with coil coating,unless otherwise indicated,to comply with the following: I. Purlins: C-or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel , sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-stet► shapes; minimum 2-1/2-inch- (64-mm-) wide flanges. 2. Girls: C- or Z-shaped sections; fabricated from minimum 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick steel , sheet,built-up steel plates,or mAroctural-steel shales. Form ends of Z-sections with stiffening lips angled 45 to 50 degrees to flange and with minimum 2-1/2-inch-(64-mm-)wide flanges. 3. Eavc Struts: Unequal-flange, C-skimped sections; fabricated from 0.0598-inch- (1.5-mm-) thick , steel sheet, built-up steel plates, or structural-steel shapes; to provide adequate backup for both roof and wall panels. 4. Flange and Sag Bracing: Minimum 1.5/8-by-1-5/8-inch (41-by4l-mm) structural-steel angles, with a minimum thickness of 0.0598 inch(1.5 mm),to stiffen primary frarne flanges. 5. Base or Sill Angles: Minimum 3-by-2-by-0.0747-inch (76-by-51-by-1.9-mm) zinc-coated (galvanized)steel sheet. ' 6. Puriin and Girl Clips: Minimum 0.0747-inch- (1.9-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet. 7. Secondary End-Wall Framing: Manufacturces standard sections fabricated from minimum 0.0747-inch-(1.9-mmn-)thick,Anc-coated(galvanized)steel sheet. ' 8. Framing for Openings: Channel shapes; fabricated from minimum 0,0598-inch-(1.5-mrn-)thick, cold-formed, structuml-steel sheet or structural-steel shapes. Frame head and jamb of door openings,and head,jamb,and sill of other openings. , 9. Miscellaneous Structural Members: Manufacturer's standard sections fabricated from cold- formed, structural-steel sheet; built-up steel plates; or zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet; designed to withstand required loads. D. Bracing: Provide adjustable wind bracing as follows: , 1. Rods: ASTM A 36/A 36M; ASTM A 572/A 572M, Grade D; or ASTM A 529/A 529M, , Grade 50; 1/2-inch- (13-mm-) diameter steel; threaded full length or threaded u minimum of 12 inches(300 mm)at each end. 2. Cable: ASTM A 475, 114-inclo-(6-rmn-)diameter,extra-high-strength guide,Class B zinc-coaled, seven-strand steel;with threaded end anchors. , 3. Angles: Fabricated from structural-steel shapes to match primary framing, of size required to withstand design loads. 4. Rigid Portal Frames: Fabricate from shop-welded, built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes ' to match primary framing;of size required to withstand design loads. 5. Fixed-Base Columns: Fabricate from shop-welded,built-up steel plates or structural-steel shapes • to match primary framing;of size required to withstand design loads. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125. 14 , ' 6. Diaphragm Action of Panels: Design metal building to resist wind forces through diaphmgm • action of roof and wall panels. ' 7. Bracing: Provide wind bracing using any method specified above,at mat ufactumr's option. E. Boils: Provide shop-painted bolts unless stmctuml-framing components are in direct contact with roof and wall panels. Provide zinc-plated bolts when stroctural-forming components arc in direct contact with ' roof and wall panels. 2.8 ROOF PANELS A. Lap-Seam Roof Panels: Fabricate from metallic coated steel shoets prcpainted with coil coating,factory formed to provide 36-inch(914-mm)coverage,with raised trapezoidal major ribs at 12 inches(305 mm) o.c., and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs for full length of panel. Design panels for mechanical attachment to structure using exposed fasteners,lapping major ribs at panel edges. Comply with the following: 1. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel. 2. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel. 3. Yield Strength: 50 ksi(345 MPa),Metal Thickness:24 gauge 0.0239 inch(0,60 mm). ' 4. Yield Strength: 80 ksi(552 Will,Metal Thickness: 29 gauge 0.0134 inch(0.34 mm). 5. Panel Thidmess: 1.125 inches(29 mm). B. Roof Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete roof panel assembly including trim,copings,fasciae,mullions, sills,comer units,ridge closures, clips, scam covers, battens, fiashings, gutters, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items. Match materials and finishes of roof panels,unless otherwise indicated. 1. Closures: Provide closures at cave and ridge,fabricated of same metal as roof panels. 2. Clips: Minimum 0.0625-inch- (1,6-mm-)thick, stainless-steel panel clips designed to withstand ' negative-load requirements. 3. Cleats: Mechanically seamed cleats formed from minimum 0.0250-inch- (0.65-mm-) thick, stainless-stcel or nylon-mated aluminum sheet. 4. Thermal Spacer Blocks: Where panels attach directly to puriins,provide 1-inch-(25-mm-)thick, ' thermal spacer blocks;fabricated from extruded polystyrene. 5. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material recommended by manufacturer. ' C. Exterior Finish: Apply the following coil mating to roof panels and accessories: 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturers standard two-coat, thermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and flwropolymer color topcoat containing not less than 70 percent polyvinylidcne fluoride resin by weight, with a total minimum dry film ddclmcss of I mil (0.025 mm) and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested according to ASTM D 523. ' a. Durability: Provide' coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions for a minimum of 20 years without significant peel,blister,flake,chip,crack,or check in finish; ' without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to ASTM D 4214;and without fading in excess of five Hunter units. 2. Colors,Textures,and Glosses: As selected by Project Engineer from manufacturer's full range for these characteristics. '• D. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and manufacturer's standard while or light-colored backer finish, consisting of prime mat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil(0.013 mm). 1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 15 1 ' 2.9 WALL PANELS '• A. Uninsulated Wall Panels: Provide manufacturces standard panels complying with the following: L Ribbed Panels: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheets prepainted with coil coating, factory formed to provide 36-inch (914-mm) coverage, with raised trapezoidal major ribs at 12 inches (305 mm)o.c., and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs for full length of panel. Design panels for mechanical attachment to structure using exposed fasteners, lapping major ribs at panel edges. Comply with the following: ' a. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel. b. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel. C. Yield Strength: 50 ksi(345 MPa),Metal Thickness:24 gauge 0.0239 inch(0.60 mm). ' d. Yield Strength: 80 ksi(552 MPa),Mewl Thrickness: 29 gauge 0.0134 inch(0.34 mm). C. Panel Thickness: 1.125 inches(29 mm), ' 2. Reverse-Ribbed Panels: Fabricate from mcfallic-coated steel sheets prepainted with coil coating, factory formed to provide 36-inch(914-mm)coverage,with recessed trapezoidal major valleys at 12 inches(305 mm)o.c.,and intermediate valleys symmetrically spaced between major valleys for full length of panel. Design panels for mechanical attachment to structure using exposed fasteners,lapping major valleys at panel edges. Comply with the following: a. Material: Zinc-(mtei(galvanized)steel. ' b. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel. C. Yield Strength: 50 ksi(345 MPa),Mewl Thickness: 24 gauge 0.0239 inch(0.60 mm). d. Yield Strength: 80 ksi(552 MPa),Metal Thickness:29 gauge 0.0134 inch(0.34 mm). C. Panel Thickness: 1.125 inches(29 mm). 3, Box Section Panels: Fabricate from 50-ksi(345-MPa)metallic-coated steel sheets prcpainted with coil coating, factory formed to provide flat panel with 16-inch (406-mm)coverage. Panels shall be 3 inches(76 mm)deep with 1-inch-(25-mm-)wide flange for attaching interior finish. Design side laps for mechanical attachment to structure by interlocking panel edges and securing panels with concealed fasteners installed from interior side of panel. Factory apply sealant at each interlocking joint. Comply with the following: ' a. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel. b. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel. ' C. Metal Thickness: 0.0239 inch(0.60 nun). d. Metal Thickness: 0.0299 inch(0.75 mm). B. Wail Liner Panels: Fabricate from metallic-coated steel sheets prepainted with coil coating, factory ' formed to provide 36-inch (914-mm)coverage, with raised major ribs at 12 inches (305 mm)o.c., and intermediate stiffening ribs symmetrically spaced between major ribs for full length of panel. Design panels for mechanical attachment to structure using exposed fasteners,lapping major ribs at panel edges. ' Comply with the following: I. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel. 2. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel. ' 3, Yield Strength: 50 ksi(345 MPa), 4. Metal Thickness: 0.0179 inch(0.45 tmn). 5. Panel Thickness: 1.125 inches(29 mm)minimum. ' C. Wall Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete wall panel assembly, including • trim,copings,mullions,sills,comer units,clips,scam covers,battens,fleshings,sealants,gaskets,fillers, closure strips,and similar items, Match materials and finishes of panels. METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 16 1. Backing Plates: Provide metal backing plates at panel end splices, fabricated from material , recommended by manufacturer. • D. Exposed Finish for Exterior Panels: Apply the fallowing call coating: ' 1. Fluoropolymer Two-Coat System: Manufacturer's standard two-coal, Ihermocured system consisting of specially formulated inhibitive primer and fluoropo)ymer color topcoat containing ' not less than 70 percent polyvinylidcne fluoride resin by weight, with a total minimum dry film thickness of 1 mil (0.025 mm) and 30 percent reflective gloss when tested according to ASTM D 523. ' a. Durability: Provide coating field tested under normal range of weather conditions for minimum of 20 years without significant peel,blister,flake,chip,crack,or check in finish; without chalking in excess of a chalk rating of 8 according to ASTM D 4214;and without ' fading in excess of five Hunter units. 2. Colors,Textures,and Glosses: As selected by Projcct Engineer from manufacturces full range for these characteristics. E. Exposed Finish for Liner Panels: Apply the following coil coating: 1. Acrylic-Enamel Coaling: Epoxy primer and acrylic-enamel topcoat; with a dry film thickness of not less than 0.2 mil(0,005 mm)for primer and 0,8 mil(0.02 mm)for topcoat. ' 2, Colors,Textures,and Glosses: As selected by Project Engineer from manufacturers full range for these characteristics. F. Concealed Finish: Apply pretreatment and mmufactumes standard white or light-colored backer finish, , consisting of prime coat and wash coat with a total minimum dry film thickness of 0.5 mil(0.013 mm). 2.10 SOFFIT PANELS M A. Soffit Panels: Manufacturers standard panels complying with the following: ' I, Flat Panels: Fabricate from 50-ksi (345-MPa) steel sheets, factory formed to provide fiat panel with 16-inch (406-mm) coverage, Panel shall be 1 inch (25 mm) deep. Design side laps for mechanical attatchmemt to stmauoe by interlocking panel edges and securing panels with ' concealed fasteners. Factory apply sealant at each interlocking joint. Comply with the following: a. Material: Zinc-coated(galvanized)steel. b. Material: Aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel, ' C. Metal Thickness:26 gauge 0.0179 inch(0.45 mm). B. Finishes: Finish panel surfaces to match adjacent panels as follows: ' 1. Soffit Panels: Match finish and color of wail panels. 2.11 DOORS AND FRAMES ' A. Exterior Doors: Refer to Division 8 Section"Steel Doors and Frames," B. Overhead Doors: Refer to Division 8 Section"Sectional Overhead Doors," ' 2.12 WINDOWS ' A. Aluminum Windows: Refer to Division 8 Section"Aluminum Windows." • 1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 17 ,• 2.13 ACCESSORIES ' A. General: Provide accessories as standard with metal building system manufacturer,and complying with the following: ' 1. Provide sheet metal accessories of same material and in same finish as roof and wall panels,unless otherwise indicated. B. Fasteners: Seif-tapping screws, bolts, nuts, sclMocking rivets and bolls, end-welded studs, and other ' suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads. Provide fasteners with heads matching color of roof or wall sheets by means of plastic caps or factory-applied coating. Comply with the following: 1. Fasteners for Roof Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping,zinc-plated,hex-head carbon-steel screws, with a stainless-steel cap or zincaluminum-alloy head and EPDM or neoprene scaling washer. 2. Fasteners for Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping,zinc-plated,hex-haid carbon-steel screws, with nylon or polypropylene washer. 3. Fasteners for Roof and Wall Panels: Self-drilling or self-tapping 410 stainless or zinc-alloy steel hex washer head,with EPDM or PVC washer under heads of fasteners bearing on weather side of panels, 4. Fasteners for Flashing and Trim: Blind fasteners or sclfdrilling screws with hex washer head. 5. Blind Fasteners: Nigh-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets. C. Flashing and Trim: Form from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc-mated (galvanized) steel sheet or ' aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with mil coating. Provide flashing and trim as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but arc not limited to,eaves, rakes,comers,bases, framed openings,ridges, fasciae, and fillers, Finish flashing and N trim with same finish system as adjacent roof or wall panels, 1. Opening Trim: Minimum 0.028-inch- (0.7-mm-)thick steel sheet. Trim head and jamb of door openings,and head,jamb,and sill of other openings. ' D. Gutters: Form from 0.0179-inch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum- zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepaiMed with coil coating. Match profile of gable trim,complete with end ' pieces, outlet tubes, and other special pieces as required. Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- (2400-mm-) long sections,sized according to SMACNA's"Project Engiwcnuai Sheet Metal Manual." Furnish gutter supports spaced 36 inches(900 mm)mc.,fabricated from same metal as gutters. Provide bronze,copper, or aluminum wire ball strainers at outlets. Finish gutters to match roof fascin and rake trim. ' E. Downspouts: Form from 0.0179 4nch- (0.45-mm-) thick, zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet or aluminum-zinc alloy-coated steel sheet prepainted with coil coaling; in 10-foot- (3-m-) long sections, complete with formed elbows and offsets. Finish downspouts to match wall panels. F. Closures: Closed-cell,laminated polyethylene; minimum 14nch-(25-mm-)thick,flexible closure strips; cut or premolded to match roof and wail panel profile. Provide closure strips where indicated or ' necessary to ensure wcathertight construction. G. Pipe Flashing: Premoided,EPDM pipe collar with flexible aluminum ring bonded to base. 2.14 FINISHES,GENERAL ' A. Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Project Enginecmml and Metal Products" for recommendations for applying and designating finishes. ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 18 B. Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in uppmrance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable if ' they are within one-half of the range of approval Samples. Noticeable variations in the same piece are • not acceptable, Variations in appearance of other components arc acceptable if they are within the range , of approved Samples and arc assembled or installed to minimize contrast. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine substrates, with Erector present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting perfomance of metal building system. I. For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Erector, listing conditions detrimental to , performance of work. 2. Proceed with erection only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. ' B. Before erection proceeds, survey elevations and locations of concrete bearing surfaces, baseplates, and anchor bolls to receive sanctum) framing. Verify compliance with requirements and metal building system manufacturces tolerances. ' 3.2 PREPARATION ' A. Clean substrates of substances,including oil,grease,rolling compounds, incompatible primers,and loose mill scale that impair bond of erection materials, B. Surface Preparation: Clean and prepare surfaces to be painted according to manufacturer's written N instructions for cacti particular substrate condition and as specified. 3.3 ERECTION , A. Erect mewl building system according to manufacturces written instructions and erection drawings. ' B. Do not field cut, drill, or alter structural members without written approval from metal building system manufacturer's professional engineer. ' C. Set structural framing in locations and to elevations indicated and according to AISC specifications referenced in this Section. Maintain structural stability of frame during erection. D. Baseplates and Bearing Plates: Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials ' and roughen surfaces before setting bascplates and bearing plates. Clean bottom surface of bascplates and bearing plates. ' 1. Set baseplates and bearing plates for structural members on wedges,shims,or setting nuts. 2. Tighten anchor bolts after supported members have been positioned and plumbed. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut off flush with edge of bascplatc or bearing plate before ' packing with grout. 3. Pack grout solidly between bearing surfaces and plates so no voids remain. Finish exposed surfaces,protect installed materials,and allow to cure. ' a. Comply with manufacturces written instructions for proprietary grout materials. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125- 19 '• E. Align and adjust framing members before permanently fastening. Before assembly, clean bearing surfaces and other surfaces that will be in permanent contact. Make adjustments to compensate for discrepancies in elevations and alignment. 1. Level and plumb individual members of structure. 2. Establish required leveling and plumbing measurements on mean operating temperature of structure. Make allowances for difference between temperature at time of erection and mean temperature at which structure will be when completed and in service. ' F. Primary Framing and End Walls: Erect framing true to line, level, plumb, rigid, and secure. Level baseplates to a true even plane with full bearing to supporting structures, set with double-nutted anchor bolts. Use grout to obtain uniform bearing and to maintain a level base-line elevation. Moist cure grout for not less Otan seven days after placement. 1. Make field connections using high-strength bolts. Tighten bolts by tum-of-the-nut method. G. Secondary Framing: Erect framing we to line,level,plumb,rigid,and secure. Fasten secondary framing to primary framing using clips with field connections using non-high-strength bolts. Hold rigidly to a straight line by sag rods. ' 1. Provide rake or gable purlins with tight-fitting closure channels and fasciae. 2. Locate and space wall gins to suit door and window arrangements and heights. 3. Locate canopy framing as indicated. 4. Provide supplemental framing at entire perimeter of openings, including doors,windows,louvers, ventilators,and other penetrations of roof and walls. N H. Steel Joists and Joist Girders: Install joists, girders, and accessories plumb, square, and true to line,, securely fasten to supporting construction according to SJI's "Standard Specifications,Load Tables, and Weight Tables for Steel Joists and Joist Girders," joist manufacturer's written instructions, and requirements in this Section. ' 1. Before installation,splice joists delivered to Project site in more than one piece. 2. Space,adjust,and align joists accurately in location before permanently fastening. ' 3. Install temporary bracing and bridging,connections,and anchors to ensure that joists are stabilized during construction. 4. Boll joists to supporting steel framework using carbon-steel bolts,unless otherwise indicated. 5. Bolt joists to supporting steel framework using high-strength structural bolts, unless otherwise ' indicated. a. Comply with RCSC's "Allowable Stress Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts" for ldgh-strength structural bolt installation and tightening ' requirements. b. Comply with RCSC's "Load and Resistance Factor Design Specification for Structural Joints Using ASTM A 325 or A 490 Bolts"for high-strength structural bolt installation and ' tightening requirements. G. Install and connect bridging concurrently with joist erection,before construction loads arc applied. Anchor ends of bridging lines at top and bottom chords where terminating at walls or beams. ' 1. Bracing: Install bracing in roof and sidcwalls where indicated on erection drawings. ' 1. Tighten rod and cable bracing to avoid sag. ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-20 J. Forming for Openings: Provide shapes of proper design and size to reinforce openings and to carry loads •, and vibrations imposed, including equipment furnished under mechanical and electrical work. Securely attach to building structural frame. , 3.4 ROOF PANEL INSTALLATION A. General: Provide roof panels of full length from cave to ridge when possible. Install panels , perpendicular to pudins. 1. Field cutting by torch is not permitted. ' 2. Rigidly fasten cave end of roof panels and allow ridge end free movement due to thermal expansion and contraction. Predrill panels. 3. Provide weatherscai under ridge cap. , 4. Flash and seal roof panels with wcathcr closures at caves, rakes,and at perimeter of all openings, Fasten with self-tapping screws. 5. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene ' washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in ptcdrillod holes. 6. Use aluminum or staitdcss-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized fasteners for interior applications. , 7. Locate and space fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment. 8. Install ridge caps as roof panel work proceeds. 9. Locate panel splices over,but not attached to,structural supports. Stagger panel splices to avoid a , four-panel lap splice condition. B. Lap-Seam Roof Panels: Fasten roof panels to pwifns with exposed fasteners at each lapped joint at location and spacing determined by manufacturer. 1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over,not into,lapped joints. Lap ribbod or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for ncat and , wcathertight enclosure. Avoid"panel crow or application not true to line. 2. Locate and space exposed fasteners in true vertical and horizontal alignment. 3. Provide sealant tape at lapped joints of roof panels and between panels and protruding equipment, vents,and accessories. ' 4. Apply a continuous ribbon of sealant tape to weather-side surface of fastenings on end laps,and on side laps of nesting-type panels. S. At panel splices, nest panels with minimum 6-inch (150-mm) end lap, scalod with butyl sealant ' and fastened together by interlocking clamping plates. 3.5 WALL PANEL INSTALLATION , A. General: Provide panels full height of building when possible. Install panels perpendicular to girts. 1. Arrange and nest side-lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Install , panels with vertical edges plumb. Lap ribbed or fluted sheets one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for ncat and weathcr ight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. ' 2. Unless otherwise indicated,begin panel installation at corners with center of rib lined up with line of framing. 3. Field cutting by torch is not permitted. ' 4. Align bottom of wall panels and fasten with blind rivets,bolls,or self-tapping screws. 5. Fasten flashing and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. • METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-21 ' '. 6. When two rows of panels are required, lap panels 4 inches (100 mm) minimum. Locate panel splices over structural supports. ' 7. When building height requires two rows of panels at gable ends, align lap of gable panels over wall panels at cave height. 8. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene ' washer lightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled holes. 9. Provide weather-resistant escutcheons for pipe and conduit penetrating exterior walls. 10. Flash and seal wall panels with weather closures under caves and rakes,along lower panel edges, and at perimeter of all openings. 11. Apply clastomcric sealant continuously between metal base channel (sill angle)and concrete,and ciscwhcrc as necessary for waterproofing. Handle and apply sealant and backup according to sealant manufacturces written instructions. ' 12. Use aluminum or stainless-stool fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized fasteners for interior applications, 13. Locate and space fastenings in we vertical and horizontal alignment. ' B. Factory-Assembled, Insulated Panels: Insiall wall panels on exterior side of girls. Attach panels to supports at each panel joint with concealed clip and fasteners at maximum 42 inches(1067 mm)o.c.,but spaced not more than as recommended by manufacturer. ' C. Field-Assembled,Insulated Panels: Install wall panels on exterior side of girls. Attach panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. Install insulation as specified below, and cover with ' liner panels. D. Uninsulaled Panels: Install wall panels on exterior side of girls. Attach panels to supports with fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. NE. Liner Panels: Install panels on interior side of girls at locations indicated. Fasten with exposed fasteners as recommended by manufacturer. ' 3.6 SOFFIT PANEL INSTALLATION A. Geneml: Provide panels full width of fasciae and soffits. Install panels perpendicular to support framing. 1, Arrange and nest sidc•lap joints so prevailing winds blow over, not into, lapped joints. Install ' panels with vertical edges plumb. Lap ribbed or fluted panels one full rib corrugation. Apply panels and associated items for neat and weathcrtight enclosure. Avoid "panel creep" or application not true to line. 2. Field cutting by torch is not permitted. ' 3. Fasten Bashing and Irim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws. 4. Install screw fasteners with power tools having controlled torque adjusted to compress neoprene washer tightly without damage to washer, screw threads, or panels. Install screws in predrilled moles. 5. Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for exterior applications and galvanized fasteners for interior applications. 6. Locate and span;fastenings in true vertical and horizontal alignment B. Soft Panels: Flash and seal panels with weather closures where soffit meets walls and at perimeter of all openings. '• 3.7 INSULATION INSTALLATION ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-22 A. General: Install insulation concurendy with panel installation, according to manufacturces written , instructions and as follows: • L Set vapor-retarder-faced units with vapor retarder to warn side of construction, unless otherwise ' indicated. Do not obstruct ventilation spaces,except for Grestopping. 2. Tape joints and raptures in vapor retarder, and seal each continuous area of insulation to surrounding construction to ensure:airtight installation. ' B. Blanket Insulation: Install blankets straight and true in one-piece lengths. Install vapor retarder over insulation with both sets of facing tabs spied to provide a complete vapor retarder. Comply with the following installation method: 1. Ovcr-Framing Installation (Wail insulation): Extend insulation and vapor retarder over and perpendicular to top flange of secondary framing members. Hold in place by panels fastened to ' secondary framing. 2. Two-Laycrs-between-Purlin-with-Spacer-Block Installation (Roof Insulation): Extend insulation and vapor retarder between purlins, Carry vapor-retarder facing tabs up and over purlin, overlapping adjoining facing of next insulation course maintaining continuity of retarder. Install , layer of filler insulation over first layer to fill space between pudins formed by thermal spacer blocks. Hold in place with bands and crossbands below insulation. a. Steel Straps: Minimum 80 ksi high tensile strength, r/i' x 0.015" galvanized steel bands, , painted white. b. Fasteners: 012 x 1/."galvanized,self-drilling and tapping screws. C. Maximum Spacing:30"o.c,. 3. Rctainer Strips: Install retainer strips straight and taut, nesting with secondary framing to hold ' Insulation in place. 3.8 ACCESSORY INSTALLATION A. General: Install gutters, downspouts, ventilators, louvers, and other accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions, with positive anchorage to building and weatherdght mounting. , Coordinate installation with(lashings and other components. B. Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manuracturces written installation ' instructions,and SMACNA's"Project Engincenual Sheet Metal Manual." Provide for thermal expansion of metal units; conceal fasteners where possible,and set units true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps,joints,and seams that will be permanently watertight and weather resistant. 1. Install exposed flashing and trim that is without excessive oil canning,buckling, and tool marks ' and dial is true to line and levels indicated,with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in waterproof and wcather-resistant , performance. 2. Expansion Provisions: Provide for !thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet(3 m)with nojoints allowed within 24 inches(610 mm) of comer or intcrscctioa Where tapped or bayonet-type expansion provisions cannot be used or ' would not be sufficiently weather resistant and waterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch (25 mm)deep, filled with mastic sealant (concealed within Joints). 3. Separations: Separate metal from incompatible metal or corrosive substrates by coating cenccalal surfaces, at locations of contact, with asphalt mastic or other permanent separation as recommended by manufacturer. •, METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-23 '• C. Gutters: Join sections with riveted and soldered or lapped and sealed joints. Attach gutters to cave with gutter hangers spaced not more than 4 feet(1.2 m)o.c. using manufacturer's Standard fasteners. Provide end closures and seal watertight with sealant. Provide for thermal expansion. D. Downspouts: Join sections with 1-1/2-inch (38-mm) telescoping joints. Provide fasteners designed to ' hold downspouts securely I inch (25 mm) away from walls; locale fasteners at top and bottom and at approximately 60 inches(I 5(K)mm)o.c.in between. I. Provide elbow at base of downspout to direct water away from building, ' 2. Provide concrete splash blocks where storm water is not discharged to a concrete surface. E. Louvers: Set louvers complete with necessary hardware, anchors, dampers, weather guards, and ' equipment supports according to manufacturer's written instructions. Locate and place louver units level, plumb,and at indicated alignment with adjacent work. ' 1. Use concealed anchorages where possible. Provide brass or lead washers fitted to screws where required to protect metal surfaces and to make a wcathertiglu connection. 2. Provide perimeter reveals and openings of uniform width for sealants and joint fillers. 3. Protect galvanized-and nonferrous-metal surfaces from corrosion or galvanic action by applying a ' heavy coating of bituminous paint on surfaces that will be in contact with concrete, masonry, or dissimilar metals. 4. Install concealed gaskets, fleshings,joint fillers, and insulation,as louver installation progresses, ' where required to make louver joints weathcrtight. Comply with Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants"for sealants applied during louver installation. F. Pipe Flashing: Form flashing around pipe penetration and roof panels. Fasten and seal to roof panel as recommended by manufacturer. ' 3.9 ERECTION AND LOCATION TOLERANCES A. Structural-Slect Erection Tolerances: Comply with erection tolerance limits of A1SC 5303, "Code of Standard Practice for Steel Buildings and Bridges." ' B. Roof Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on slope and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of adjoining ' faces and of alignment of matching profiles. C. Wall Panel Installation Tolerances: Shim and align units within installed tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet (6 mm in 6 m) on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated and within 1/8-inch (3-mm) offset of ' adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles. D. Door Installation Tolerances: Fit doors in frames within clearances specified in SDI 100, ' 1. Fire-Rated Doors: Install with clearances specified in NFPA 80, ' 3.10 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contactor and Project Engineer. '• 3.11 ADJUSTING ' METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125.24 A. Ventilators and Louvers: After completing installation, including work by other trades, lubricate, test, , and adjust units to operate easily, free from warp,twist,or distortion. • 1. Adjust louver blades to be wcathenight when in closed position. ' 3.12 CLEANING AND PROTECTION , A. Touchup Painting: Immediately alter erection, clean, prepare, and prime or reprime welds, bolted connections, and abraded surfaces of prime-painted primary and secondary framing, accessories, and , bearing plates. 1. Clean and prepare surfaces by hand400i cleaning, SSPC-SP2, or power-tool cleaning, SSPC- SP 3. ' 2. Apply compatible primer of same type as shop primer used on adjacent surfaces. B. Repair damaged galvanized coatings on exposed surfaces with galvanized repair paint according to , ASTM A 780 and manufactwces written instructions. C. Roof and Wall Panels: Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as soon as each panel is installed. On completion of panel installation,clean finished surfaces as recommended by , panel manufacturer and maintain in a clean condition during construction. 1. Replace panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repair by finish ' touchup or similar minor repair procedures. D. Louvers: Provide temporary protective coverings where needed and approved by louver manufacturer. Remove protective covering at time of Substantial Completion. 1. Restore louvers and vents damaged during installation and construction period, so no evidence remains of correction work. If results of restoration are unsuccessful, as judged by Project ' Engineer,remove damaged units and replace with new units. a. Clean and touch up minor abrasions in finishes with air-dried coating that matches color and gloss of and is compatible with,factory-applied finish coating. , 2. Test operation of adjustable wall louvers and adjust as needed to produce fully functioning units. END OF SECTION 13125 ' 1 METAL BUILDING SYSTEMS 13125-25 1 SECTION 15000-GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ,• PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SCOPE OF WORK A. This work shall include all plant, labor, material, and equipment as required to furnish end install ' mechanical work as shown on the drawings and as hereinafter specified. All plant, labor,material and equipment not shown on the drawings and not specified but necessary and incidental to provide first class and complete installations of mechanical work shall be included in this contract. ' B. All licenses and permits required for the performance of this work shall be included in this contract. All equipment under this division shall be installed under competent supervisory service furnished by the Contractor and where necessary shall include services of special erection and operating engineers. 1.3 MISCELLANEOUS CONDITIONS A. All installed materials and equipment shall benew and ofthebest qualityand design,andshall be free from ' defects and imperfections. B. All work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements Article 5 of the General Conditions N (Compliance with Laws,Regulations and Inspections),and as specified below. All work shall be in accordance with all local codes and ordinances including the latest requirements of the ' Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL), the National Fire Protection Association (NFPA), the Building Official and Code Administrators International,Inc.(BOCA).the International Mechanical Code and the International Plumbing Code. Laws,codes and ordinances conflicting with specifications and drawings shall govern,unless exceeded by specifications and drawings in quality or quantity. C. Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating this work with the work of other trades on the project including responsibility for all material and equipment deliveries and installation in a manner so as to ' prevent delay in construction schedule. D. Acceptance of the work shall be subject to the condition that all systems, equipment, apparatus and appliances included in the work shall operate and perform as designed and selected with respect to ' efficiency,capacity and quietness. Acceptance ofthe work shall farther be subject to the conditions that any time within one year of final approval date any defective part ofthe work resulting from faulty workmanship or material shall be immediately amended,repaired,or replaced without additional cost to the Owner. ' 1.4 INSPECTION OF AREA ' A. The Contractor shall be responsible for field inspection of the area before preparing his bid. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000- 1 1.5 VARIATION FROM SPECIFICATIONS A. Variations from the specifications will be considered,provided attention is drawn to such variations and ' details given for the variations. The Owner reserves the right to reject any and all variations or to accept the variation which it dams most suitable without recourse. 1.6 CLEANING UP A. The Contractor shall remove from the Owner's propertyall temporary structures,rubbish and waste material resulting from the construction,and in general, leave the work area in clean and*Drkmaniike condition. ' 1.7 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS A. See Article 2 of the General Conditions. B. Where specific details and dimensions are not shown on the drawings, the contractor shall take measurements and make layouts as required for proper installation of mechanical work so that interference ' with all other work will be avoided. This includes roughing-in for fixtures and equipment as called for or inferred. 1.8 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawings and Samples shall be submitted in accordance with the requirements of Articles 18& 19 of the General Conditions and as follows: B. Submittals shall include but not be limited to the following: 1. Manufacturer's detail drawings of equipment and material. 2. Descriptive literature including catalog data covering design,site,performance and capacity of ' material and equipment. 3. Contractor's shop details for installation of material and equipment. ' 1.9 SUBSTITUTIONS A. Substitutions shall be made in accordance with the Article 16 of the General Conditions and as follows:In addition to the conditions of Article 16 the contractor shall make all required changes in the performance of any and all equipment affected by the change. ' 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. The Contractor shall furnish all services as required for adequate verbal and written instructions to the Owner's operating and maintenance personnel for operation and maintenance of all equipment and systems ' installed. B. Warranties and operating instructions shall be provided in accordance with Article 32 of the General Conditions,and as follows: _ C. Materials shall be furnished in hard-back binders and shall include all manufacturer's printed instructions for equipment installation,operation and maintenance and all approved shop drawings. Hardback binders ' shall be similar to National Stiff Cover Ring Binders with heavy duty Tufvin cover,metal hinge and label • holder and rings with open,close and lock booster. ' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000-2 1.11 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT , A. All required electrical equipment, such as motors, starters, relays and electric or electronic controls for • equipment furnished shall be installed per specifications in Division XVI -Electrical Work. , 1.12 ALIGNMENT OF DRIVERS.DRIVES AND DRIVEN EQUIPMENT A. Drivers (motors and/or engines)shall be set level and aligned with equipment being driven and shall be ' securely fastened in place. Driversshallberated for aminimumof150%ofthe driver horsepower and shall be provided with coupling or belt guards as required by OSHA and as directed by the engineer. All equipment requiring lubrication shall be kept in the best operating condition during performance of the ' work. 1.13 ACCESS TO EQUIPMENT A. All control devices,specialties,valves,junction boxes,pull boxes and removable panels on equipmentshall 1 be so located as to provide easy access for inspection and maintenance including removal of any interior components. Any material or equipment,such as piping,ducts,conduit,etc.,that is installed without due ' regard to the accessibility of equipment and devices shall be relocated,offset or rerouted without cost to the Owner. 1.14 SLEEVES AND OPENINGS ' A. General The contractor shall locate and provide all sleeves and openings required for the execution of the design as ' specified. Contractor shall locate sleeves and openings as shown on the structural drawings,if shown. No sleeves are permitted through concrete structural members unless indicated on the structural drawings N or approved in writing by the Engineer. All sleeves shall be carefully and accurately set. Sleeves set in concrete construction shalt be securely ' anchored as required to prevent movement and maintain alignment,when concrete is poured. Sleeves shall be sated to the surrounding construction using grout,plaster etc.as approved by engineer. ' Space between pipe and sleeve shall be sealed using approved sealants. Sealants shall be selected to maintain the fire rating of the partition. Sealant shall be finished flush with adjacent surfaces. Contractor shall submit shop drawings for the sealant materials for approval by engineer. ' B. Exterior Walls I. Masonry or Concrete:All sleeves penetrating masonry or concrete walls shall be Schedule 40 black ' steel pipe. Sleeves shall be cut flush with both sides of wall and all burrs or sharp edges filed smooth. ' 2. Wood Frame: Sleeves shall not be required where pipe lines penetrate exterior wood frame walls. The piping shall be anchored to prevent all motion at the penetration location and the penetrations shall be sealed air and water tight ' GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000-3 1 ' 3. Duct Penetration(Masonry and Wood Frame): All ducts through exterior walls shall be reinforced on both sides of wall with angle iron or galvanized sheet steel frames. Contractor shall provide • lintels as required and directed by the engineer for masonry penetrations. Opening between ductwork and wall opening shall be scaled using approved sealant. Sealant shall be selected to maintain the fire rating of the separation. Where fire walls are involved, fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with UL and NFPA requirements. All steel shall be galvanized or painted. Equipment(fans,etc.)Penetrating walls shall be provided with lintels,fire dampers,etc.as specified for ducts above. C. Interior Walls,Ceilings&Partitions 1. Masonry or Concrete:All sleeves penetrating masonry or concrete walls shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe. Sleeves shall be cut flush with both sides of wall and all burrs or sharp edges filed smooth. ' 2. Drywall:All piping passing through new or existing dry way partitions or ceilings shall be sealed to the drywall and where exposed,shall be provided with chrome plated escutcheons. Piping shall ' be supported such that motion of piping at the point of wall penetrations is eliminated. 3. Duct Penetration(Masonry and Drywall): All ducts through interior walls,ceilings and partitions ' shall be reinforced on both sides ofwall with angle iron or galvanized sheet steel frames. Contractor shall provide lintels as required and directed by the engineer for masonry penetrations. Opening between ductwork and wall opening shall be sealed using approved sealant. Sealant shall ' be selected to maintain the fire rating of the separation. Where fire walls are involved,fire dampers shall be installed in accordance with UL and NFPA requirements. All steel shall be galvanized or painted. Equipment(fans,etc.)penetrating walls shall be provided with lintels,fire dampers,etc. as specified for duds above. D. Floors 1. Floor Sleeves: a. All piping through floors shall be installed in sleeves. b. Unless other wise indicated on the structural drawings, floor sleeves shall be as follows. Sleeves in floors shall be Schedule 40 black steel pipe sleeves extending V above floor to ' serve as a water stop. Sleeves shall be sealed so as to be watertight and maintain fire rating of floor. END OF SECTION 15000 1• 1 . GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 15000-4 1 1 SECTION 15050-BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' PARTI -GENERAL • 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract,including General and the Special Conditions and Division ' Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following basic mechanical materials and methods to complement other ' Division 15 Sections. 1. Piping materials and installation instructions common to most piping systems. ' 2. Equipment nameplate data requirements. 3. Nonshrink grout for equipment installations. , 4. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 5. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 6. Cutting and patching. 7. Touchup painting and finishing. , a. Hangers and supports for mechanical systems piping and equipment. 9. Gas Vent. 10. LP Gas Tank. ' B. Pipe and pipe fitting materials are specified in piping system Sections. C. Related Sections:The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: I. Division 5 Section"Metal Fabrications"for materials for attaching hangers and supports to building structure. ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Pipe,pipe fittings,and piping include tube,tube fittings,and tubing. , B. Finished Spaces: Spaces other than mechanical and electrical equipment rooms, furred spaces,pipe and duct shafts,unheated spaces immediately below the roof,spaces above ceilings,unexcavated spaces,crawl ' spaces,and tunnels, C. Exposed Interior Installations: Exposed to view indoors. Examples include finished occupied spaces and ' mechanical equipment rooms. D. Exposed Exterior Installations: Exposed to view outdoors,or subject to outdoor ambient temperatures and weather conditions. Examples include porches. ' E. Concealed Interior installations: Concealed from view and protected from physical contact by building occupants. Examples include above ceilings and in duct shafts. ' F. Concealed Exterior Installations: Concealed from view and protected from weather conditions and physical contact by building occupants,but subject to outdoor ambient temperatures. Examples include installations ' within unheated shelters. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050- 1 1 ' 1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS • A. Design seismic restraint hangers and supports,for piping and equipment. ' B. Design andobtain approval from authority with jurisdiction over seismic restraint hangers and supports for piping and equipment. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections. B. Product data for following piping specialties: ' 1. Mechanical sleeve seals. 2. Identification materials and devices. ' C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation for metal and wood supports and anchorage for mechanical materials and equipment. ' D. Product data for each type of hanger and support. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Equipment Selection: Equipment of greater or larger power,dimensions,capacities, and ratings may be furnished provided such proposed equipment is approved in writing and connecting mechanical and electrical services, circuit breakers, conduit, motors, bases, and equipment spaces are increased. No additional costs will be approved for these increases,if larger equipment is approved. lfminimumenergy ratings or efficiencies ofthe equipment are specified,the equipment must meet the design requirements and commissioning requirements. 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING A. Deliver pipes and tubes with factory-applied end-caps. Maintain end-caps through shipping,storage,and ' handling to prevent pipe-end damage and prevent entrance of dirt,debris,and moisture. B. Protect pipes,tubes,flanges,fittings,and piping specialties from moisture and dirt. ' C. Protect stored plastic pipes from direct sunlight. Support to prevent sagging and bending. 1.9 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING ' A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components. ' B. Arrange for chases,slots,and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations. C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and ' other structural components as they are constructed. D. Sequence,coordinate,and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow ' of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building. '• E. Coordinate connection of electrical services. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-2 F. Coordinate connection ofmcchanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. , Comply with requirements ofgoveming regulations,franch ised service companies,and controlling agencies. G. Coordinate installation of identifying devices offer completing covering and painting where devices are • applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar , concealment. PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 PIPE AND PIPE FITTINGS , A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections for pipeand fitting materials and joining methods, B. Pipe Threads: ASME 81.20.1 for factory-threaded pipe and pipe fittings. ' 2.2 JOINING MATERIALS A. Refer to individual piping system specification Sections in Division 15 for special joining materials not , listed below. B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system , contents. 1. ASME B16.21,nonmetallic,flat,asbestos-firec,1/9-inch(3-mm)maximum thickness,except where , thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face,Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face,Class 250 cast-iron and steel flanges. 2. ASME,B16.20 for grooved,ring-joint,steel flanges. 3. AW WA C110.rubber,flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm)thick,except where other thickness is indicated; ' and full-face or ring type,except where type is indicated. C. Flange Bolts and Nuts: ASME B 18.2.1,carbon steel,except where other material is indicated. , D. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket. Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer,except where other type or material is indicated. ' E. Solder Filler Metal: ASTM B 32. I. Alloy Sn95 or Alloy Sn94: Tin (approximately 95 percent)and silver(approximately 5 percent), ' having 0.10 percent lead content. 2. Alloy Sn50: Tin(50 percent)and lead(50 percent). 3. Alloy E: Tin(approximately 95 percent)and copper(approximately 5 percent),having 0.10 percent ' maximum lead content. 4. Alloy HA: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-zinc,having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. S. Alloy HB: Tin-antimony-silver-copper-nickel,having 0.10 percent maximum lead content. 6. Alloy Sb5: Tin(95 percent)and antimony(5 percent),having 0.20 percent maximum lead content. ' F. Brazing Filler Metals: AWS A5.8. I. BCuP Series: Copper-phosphorus alloys. ' 2. BAgI: Silveralloy. • BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-3 1 G. Welding Filler Metals: ComplywithAWSD10.12 for welding materials appropriate for wall th ickncss and chemical analysis of steel pipe being welded. ,• H. Solvent Cements: Manufacturer's standard solvents complying with the following: I. Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene(ABS): ASTM D 2235. 2. Chlorinated Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(CPVC): ASTM F 493. 3. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC): ASTM D 2564, 4. PVC to ADS Transition: Made to requirements of ASTM D 3138,color other than orange. ' 1. Plastic Pipe Seals: ASTM F 477, clastameric gasket. J. Flanged.Ductile-iron Pipe Gasket.Bolts,and Nuts: AWWA Cl 10,rubber gasket,carbon steel bolts and ' nuts. K. Couplings: Iron body sleeve assembly,fabricated to match outside diameters of plain-end pressure pipes. I. Sleeve: ASTM A 126,Class B,gray iron. 2. Followers: ASTM A 47(ASTM A 47M),Grade 32510 or ASTM A 536 ductile iron. 3. Gaskets: Rubber. ' 4. Bolts and Nuts: AWWA CI I I. S. Finish: Enamel paint. 2.3 PIPING SPECIALTIES A. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates;deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter; Closely fit around pipe,tube,and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. ' 3. Cast Brass: One-piece,with set-screw. a. Finish: Polished chrome plate. ' 4. Stamped Steel: One-piece,with set-screw and chrome-plated finish. 5. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting. ' B. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion. I. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous;threaded,solder,plain,and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials. 2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid,pressure,and temperature. ' C. Mechanical Sleeve Seals: Modular,watertight mechanical We. Components include interlocking synthetic rubber links shaped to continuously fill annular space between pipe and sleeve. Connecting bolts and pressure plates cause rubber sealing elements to expand when tightened. ' D. Sleeves: The fallowing materials are for wall, floor,slab,and roof penetrations; 1. Steel Sheet-Metal: 24-gage(0.70mm)or heavier galvanized sheet metal, round tube closed with ' welded longitudinal joint. • 2. Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53,Type E,Grade A,Schedule 40,galvanized,plain ends. 3. Cast-Iron; Cast or fabricated wall pipe equivalent to ductile-iron pressure pipe,having plain ends ' and integral water stop,except where other features are specified. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-4 1 4. Wall Penetration Systems: Wall sleeve assembly,consisting of housing,gaskets,and pipe sleeve, , with 1 mechanical-joint end conforming to AWWA Cl 10 and 1 plain pipe-sleeve end, a. Penetrating Pipe Deflection: 5 percent without leakage. b. Housing: Ductile-iron casting having waterstop and anchor ring,with ductile-iron gland, steel studs and nuts,and rubber gasket conforming to A W WA C111,of housing and gasket size as required to fit penetrating pipe. C. Pipe Sleeve: AWWA CIS 1,ductile-iron pipe. , d. Housing-to-Sleeve Gasket: Rubber or neoprene push-on type of manufacturer's design. S. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: Commercially made sleeve having an integral clamping flange, with ' clamping ring,bolts,and nuts for membrane flashing. 2.4 IDENTIFYING DEVICES AND LABELS , A. General: Manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 Sections. Where more than one type is specified for listed application, selection is Installer's option,but provide single selection for each product category. ' B. Equipment Nameplates: Metal nameplate with operational data engraved or stamped,permanently fastened to equipment. , I. Data: Manufacturer, product name, model number,serial number,capacity,operating and power characteristics,labels of tested compliances,and similar essential data. , 2, Location: An accessible and visible location. C. Pressure-Sensitive Pipe Markers: Manufacturer's standard preprinted, permanent adhesive,color-coded, pressure-sensitive vinyl pipe markers,conforming to ASME A13.1. 2.5 GROUT A. Nonshrink,Nonmetallic Grout: ASTM C 1107,Grade B. I. Characteristics: Post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement grout, nonstaining, noncorrosive,nongaseous,and recommended for interior and exterior applications. , 2. Design Mix: 5000-psi(34.50-MPa),28-day compressive strength. 3. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged, 4. Water Potable. ' 2.6 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Hangers,Supports,and Components: Factory-fabricated according to MSS SP-58. ' 1. Components include galvanized roatingswhere installed forpiping and equipment that will nothave a field-applied finish. ' 2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where attachments ere in direct contact with copper tubing. B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690-kPa)average compressive strength,waterproofed calcium , silicate,encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation. C. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type,drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear , capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection • systems include UL listing and FM approval. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-5 ' D. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for • supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems includeULlisting and FM approval. ' 2.7 HANGER AND SUPPORTS MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36(ASTM A 36M),steel plates,shapes,and bars,black and galvanized. B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183,steel,hex-head,track bolts and nuts. C. Washers: ASTM F 844,steel,plain,Bat washers. 2.8 GAS VENT ' A. Gas Vent shall be a Metalbestos double wall Type B Gas vent or equal. ' 2.9 LP GAS TANK A. Contractor shall provide and install a LP Gas tank of the size indicated. Tank and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 58. PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 PIPING SYSTEMS—COMMON REQUIREMENTS A. General: Install piping as described below,except where system Sections specify otherwise. Individual piping system specilication Sections in Division 15 specify piping installation requirements unique to the piping system. B. General Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate general location and arrangement of piping systems. Indicated locations and arrangements were used to size pipe and calculate friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. Install piping as indicated,except where deviations to layout are approved on coordination drawings. C. install components having pressure rating equal to or greater than system operating pressure. D. Install piping free of sags and bends. E. Install exposed interior and exterior piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are ' prohibited,except where indicated. F. Install piping tight to slabs,beams,joists,columns,walls, and other building elements. Allow sufficient ' space above removable ceiling panels to allow for ceiling panel removal. G. Install piping to allow application of insulation plus I-inch(25-mm)clearance around insulation. ' H. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other,spaced to permit valve servicing. 1. Install pipe escutcheons for pipe penetrations of concrete and masonry walls, wall board partitions, and ' suspended ceilings according to the following: • 1. Chrome-Plated Piping: Cast-mass,one-piece,with set-screw,and polished chrome-plated finish. 2. Uninsulated Piping Wall Escutcheons: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with set-screw. ' 3. Uninsulated Piping Floor Plata in Utility Areas: Cast-iron Boor plates. ' BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-6 4. Insulated Piping: Cast-brass or stamped-steel,with concealed hinge,spring clips,and chrome-plated , finish. • 5. Piping in Utility Areas: Cast-brass or stamped-steel, with set-screw or spring clips. t J. Install sleeves for pipes passing through concrete and masonry walls,gypsum-board partitions, concrete floor and roof slabs,and where indicated. ' I. Cut sleeves to length for mounting flush with both surfaces. a. Exception: Extend sleeves installed in floors of mechanical equipment areas or other wet , areas 2 inches(50 mm)above finished floor level. Extend cast-iron sleeve fittings below floor slab as required to secure clamping ring where specified. 2. Build sleeves into new walls and slabs as work progresses. , 3. Install large enough sleeves to provide 114-inch(6-mm)annular clear space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation. Use the fallowing sleeve materials: a. Steel Pipe Sleeves: For pipes smaller than 6 inches(150 mm). ' b. Steel Sheet-Metal Sleeves: For pipes 6 inches(I50 mm)and larger that penetrate gypsum- board partitions. , C. Cast-Iron Sleeve Fittings: For floors having membrane waterproofing. Secure flashing between clamping flanges. Install section of cast-iron soil pipe to extend sleeve to 2 inches (50 mm)above finished floor level. Flashing is specified in Division 7 Section"Flashing and , Sheet Metal." 4. Except for below-grade wall penetrations, seal annular space between sleeve and pipe or pipe insulation,using clastomeric joint sealants specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants." K. Above Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: Seal penetrations using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Size sleeve for 1-inch (25-mm) annular clear space between pipe and sleeve for installation of ' mechanical seals. 1. Install steel pipe far sleeves smaller than 6 inches(150 mm). , 2. Install cast-iron wall pipes for sleeves 6 inches(150 mm)and larger. 3. Assemble and install mechanical seals according to manufacturer's printed instructions. L. Below Grade, Exterior Wall, Pipe Penetrations: install ductile-iron wall penetration system sleeves , according to manufacturer's printed installation instructions. M. Verify final equipment locations for roughing in. ' N. Refer to equipment specifications in other Sections for roughing-in requirements. 0. ' Piping Connections: Except as otherwise indicated,make piping connections as specified below. ' 1. Install unions in piping 2 inches(50 mm)and smaller adjacent to each valve and at final connection to each piece of equipment having a 2-inch(50-mm)or smaller threaded pipe connection. ' 2. Install flanges in piping 2-1/2 inches(65 mm)and larger adjacent to flanged valves and at final connection to each piece of equipment having flanged pipe connection. 3. Dry Piping Systems (Gas): Install dielectric unions and flanges to connect piping materials of dissimilar metals. ' 4. Wet Piping Systems (Water): Install dielectric coupling and nipple fittings to connect piping • materials of dissimilar metals. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-7 , ' 3.2 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION—COMMON REQUIREMENTS • A. Install equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting heights are not indicated. B. Install equipment according to approved submittal data. Portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic farm. Refer conflicts to the Architect. C. Install equipment level and plumb,parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components in exposed interior spaces,except where otherwise indicated. ' D. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing,maintenance,and repair or replacement of equipment components. Connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location. ' E, Install equipment giving right-of-way to piping systems installed at a required slope. 3.3 LABELING AND IDENTIFYING ' A. Equipment:Standard equipment labels which generally come with the equipment. ' 3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING A. Refer to Division 9 Section "Painting"for field painting requirements. ' B. DamageandTouch Up:Repairmarredand damaged factory-painted finisheswithmaterialsandprocedures to match original factory finish. N3.5 ERECTION OF METAL SUPPORTS AND ANCHORAGE A. Cut,fit,and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location,alignment,and elevation tosupport ' and anchor mechanical materials and equipment. B. Field Welding: Comply with AWS DI.I "Structural Welding Code—Steel." ' 3.6 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. General:No structural members,load-bearing walls or footings shall be cut without first obtaining written ' permission from the Engineer. All openings not provided by sleeves and framed openings shall be cut by the contractor,at no additional cost to the owner. I. All openings for pipe in masonry materials shall be core drilled. ' 2. Contractor shall investigate by use of magnetic detection instruments, field measurement or other approved means to locate any concealed pipingor conduit prior to cutting. Should any active piping, ' conduit or wire be damaged the contractor shall restore same immediately,at no cost to the owner. 3. Openings shall be cut no larger than required, The contractor shall coordinate between the trades ' requiring the cutting and the trades responsible for the finish work When cutting surfaces that are difficult or costly to replace, to develop a method of cutting. Contractor shall subcontract work to a contractor with expertise in this type of work,if required. B. Patching and Finishing • 1. Patching: The contractor shall patch the opening with approved non-shrink materials. Patching ' material shall be finished smooth with the adjacent surface,prior to applying final finish. Contractor BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-8 1 shall submit shop drawings for patching materials for approval by engineer. 2. Finishing:When finished surfaces are cut the final finish shall match the finish that existed prior •' to cutting. Contractor shall be totally responsible for the quality of finish work and shall make any corrections required to maintain quality of finish to match existing. Contractor shall subcontract , work to a contractor with expertise in this type of work,if required. 3.7 GROUTING A. install nonmetallic nonshrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates,and anchors. Mix grout according to manufncturer's printed instructions. B. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. , C. Provide forms for placement of grout,as required. D. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. , E. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. , F. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for equipment. G. Place grout around anchors. , H. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions. ' 3.8 HANGER AND SUPPORT APPLICATIONS A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems. 3.9 HANGER AND SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. General: Install hangers,supports,clamps,and attachments as required to properly support piping from ' building structure. B. Arrangefor grouping ofparaffel runs ofhorizontal piping supported togetheron field-fabricated,heavy-duty ' trapeze hangers where possible. C. Wherepipesofvarioussizesare supported togetherbytrapeze hangers,space hangers forsmallestpipesize , or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers. D. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments within maximum ' piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads,including valves,flanges,guides,strainers,expansion joints,and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts before concrete is placed;fasten insert to forms. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts. , E. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers, and other accessories. , F. Support fire protection systems piping independent of other piping. G. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems,permit freedom of movement ' between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and • similar units. BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050-9 ' ' H. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. '• 3.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS A. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor. ' B. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment,and make a smooth bearing surface, ' 3.11 HANGER METAL FABRICATION A. Cut,drill,and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment supports. ' B. Fit"posed connections together to form hairlinejoints. Field-weld connections that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. ' C. Field Welding: Comply with AWS Dl.l procedures for manual shielded meal-arc welding,appearance and quality of welds,methods used in correcting welding work,and the following: ' 1. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance of base metals. 2. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. 3. Remove welding flux immediately. 4. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after finishing,and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours. N3.12 HANGER ADJUSTING A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated ' slope of pipe. 3.13 GAS VENT ' A. Gas vent shall be connected to all fuel burning appleances. Size shall be as recommended by the manufactorer or as required by code. ' B. Gas vent shall be installed according to manufaclorcrs recommendations and code. 3.14 LP GAS TANK ' A. LP gas tank shall be installed on concrete supports Tank shall be installed level. Contractor shall provide and install a LP Gas tank of the size indicated. Tank and installation shall be in accordance with NFPA 58. ' END OF SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 15050- 10 1 SECTION 15500-MECHANICAL HVAC EQUIPMENT ' PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawingsand general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 ' Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes: 1. Fans for indoor installations. ' 2. Gas-fired unit heaters. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ' 1. Division IG Section"Disconnects and Circuit Breakers"for disconnect switches. 1.3 SUBMITTALS , A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I ' Specification Sections, B. Product data including rated capacities of selected model, weights (shipping, installed,and operating), furnished specialties,and accessories;and installation and startup instructions. ' C. Shop drawings detailing fabrication and installation ofequipment assemblies. Indicate dimensions,weights, loadings,required clearances,method of field assembly, components,and location and size of each field connection. D. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between manufacturer- installed wiring and field-installed wiring. ' E. Maintenance data for each piece of equipment, control, and accessory to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division I. Include parts list,maintenance guide,and wiring diagrams. , 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Firm experienced in manufacturing each piece of equipment of a similar size ' and type for a period of not less than five years. B. Comply with NFPA 70"National Electrical Code"for components and installation. , C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.. I. The Terms"Listed"and "Labeled": As defined in the"National Electrical Code,"Article 100. , 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"National lyRecognizedTestingLaboratory"(NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. MECHANICAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 15500- 1 ' 1 D. Coordination: Coordinate layout and installation of concrete housekeeping pads. Coordinate with other trades where mechanical work interfaces with other trades. ' E. Comply with appropriate codes and standards by:ASHRAE, ARI,UL,NEC and NFPA. • I.5 DELIVERY,STORAGE,AND HANDLING ' A. Deliver equipment in sufficient time to allow movement into building. Store and handle equipment as recommended by manufacturer. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Fans: a. Carnes Co. b. Cook(Loren)Co. C, Greenheck Fan Corp. 1 2.2 PAN UNITS A. The contractor shall furnish and install complete and operative exhaust fans as shown and scheduled on the drawings and as herein specified. The fan shall be of the make and model scheduled,or equal and shall be provided with a one year warranty against defects in workmanship and materials. All fans shall be AMCA rated and UL listed. Speed controls,where called for,shall be mounted at the fan and used for balancing. All exhaust fans shall be provided with built-in overload protection. ' PART 3- EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine area to receive equipment for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting equipment performance.Do notproceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 INSTALLATION ' A. Install equipment level and plumb,accordinglo manufacturer's written instructions,rough-in drawings,and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturers recommended clearances. ' B. Install according to NFPA 54. C. Install electrical devices furnished with equipment but not specified to be factory mounted. ' D. Connect all electrical connections,ductwork as recommended by manufacturer and as shown on drawings. 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL '• A. General: Stan-up equipment,in accordance with manufacturer's start-up instructions. Test controls and demonstrate compliance with requirements. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. ' Factory authorized service representative shall be available as required. ' MECHANICAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 15500-2 3.4 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING , A. Flush and clean equipment upon completion of installation,according to manufacturer's instructions. , B. Clean factory-finished surfaces,and repair any marred or scratched surfaces with manufacturer's touchup • paint. ' C. Adjust unit for optimum performance. 3.5 COMMISSIONING ' A. Startup Services: Provide startup service,as specified below. 1. Start units and operate controls and safeties. ' 2. Test and adjust controls water levels,flow rates,and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. 3., Correct deficiencies identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are ' met. 3.6 DEMONSTRATION ' A. Demonstrate operation of each piece of equipment and entire system. Remove and replace malfunctioning units with new and retest. ' B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup and shutdown, troubleshooting,servicing,and preventive maintenance. 1 END OF SECTION 15500 MECHANICAL HVAC EQUIPMENT 15500-3 1 ' SECTION 15250-MECHANICAL INSULATION • PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes pipe insulation. ' B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section: 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods" for pipe insulation shields and ' protection saddles. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Hot Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures of 100 deg F(38 deg C)or higher. B. Dual-Temperature Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures that vary from hot to cold, C. Cold Surfaces: Normal operating temperatures less than 75 deg F(24 deg C). D. Thermal resistivity is designated by an r-value that represents the reciprocal of thermal conductivity(k- value). Thermal conductivity is the rate of heat flow through a homogenous material exactly I inch(25.4 mm)thick. Thermal resistivity(r-value)is expressed by the temperature difference in degrees Fahrenheit (Ke)vins)between the two exposed faces required to cause I BTU per hour(1 Watt)to flow through I square ' foot() square meter)at mean temperatures indicated. E. Density. Is expressed in pcf(kg/cu.m). ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product data for each type of mechanical insulation identifying k-value.thickness,and accessories. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fire PerformanceCharacteristics:Conform to the following characteristics for insulation including facings. cements, and adhesives, when tested according to ASTM E 84, by UL or other testing or inspecting organization acceptable to the authority having jurisdiction. Label insulation with appropriate markings of testing laboratory. ' 1. Interior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or less. 2. Exterior Insulation: Flame spread rating of 75 or less and a smoke developed rating of 150 or less. '• PART2-PRODUCTS MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250- 1 1 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that •' may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: 1. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular: , a. Armstrong World Industries, Inc. ' 2.2 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR A. Material: Flexible expanded closed-cell structure with smooth skin on both sides. ' 1. Tubular Materials: ASTM C 534,Type I. 2. Sheet Materials: ASTM C 534,Type 11. ' B. Thermal Conductivity: 0.30 Btu x inchth x sq.ft.x deg F(0.043 W x misq.in x K)average maximum at 75 deg F(24 deg C). , C. Coating: Water based latex enamel coating recommended by insulation manufacturer. 2.3 ADHESIVES ' A. Flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation Adhesive: Solvent-based, contact adhesive recommended by insulation manufacturer. ' B. Lagging Adhesive: MIL-A-3316C,non-flammable adhesive in the following Classes and Grades: 1. Class 1,Grade A for bonding glass cloth and tape to unfaced glass fiber insulation,sealing edges of glass fiber insulation,and bonding lagging cloth a unfaced glass fiber insulation. 2. Class 2,Grade A for bonding glass fiber insulation to meal surfaces. FART 3-EXECUTION , 3.1 PREPARATION ' A. Surface Preparation: Clean,dry,and remove foreign materials such as rust,scale,and dirt. 3.2 INSTALLATION,GENERAL ' A. Refer to schedules at the end ofthis Section for materials,forms,jackets,and thicknesses required for each ' mechanical system. B. Select accessories compatible with materials suitable for the service. Select accessories that do not corrode, soften,or otherwise attack the insulation or jacket in either the wet or dry state. ' C. Apply insulation material,accessories,and finishes according to the manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Install insulation with smooth,straight,and even surfaces. , E. Seal joints and scams to maintain vapor barrier an insulation requiring a vapor barrier. ' F. Seal penetrations for hangers, supports, anchors, and other projections in insulation requiring a vapor . barrier. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250-2 ' G. Seal Ends: Except for flexible clastomeric insulation,taper ends at 45 degree angle and seal with lagging adhesive. Cut ends of flexible clastomeric cellular insulation square and seal with adhesive. ,• H. Apply adhesives and coatings at manufacturer's recommended coverage-per-gallon rate. 1. Keep insulation materials dry during application and finishing. ' J. Items Not Insulated: Unless otherwise indicated do not apply insulation to the following systems,materials, and equipment: ' I. Sanitary drainage and vent piping. 2. • Below grade piping. 3. Chrome-plated pipes and fittings,except for plumbing fixtures for the disabled. ' 3.3 PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Tightly butt longitudinal seams and end joints. Bond with adhesive. ' B. Stagger joints on double layers of insulation. ' C. Apply insulation continuously over fittings,valves,and specialties,except as otherwise indicated. D. Apply insulation with a minimum number ofjoints. ' E. Flanges, Fittings,and Valves - Interior Exposed and Concealed: Coat pipe insulation ends with vapor barriercoating. Apply prcmaided,precut,or field-fabricated segments of insulation around flanges,unions, valves,and fittings. Make joints tight. Bond with adhesive. 1. Use same material and thickness as adjacent pipe insulation. 2. Overlap nesting insulation by 2 inches(50 mm)or I-pipe diameter,which ever is greater. ' 3. Apply materials with adhesive,fill voids with mineral fiber insulating cement. Secure with wire or tape. 4. Insulate elbows and tees smaller than 3 inches(ON 75)pipe size with premolded insulation. 5. Insulate elbows and tees 3 inches (DN 75) and larger with premolded insulation or insulation material segments. Use at least 3 segments for each elbow. 6. Cover insulation, except for metal jacketed insulation, with PVC fitting covers and seal circumferential joints with butt strips. F. Hangers and Anchors: Apply insulation continuously through hangers and around anchor attachments. Install saddles,shields,and inserts as specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." For cold surface piping,extend insulation on anchor legs a minimum of 12 inches (300 mm) and taper and seal ' insulation ends. I. Inserts and Shields: Cover hanger inserts and shields with jacket material matching adjacent pipe ' insulation. 3.4 FLEXIBLE ELASTOMERIC CELLULAR PIPE INSULATION INSTALLATION ' A. Slip insulation on the pipe before making connections wherever possible. Seal joints with adhesive. Where the slip-on technique is not possible,cut one side longitudinally and apply to the pipe. Seal seams and joints with adhesive. ' B. Valves,Fittings,and Flanges: Cut insulation segments from pipe or sheet insulation. Bond to valve,fitting, • and flange and seal joints with adhesive. MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250-3 1 I. Miter cut materials to cover soldered elbows and tees. 2. Fabricate sleeve fitting covers from flexible elastomeric cellular insulation for screwed valves, ' fittings,and specialties. Miter cut materials. Overlap adjoining pipe insulation. • 3.5 FINISHES ' A. Paint finished insulation as specified in Division 9 Section "Painting." B. flexible Elastomeric Cellular Insulation: After adhesive has fully cured,apply 2 coats of protective coating ' to exposed insulation. 3.6 APPLICATIONS ' A. General: Materials and thicknesses are specified in schedules at the end of this Section. B. Interior,Exposed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated,insulate the following piping systems: ' 1. Domestic cold water. 2. Domestic hot water. ' 3. Sanitary drains for fixtures accessible to the disabled. C. Interior,Concealed Piping Systems: Unless otherwise indicated,insulate the following piping systems: ' 1. Domestic cold water. 2. Domestic hot water. ' 3.7 PIPE INSULATION SCHEDULES A. Domestic Water All piping shall be insulated with elastometric insulation Armstrong Armoflex or equal,shall be supplied as unslit, expanded, closed-cell tubing and have a flame spread rating not to exceed 25 and a smoke , developed rating not to exceed 50. All cold water lines shall be insulated with''/,"insulation with a thermal conductivityofnat more than 0.29 ' BTUrn-hr-sqft-F at 90°F. All hot water and hot water return lines shall be insulated in accordance with the following table: Tnnpvmurc Conductivity"use aunuts 1"rand 11/4" 2%to S' B. ' atu•inj(h41'.'F) Less to 2' 4- to no 6' d U 105 and Gmla 0.24-0.28 D.S 1.0 110 IS 13 END OF SECTION 15250 1 MECHANICAL INSULATION 15250 -4 , SECTION 15440-PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES ,• PART I -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawingsand general provisions ofthe Contract,including General and Special Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes plumbing fixtures and trim,faucets,other fittings,and related components. ' B. This Section includes plumbing specialties for water distribution systems;soil,waste,and vent systems. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: a. Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants" for sealing between fixtures and walls,Boors,and counters. b. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for piping joining materials,joint construction,basic installation requirements,and labeling and identifying requirements. C. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Piping"for piping and connections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Accessible:Plumbing fixture,building.facility,or portion thereof that can be approached,entered,andused by physically handicapped,disabled,and elderly people. B. Fining: Device that controls Bow of water into or out of plumbing fixture. Fittings specified in this Section includesupplies and stops,faucets and spouts,shower heads and tub spouts,drains and tailpieces,traps and waste pipes. Pipe fittings,tube fittings,and general-duty valves are included where indicated. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. Provide components and installation capable ofproducing piping systems with following minimumworking pressure ratings,except where otherwise indicated: a. Water Distribution Systems,Below Ground: 150 psig(1035 kPa). b. Water Distribution Systems,Above Ground: 125 psig(860 kPa). C. Soil,Waste,and Vent Systems: 10 foot head of water(30 kPa). d. Sanitary Sewage Systems:75 psig(520 kPa). ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS ' A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440- 1 B. Product Data for each plumbing fixture category and type specified. Include selected fixture,trim,fittings, ' accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports. Indicate materials and finishes, dimensions,construction details,and flow-control rates. • C. Submit product data including rated capacities of selected models and weights(shipping,installation,and , operation). Indicate materials, finishes, dimensions, required clearances, and methods of assembly of components;and piping and wiring connections for the following plumbing specialty products: a. Hose bibbs. , b. Yard hydrants. C. Cleanouts,cover plates,and access panels. , d. Vent caps,vent terminals,and roof flashing assemblies. C. Floor drains. f. Sleeve penetration systems. D. Maintenance data for plumbing fixtures and components to include in the operation and maintenance manuals specified in Division 1. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Source Limitations: Obtain plumbing fixtures,faucets,and other components of each category from one , source and by a single manufacturer. B. Regulatory Requirements: Complywilhrequirementsof Public Law 101-336,"Americans with Disabilities Act"regarding plumbing fixtures for physically handicapped people. ' C. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures and components specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. D. Select combinations of fixtures and trim.faucets.fittings,and other components that are compatible. E. Comply with ASME B31.9, "Building Services Piping,"for materials,products,and installation. , F. Design Concept: The Drawings indicate capacities, sizes, and dimensional requirements of system components.Components having equal performance characteristics that deviate from the indicated sizeand , dimensions may be considered, provided deviations do not change the design concept or intended performance. The burden of proof for equality of products is on tho Contractor. Refer to Division I Section "Product Substitutions." ' 1.7 DELIVERY,STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver plumbing fixtures in manufacturer's protective packing,crating,and covering. ' 8. Store plumbing fixtures on elevated platforms in dry location. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS ' A. Operating Keys(Handles):Furnish I extra key for each key-operated hose bibb installed. ' 1.9 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Field Measurements: Coordinate roughing-in and final fixture locations and verify that plumbing fixtures ' can be installed to comply with original design and referenced standards. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-2 PART 2-PRODUCTS • 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available Manufacturers:Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: ' a. Wall Hydrants: IL Ancon,Inc. b. Jones Manufacturing Co.,Inc. ' C. Josam Co. d. Smith by Jay R.Smith Mfg.Co.Div.,Smith Industries,Inc. C. Wade Div.,Tyler Pipe. C Watts Regulator Co. g. Woodford Manufacturing Co.Div„ WCM Industries,Inc. h. Zurn by Hydromechanics Div.,Zurn Industries.Inc. b, Sleeve Penetration Systems: ' a. Proset Systems.Inc. 2.2 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING SPECIALTIES ' A. Piping specialties such as escutcheons,dielectric fittings,sleeves,and sleeve seats are specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." ' 2.3 CLEANOUTS A. Floor cleanouts shall be Wade Series W-6000,orequal,with a coated cast iron body,spigot connection with NPVC tapered plug,adjustable housing with a secured satin finish bronze top,sized as shown on drawings. B. Wall cleanout for PVC Piping shall be Type 1 PVC G&R Sloan Mfg.Co.,Part No.211 (x),or equal,"T" branch cleanout with tapered thread bronze plug tapped for center screw,sized as shown on drawings. Provide stainless steel cover,(size as required),for all wall cleanouts. ' 2A FLOOR DRAINS AND TRENCH DRAINS A. General:Size outlets as indicated on Product Data Sheet or drawings. ' B. Floor Drains:FD-I Floor drain shall be carefully installed and set level at proper elevation. Floor drains shall be Wade W-1100 series, or equal, with adjustable 6"diameter standard strainer with satin nickel bronze top. Drain body shall be inside caulk connection or"Ty Seal" at contractors option. Floor drain shall be installed with deep seal"P"trap,sized as shown on drawings. C. Trench Drains:Trench drains shall be concrete formed in place as shown on the drawings, ' PART 3 -EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION ' A. Examine roughing-in for potable,hot-and cold-water supply piping systems; soil,waste,and vent piping • systems;and supports. Verify that locations and sizes of piping and locations and types of supports match ' those indicated, before installing and connecting fixtures. Use manufacturer's roughing-in data when PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-3 1 roughing-in data are not indicated. B. Examine walls,floors,and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be installed. •, C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. , 3.2 APPLICATIONS A. Include supports for plumbing fixtures according to the following: , a. Carriers: For wall-hanging water closets and fixtures supported from wall construction. b. Chair Carriers: For wall-hanging urinals, lavatories,sinks, drinking fountains,and electric water ' coolers. C. Heavy-Duty Chair Carriers: For accessible urinals,lavatories.and other fixtures where indicated. d. Reinforcement: For floor-mounted lavatories and sinks that require securing to wall and recessed, ' box-mounted,electric water coolers. C. Fabricate reinforcement from 2-by4-inch or 2-hy-6-inch (38-by-89-mm or 38-by-140-mm) fire- retardant-treated-wood blacking between studs or 1 14-by-6-inch (635-by-152.4-mm)steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction,to secure fixtures to wall. Include length that will extend ' beyond ends of fixture mounting bracket and attach to at least 2 studs. 3.3 PLUMBING FIXTURE INSTALLATION , A. Assemble plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings,faucets,and other components level and plumb according to manufacturers'written instructions,roughing-in drawings,and referenced standards. ' B. Install Handicapped Fixtures in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act(ADA). Mounting heights of fixtures,flush valves,traps,etc.shall comply with ADA. C. Set shower receptors in leveling bed of cement grout. N D. Install individual stop valve in each water supply to fixture. Use gate or globe valve where specific stop ' valve is not specified. E. Install supply,flow-control fittings with specified flow rates in fixture supplies at stop valves. ' F. Install faucet,flow-control fittings with specified flow rates and patterns in faucet spouts when faucets are not available with required rates and patterns. Include adapters when required. G. Install shower,flow-control fittings with specified maximum flow rates in shower arms. , H. Install traps on fixture outlets. Omit traps on fixtures having integral traps. Omit traps on indirect wastes, , except where otherwise indicated. 1. • Install escutcheons at wall,floor,and ceiling penetrations in exposed,finished locations and with in cabinets and millwork. Use deep-pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings. ' J. Seal joints between fixtures and walls,floors,and counters using sanitary-type, I-part,mildew-resistant, silicone sealant according to sealing requirements specified in Division 7 Section"Joint Sealants." Match ' sealant color to fixture color. 3.4 CONNECTIONS A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate general •1 arrangement of piping,fittings.and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-4 ' 1 ' a. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and plumbing equipment specified in other Division 15 Sections. '• B. Supply and Waste Connections to Plumbing Fixtures: Refer to plumbing fixture schedules at the end of this Section for fitting sizes and connection requirements for each plumbing fixture. C. Supply and Waste Connections to Equipment Specified in Other Sections: Connect equipment with supply inlets,supply stops,supply risers,and traps specified in this Section. Use fitting sizes required to match connected equipment. Connect fittings to plumbing piping. D. Ground equipment. a. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. Where manufacturces torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 496A and ' UL 496B. E. Arrange for electric-power connections to fixtures and devices that require power. Electric power is specified in Division 16 Sections. 3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING ' A. Operate and adjust all faucets,flush valves,disposers,etc.. Replace damaged or malfunction ing equipment. Replace damaged or malfunctioning equipment. B. Clean all fixtures,fittings,strainers,etc.using manufacturers recommended methods and products. 3.6 PROTECTION A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings. ' B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities,except when approved in writing by Owner. 3.7 WATER CLOSET SCHEDULE A. Accessible WsterCiosetWC-1: Where plumbing fixtures ofthis designation are indicated,provideproduets complying with the following: ' a. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: b. Vitreous-China Water Closet: a. Carusoe Model CST714T,Toto. C. Toilet Seat: a. 095,Olsonite Corp. d. Fixture Color: White. ' C. Bowl Type and Operation: Elongated,siphon jet. E Mounting and Outlet: Floor mounted, floor outlet. g. Fixture Bolt Caps: White,china. ' h. Rim Height: 17.0 to 19.0 inches(445 to 457 mm). 1. Tank Trim: Fiushometer Tank. J. Accessible-Fixture Tank:Modified as required for lever mounting on side of tank that will be on wide side of fixture compartment. k. Design Water Consumption: 1.6 gal.(6 L)per flushing cycle. I. Toilet Seat: Solid-plastic, water-closet seat with bumpers and hardware, compatible with water • closet and as follows: a. Color: White. PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-5 1 1 b. Class: Commercial,Standard. , C. Size: Elongated. d. Pattern: Open front without cover. • 3.8 PIPING SPECIALTY INSTALLATION , A. Install cleanouts in above-ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated,according to the following: , a. Sdzc same as drainage piping up to 4 inches(ON 100)size. Use 4 inches(DN 100)size for larger drainage piping except where larger size cleanout is indicated. ' b. Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45 degrees. C. Locate at minimum intervals of50 feet(15 m)for piping 4 inches(DN 100)and smaller and 100 feet(30 m)for larger piping. d. Locate at base of each vertical soil or waste stack. , B. Install cleanout deck plates(covers),of types indicated,with top Bush with finished floor,for floor cleanouts for piping below floors. ' C. Install cleanout wall access covers,oftypes indicated,with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping. D. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors having waterproof membrane. 3.9 FLOOR DRAIN INSTALLATION , A. Install floor drains according to manufacturer's written instructions,in locations indicated. B. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained,or as indicated. Set tops of drains flush with floor. C. Set drain elevation depressed below finished slab elevation as shown on structural drawings, if not ' shown on structural drawings,set elevation to provide proper floor slope to drain as follows: a. 60 inches(1500 mm)Drain Area Radius: %n inch (13 mm)depression. ' b. 10 Foot(3000 mm)Drain Area Radius: 3/4 inch (19 mm)depression. C. 15 Foot(4500 mm)Drain Area Radius: I inch(25 mm)depression. , d. 20 Foot(6000 mm)Drain Area Radius: 1-1/4 inches(32 mm)depression. C. 25 Foot(7500 mm)Drain Area Radius: 1-1/2 inches(40 mm)depression. D. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between drain and adjoining floating. , Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes,where penetrated. E. Position drains for easy accessibility and maintenance. , 3.10 CONNECTIONS A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot-and cold-water supply piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated. ' but not smaller than required by plumbing code. B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts to plumbing fixtures and drains, ' with approved trap,of sizes indicated,but not smaller than required by plumbing code. C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. .' PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440-6 1 1 3.11 COMMISSIONING • A. Preparation: Perform the following checks before start-up: 1 a. Systems tests are complete. b. Damaged and defective specialties and accessories have been replaced or repaired. C, There is clear space for servicing of specialties. -1 B. Before operating systems,perform these steps: a. Close drain valves, hydrants,and hose bibbs. b. Open valves to full open position. C. Verify drainage and vent piping are clear of obstructions. Flush with water until clear. 1 3.12 PROTECTION A. Protect drains during remainder ofconstruction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and top.eve. t ' damage from traffic and construction work. B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. 1 I END OF SECTION 15440 N 1 1 1 1 . 1 . 1 1� 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES AND SPECIALTIES 15440 -7 i SECTION 15410-PLUMBING PIPING , PART I -GENERAL •, 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Special Conditionsand Division ' I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section includes plumbing piping systems to a point 60 inches (1500 mm)outside the building. Systems include the following: ' 1. Potable water distribution,including cold-and hot-water supply. 2. Drainage and vent systems, including sanitary. B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ' 1. Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods"for piping joining materials,joint , construction,and installation requirements not specified in this Section. 2. Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties"for plumbing system components. 1.3 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS , A. Provide components and installation capable of producing piping systems with the following minimum working pressure ratings,except where indicated otherwise: 1. Water Distribution Systems,Below Ground: 150 psig(1035 kPa). 2. Water Distribution Systems,Above Ground: 125 psig(860 kPa). ' 3. Soil,Waste,and Vent Systems: 10-foot head of water(30 kPa). 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification 1 Sections. B. Product data for the following plumbing piping products: , 1. Couplings and fittings for grooved-end copper tube and grooved-end copper fittings. , C. Water samples,test results,and reports specified in "Field Quality Control"and"Cleaning" Articles. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Comply with the provisions of ASME 831.9 "Building Services Piping" for materials, products, and installation. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Available manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that •, may be incorporated in the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: PLUMBING PIPING 15410- 1 ' 1. Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tube and Grooved-End Copper Fittings: '• a. Victaulic Co.of America. 2. Mechanically Formed Outlet Procedure: a. T-Drill Industries,Inc. 2.2 PIPES AND TUBES ' - A. General: The application of the following pipe,tube,and fitting materials and joining methods required for plumbing piping systems are indicated in Part 3 Article"Pipe and Fittings Applications." B. Hard Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types K, L,and M.(ASTM B 88M,Types A. B, and CJ water tube, drawn temper. ' C. Soft Copper Tube: ASTM B 88,Types K and L.(ASTM B 88M,Types A and B,)water tube,annealed temper. ' D. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic,DWV Pipe: ASTM D 2665,Schedule 40,plain ends. 2.3 PIPE FITTINGS AND TUBE FITTINGS A. Wrought-Copper, Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings: ASME BI6.22. B. Wrought-Copper and Bronze,Grooved-End Fittings: ASTM B 75(ASTM B 75M)Tube and ASTM B 584 NBronze Castings. C. Copper Tube, Grooved-End Mechanical Fittings: ASTM B 75 (ASTM B 75M), copper tube and ' ASTM B 584 bronze castings. D. Bronze Flanges: ASME BI 6.24,Classes 150 and 300. ' E. CopperUnions: ASME Bl6.18.cast-copper-alloy body,hexagonal stock,with ball-and-socketjoinLmetal- to-meta!seating surfaces,and solder joint,threaded,or solder joint and threaded ends. 1. Threaded Ends: Threads conforming to ASME 131.20.1. F. Poly(Vinyl Chloride)(PVC)Plastic,DWV Pipe Fittings: ASTM D 2665,made to ASTM D 3311;socket- type;drain,waste,and vent pipe patterns. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS ' A. Solder,brazing,and welding tiller metals are specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." ' B. Couplings for Grooved-End Copper Tube and'Grooved-End Copper Fittings: ASTM A 536 ductile-iron or ASTM A 47 malleable-iron housing having copper-colored enamel finish, with synthetic-rubber gasket having central-cavity,pressure-responsive design and suitable for hot water,with ASTM A 183 carbon-steel bolts and nuts. 2.5 VALVES '• A. Refer to Division 15 Section "Plumbing Fixtures and Specialties" for special-duty valves. ' PLUMBING PIPING 15410-2 PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 EXCAVATION • A. Excavation,trenching, and backfilling are specified in Division 2 Section "Earthwork." , 3.2 PREPARATION OF FOUNDATION FOR BURIED PIPING A. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth,firm,stable,and rock-free foundation throughout length ofpiping. ' B. Remove unstable,soft,and unsuitable materials at surface on which piping is to be laid and backfill with ' clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. C. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped-sand backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing of pipe barrel on foundation. ' 3.3 PIPE AND FITTINGS APPLICATIONS A. General: Use pipe, tube, fittings, and joining methods for piping systems according to the following ' applications. B. Water Distribution Piping Below Ground: Use the following: , I. 2 Inches(ON 50)and Smaller: Soft copper tube.Type K (Type A),cast-copper-alloy solder joint pressure fittings,and soldered joints with Alloy Sn95 solder. ' C. Water Distribution Piping Above Ground: Use the following: I. 3-1/2 Inches(DN 90)and Smaller: Hard copper tube,Type L (Type B); flare pressure fittings; Below ground water service shall be continuous without joints. D. Soil, Waste,and Vent Piping Below Ground: Use the following: ' I. 2 to 4 Inches(DN 50 to DN 100): Poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe;PVC socket-type ' drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. 2. 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 Inches(DN 32 and DN 40): Poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe;PVC socket-type drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. ' E. Soil,Waste,and Vent Piping Above Ground: Use the following: I. 2 to 4 Inches(ON 50 to DN 100): Poly(vinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe:PVC socket-type ' drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. 2. 1-1/4 and 1-1/2 Inches(DN 32 and DN 40): Polyvinyl chloride)(PVC)plastic DWV pipe;PVC socket-type drain,waste,and vent pipe pattern fittings;and solvent-cemented joints. ' 3.4 VALVE APPLICATIONS A. Drawings indicate valve types to be used. Where specific valve types are not indicated, the following , requirements apply: 1. Shutoff Duty: Use gate,or ball valves. ' 2. Throttling Duty: Use globe,or ball valves, 3.5 PIPING INSTALLATION,GENERAL •, PLUMBING PIPING 15410-3 1 ' A. Basic piping installation requirements are specified in Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." '• B. Install water hammer arrestor in accordance with the latest version of the International Plumbing Code. Water hammer arrestor shall he manufactured by Sioux Chief or similar and be sized in accordance with manufacturers recommendations. ' C. Install thermal expansion control expansion tank on the hot water supply system in accordance with the latest version of the International Plumbing Code. Expansion tank shall he manufactured by Amtrol or similar and be sized in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. ' 3.6 SERVICE ENTRANCE PIPING ' A. Extend water distribution piping and connect to water service piping of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. B. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitarysewer pipingofsizeand in location indicated ' for service entrance to building. Install manhole or cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer. ' C. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at service penetrations through foundation wall for watertight installation. 3.7 WATER DISTRIBUTION PIPING INSTALLATION tA. Install piping with 1/32-inch-per-foot(1:400)(1/4 percent)slope downward toward drain. 3.8 DRAINAGE AND VENT PIPING INSTALLATION A. Makechanges in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y branches,Y branches with 1/8 ' bends,and long-sweep 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8,and 1/16 bends. Sanitarytees and short-sweep quarter bends may be used on vertical stacks ofdrainage lines where change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-tum double-Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings where 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side and have a common drain. Straight tees,elbows,and crosses may be used on vent lines. Make no ' change in direction of flow greater than 90 degrees. Where different sizes ofdrainage pipes and fittings are connected,use proper size standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size ofdrainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited. B. Lay buried building drains beginning at low point of each system,true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub or bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer's recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special ' installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as completed. C. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes,except whereanother slope is indicated: ' I. Sanitary Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot (1:50) (2 percent) for piping 3 inches (DN 80) and smaller, 114 inch per foot(1:50)(2 percent)for piping 4 inches(DN 100)and larger. ' 2. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot(1:50)(2 percent). 3. Vent Piping: 1/8 inch per foot(1:100)(1 percent). 3.9 JOINT CONSTRUCTION ' A. Basic piping joint construction is specified in Division 15 Section "Basic Mechanical Materials and . Methods." B. Grooved Pipe and Grooved-Pipe Fitting Joints: Assemble joints with coupling,gasket,lubricant,and bolts PLUMBING PIPING 15410.4 according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. , C. Grooved Copper Tube and Grooved-Tube Fitting Joints: Assemble joints with coupling,gasket,lubricant, • and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer's written instructions. D. Mechanically Formed Outlet Joints: Make joints according to forming equipment manufacturer's written , instructions. Use tool designed for piping material being joined,drill pilot hole,and form collar for branch connection. , 1. Copper'rube: Dimple tube to form sealing slop and braze branch tube into formed collar outlet. E. PVC DWV Pipe: loin PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D 2665. ' 3.10 INSTALLATION OF VALVES A. Sectional Valves: Install sectional valves close to main on each branch and riser serving 2 or more ' plumbing fixtures or equipment connections and where indicated. Use gate or ball valves for sectional valves 2 inches(ON 50)and smaller. Use gate or ball valves for sectional valves 2-1/2 inches(DN 65)and ' larger. B. Shutoff Valves: Install shutoff valves on inlet to each plumbing equipment item,on each supply to each plumbing fixture not having stops on supplies,at all main-branch connections,at bottom of risers where 1 they originate from a continuous main and rise to a floor or floors above and elsewhere as indicated. For shutoff valves 2 inches(DN 50)and smaller,use gate or ball valves;for shutoff valves 2-1/2 inches(DN 65) and larger,use gate or ball valves. ' C. Drain Valves: Install drain valves specified in Division 15 Section "Plumbing Specialties" on each plumbing equipment item located to drain equipment for service and repair. Install drain valve at base of each riser,at low points of horizontal runs,and where required to drain water distribution piping system. I. Install hose-end drain valves at low points in water mains,risers,and branches. 2. Install stop and waste drain valves where indicated. , 3.11 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS INSTALLATION A. Hanger and support devices are specified in Division 15 Section "Hangers and Supports." ' B. Conform to table below for maximum spacing of supports: Horizontal Vertical ' Pine Material In Feet In Feet Copper Tubing- 1-1/4 Inches and Smaller 6 10 ' Copper Tubing- 1-1/2 Inches and Larger 10 10 PVC Plastic Pipe 4 4 C. Pipe Attachments: install the following: 1. Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 for vertical runs. , 2. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type I for individual straight horizontal runs 100 feet(30 m)and less. 3. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43 for individual straight horizontal runs longer than 100 ' feet(30 m). 4. Spring Cushion Roils: MSS Type49,where indicated,for individual straight horizontal runs longer than 100 fat(30 m). 5. Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 44 for multiple straight horizontal runs 100 feet(30 m)or longer. Support ' PLUMBING PIPING 15410- 5 pipe rolls on trapeze. 6, Spring Hangers: MSS Type 52 for support of base of vertical runs. ,• D. Support plastic pipe and tubing not included in table according to manufacturer's recommendations. 3.12 CONNECTIONS A. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot-and cold-water supply piping runouts of sizes indicated,but not smaller than required by plumbing code to fixtures. B. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts,with approved trap, of sizes indicated,but not smaller than required by plumbing code,to plumbing fixtures and drains. C. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains. .D. Mechanical Equipment Connections: Connect hot-and cold-water supply piping system to mechanical equipment as indicated. Provide shutoff valve and union for each connection;provide drain valve on drain ' connection. 3.13 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Inspect water distribution piping as follows: ' 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation water distribution piping system until it has been inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. 2. Duringprogress of the installation,notify the plumbing official havingjurisdiction at least24 hours prior to time inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the plumbing Nofficial. a. Roughing-in Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system before concealed or closed- in after system roughing-in and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code. ' 3. Reinspections: When a plumbing official finds that piping system will not Pass test or inspection, make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by the plumbing official. 4. Reports: prepare inspection reports signed by plumbing official. B. Test water distribution piping as follows: ' I. Test for leaks and defects in new water distribution piping systems and parts ofexisting systems that have been altered,extended,or repaired. If testing is performed in segments,submit separate report for each test,complete with diagram of portion of system tested. 2. Leave uncovered and unconcealed in new,altered,extended,or replaced water distribution piping ' until it has been tested and approved. Expose work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved for testing. 3. Cap and subject the piping system to a static water pressure of50 pail;(345 Val above the operating ' pressure without exceeding pressure rating of piping system materials. Isolate test source and allow to stand for 4 hours. leaks and loss in test pressure constitute defects that must be repaired. 4. Repair leaks and defects with new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. ' 5. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. • C. Inspect drainage piping as follows: ' 1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation drainage and vent piping system until it has been ' PLUMBING PIPING 15410-6 inspected and approved by the authority having jurisdiction. ' 2, During progress of installation, notify the plumbing official having jurisdiction at least 24 hours • prior to time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified below in presence of the plumbing official, ' a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system after system roughing-in, before concealing,and prior to setting fixtures. , b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by plumbing official to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of plumbing code. 3. Reinspections: Make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by plumbing official when , piping system fails to pass test or inspection. 4. Reports: Prepare inspection reports signed by the plumbing official. D. Drainage and Vent Piping System Tests: Test drainage and vent systems according to procedures of , authority having jurisdiction or,in absence of published procedure,as follows: 1, Test for leaks and defects in now drainage and vent piping systems and parts of existing systems that , have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit a separate report for each test.complete with a diagram of the portion of the system tested, 2. leave uncovered and unconcealed in new,altered,extended,or replaced drainage and vent piping ' until it has been tested and approved. Expose for testing work that has been covered or concealed before it has been tested and approved. 3. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or open jointed drain , tile,test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing-in piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow,but not less than 10 feet head of water(30 kPa). Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks. 4. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: Afkr plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water,test connections and prove gastight and watertight, Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of I inch water , column(250 Pa). Use a U tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks. ' S. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained. 6. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.14 CLEANING A. Clean and disinfect water distribution piping as follows: ' 1. Purge new potable water distribution piping systems and parts of existing potable water systems that have been altered,extended,or repaired prior to use. ' 2. Use purging and disinfecting procedure prescribed by authority having jurisdiction or,if method is not prescribed by that authority,the procedure described in either AW W A C651 or A W W A C652 or as described below: a. Flush piping system with clean,potable water until dirty water does not appear at outlets. , b. Fill system or part thereof with water/chlorine solution containing at least 50 parts per million of chlorine. Valves and faucets shall be opened several times during the disinfection ' process. Isolate(valve off)and allow to stand for 24 hours. C. The system may be flushed if residual chlorine is not less than 10 ppm. If the residual • chlorine is less than 10ppm,the disinfection procedure shall be repeated. ' d. After the sterilization process,the system shall be thoroughly flushed with clean water until the chlorine content is less than 0.1 ppm. PLUMBING PIPING 15410-7 , c. Water samples shall be taken in bottles furnished by the Department of Natural Resources- • Environmental Quality for a complete bacteriological analysis. If water is not suitable for human consumption,the sterilization process shall be repeated until water is approved as ' satisfactory for use. Sterilization process shall meet requirements of the Department of Natural Resources-Environmental Qualityand theContractor shall provideallmaterialsond labor to perform the work. B. Prepare and submit reports for purging and disinfecting activities. C. Clean interior of piping system. Remove dirt and debris as work progresses. ' 3.15 COMMISSIONING ' A. Fill water systems. Check compression tanks to determine that they are not air bound and that system is completely full of water. B. Before operating systems,perform these steps: 1 I. Close drain valves,hydrants,and hose bibbs. 2. Open shutoff valves to full open position. ' 3. Open throttling valves to proper setting. 4. Remove plugs used during testing of piping systems and plugs used for temporary sealing of piping during installation. ' C. Check plumbing equipment and verify proper settings,adjustments.and operation. Do not operate water heaters before filling with water. D. Check plumbing specialties and verify proper settings,adjustments,and operation. 3.16 PROTECTION A. Protectdrains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debrisand toprevent damage from traffic and construction work. ' B. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. C. Exposed PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2 coats ofa water-based latex paint. ' END OF SECTION 15410 1 1 1• 1 ' PLUMBING PIPING 15410-9 1 SECTION 16010-FURNACES •, PART 1 -GENERAL , 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawingsandgeneral provislonsof theContract,Including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section, ' 1.2 SUMMARY , A. This Section Includes furnaces and accessories complete with controls(AHU-1). B. This Section Includes furnaces and accessories with the following additional components: , 1. Direct-expansion cooling coils. C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: ' 1. Division 15 Section "Condensing Units" for condensing units used with cooling coils provided in furnaces. , 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and M Division 1 Specification Sections, B. Product Data for each furnace including rated capacities of selected models,weights(shipping, , installed,and operating),furnished specialties,and accessories. Include plan and elevation views of units, minimum clearances, and data on ratings and capacities. C. Maintenance data for each furnace to Include in the operation and maintenance manual specified , In Division 1. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE , A. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70 and that are , listed and labeled by UL where available, B. Listing and Labeling: Provide electrically operated fixtures specified in this Section that are listed ' and labeled, 1. The Terms"Listed"and"Labeled": As defined In the National Electrical Code,Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A"Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" ' (NRTL)as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. PART 2-PRODUCTS , -FURNACES 15610- 1 1 ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS • A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work Include, but are not limited to,the following: 1. Furnaces: a. York b. Trans C. Carrier - ' d. Lennox ' 2.2 FURNACES, GENERAL A. Description: Factory assembled, piped, wired, and tested. ' B. Cabinet: Steel with foil-faced,glass-fiber, interior Insulation. Lift-out panels expose burners and all other items requiring access for maintenance. C. Finish of External Casings and Cabinets: Baked enamel over corroslon-resistant4reated surface. D. Fan: Centrifugal,factory balanced, resilient mounted. 2.3 GAS-FIRED FURNACES, "STANDARD"EFFICIENCY A. Comply with AGA Z21.47,"Gas-Fired Central Fumaces";and NFPA 54,"National Fuel Gas Code." N1. AGA Approval: Bear label of American Gas Association. 2. Type of Gas: Propane. ' B. Efficiency: 80 percent AFUE, minimum. ' 2.4 CONTROLS A. FumaceContmls: Include components required for satisfactory operation of fumaces and auxiliary ' equipment in all seasons. B. Control Transformer. 24 VAC output,factory installed, and wired in furnace. ' C. Thermostat: 24 VAC, single-stage, adjustable, heating-cooiing wall mounting unit with fan ON-AUTOMATIC selector. D. Relays: As required to achieve specified operation, E. Wire and Cable: Specified in Division 16 Section"Wires and Cables." ' 2.5 AIR FILTERS A. Filters: 1-Inch-(25-mm-)thick,disposable,fiberglass type In sheet metal rack. • 2.6 COOLING FEATURES ' FURNACES 15,610-2 A. Evaporator Coil: Conform to ARI 2101240, "Unitary Air Conditioning and Air Source Heat Pump ' Equipment." Match size with furnace. Match remote condensing unit specified in Division 15 • Section "Condensing Units" with type, capacity, pressure-drop ratings, restricted distributor, or , expansion valve. Include condensate drain pan with accessible drain outlet. B. Evaporator Coll Enclosure: As required to suit furnace and cooling coil. Steel cabinet with access panel and flanges for Integral mounting at or on furnace cabinet. , C. Refrigerant Line Kits: Annealed-copper suction and liquid lines factory cleaned,dried,pressurized, and sealed;with insulated suction Iina and flared fif ingsatevaporatorend;no fitting at condenser ' end; length as required. PART 3- EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Install furnaces and accessories according to manufacturer's written Instructions. B. install and connect gas-fired furnaces and associated fuel and vent features and systems ' according to NFPA 54, applicable local codes and regulations, and manufacturer's published installation Instructions. 1. Connect gas piping according to Division 15 Section"Liquified Petroilum Gas Piping." ' 2. Connect condensate drain pans using copper tubing,ASTM B 88,Type M (ASTM B 88M, Type C) with streamline drainage fittings and soldered joints or PVC drainage piping. Extend to nearest equipment drain or floor drain. Construct vented,deep trap at connection to drain pan and Install cleanouts at changes in direction. Terminate to suit local code requirements, except where stricter methods are indicated. C. Controls: Install thermostats at mounting height of 80 inches (1500 mm) above floor. ' D. Control Wiring: Install control wiring as specified in Division 18 Section "Wires and Cables." E. Identify furnaces and connections according to Division 15 Section"Basic Mechanical Materiels ' and Methods." 3.2 CONNECTIONS , A. Piping Installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. Drawings indicate , general arrangement of piping,fittings, and specialties. Specific connection requirements are as follows: 1. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow service and maintenance. ' B. Connect motors and components to wiring systems and to ground as Indicated and Instructed by manufacturer. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals, including grounding connections, ' according to manufacturer's published torque•tightening values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 4888. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING , FURNACES 15610-3 1 A. Set controls, burner, and other adjustments for optimum heating performance and efficiency. • Adjust heat distribution features, Including shutters, dampers, and relays, to provide optimum heating performance and system efficiency. B. After completing system Installation, Inspect furnaces and associated components. Repair scratches and more of finish to match original finish. Clean unit Internally using methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. ' 3.4 COMMISSIONING — A. Startup Services: Provide startup service, as specified below. ' 1. Start each furnace and operate controls. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment. ' 3. Test functions, operations, control sequences, and protective features, Adjust to ensure operation is as specified. B. Correct deficiencies Identified by tests and observations and retest until specified requirements are met. END OF SECTION 15610 1• FURNACES 15610-4 SECTION 15891 -DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES ' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Special Conditions and Division 1 , Specification Sections,apply to this Section. B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this section: , 1. Mechanical "General Requirements.•" 2. "Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods." ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes rectangular metal ducts for heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems in ' pressure classes from minus 2 inches to plus 10 inches water gage. B. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Manual volume control dampers. 2. Turning vanes. ' 3. Flexible connectors. 4. Accessories hardware. 5. Air Outlets and Inlets ' 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. Sealing Requirements Definitions: For the purposes of duct systems sealing requirements specified in this Section,the following definitions apply: 1. Seams: A scamn is defined asjoining oftwo longitudinally(in the direction ofairflow)oriented edges , of duct surface material occurring between two joints. All other duct surface connections made on the perimeter are deemed to bejoints. 2. Joints: Joints include girth joints;branch and subbranch intersections;so-called duct collar tap-ins; , fitting subsections;louver and air terminal connections to ducts;access door and access panel frames and jambs;duct,plenum,and casing abutments to building structures. 1.4 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS ' A. The duct system design,as indicated,has been used to select and size air moving and distribution equipment and other components of the air system. Changes or alterations to the layout or configuration of the duct ' system must be specifically approved in writing. Accompany requests for layout modifications with calculations showing that the proposed layout will provide the original design results without increasing the system total pressure. Unless otherwise indicated duct sizes shown on plans are INSIDE FREE AREA DIMENSIONS. ' 1.5 SUBMITTALS A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification ' Sections. B. Product data including details of construction relative to materials,dimensions of individual components, , profiles,and finishes for the following items: • I. Air Outlets and Inlets ' DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15991 - I ' 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. NFPA Compliance: Comply with the following NFPA Standards: 1. NFPA 90A,"Standard for the Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilating Systems,"except as indicated otherwise. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 SHEET METAL MATERIALS ' A. Galvanized Sheet Steel: Lock-forming quality, ASTM A 527,Coating Designation G 90. Provide mill phosphatized finish for exposed surfaces of ducts exposed to view. ' B. Reinforcement Shapes and Plates: Unless otherwise indicated,provide galvanized steel reinforcing where installed on galvanized sheet metal ducts. ' C. Tic Rods: Galvanized steel, 1/4-inch minimum diameter for 36-inch length or less; 3/8-inch minimum diameter for lengths longer than 36 inches. 2.2 RECTANGULAR DUCT FABRICATION ' A. General: Except as otherwise indicated, fabricate rectangular ducts with galvanized sheet steel, in accordance with SMACNA"HVAC Duct Construction Standards,"Tables 1-3 through 1-19,including their ' associated details. Conform to the requirements in the referenced standard for metal thickness,reinforcing types and intervals,tie rod applications,and joint types and intervals. M 1. Fabricate rectangular ducts in lengths appropriate to reinforcement and rigidity class required for pressure classification. 2. Provide materials that are free from visual imperfections such as pitting,seam marks,roller marks, stains,and discolorations. ' B. Static Pressure Classifications: Except where otherwise indicated,construct duct systems to the fallowing pressure classifications: ' 1. Supply Ducts: 1 inches water gage. 2. Return Ducts: I inches water gage,negative pressure. 3. Exhaust Ducts: 1 inches water gage,negative pressure. 1 C. Crossbreaking or Cross Beading: Crossbreak or bead duct sides that are 19 inches and larger and are 20 gage or less, with more than 10 sq. it, of unbraced panel area, as indicated in SMACNA "HVAC Duct ' Construction Standard," Figure 14, unless they are lined or are externally insulated. 2.3 RECTANGULAR DUCT FITTINGS ' A. Fabricate elbows,transitions,offsets,branch connections,and other duct construction in accordance with SMACNA "HVAC Metal Duct Construction Standard," 1985 Edition,Figures 2.1 through 2-10. ' 2.4 FLEXIBLE CONNECTORS A. All duct connections to equipment shall be made with UL listed flexible duct connections and shall be ' Ventglass-LA,ar equal,heavy glass fabric double coated on one side only with neoprene,ofapproximately 16 ounces per square yard,provided with 3"wide,24 gauge metal mounting strips finely attached to each • edge and suitable for the pressure class of the air handling system. Connectors shall have a flame spread. smoke developed rating not in excess of 25/50. Connections exterior to building shall be of Ventlon,or ' equal,Hypalon-coated glass fabric weighing approximately 26 ounces per square yard. ' DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15891 .2 2.5 AIR OUTLETS AND INLETS ' A. Shall be as scheduled on drawings or equal. ' PART 3 -EXECUTION ; 3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine areas and conditions for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other ' conditions affecting performance of ductwork and accessories. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. , 3.2 DUCT INSTALLATION,GENERAL A. Duct System Pressure Class: Construct and install each duct system for the specific duct pressure , classification indicated. B. Install ducts with the fewest possible joints. , C. Use fabricated fittings for all changes in directions,changes in size and shape,and connections. D. Locate ducts, except as otherwise indicated, vertically and horizontally, parallel and perpendicular to ,. building lines;avoid diagonal runs. Install duct systems in shortest route that does not obstruct useable space or block access for servicing building and its equipment. E., Install ducts close to walls,overhead construction,columns,and other structural and permanent enclosure ' elements of building. F. Coordinate layout with suspended ceiling and lighting layouts and similar finished work. G. Install duct accessories according to manufacturer's installation instructions and applicable portions of details of construction as shown in SMACNA standards. , H. Provide test bolts at fan inlet and outlet. 3.3 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING , A. Adjust duct accessories for proper settings. B. Vacuum ducts systems prior to final acceptance to remove dust and debris. ' END OF SECTION 15891 , •' DUCTWORK AND ACCESSORIES 15891 -3 ' ,• SECTION 16050-BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS ' PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes the following: ' 1. Raceways. 2. Building wire and connectors. ' 3. Supporting devices for electrical components. 4. Electricity-metering components. S. Concrete equipment bases ' 6. Touchup painting. 7. Enclosed switches 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit. C. RNC:Rigid nonmetallic conduit. ' D. RMC:Rigid metallic conduit. ' E. LFMC:Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. F. MC Cable-Metal-Clad Cable. ' 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Shop Drawings:Catalog data. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100 and marked for intended use. ' B. Comply with NFPA 70. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050. 1 1 1.6 COORDINATION ' A. Sequence,coordinate,and integrate installing electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the •, Work. Coordinate installing large equipment requiring positioning before closing in the building. B. Coordinate electrical service connections to components furnished by utility companies. ' 1. Coordinate installation and connection of exterior underground and overhead utilities and services, including provision for electricity-metering components. , 2. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction and of utility company providing electrical power and other services. PART 2-PRODUCTS , 2.1 RACEWAYS A. EMT: ANSI C80.3,zinc-coated steel,with set-screw or compression fittings. , B. FMC: Zinc-coated steel. C. LFMC: Zinc-coated steel with sunlight-resistant and mineral-oil-resistant plastic jacket. , D. RNC: NEMA TC 2,Schedule 40 PVC,with NEMA TC3 fittings. E. Raceway Finings: Specifically designed for the raceway type with which used. N 2.2 CONDUCTORS ' A. Conductors,No. 10 AWG and Smaller: Solid or stranded copper. B. Conductors,Larger Than No. 10 AWG: Stranded copper. C. Insulation: Thermoplastic,rated at 75 deg C minimum. ' D. Wire Connectors and Splices: Units of size,ampacity rating,material,type,and class suitable for service indicated. , E. MC Cable:Metal-Clad Cable,outer shell shall be steel. 2.3 SUPPORTING DEVICES ' A. Material: Cold-formed steel,with corrosion-resistant coating acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. ' B. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel. C. Slotted-Steel Channel Supports:Flange edges turned towardweb,and 9/16-inch-(I4-mm-)diameter slotted ' holes at a maximum of 2 inches(50 mm)ox.,in webs. • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-2 D. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers,riser clamps,straps,threaded C-clamps with • retainers,ceiling trapeze hangers,wall brackets,and spring-steel clamps or click-type hangers. E. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type. 2.4 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION A. Identification Devices: A single type of identification product for each application category. Use colors prescribed by ANSI A13.1,NFPA 70,and these Specifications. B. Cable Labels: Comply with ANSI A13.3,Table 3. C. Colored Adhesive Marling Tape for Wires and Cables: Self-adhesive vinyl tape,not less than 1 inch wide by 3 mils thick(25 mm ntidc by O.08 mm thick). ' D. Underground Warning Tape: Permanent,bright-colored,continuous-printed,vinyl tape with the following features: ' i. Not less than 6 inches wide by 4 mils thick(150 mm wide by 0.102 mm thick). 2. Compounded for permanent direct-burial service. 3. Embedded continuous metallic strip or core. ' 4. Printed legend that indicates type of underground line. E. Tape Markers for Wire: Vinyl or vinyl-cloth,self-adhesive,wraparound type with preprinted numbers and letters. F.F. Color-Coding Cable Ties: Type 6/6 nylon,self-locking type. Colors to suit coding scheme. 2.5 CONCRETE BASES ' A. Concrete: 3000-psi (20.7-MPa), 28-day compressive strength as specified in Division 3 Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete." ' 2.6 TOUCHUP PAINT A. For Equipment: Equipment manufacturer's paint selected to match installed equipment finish. ' B. Galvanized Surfaces: Zinc-rich paint recommended by item manufacturer. ' 2.7 ENCLOSED SWITCHES A. Enclosed,Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1,Type HD,with lockable handle. 1 ' PART 3-EXECUTION '• 3,1 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-3 1 A. Headroom Maintenance: Ifiriounting heights or other location criteria are not indicated,arrange and Install •, components and equipment to provide the maximum possible headroom. , B. Materials and Components: Install level,plumb,and parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components,unless otherwise indicated. C. Equipment: Install to facilitate service,maintenance,and repair or replacement of components. Connect for ease of disconnecting,with minimum interference with other installations. D. Right of Way: Give to raceways and piping systems installed at a required slope. , 3.2 RACEWAY APPLICATION ' A. Use the following raceways for outdoor installations: 1. Exposed:RMC. ' 2. Concealed:RMC. 3. Underground,Single Run: RNC. , 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 311 or Type 4, B. Use the following raceways for indoor installations: ' 1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT or MC cable. J. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: FMC;except in wet or damp locations,use LFMC. 4. Damp or Wet Locations: IMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 1, unless otherwise indicated. , 3.3 RACEWAY AND CABLE INSTALLATION A. Conceal raceways and cables,unless otherwise indicated,within finished walls,ceilings,and floors. ' B. Install raceways and cables at least 6 inches(150 mm)away from parallel rums of steam or hot-water pipes. ' Locate horizontal raceway runs above water piping. C. Use temporary raceway caps to prevent foreign matter from entering. , D. Make conduit bends and offsets so ID is not reduced. Keep legs ofbends in the same plane and straight legs of offsets parallel,unless otherwise indicated. E. Use raceway and cable fittings compatible with raceways and cables and suitable for use and location. , F. Install raceways embedded in slabs in middle third of slab thickness where practical, and leave at least , I-inch(25-mm)concrete cover. I. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. ' 3. Install conduit larger than I-inch trade size (DN27) parallel to or at right angles to main • reinforcement. Where conduit is at right angles to reinforcement,place conduit close to slab support. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-4 1 ' 4. Make bends in exposed parallel or banked runs from same centerline to make bends parallel. Use • factory elbows only where elbows can be installed parallel;otherwise,provide field bends for exposed ' parallel raceways. 3.4 WIRING METHODS FOR POWER&LIGHTING. A. Underground Fceders and Branch Circuits: Type THHN/THWN. B. Branch Circuits: Type THHNITHWN insulated conductors in raceway where exposed. Metal-clad cable where concealed in ceilings and gypsum board partitions. 3.5 WIRING INSTALLATION A. Install splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. B. Install wiring at outlets with at least 6 inches(300 mm)of slack conductor at each outlet. ' C. Connect outlet and component connections to wiring systems and to ground. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals,according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A. 3.6 ELECTRICAL SUPPORTING DEVICE APPLICATION A. Damp Locations and Outdoors: Hot-dip galvanized materials or nonmetallic, U-channel system components. B. Selection of Supports: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. C. Strength of Supports: Adequate to carry present and future loads,times a safety factor of at least four; minimum of 2004b(90-kg)design load. 3.7 SUPPORT INSTALLATION A. Install support devices to securely and permanently fasten and support electrical components. ' B. Spring-steel fasteners specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing may be used instead of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2-inch(38-mm)and smaller raceways servinglighting and mceptaclebranch circuits above suspended ceilings and for fastening raceways to slotted channel and angle supports. ' C. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals. ' D. Securely fasten electrical items and their supports to the building structure, unless otherwise indicated. Perform fastening according to the following unless other fastening methods are indicated: ' 1. Wood: Fasten with wood screws or screw-type nails. • 2. New Concrete: Concrete inserts with machine screws and bolts. ' 3. Light Steel: Sheet-metal screws. BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-:5 1 3.8 IDENTIFICATION MATERIALS AND DEVICES , A. Install at locations for most convenient viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of equipment. ' B. Install continuous underground plastic markers during trench backfilling,for exterior underground power, control,signal,and communication lines located directly above power and communication lines. Locate ' 6 to 8 inches(150 to 200 mm)below finished grade. If width of multiple lines installed in a common trench or concrete envelope does not exceed 16 inches(400 mm),overall,use a single line marker. 3.9 UTILITY COMPANY ELECTRICITY-METERING EQUIPMENT ' A. Install equipment according to utility company's written requirements. Provide grounding as required by utility company. 3.10 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. On completion ofinstallation,including outlets,fittings,and devices,inspect exposed finish. Removeburrs, , dirt,paint spots,and construction debris. B. Protect equipment and installations and maintain conditions to ensure that coatings,finishes,and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION 16050 ' 1 ' 1 1 •1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 16050-6 '• SECTION 16060-GROUNDING AND BONDING PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract,including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding requirements specified ' in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements of systems described in other Sections. 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. 1 B. Product Data: For the following: 1. Ground rods. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100 ' and marked for intended use. I. Comply with UL 467. 1 PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS rA. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated Into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1, Grounding Conductors,Cables,Connectors,and Rods: ' a. Apache Grounding/Erico Inc. • b. Boggs,Inc. IC. Chancdflubbell. GROUNDING AND BONDING )6060- 1 I d. Copperweld Corp. ' e. Dossert Corp. • f. Erico Inc.;Electrical Products Group. g. Framatome Connedors/Bumdy Electrical. ' h. Geivan Industries,Inc. i. Harger Lightning Protection,Inc. J. Hastings Fiber Glass Products,Inc. ' k. Henry Brothers Lightning Protection Co. 1. Ideal Industries,Inc. M. ILSCO. ' n. Keamey/Cooper Power Systems. o. Karns: C.C.Karns Co.;Division of Robroy Industries. p. Lightning Master Corp. q. Lyncole XIT Grounding. ' T. O-Z/Gedney Co.;a business of the EGS Electrical Group. S. Raco,Inc.;Division of Hubbell. t. Robbins Lightning,Inc. ' U. Salisbury: W.H.Salisbury&Co. V. Superior Grounding Systems,Inc. W. Thomas&Betts,Electrical ' 2.2 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. For insulated conductors,comply with Division 16 Section "Conductors and Cables." , B. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated with green-colored insulation. C. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable. D. Underground Conductors: Bare,tinned,stranded,unless otherwise indicated. '. E. Bare Copper Conductors: Comply with the following: 1. Assembly of Stranded Conductors: ASTM B 8. , 2. Tinned Conductors: ASTM B 33. 1 2.3 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS A. Comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467;listed for use for specific types,sizes,and combinations of conductors , and connected items. B. Welded Connectors: Exothermic.welded type, in kit form, and selected per manufacturer's written ' instructions. 2.4 GROUNDING ELECTRODES ' A. Ground Rods: Copper-clad steel. , B. Ground Rods: Sectional type;copper-clad steel. • •GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-2 1. Size: 5/8 by 96 inches(6 by 2400 mm)in diameter. • PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 APPLICATION A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct contact with earth, concrete,masonry,brushed stone,and similar materials. B. In raceways,use insulated equipment grounding conductors. ' C. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Use for underground connections. D. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: Use bolted pressure clamps, ' 3.2 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING CONDUCTORS A. Comply with NFPA 70,Article 250,for types,sizes,and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, unless specific types,larger sizes,or more conductors than required by NFPA 70 are indicated. ' B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. N C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors forthe following items,in addition to those required by NEC: 1. Feeders and branch circuits. 2. Lighting circuits. 3. Receptacle circuits. 4. Single-phase motor and appliance branch circuits. ' 5. Flexible raceway runs. 6. Metal-clad cable runs. ' D. Water Heater Heating Cables: Install a separate equipment grounding conductor to each electric water heater cable. Bond conductor to heater units,piping,connected equipment,and components. ' 3.3 INSTALLATION ' A. Ground Rods: 1. Drive ground rods until tops are 2 Inches (50 mm)'below finished floor or final grade,unless otherwise indicated. 2. Interconnect ground rods with grounding electrode conductors. Use exothermic welds. Make connections without exposing steel or damaging copper coating. ' B. Metal Water Service Pipe:Provide insulated copper grounding conductors,in conduit,frombuilding'smain • service equipment,orgrounding bus,tomain metal water service entrances to building, Connect grounding conductors to main metal water service pipes by grounding clamp connectors. Where a dielectric mein GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060.3 r water fitting is installed, connect grounding conductor to street side of fitting. Bond metal grounding r conductor conduit or sleeve to conductor at each end, • C. Water Meter Piping: Use braided-type bondingjumpers to electrically bypass water meters. Connecttopipe , with grounding clamp connectors. 3.4 CONNECTIONS , A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized. Select connectors, connection hardware,conductors,and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible, 1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to make contact points , closer to order of galvanic series, 2. Make connections with clean,bare metal at points of contact. r 3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and mechanical clamps. 4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers and mechanical clamps. 5. Cost and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent future penetration ' of moisture to contact surfaces. B. Exothermic-Welded Connections: Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Welds thatarepufTed ' up or that show convex surfaces indicating improper cleaning are not acceptable. C. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No.8 AWG and larger,use ptessure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be terminated with winged pressure-type connectors. D. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals aecordingtomanufacturer's ' published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. END OF SECTION 16060 r r r r r . r GROUNDING AND BONDING 16060-4 �r r SECTION 16120-CONDUCTORS AND CABLES PART1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes building wires and cables and associated connectors,splices,and terminations for ' wiring systems rated 600 V and less. ' 1.3 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. ' 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE N A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100 ' and marked for intended use. B. Comply with NFPA 70. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Part 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists,the following requirements apply for product selection: ' I. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that maybe incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified. ' 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the manufacturers specified. ' 2.2 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES A. Manufacturers,or equal: ' 1. American Insulated Wire Corp.:a Leviton Company, • 2. General Cable Corporation. ' 3. Senator Wire&Cable Company. CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120- 1 4. Southwire Company. , 5. Integral Cablecon. • B. Refer to Part 3"Conductorand Insulation Applications"Article for insulation type,cable construction,and ' ratings. C. Conductor Material: Copper;stranded conductor ' D. Conductor Insulation Types: Type THHN-THWN. E. Multiconductor Cable: Metal-clad cable,Type MC,outer shell shall be steel. , 2.3 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES A. Manufacturers,or equal: ' 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. AMP Incorporatedffyco International. ' 3. Hubbell/Anderson. 4. O-7JGedney;EGS Electrical Group LLC. 5. 3M Company;Electrical Products Division. B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size,ampacity rating,material,type,and class , for application and service indicated. 2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES EXECUTION A. Each Telephone Outlet shall have two(2)Category Sc cables run to the telephone enclosure. Category Se ' cables shall be unshielded cable consisting of four twisted pair of N 24 A WG solid conductors, meeting Category 5e specifications. , PART 3-EXECUTION ' 3.1 CONDUCTOR AND INSULATION APPLICATIONS A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors In a raceway. B. Branch Circuits Concealed in Ceilings,Walls,and Partitions: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors In , raceway or Metal-clad cable,Type MC. C. Branch Circuits Concealed in Concrete and below Slabs-on-Grade: Type THHN-THWN,single conductors , in a raceway. D. Underground Feeders and Branch Circuits:Type THHN-THWN,single conductors in raceway. ' 3.2 INSTALLATION • CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120.2 ,• A. Conceal cables in finished walls,ceilings,and floors,unless otherwise indicated. B. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values, C. Use pulling means,including fish tape,cable,rope,and basket-weave wire/cable grips,that will not damage cables or raceway. ' D. Install exposed cables parallel and perpendicular to surfaces of exposed structural members, and follow surface contours where possible. E. Support cables according to Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" F. Identifyand color-code conductors and cables according to Division 16 Section"Basic Electrical Materials ' and Methods." 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according tomanufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 496A and UL 416B. iB. Make splices and taps that are compatible with conductor material and possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than unspliced conductors. NC. Wiring at Outlets: install conductors at each outlet,with at least 6 inches(150 mm)of slack. ' END OF SECTION 16120 1 1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 16120-3 1 1 SECTION 16130-RACEWAYS AND FOXES PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and , Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY ' A. This Section Includes raceways,fittings,boxes,enclosures,and cabinets for electrical wiring. ' B. Related Sections include the following: 1. Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods" for supports, anchors, and ' identification products. 2. Division 2 Section"Trenching,Backfilling,and Compaction. , 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing. 13. ENT: Electrical nonmetallic tubing. , C. RMC:Rigid metallic conduit. D. AMC: Flexible metal conduit. ' E. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit. , F. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit. 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data:Catalog data. ' 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100 ' and marked for intended use. ' B. Comply with NFPA 70. • RACEWAYS AND BOXES ' 16130- 1 1 1 '• 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceways, boxes, cabinets, and suspension system with other construction. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS ' 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. In other Pail 2 articles where subparagraph titles below introduce lists,the following requirements apply for product selection: 1. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products ' that maybe incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the manufacturers specified. 2. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by the manufacturers specified. ' 2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING ' A. Manufacturers,or equal: 1. AFC Cable Systems,Inc. 2. Alflex Inc. 3. Anamet Electrical,Inc.;Anaconda Metal Hose. 4. Eleetri-Flex Co. 5. Grinnell Co./Tyco International; Allied Tube and Conduit Div. 6. LTV Steel Tubular Products Company. 7. . Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 8. O-Z Gedney;Unit of General Signal. 9. Wheatland Tube Co. ' B. Rigid Steel Conduit: ANSI C80.1. C. EMT and Fittings: ANSI C80.3. 1. Fittings:Set-screw or compression type. D. FMC:Zinc-coated steel. ' E. LFMC: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. F. Fittings: NEMA FB l;compatible with conduit and tubing materials. 2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING ' A. Manufacturers,or equal: '• 1. American International. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-2 2. Anamel Electrical,Inc.;Anaconda Metal Hose. •' 3. Arnco Corp. 4. Cantex Inc. ' 5. Certainteed Corp.;Pipe&Plastics Group. 6. Condux International. 7. EIecSYS,Inc. , 8. Eleetri-Flex Co. 9. Lamson &Sessions;Carton Electrical Products. 10. Manhattan/CDT/Cole-Flex. 11. RACO;Division of Hubbell,Inc. 12. Spiralduct,Inc./AFC Cable Systems,Inc. ' 13. Thomas&Betts Corporation. B. RNC: NEMA TC 2,Schedule 40. , C. RNC Fittings: NEMA TC 3;match to conduit or tubing type and material. D.. LFNC: UL 1660. ' 2.4 BOXES,ENCLOSURES,AND CABINETS , A. Manufacturers,or equal: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds;Div.of Cooper Industries,Inc. 2. Emerson/General Signal;Appleton Electric Company. 3. Erickson Electrical Equipment Co. 4. Hoffman. 5. Hubbell,Inc.;Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. 6. O-Z/Gedney;Unit of General Signal, 7. RACO;Division of Hubbell,Inc. , S. Robroy Industries,Inc.;Enclosure Division. 9. Scott Fetzer Co.;Adslet-PLM Division. 10. Spring City Electrical Manufacturing Co. ' 11. Thomas&Betts Corporation. 12. Walker Systems,Inc.;Wiremold Company(The). 13. Woodhead,Daniel Company;Woodhead Industries,Inc.Subsidiary. B. Sheet Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA OS 1. , C. Cast-Metal Outlet and Device Boxes: NEMA FB 1,Type FD,with gasketed cover. ' D. Small Sheet Metal Pull and]unction Boxes: NEMA OS 1. PART 3 -EXECUTION ' 3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION ' A. Outdoors: • RACEWAYS AND BOXES J6130-3 1• 1. Exposed;RMC. 2. Underground; RNC. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment: LFMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type 31 B. Indoors: 1. Exposed: EMT. 2. Concealed: EMT or MC cable. 3. Connection to Vibrating Equipment(Including Transformers and Hydraulic,Pneumatic,Electric Solenoid,or Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC. 4. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250,Type I,except as follows: 5. Hazardous Areas:RMC C. Minimum Raceway Size: '/,-inch trade size. D. Raceway Fittings: Compatible with raceways and suitable for use and location. E. Contractor shall use conduit seals for hazardous locations as required by the NFPA 70. 3.2 INSTALLATION A. Keep raceways at least 6 inches(150 mm)away from parallel runs of hot-water pipes. Install horizontal Nraceway runs above water. B. Complete raceway installation before starling conductor installation. ' C. Support raceways as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." D. Install temporary closures to prevent foreign matter from entering raceways. E. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portions ofbends are not visible above the finished slab. F. Make bends and offsets so H) is not reduced. Keep legs of bends in the same plane and keep straight legs of offsets parallel,unless otherwise indicated. ' G. Conceal conduit and EMT within finished walls,ceilings,and floors,unless otherwise indicated. H. Join raceways with fittings designed and approved for that purpose and make joints light. 1. Use insulating bushings to protect conductors. ' 1. Tighten set screws of threadless fittings with suitable tools. J. Terminations: ' I. Where raceways are terminated with lockouts and bushings,align raceways to enter squarely and Install lockouts with dished part against box. Use two lockouts,one inside and one outside box. RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-4 2, Where raceways are terminated with threaded hubs,screw raceways or fittings tightly into hub so , end bears against wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples arc used, align raceways so • coupling is square to box;tighten chase nipple so no threads are exposed, ' K. Flexible Connections; Use maximum of 72 inches (1830 mm) of flexible conduit for recessed and , semirecessed lighting fixtures;for equipment subject to vibration,noise transmission,or movement;and for all motors, L. Surface Raceways; Install a separate,green,ground conductor in raceways from junction box supplying ' raceways to receptacle or fixture ground terminals. M. Comply with Division 2 Section"Trenching,Backfilling and Compaction" ' 3.3 PROTECTION ' A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure coatings, finishes,and cabinets are without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion. ' 1. Repair damage to galvanized finishes with zinc-rich paint recommended by manufacturer. 2. Repair damage to PVC or paint finishes with matching touchup coating recommended by manufacturer. ' 3.4 CLEANING A. After completing installation ofexposed,factory-finished raceways and boxes,inspect exposed finishesand repair damaged finishes. END OF SECTION 16130 1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES 16130-5 ' i I• SECTION 16140-WIRING DEVICES PARTI -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS 'A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes receptacles,connectors,switches,and finish plates. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each product specified. B. Samples: For devices and device plates for color selection and evaluation of technical features as requested by Engineer. C. Maintenance Data: For materials and products to include in maintenance manuals specified In Division 1. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Electrical Components,Devices,and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70,Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. B. Comply with NEMA WD 1. C. Comply with NFPA 70. PART2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Wiring Devices: WIRING DEVICES 16140- 1 a. Bryant Electric,Inc. , b. Eagle Electric Manufacturing Co.,Inc. • C. GE Company;GE Wiring Devices. d. Hubbell,Inc.;Wiring Devices Div. , C. Killark Electric Manufacturing Co. f. Leviton Manufacturing Co.,Inc. g. Pass&Seymour/Legrand;Wiring Devices Div. , h. Pyle-National,Inc.;an Amphenol Co. 2.2 RECEPTACLES , A. Straight-Blade:5-20R,specification grade. Push in connections will not be allowed. B. GFCI Receptacles: Feed-through type,with integral NEMA WD 6,Configuration 5-20R duplex receptacle ' arranged to protect connected downstream receptacles on same circuit. Design units for installation in a 2-3/4-inch-(70-mm-)deep outlet box without an adapter. ' 2.3 SWITCHES A. Snap Switches:20Amp,specification grade,quiet type. Push in connections will not be allowed. ' 2.4 WALL PLATES ' A. Single and combination types match corresponding wiring devices. 1. Material: 0.04-inch-(1-mm-)thick,Type 302,satin-finished stainless steel. B. Color of outlets as selected by Engineer. , 2.5 FINISHES ' A. Color: Manufacturers standard,as selected by Engineer. PART 3 -EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. Install devices and assemblies plumb and secure. , B. Install wall plates when painting is complete. C. Protect devices and assemblies during painting. ' D. Adjust locations at which floor service outlets and telephone/power service poles are installed to suit arrangement of partitions and furnishings. ' 3.2 IDENTIFICATION • WIRING DEVICES 16140-2 ' ' A. Comply with Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," ,• 1. Switches: Where three or more switches are ganged, and elsewhere as Indicated, identify each switch with approved legend engraved on wall plate. ' 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Connect wiring device grounding terminal to branch-circuit equipment grounding conductor. B. Tighten electrical connectors anciterminals according to manufacturers published torque-tightening values. If manufacturers torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. 1 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL ' A. Teat wiring devices for proper polarity and ground continuity. Operate each device at least six times. ' B. Test GFCI operation with both local and remote fault simulations according to manufacturer's written instructions. C. Replace damaged or defective components. 1 3.5 CLEANING A. Internally clean devices,device outlet boxes,and enclosures. Replace stained or improperly painted wall plates or devices. 1 END OF SECTION 16140 1 • ' WIRING DEVICES 16140-3 •' SECTION 16442•PANELBOARDS 1 PART 1 -GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and , Division I Specification Sections,apply to this Section. 1.2 SUMMARY , A. This Section includes load centersand panelboards,overcurrent protective devices,and associated auxiliary , equipment rated 600 V and less for the following types: 1. Lighting and appliance branch-circuit panelboards. 1.3 DEFINITIONS A. EMI: Electromagnetic interference. , B. GFCI: Ground-fault circuit interrupter. C. RFI: Radio-frequency interference. D. RMS: Root mean square. , E. SPDT: Single pole,double throw, 1.4 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of paneiboard, overcurrent protective device, accessory, and component ' Indicated. Include dimensions and manufacturers' technical data on features, performance, electrical characteristics,ratings,and finishes. , B. Shop Drawings: For each paneiboard and related equipment, I. Dimensioned plans, elevations, sections, and details. Show tabulations of installed devices, ' equipment features,and ratings, include the following: a. Enclosure types and details for types other than NEMA 250,Type 1. , b. Bus configuration,current,and voltage ratings. C. Short-circuit current rating of panelboards and overcurrent protective devices, d. UL listing for series rating of installed devices. ' C. Features, characteristics, ratings,and factory settings of individual overcurrent protective devices and auxiliary components, • 1 PANELBOARDS 16442. 1 , 2, Wiring Diagrams: Diagram power wiring and differentiate between manufacturer-installed and • field-installed wiring, 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. Comply with NEMA PB I. 1 B. Comply with NFPA 70. ' 1.6 COORDINATION A. Coordinate layout and installation of panelboards and components with other construction that penetrates walls or is supported by them, Including electrical and other types of equipment,raceways, piping,and encumbrances to workspace clearance requirements. PART 2-PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements,provide products by one of the following: 1. Panelboards,Overcurrent Protective Devices,Controllers,Contactors,and Accessories: a. Eaton Corp.;Cutler-Hammer Products. b. General Electric Co.;Electrical Distribution&Control Div. ' C. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. d, Square D Co, 2,2 FABRICATION AND FEATURES ' A. Enclosures:Surflica-mounted cabinets. NEMA PB 1,Type 1,to meet environmental conditions at installed location, ' B: Front: Secured to box with concealed trim clamps. For surface-mounted fronts,match box dimensions;for flush-mounted fronts,overlap box. ' C. Hinged Front Cover: Entire front trim hinged to box and with standard door within hinged trim cover, D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish over corrosion-resistant treatment or primer coat, E. Directory Card: With transparent protective cover,mounted Inside metal frame,inside panelboard door. '• F. Bus:Copper. PANELBOARDS 16442-2 G. Main and Neutral Lugs: Mechanical type suitable for use with conductor material. •' H. Equipment Ground Bus: Adequate for feeder and branch-circuit equipment ground conductors;bonded to ' box. I. Future Devices: Mounting brackets, bus connections,and necessary appurtenances required for future installation of devices. ' 2.3 PANELBOARD SHORT-CIRCUIT RATING A. UL label indicating series-connected rating of 22,000 AIC minimum. Include size and type of upstream device allowable,branch devices allowable,and UL series-connected short-circuit rating. , 2.4 LIGHTING AND APPLIANCE BRANCH-CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS A. Branch Overcurrent Protective Devices:Bolt-on circuit breakers,replaceable without disturbing adjacent 1 units. PART 3-EXECUTION , 3.1 INSTALLATION , A. Install panelboards and accessories according to NEMA PB I.I. B. Mounting Heights: Top of trim 74 inches 0 880 mm)above finished Boor,unless otherwise indicate!. C. Mounting: Plumb and rigid without distortion of box. Mount recessed panelboards with fronts uniformly ' (lush with wall finish. D. Circuit Directory: Create a directory to indicate installed circuit loads after balancing panelboard loads. , Obtain approval before installing. Use a computer or typewriter to create directory;handwritten directories are not acceptable. E. Install filler plates in unused spaces. , 3.2 IDENTIFICATION ' A. Identify field-installed conductors, Interconnecting wiring, and components; provide warning signs as specified in Division 16 Section "Basic Electrical Materials and Methods." , B. Panelboard Nameplates: Label each panclboard with engraved metal or laminated-plastic nameplate mounted with corrosion-resistant screws. ' 3.3 CONNECTIONS A. Install equipment grounding connections for panelboards with ground continuity to main electrical ground •' bus. PANELBOARDS 16442-3 ' B. Tighten electrical connectors andteminals according to manufacturces published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 496B. 3.4 CLEANING ' A. On completion of installation,inspect interior and exteriorofpanelboards. Remove paint splatters and other spots. Vacuum dirt and debris;do not use compressed air to assist in cleaning. Repair exposed surfaces to match original finish. END OF SECTION 16442 1 1 1 PANELBOARDS 16442 -4 1 SECTION 16476-DISCONNECT SWITCHES •' PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes individually mounted switches and circuit breakers used for the following: ' I. Feeder and equipment disconnect switches. ' 2. Motor disconnect switches. B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: , 1. Division 16 Section"Wiring Devices"for attachment plugs and receptacles,and snap switches used for disconnect switches. 1.3 SUBMITTALS ' A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division I Specification Sections. B. Product Data for disconnect switches and accessories specified in this Section. ' C. Product Data for switches and accessories specified in this Section. Include the following: I. Descriptive data and time-current curves. ' 2. Let-through current curves for circuit breakers with current-limiting characteristics. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations: Obtain disconnect switches from one source and by a single manufacturer. , B. Comply with NFPA 70 for components and installation. , C. Listing and Labeling: Provide disconnect switches and circuit breakers specified in this Section that are listed and labeled. 1. The Terns"Listed"and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,Article 100. ' PART 2-PRODUCTS , 2.1 MANUFACTURERS •' DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476. 1 ' A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering disconnect switches that may be incorporated into the Work include,but are not limited to,the following: B. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide disconnect switches by one of the following: ' 1. Disconnect Switches: a. Eaton Corp.;Cutler-Hammer Products. ' b. General Electric Co.;Electrical Distribution and Control Division. C. General Switch Corp, d. Siemens Energy&Automation,Inc. e. Square D Co. E Westinghouse Electric Corp.;Distribution&Control Business Unit. ' 2.2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES A. Enclosed,Nonfusible Switch: NEMA KS 1,Type HD,with lockable handle. B. Enclosure: NEMA KS 1,Type 1,unless otherwise specified or required to meet environmental conditions of installed location. 1. Outdoor Locations: Type 3R. 2. Other Wet or Damp Indoor Locations: Type 4. PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION A. Install disconnect switches in locations as indicated,according to manufacturer's written instructions. B. Install disconnect switches level and plumb, ' C. Install wiring between disconnect switches and indication devices. D. Connect disconnect switches and circuit breakers and components to wiring system and to ground as ' indicated and instructed by manufacturer. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening ' values. Where manufacturer's torque values are not indicated,use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B. ' E. IdentifyeachdisconnectswitchaccordingtorequirementsspecifiedinDivision16Section"Basic Electrical Materials and Methods," ' 3.2 CLEANING . A. After completing system Installation,including outlet fittings and devices,inspect exposed finish. Remove ' burrs,dirt,and construction debris and repair damaged finish including chips,scratches,and abrasions, ' DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS )6476-2 END OF SECTION 16476 1 1 y 1 f i i 1 1 � 1 • DISCONNECT SWITCHES AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS 16476-3 i ,• SECTION 16521 -INTERIOR&EXTERIOR LIGHTING PART 1 -GENERAL ' 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections,apply to this Section. ' 1.2 SUMMARY A. This Section includes exterior lighting units with luminaires, lamps, ballasts, interior lighting fixtures, ' lighting fixtures mounted on exterior building surfaces, lamps, ballasts, emergency lighting units,and accessories. 1.3 DEFINITIONS ' A. Lighting Unit: A luminaire or an assembly of luminaires complete with a common suppoM including pole, post,or other structure,and mounting and support accessories. N B. Luminaire (Light Fixture): A complete lighting device consisting of lamp(s) and ballast(s), when applicable,together with parts designed to distribute light,to position and protect lamps,and to connect lamps to power supply. 1 1.4 SUBMITTALS ' A. Product Data: For each type of lighting unit indicated,arranged in order of lighting unit designation. Include data on features,accessories,finishes,and the following: ' 1. Materials and dimensions of luminaires and poles, 2. Certified results of independent laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for electrical ratings and photometric data. 3. Certified results of laboratory tests for fixtures and lamps for photometric performance. ' 4. High-intensity-discharge luminaire ballasts. 5. Emergency lighting unit battery and charger. 6. Fluorescent and high-intensity-discharge ballasts. ' 7. Types of lamps. B. Shop Drawings: Anchor-bolt templates keyed to specific poles and certified by manufacturer. ' C. Comply with ANSI C2. D. Comply with NFPA 70. '• ' PART 2-PRODUCTS INTERIOR&EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 - 1 2.1 MANUFACTURERS A. Available Products: Subject to compliance with requirements,products that maybe incorporated into the ' Work include,but are not limited to,the products Indicated on the contract drawings. 2.2 LUMINAIRES A. Metal Parts: Free from burrs,sharp comers,and edges. B. Sheet Metal Components: Corrosion-resistant aluminum,unless otherwise indicated. Form and support , to prevent warping and sagging. C. Housings: Rigidly formed,weather-and light-tight enclosures that will not warp,sag,or deform in use. , D. Doors, Frames,and Other Internal Access: Smooth operating, free from light leakage under operating conditions,and arranged to permit relamping without use of tools. Arrange doors,frames,lenses,dilfusers, and other pieces to prevent accidental falling during relamping and when secured in operating position. , Provide for door removal for cleaning or replacing lens. E. Plastic Parts: High resistance to yellowing and other changes due to aging,exposure to heat,and ultraviolet , radiation. F. Exterior Lenses and Refractors: Materials as indicated. Use heat.and aging-resistant,resilient gaskets to seal and cushion lens and refractor in luminaire doors. G. Photoelectric Relays: As follows: 1. Relay Mounting: In luminaire housing. ' H. High-Intensity-Discharge Ballasts: Comply with ANSI C82.4. Constant wattage outotransformer or ' regulating high-power-factor type,unless otherwise indicated. I. Single-Lamp Ballasts: Minimum starting temperature of minus 40 deg C. 2. Open-circuit operation will not reduce average life. ' 3. High-Pressure Sodium Ballasts: Equip with a solid-state igniter/starter having an average life in pulsing mode of 10,000 hours at an igniter/starter case temperature of 90 deg C. 4. Noise: Uniformly quiet operation,with a noise rating of B or better. , 1. Lamps: Comply with the standard of the ANSI C78 series that is applicable to each type of lamp. Provide , luminaires with indicated lamps of designated type,characteristics,and wattage. 2.3 FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLASTS , A. General Requirements: Unless otherwise indicated,features include the following: ' I. Designed for type and quantity of lamps indicated at full light output. • 2. Total Harmonic Distortion Rating: Less than 10 percent. ' INTERIOR&EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 -2 ' 3. Sound Rating: A. • ' B. Electromagnetic Ballasts for Linear Lamps: Unless otherwise indicated,features include the following, besides those in "General Requirements"Paragraph above: ' 1. Type: Energy saving. 2. Certified Ballast Manufacturer Certification: Indicated by label. 3. Encapsulation: Without voids in potting compound. . . ' 2.4 LAMPS A. Fluorescent Color Temperature and Minimum Color-Rendering Index: 3500 K and 85 CRI, unless otherwise indicated. ' PART 3-EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION ' A. . Lamp luminaires with indicated lamps according to manufacturer's written instructions. Replace malfunctioning lamps. 3.2 CONNECTIONS ' A. Ground equipment. 1. Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not.indicated, use those specified in UL 496A and UL 486B. ' 3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL A. Inspect each installed unit for damage. Replace damaged units. ' 3.4 CLEANING AND ADJUSTING ' A. Clean units after installation. Use methods and materials recommended by manufacturer. 3.5 LIGHTING SCHEDULE A. See drawings for lighting schedule. ' END OF SECTION 16521 INTERIOR k EXTERIOR LIGHTING 16521 -3 1 END OF TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 1 •, 1 1 1 1 1 N 1 1 i 1 ■ '• Page 1 of 2 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Project No. 81000 Fire Apparatus Storage Building February 10, 2006 1. The bidder will acknowledge receipt of this Addendum and his acceptance of Its conditions by signing this/A'd'dendum and including it with his bid. BIDDER: NY2/L'; 24 7 6D ' BY: TITLE: L ' CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI ' PATRICK E. SULLIVAN, P.E. DIRECTOR OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 1 ,• Page 2 of 2 ADDENDUM NO. 1 Project No. 81000 ' Fire Apparatus Storage Building February 10, 2006 ' 1. All references to the "BOCA National Building Cade/1999" or any other reference to "BOCA National Building Code" or BOCA shall be deleted. In Its ' place, substitute "International Building Code/2000". 2. Division 03300 - 2.10 (C)1 - Compressive Strength (28 Days): 4500 psi (31 ' MPa). Delete "4500 psi(31 MPa)"and Insert in its place "3000 psi. 3. Division 08110 - 2.3 (A)1 - Exterior Door. Delete the sentence "Fabricate with ' 0.0478 Inch 1.2 mm thick(18 gage), zinc-coated(galvanized)steel face sheets; of styles indicated." Insert in its place "per manufacturers'standard." 4. Division 13125 - 1.4 (B)9 - Roof System. Delete "24 gauge"and insert in Its place "26 gauge". In the same Division 13125 - 1.4 (C)10(b), delete "Design to support a 200 pound load evenly distributed over a 2 foot square area centered N between purlins and limit the deflection to 0180 in a two span condition" In its entirety. ' 5. Division 13125 - 1.10(B)l - Warranty. Delete "Three years"and Insert in Its place "One (1)year". ' 6. Division 13125 - 2.8 (B)4 and 5 - Roof Panel Accessories. Delete 4 (thermal spacer blocks) and 5 (backing plates) in their entirety. ' 7. Sheet A1.1 of the Plan Set for the Project: 12" Wide Trench Drain shall be a Neenah R-4990-CX or equivalent with either a Type A or Type C cover. Cover to be Installed flush with floor. Trench depth to be 6 inches from top of grate. ' 8. Sheet A.2.2 of the Plan Set for the Project: All references to a "24GA Metal Roof' shall be deleted. Insert in Its place "26GA Metal Roof'. ' 9. Sheet A.2.2 of the Plan Set for the Project: All references to "6"R19 Insulation" to be deleted. Insert in Its place "4"R13 Insulation." 10. Sheet A.2.2 of the Plan Set for the Project. Wall Section at E/A-2.2 in the upper right hand corner of the sheet is mislabeled. The correct label Is F/A-2.2. '• 11. Sheet A.2.2 of the Plan Set for the Project: Wall Section labeled In the lower left hand corner of the sheet is mislabeled. It should read as E.1/A-2.2. 1 1 '• Page 10l 2 ADDENDUM N0. 2 Project No. 61000 Fire Apparatus Storage Building February 17, 2006 ' 1. The bidder will acknowledge receipt of this Addendum and his acceptance of Its conditions by signing this Addendum and including it with his bid. ' BIDDER: 60. 9s..c r 1 BY: TITLE: ' CITY OF JEFFERSON, MISSOURI ' PATRICK E. SULLIVAN, P.E. ' DIRECTOR OF COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 1• 1 1 '1 Page 2 of 2 • ADDENDUM NO. 2 1 Project No. 61000 Fire Apparatus Storage Building February 17, 2006 1. Page I13-24 states that the "contract time shall be 210 working days." This 1 shall be changed to "contract time shall be 210 calendar days." 2. All other items contained within the Pre-Bid Conference Notes dated ' February 17, 2006 are hereby incorporated by reference Into this Addendum. 1 1 1 N 1 1 i 1 1 1 1� 1 1 ' City of Jefferson = �'� E John Landwehr • = ? Mayor ' Department of Community Development Patrick E.Sullivan,P.E.;Director 320 East McCarty Street Phone: (573)634-6410 Jefferson City,Missouri 65101 Pax: (S73)634-6562 February 17, 2006 Subject: Fire Apparatus Storage Building ' Project No. 81000 Pro-bid Conference Notes ' A pre-bid conference was held in the Missouri River conference room of City Hall on Tuesday, February 14, 2006 for the above noted project. Those attending the meeting are as listed below; ' NAME REPRESENTING Jake Hunget GBH Builders, Inc. Randy Rehagen Rehagen Electric Dave Cundlff WAVCO Mitch Fletcher Balkenbush Mechanical Wayne Barry Barry Construction Co. Inc. Steve Meyer Meyer Electric Mike Broker Cleary Buildings Adam Carroll J.C. Industries Mike Robinett Schneider Electric Troy Bonnett Bonnelt Electric Gene Williams City of Jefferson Pat Sullivan City of Jefferson The meeting proceeded with a general discussion of the planned project and an overview of the specifications. This memorandum summarizes the proceedings of that meeting and the questions ' received at the meeting. In addition, this memo contains any questions received by telephone, fax, or letter. Below are the items that were specifically discussed. ' GENERAL COMMENTS: No questions will be allowed after 12:00 PM, Thursday, February 16 at 12:00 noon. ' CONTRACT TIME: 210 calendar days BID OPENING: Tuesday, February 21, 2006 at 1:30 p.m, LIQUIDATED DAMAGES: $500.00 a day. ' ADDENDUM: Addendum No. 1 and Addendum No. 2 have been issued for the project. City of erson " COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT IY ft "building a better Community" '• BID PACKET: The bid packet shall Include the following Items from the specification book for this project: ' Bid Form Bid Bond Anti-Collusion Statement ' Contractor's Affidavit Minority Business Utilization Agreement Addendum No. 1 and 2 ' PLAN REVIEW: The building location is on Hyde Park Road, by the Wastewater Collections facility and the Fire Departments bum tower. The building will be built adjacent to the burn tower. A sewer lateral has been installed within 30' of the building. There will be some site storm drainage Iniets and piping to be placed in advance of this project by others. Also a retaining wall will be built by others prior to the start ' of this project. The building will be 10,240 square feet. The purpose for the building is storage of fire apparatus. There will also be a small locker room area and a classroom area. There are three alternates. ' Alternate One—Manual barrier gate. Asking for a unit price. Alternate Two—Construct Room 109 and 110. Alternate Three— Bronze dedication plaque and installation. NQUESTION/ANSWER :(Received at the prebid meeting and those received by telephone, fax, or letter prior to 12:00 PM Thursday, February 16, 20061 QUESTION: Is the Contractor required to finish the mezzanine? ANSWER: No. QUESTION: You said there would not be a wall liner below 10'? With or without the Alternate. ANSWER: Wall liner is not required below 10' AFF in the area where the locker rooms or future rooms are planned. QUESTION: The light fixtures on the Base Bid are they below or for up above (the mezzanine)? ' ANSWER: Three strip lights above the mezzanine are in the base bid. 2' x 4' fixtures in Room 109 are part of Alternate 2, QUESTION: What kind of liner material is this? ANSWER: 28 gauge painted metal. QUESTION: What about roof pitch? Cleary Buildings are pole barns which typically start at 3— 12. ANSWER: The roof pitch shall be specified by the design professional in the drawings and submittals. ' City of erson COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT IY "building a better community" 1 '• QUESTION: Are you requiring metal lining on the walls? ' ANSWER: All interior sides of all exterior walls shall receive wall liner except where sheet rock is indicated. ' QUESTION: Is a wood structure acceptable? ANSWER: No, ' QUESTION: Out In the high bay area you have 400 watt quartz halogen lamps. What about high bay fluorescents? ANSWER: That would be acceptable provided that the equivalent lighting level is achieved. QUESTION: You won't be considering a wooden frame? ANSWER: No. ' QUESTION: You changed the concrete from 4500 to 3000 psi? ANSWER: Yes, on the foundation only. It remains the same on the slab (i.e. 4000 psi). ' QUESTION: Do you want a color on the roof or a galvalume finish? On the walls and Inside also? ANSWER: Yes we want a color. List your standard colors and we will pick one but galvalume will not be considered. ' QUESTION: Will electric lines be installed underground to the pole? ANSWER: Yes. NQUESTION: What about telephone? ANSWER: Telephone line shall be Installed in conduit as shown on the drawings, ' QUESTION: We noticed a manual transfer switch. Do you have a generator to install? ANSWER: Yes, the Fire Department will be installing a generator(backup). ' QUESTION: Which building code are we required to comply with? ANSWER: IBC 2000 QUESTION: How much site work is involved? ANSWER: We will have the site rough graded to plus or minus a foot. You will be responsible for the final grading. Railroad tie wall has already been removed. Existing fire hydrant shall be relocated by the contractor. QUESTION: Is there sufficient fill on site to achieve final grading? ANSWER: There should be enough material on site to finish the grading. Seeding and mulching to ' be included in the bid. Once the building is built there will be sidewalks around the building. Everything will already be finished up to 30' from the building, or will be performed by others. ' QUESTION: In regards to stormwater are downspouts connected to storm sewers? city or ... • I of erson COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 'building a better community" '• ANSWER: No, where the downspouts discharge to grass, a splash block will be required. QUESTION: WIII there be some dirt removal? Near the little stud wall? ANSWER: Yes. Excess dirt or unsuitable fill shall be wasted by the contractor. ' QUESTION: On the liner panel, are you going to specify the girt spacing? ANSWER: This Is dependent on the design prepared by a design professional. ' QUESTION: What size and type of shower is required? ANSWER: 3' x 3', concrete block or fiberglass. Nothing fancy but good quality. On the bid form please Include the Anti Collusion Statement, Contractor's Affidavit, MBE, if you are going to use a MBE, you are committed to using them. There is a list on the Office of Administration's website and also the MoDOT website. The goal is 2% MBE. QUESTION: You want us to buy a kitchen sink? What about the drinking fountain? ' ANSWER: Just rough in the kitchen sink, since we are buying the cabinets. The bathroom shall be finished with toilets and fixtures, sinks, shower and towel bars. The contractor will supply the drinking fountain. The ice machine will be supplied by the owner. ' QUESTION: What about the brick? ANSWER: We will want it to match what is on the existing Wastewater Collections building. This is considered king size brick. We want this to blend in and match the colors and texture of the existing king size bricks. QUESTION: Will sealed drawings and a building permit be required? t ANSWER: Yes. You will actually get a building permit but there will be no charge. Sealed drawings are required for all work except electrical and mechanical. ' QUESTION: How many calendar days Bra allowed for completion of the project? ANSWER: 210 calendar days from the date of Notice to Proceed. Notice to Proceed should be discussed around the first of April. ' QUESTION: Sheet Number A.2.1 Detail D shows a stud wall section. What is the spacing on the studs? ANSWER: 16" O.C. QUESTION: Are the doors marked D2 wood or hollow metal? ANSWER: Metal. ' QUESTION: Are the two double openings not marked in the wall marked "Alternate #2, D.2.1" wood or metal? ANSWER: Metal. ' CitY. of erson t COMMUNITY DEVELOPMENT 'building a better community" '. QUESTION: What is the thickness of the concrete slab? ANSWER: 6". QUESTION: On sheet No. A.2.2, are there two sheets of 3/4" plywood for the flooring? ANSWER: Yes. ' QUESTION: Is a separate Owner's and Protective Liability Policy required? ANSWER: Yes. ' QUESTION: Is the window marked as 60" x 12" hollow metal? ANSWER: Yes. ' Sincerely, � A Gene A.Williams, P.E. Division Director of Engineering GAW:bIt c: Plan Holders Meeting Attendees Matt Morasch, P.E., Deputy Director for Public Works N Pat Sullivan, P.E., Director Community Development Project File Writer's File ' it sr ... of erson COMMUNITY DEVELOPMEW 'building a better community" FINANCE DEPARTMENT PURCHASING DIVISION SUBJECT: Bid 2265- Fire Apparatus Storage Building project No. 81000 Community Development,Engineering, Opened February 21, 2006 BIDS RECEIVED: Barry Construction Company, California, MO $ 430,253.00 GBH Builders,Jefferson City, MO $ 466,760.00 'J.C. Industries,Jefferson City, MO $ 502,300.00 Prost Builders,Jefferson City, MO S 527,700.00 Septagon Construction,Jefferson City,MO $ 559,166.00 *Not located within the Jefferson City corporate city limits. Plans and specifications were sent to six plan houses. Eight additional firms requested plans and: specifications but did not return bids. FISCAL NOTE: 3502-9900.7350-6058-Fire Department Storage Building 2005-2006 Budget $550,000.00 . Expended 935.00 Encumbered -0- Bid No.2265 S 430.253.00 Balance $ 118,812.00 PAST PERFORMANCE: Barry Construction Company has not been awarded a City project recently. Staff believes the firm will complete the work as specified and bid. RECOMMENDATION: Staff recommends award of the bid to Barry Construction Company of California,Missouri in the amount of$430,253.00. ATTACHMENTS - SUPPORTING DOCUMENTATION Tabulation of Bids,Departmental Recommendation Signature L11- Purchasi ent Director,Community evelopment fal.AMIL sony COMMUNITY r DEVELOPMENT Memorandum P�MIe[t.•YWV'N'PLI O.R9=4 20 East McCarty Street • Jefferson City, Missouri 65101 Phone: (573) 634-6410 • Fax (573) 634-6562 •www Jeffcitymo.org Date: February 24,2006 To: Terry Stephenson-Purchasing Agent, Finance From, Gene A. Williams, P.E.- Division Director Engineerin�C �2 " Re: Fire Apparatus Storage Building Project No. 81000,Bid No.2265 Public Works has completed a review of the bids opened at 1:30 PM on February 21, 2006 for the above noted project. As part of the review all the bids were tabulated to check for math errors and to compare unit price quotes of the various contractors. Attached to this memo is the tabulation of the five (5) bids that were received for the project. Based on our review,we recommend acceptance of the base bid With Alternate 1, Alternate 2 and Alternate 3 from the low bidder Barry Construction Company, P.O, Box 387, California, MO 65018. The bid total including alternates is $430,253.00. The project will be expensed as follows: Barn!Construction Company Contract($430.253.001: Account Number: Amount Available: Required: Remaining: 3502-9900-7350-8058 $549,065.00 $430,253.00 $118,812,00 Total $430,253.00 If you need any other Information please feel free to contact me at extension 547. .Attachments: Bid Tabulation Sheet Original Bid Submittals c: Nathan Nickolaus Pat Sullivan Matt Morasch % . s � % \ \ a - . ' ` \ ! \ Aa \ \ ty % \ � \ 2 \` %